Some symbolic expressions for the blue colour
CONTENS
अङ्ग असित आविल इंद्रः उत्पल कर्ण काल कालक कृष्ण कृष्णवर्ण गो देवहूती नील नीलक नीलकम् नीलता नीलति नीललोहित नीलवर्ण नीलाय नीलिमन् नीली नीलीवर्ण नैल्य नैल्यम् परुष मणिः मणिक मेचक मेचकित लोह लोहित वैदूर्य शार श्याम श्यामल सार सितेतर सु हरिक हरित हरिताश्म
अङ्ग – aṅga | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899aṅga ind. a particle implying attention, assent or desire, and sometimes
impatience, it may be rendered, by well; indeed, true, please, rather quick; “kim aṅga”, how much rather! aṅga n. ( “am” , a limb of the body n. a limb, member n. the body n. a subordinate division or department, especially of a science, as the six Vedāṅgas n. hence the number six n. N. of the chief sacred texts of the Jainas n. a limb or subdivision of Mantra or counsel (said to be five, viz. 1. “karmaṇām ārambhopāyaḥ”, means of commencing operations; 2. “puruṣa-dravya-sampad”, providing men and materials; 3. “deśa-kāla- vibhāga”, distribution of place and time; 4. “vipatti-pratīkāra”, counter- action of disaster; 5. “kārya-siddhi”, successful accomplishment; whence “mantra” is said to be “paṇcāṅga”) n. any subdivision, a supplement aṅga n. (in Gr.) the base of a word, but in the strong cases only n. anything inferior or secondary, anything immaterial or unessential, see “aṅga-tā” aṅga n. (in rhetoric) an illustration aṅga n. (in the drama) the whole of the subordinate characters n. an expedient n. a mental organ, the mind aṅga m. sg. or m. pl. N. of Bengal proper or its inhabitants aṅga m. (sg.), N. of a king of Aṅga aṅga m. (mfn.), having members or divisions aṅga m. contiguous Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch aṅga indecl. gaṇa cādi. 1) eine Partikel mit versichernder Bedeutung, welche den Nachdruck auf das ihr vorangehende Wort lenkt, “doch, ja, gewiss”: gāmaṅgaiṣa ā hvayati dārvaṅgaiṣo apāvadhīt ṚV. 10, 146, 4. 1, 84, 7 – 9. Häufig nach flüchtigen Conjunctionen und andern kurzen Wörtern am Anfange eines Satzes, um denselben Halt zu geben, ähnlich wie it, z. B. yadaṅga ṚV. 3, 33, 11. 8, 6, 26. 7, 2. kimaṅga 1, 118, 3. 10, 42, 3. tvamaṅga 1, 84, 19. 5, 3, 11. tvaṁ hyāṅga AV. 5, 11, 5. ṚV. 10, 108, 3. nahyāṅga 8, 24, 15. kuvidaṅga 7, 91, 1. 10, 64, 13. 131, 2. u. s. w. vgl. NIR. 5, 17. 6, 18. und aṅgīkar, aṅkīkāra, aṅgīkṛti. — 2) anrufend und auffordernd, in Verbindung mit einem Vocativ oder einem Imperativ oder im Fragesatz: aṅgāre CHĀND. UP. 4, 1, 5. āsāmaṅgaikāṁ bhindhi (bhinddhi) 6, 12, 1. aṅgāvekṣasva saumitre kasyemāṁ manyase camūm R. 2, 97, 16. aṅga kuru. aṅga paca P. 8, 1, 33, Sch. aṅga kūjā3 idānīṁ jñāsyasi jālma. aṅgādhīṣva bhaktaṁ te dāsyāmi 8, 2, 96, Sch. mama tāvanmatamidaṁ śrūyatāmaṅga vāmapi ŚIŚ. 2, 12. samanaddha kimaṅga bhūpatiryadi saṁdhitsurasau sahāmunā 16, 34. Ueber die Betonung und Dehnung des Verbi finiti nach aṅga s. P. 8, 1, 33. 8, 2, 96. — Die indischen Lexicographen führen folgende Bedeutungen von aṅga auf: 1) = kṣipram NIR. 5, 17. — 2) saṁbodhane AK. 3, 5, 7. TRIK. 3, 3, 54. 464. H. 1537. an. 7, 19. MED. avj. 12. — 3) harṣe H. an. MED. — 4) und 5) saṁgamāsūyayoḥ MED. — 6) punararthe AK. 3, 5, 19. TRIK. 3, 3, 464. H. an. aṅga m. 1) Name eines Kriegerstammes und des von ihm bewohnten Landes (das Gebiet um Bhagalpur), meistens pl. TRIK. 3, 3, 53. H. 957. an. 2, 30 (sg.). MED. g. 2. P. 2, 4, 62, Sch. 4, 2, 81, Sch. 125, Sch. VOP. 7, 14. gandhāribhyo mūjavadbhyo ‘ṅgebhyo magadhebhyaḥ AV. 5, 22, 14. R. 1, 8, 11. vaṅgāṅgamagadhāḥ 2, 10, 35. anaṅga iti vikhyātastadā prabhṛti rāghava.. sa cāṅgaviṣayaḥ śrīmānyatrāṅgaṁ sa (kāmaḥ) mumoca ha. 1, 25, 13. 14. aṅgasyāṅgo ‘bhavaddeśaḥ MBH. 1, 4220. Vgl. LIA. I, 143, N. 1. — 2) N. pr. ein von Udamaja, dem Nachkommen Atri’s, geweihter König (auch Vairokana genannt) AIT. BR. 8, 22. Sohn Ūru’s und Verfasser von ṚV. 10, 138. Sohn Ūru’s und der Āgneyi VP. 98. HARIV. 73. ein Sohn Dīrghatama’s und der Sudeṣnā (Bali’s Gemahlin), Gebieter von Anga, MBH. 1, 4217 fgg. VP. 444. HARIV. 1684. LIA. I, 557. aṅgaṁ vṛhadratham MBH. 12, 981. — Wenn die in der Note bei aṅka ausgesprochene Vermuthung gegründet sein sollte, hätten wir noch aṅga m. in der Bedeutung “Vogel” anzuführen. aṅga n. 1) “Glied des Körpers” AK. 2, 6, 2, 21. H. 566. an. 2, 29. MED. g. 2. aṅgādaṅgāllomno lomno jātaṁ parvaṇi parvaṇi ṚV. 10, 163, 6. AV. 1, 12, 2. u.s.w. NIR. 4, 3. aṅgānyavadyatyabhañjan (beim Thieropfer) KĀTY. ŚR. 6, 7, 5. M. 3, 178. 4, 83. 8, 234. 279. hīnāṅga, atiriktāṅga 4, 141. aṅgahīnatva 11, 50. am Ende eines adj. Comp. f. ī R. 1, 9, 22. N. 1, 12. 3, 13. 11, 30. auch ā KĀŚ. zu P. 4, 1, 54. “das männliche Glied” M. 8, 374. — 2) “Körper” TRIK. 3, 3, 53. H. 563. an. 2, 29. MED. g. 2. avyaṅgāṅgī M. 3, 10. VID. 180,b. VET. 30, 17. BRAHMA-P. in LA. 59, 13. — 3) “Glied” oder “Theil eines Ganzen”: (ātmā) saptāṅgaḥ MAṆD. UP. 3. svāmyamātyau puraṁ rāṣṭraṁ koṣadaṇḍau suhṛttathā. sapta prakṛtayo hyetāḥ saptāṅgaṁ rājyamucyate.. M. 9, 294. 296. 297. 7, 105. YĀJÑ. 1, 352. RAGH. 1, 60. rathaṁ sarvāṅgabhūṣitam R. 6, 112, 22. 106, 22. yajñaścetpratiruddhaḥ syādekenāṅgena yajvanaḥ M. 11, 11. yasminkarmaṇi yāstu syuruktāḥ pratyaṅgadakṣiṇāḥ 8, 208. pṛthvīpurakṣmābhṛdvanauṣadhimṛgādibhiḥ. nṛbrahmakṣatraviṭśūdraiḥ sāṅgopāṅgaiḥ AK. 2, 1, 1. 2, 8, 2, 48. 3, 4, 25. 39. 224. H. 85. piturguṇāṅgāni “die verschiedenen, mannichfaltigen Tugenden des Vaters” R. 2, 77, 12. — 4) “ein unwesentlicher, attributärer Theil” (einer Opferhandlung u. s. w.), upasarjanabhūte H. an. 2, 29. apradhāne MED. g. 3. KĀTY. ŚR. 1, 2, 3. 4. 4, 1, 30. 16, 1, 1. im Gegens. zu pradhāna 1, 2, 18. MADHUS. in Ind. St. I, 15, 4–6. aṅga = pradhāna TRIK. 3, 3, 53. ist aller Wahrscheinlichkeit nach nur ein Druckfehler. — 5) “Anhang, ein ergänzendes Werk”: vedāḥ sarvāṅgāni KENOP. 33. Die 6 Anhänge des Veda oder der Śruti sind: śikṣā, vyākaraṇa, chandas, nirukta, kalpa und jyotiṣa AK. 1, 1, 5, 4. H. 250. 251. ṣaḍaṅgavid M. 3, 185. vedāḥ sāṅgopāṅgāḥ N. (BOPP) 12, 17; vgl. ROTH im NIRUKTA XIV fgg. dhanurvedaḥ sāṅgopāṅgopaniṣadaḥ sarahasyaḥ VIŚV. 5, 16. sāṅgaśabdānuśāsana “die Wortlehre mit ihren Anhängen” (Lehre vom Geschlecht, Wurzelverzeichniss) H. 1. Die Jaina’s theilen ihre heiligen Schriften in Anga’s und Upānga’s, die sich zusammen auf 12 Werke belaufen, H. 245; vgl. upāṅga. — 6) eine symbolische Bezeichnung der Zahl “sechs” (vgl. u. 5) BHĀSK. im Verz. d. B. H. No. 844. — 7) “Hilfsmittel” TRIK. 3, 3, 53. H. an. 2, 29. MED. g. 2. aṅgāṅgibhāvamajñātvā kathaṁ sāmarthyanirṇayaḥ HIT. II, 141. niraṅga 72, 9. — 8) “Thema” (in der Grammatik) P. 1, 4, 13. — 9) “Geist (?)”: aṅgaṁ manasi kāye cetyabhidhānāntaradarśanāt. yathā. hiraṇyagarbhāṅgabhuvaṁ muniṁ haririti māghaḥ. ŚKDR. — Euphonische Regeln P. 6, 1, 119. aṅga adj. 1) “mit Gliedern versehen” PAT. zu P. 2, 3, 20. MED. g. 3. — 2) “nahe, anstossend” H. an. 2, 19. MED. g. 3. aṅga 2) aṅga kimasti kaścidvimardako nāmātrabhavataḥ DAŚAK. in BENF. Chr. 192, 7. kimaṅga “wie viel mehr” Spr. 1106. aṅga 1) m. WEBER, RĀMAT. UP. 361. Unter “den fünf Gliedern des Körpers” sind “der Kopf, die Hände und die Füsse” gemeint MĀRK. P. 11, 3; vgl. upāṅga. — Z. 5 lies ī st. i. — 2) “Körper” (vgl. tanu, mūrti) in der Astrol. Bez. “des 1ten Hauses, des Horoskops”: -viniścaya “Fixirung –, Bestimmung des Horoskops” VARĀH. BṚH. S. 1, 9. Vgl. — mahāṅga. aṅga 6) SŪRYAS. 8, 2. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 aṅga A King belonging to the Candra vaṁśa. (Lunar dynasty). aṅga(m) The kingdom ruled by King Aṅga. Other details: Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 aṅga 1. aṅga, n. 1. A limb, Man. 3, 178. 2. The penis, Man. 8, 374. 3. A part, Man. 11, 11. 4. A supplementary part. 5. A division of Hindu learning, comprehending such sciences as are considered dependent upon the Vedas; cf. aṅgavidyā. 6. An expedient. 7. The body. — Comp. In comp. adj. the fem. ends generally in gī, sometimes also in gā. An-, m. Kāma, the god of love. an-a-vadya- (vb. vad), adj., f. gī, of faultless form. aṣṭāṅga, i. e. aṣṭan-, adj. consisting of eight parts. uttama-, n. the head, Man, 1, 93. eka-, I. n. one part only. II. m. pl. body-guards. kāla-, adj. having a dark-blue blade, MBh. 4, 231. kuṣṭha-, adj. leprous. kṛśa-, adj., f. gī, meagre. khaṭvā-, n. one of Śiva’s weapons (a club with a skull at the top), also carried by devotees. catur-, I. adj. consisting of four parts; with bala, a complete army, consisting of chariots, elephants, horse, and foot. II. n. 1. a complete army. 2. chess. citra-, m. a proper name. tanu-, f. gī, a delicate woman. tanū-ja-, n. a wing. niraṅga, i. e. nis-, adj. deprived of expedients. pañcāṅga, i. e. pañcan-, adj. consisting of five parts. makā-, m. a camel. rakta-, I. m. 1. a bug. 2. planet Mars. II. n. 1. coral. 2. saffron. ratha-, I. n. 1. any part of a carriage. 2. a wheel. II. m. the ruddy goose, Anas casarca. vakra-, m. 1. the ruddy goose. 2. a goose. vara-, I. m. an elephant. II. n. 1. an elegant body. 2. the head. 3. pudendum, male or female. vi- citra-, I. adj. 1. handsome. 2. having the body of various colours. II. m. 1. a tiger. 2. a peacock. hīna- (vb. 2. hā), I. adj. maimed, Man. 4, 141. II. f. gī, an ant. hema-, I. adj. golden, Rām. 3, 55, 32. II. m. 1. a lion. 2. Brahman. 3. Garuḍa, a fabulous bird. aṅga 2. aṅga (an old instr. sing. of the last, signifying ‘by my body’), particle: 1. Of asseveration, Indeed, to be sure. 2. Of solicitation, invocation, Rām. 2, 97, 16. 3. Of interrogation, Daśak. in Chr. 192, 7. 4. Again, further, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 1106. aṅga 3. aṅga, m. 1. The name of a country, Bengal proper. and its inhabitants. 2. The name of a king. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 aṅga aṅgati v move. aṅga [1] a. particle implying sollicitation, confirmation, or stress. aṅga [2] m. N. of sev. men & of a country (Bengal), pl. its inhabitants. aṅga [3] (adj. –° f. ī) limb, member, body (also aṅgaka n.); part, means requisite, supplement (cf. vedāṅga), theme (g.). Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 aṅga 1. aṅga, pel. 1. emphatic: just, only; especially; 2, exhortative: w. voc. or impv.; 3. intr.: kim aṅga, how much more? aṅga 2. aṅga, m. pl. No of a people and their country. aṅga 3. aṅg-a, n. (a. -° f.ī limb, member, part, membrum virile; body; constituent; secondary part; supplement (esp. the six of the Veda); resource; base (gr.); -ka, n. member, part; body. Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 aṅga t ka pade . (aṅgayati ceṣṭayati aṅga + ṇic ac .) lakṣmaṇi . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. kaṇṭhyavargatṛtīyopadhaḥ . padaṁ saṅkhyāsaṁsthānaṁ . lakṣma cihnayuktakriyā . tathā ca . arthakriyaiva dhātūnāṁ kartṛvyāpāralakṣmaṇā . ātmaniṣṭhaṁ kriyārthatvaṁ dhātvartheṣvakriyātmasu .. iti bopadevaḥ . aṅgayati aṅgāpayati, iti durgādāsaḥ .. aṅga vya sambodhanaṁ . ityamaraḥ .. (rāmāyaṇe — aṅgāvekṣasva saumitre kasyemāṁ manyase camūṁ . punararthaḥ . Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 aṅga cihnayuktakaraṇe adantacurādi ubhaya° sakarmakaḥ seṭ . aṅgaya– ti te āñjiga–t ta . matāntare aṅgāpayati te . |
असित – asita | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899asita “a-sita” mfn. unbound
asita mf (“ā”; Ved. “asiknī”) n. (“sita”, “white”, appears to have been formed from this word, which is probably original, and not a compound of “a” and “sita”; cf. “asura” and “sura”), dark-coloured, black &c. asita m. the planet Saturn asita m. a poisonous animal (said to be a kind of mouse) asita m. N. of the lord of darkness and magic asita m. of a descendant of Kaśyapa (composer of , named also Devala ([]) or Asita Devala ([ asita m. N. of a man (with the patron. Vārṣagaṇa) asita m. of a son of Bharata asita m. of a ṛiṣi asita m. of a mountain asita mf (“ā”; Ved. “asiknī”) n. (“as”) m. a black snake asita m. a Mantra (saving from snakes) asita mf (“ā”; Ved. “asiknī”) n. (“ā”) f. a girl attending in the women’s apartments (whose hair is not whitened by age) asita m. the indigo plant asita m. N. of an Apsaras 12472 asita mf (“ā”; Ved. “asiknī”) n. (“asiknī”) f. “the dark one”, the night asita m. a girl attending in the women’s apartments asita m. N. of a wife of Daksha asita m. N. of the river Akesines (afterwards called Candra-bhāgā) in the Paṇjāb (“asiknī”) x, 75, 5. Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 asita a. (1) Unbound(Ved). (2) [na sitaḥ śubhraḥ] Not white, black, dark-blue, dark-coloured; asitā moharajanī Śānti. 3. 4; Y. 3. 166; -locanā, -nayanā &c. –taḥ (1) The dark or blue colour. (2) The dark fortnight of a lunar month. (3) N. of the planet Saturn. (4) A black snake. (5) N. of the sage devala. (6) N. of a being presiding over darkness and magic. –tā (1) The Indigo plant. (2) A girl attending upon the harem (whose hair is not whitened by age); see asiknī. (3) The river Yamunā. (4) N. of a daughter of Vīraṇa and wife of Daksha. (5) N. of the river A kesines in the Punjab. — Comp. –aṁbujaṁ, –utpalaṁ the blue lotus. –aciṁs m. fire. –aśman, m. –upalaḥ a dark-blue stone; lapis lazuli. –keśā a woman having black hair. –keśāṁta a. having black locks of hair. –giriḥ, –nagaḥ ‘the blue mountain’; N. of a mountain. –grīva a. having a black neck. ( –vaḥ) fire. –ju a. (for -jānu) having black knees. –nayanaṁ a. black-eyed; Me. 112. –pakṣaḥ the dark fortnight; Pt. 1. 173. –phalaṁ the sweet cocoanut. –bhrū a. having black eye-lids. –mṛgaḥ the black antelope. –yavana = kālayavana q. v.; Śi. 15. 56. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch asita (3. a + sita von si) adj. “ungebunden” ŚAT. BR. 14, 6, 9, 28. 11, 6. 7, 2, 27 = BṚH. ĀR. UP. 3, 9, 26. 4, 2, 4. 4, 21. asita 1) adj. f. asitā, ved. asiknī P. 4, 1, 39, Vārtt. 1. 2. dieselbe Form auch klass. KĀŚ. “dunkelfarbig, schwarz” (als m. “Schwärze”) NIR. 9, 26. AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. H. 17. 1397. vasma ṚV. 4, 13, 4. (uṣasaḥ) gūhantīrabhvamasitaṁ ruśadbhiḥ 51, 9. 1, 46, 10. tvacamasiknīm 9, 73, 5. viśa asiknīḥ (“das dunkle Volk” heissen “die Geister des Dunkels”) 7, 5, 3. naktaṁjātāsyoṣadhe rāme kṛṣṇe asikni ca AV. 1, 23, 1. 5, 13, 8. 8, 7, 1. avyāmasiknyām 12, 2, 20. 1, 23, 3. 11, 2, 18. svasitāyatalocanā N. 12, 46. MEGH. 111. asitakeśāntā N. 16, 17. niśāsitā R. 2, 96, 19. ŚĀNTIŚ. 3, 4. anantā raśmayastasya – sitāsitāḥ karbunīlāḥ kapilāḥ pītalohitāḥ YĀJÑ. 3, 166. pakṣa “die dunkle, abnehmende Hälfte des Mondes” H. 147. — 2) m. a) “der Planet Saturn” H. 120. HALĀY. im ŚKDR. HORĀŚ. in Z. f. d. K. d. M. 4, 318. — b) N. pr. eines Herrschers des “Dunkels” und Zauberers: asitasya te brahmaṇā kaśyapasya gayasya ca AV. 1, 14, 4. tāṁ (keśavardhanīṁ) vītahavya ābharadasitasya gṛhebhyaḥ 6, 137, 1. asito dhānvo rājetyāha tasyāsurā viśaḥ ŚĀT. BR. 13, 4, 3, 11. ĀŚV. ŚR. 10, 7. — ein Kāśyapa, nach ṚV. ANUKR. neben Devala Verfasser der Lieder 9, 5– 24 (daher ein Asita Devala MBH. 1, 106. 2048. 2, 441. 1917 (debalaṁ cāsitam). 2038. 3, 510. 8263. 9, 2854. BHAG. 10, 13. HARIV. 951). steht im Geschlechte der Kāśyapa ĀŚV. ŚR. 12, 14. — ein Vārṣagaṇa ŚAT. BR. 14, 9, 4, 33 = BṚH. ĀR. UP. 6, 5, 3. — ein Nachkomme Ikṣvāku’s, ein Sohn Bharata’s R. 1, 70, 27. 2, 110, 15. — Auch die Buddhisten erwähnen einen Ṛṣi Asita LALIT. 103. 110. 246. BURN. Intr. 141. 384. SCHIEFNER, Lebensb. 248 (18). — c) N. pr. eines Berges MBH. 3, 8364. — 3) f. asitā. a) = asiknī “b.” (s. unten) BHARATA zu AK. 2, 6, 1, 18 im ŚKDR. — b) “die Indigo-Pflanze” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) N. pr. einer Apsaras VYĀḌI zu H. 183. MBH. 1, 4819. HARIV. 12472. — 4) f. asiknī. a) “die Dunkle, Nacht” NAIGH. 1, 7. asiknīmeti ruśatīmapājan ṚV. 10, 3, 1. asiknyāṁ yajamāno na hotā 4, 17, 15. — b) “eine weibliche Dienerin von mittleren Jahren (noch schwarz, noch nicht grau) im Harem” AK. 2, 6, 1, 18. H. 521. MED. n. 33. — c) N. pr. eine Tochter Vīraṇa’s und Gemahlin Daksha’s HARIV. 120. fgg. VP. 117. — d) N. pr. eines Flusses im Pendshab, Akesines (später candrabhāgā), MED. n. 33. (bheṣajaṁ) yatsindhau yadasiknyām ṚV. 8, 20, 25. anders betont 10, 75, 5: asiknyā marudvṛdhe vitastayā (śṛṇuhi). VP. 183. Vgl. ROTH, Zur L. u. G. d. W. 138. fg. — Angeblich zusammeng. aus 3. a + sita “weiss”, aber dieses letztere Wort ist für die ältere Zeit nicht zu belegen und verdankt seinen Ursprung wohl dem missverstandenen asita, wie man auch aus asura ein sura gebildet hat. asita m. “eine schwarze Schlange” AV. 3, 27, 1. 5, 13, 5. 6. 6, 56, 2. 72, 1. 7, 56, 1. 10, 4, 5. 13. 12, 3, 55. vielleicht VS. 24, 37. In AV. 6, 137, 2: keśā naḍā iva vardhantāṁ śīrṣṇaste asitāḥ pari könnte eher asitāḥ die richtige Betonung sein. asita TS. 7, 4, 22, 1. asita 1) asitekṣaṇā R. 3, 52, 40. -pakṣe Spr. 1191, v. l. — 2) a) VARĀH. BṚH. S. 17, 25. BṚH. 2, 7. 11, 18. — b) N. pr. eines alten Weisen Verz. d. Oxf. H. 310,a,24. Sohnes des Kaśyapa 56,b,38. PAÑCAV. BR. 14,11,18. KĀṬH. 22,11. — c) KATHĀS. 111, 93. 95. 106. — d) “ein best. zu den Mäusen gerechnetes giftiges Thier” Verz. d. Oxf. H. 309,a,19. asita m. N. pr. eines Schlangendämons MBH. 1, 2188. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 asita 1 I One of the Ṛṭviks of the Sarpasatra of Janamejaya. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 asita [1] a. unbound. asita [2] (f. asitā & asiknī) a. dark-coloured, black. m. N. of a cert. myth. being & of sev. men; f. asiknī or asiknī N. of a river. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 asita 2. as-ita, a. (ā or -iknī) dark-coloured, black; m. N.; -pakṣa, m. dark half of a month; -pītaka, a. (ikā dark yellow; -aś-man, m. sapphire; -īkṣaṇa, a. black-eyed; -utpala, n. blue lotus. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 asita pu° sitaḥ śubhraḥ virodhe na° ta° . 1 śubhravarṇabhinne tadviruddhe kṛṣṇavarṇe . 2 tadvati tri° . 3 kṛṣṇapakṣe pu° . 4 nīloṣadhau antaḥpuracāriṇyāmavṛddhāyāṁ 5 preṣyāyāñca strī ṅīp kṛṣṇavarṇaparatayā knaśca asiknītyeva . asitagirinibhaṁ syāt kajjvalaṁ sindhupātram puṣpadantaḥ tantumavavyayannasi tam ṛ° 4, 13, 4, 5 yamunāyāṁ tasyāḥ kṛṣṇavarṇatvāt tathātvam strī sitāsite yatra saridvare śubhe kāśī° . asyāḥ strītve’pi chandasītyukteḥ na knaḥ tena ṅībapi na . 6 devale ṛṣibhedepu° . asitodevalovyāsaḥ svayañcaiva bravīṣi me gītā . asitamuniśca himavataḥ ekaparṇāṁ nāma sutāmupayeme yathāha hari° 18 a° . tisraḥ kanyāstu menāyāṁ janayāmāsa śailarāṭ . aparṇāmekaparṇāñca tṛtīyāmekapāṭalām . tapaścarantyaḥ sumahadduścaraṁ devadānavaiḥ . lokān santāpayāmāsustāstisraḥ sthāṇujaṅgamān . āhāramekaparṇena ekaparṇā samācarat . pāṭalāpuṣpamekañca ādadhāvekapāṭalā . ekā tatra nirāhārā tāṁ mātā pratyaṣedhayat . umā iti niṣedhantī mātṛsnehena duḥkhitā . sā tathoktā tadāmātrā devī duścaracāriṇī . umetyevābhavat khyātā triṣu lokeṣu sundarī tathaiva nāmnā teneha viśrutā yogadharmiṇī . evaṁ trisraḥkumārīrvarṇayitvā . sarvāśca brahmavādinyaḥ sarvāścaivoddhvairetasaḥ . umā tāsāṁ variṣṭhā ca jyeṣṭhā ca varavarṇinī . mahāyogabalopetā mahādeva mupasthitā . asitasyaikaparṇā tu devalasya mahātmanaḥ . patnī dattā tathā brahman! yogācāryāya dhīmate . jaijīṣavyāya tu tathā viddhi tāmekapāṭalām . ete kanye mahābhāge yogācāryamupasthite . 7 śanoca 8 apsarobhede strī asitā ca subāhuśca suvṛttā mṛdukā tathā . hari° va° . |
आविल – āvila | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899āvila mfn. (also written “ā-bila” q.v.) turbid (as a fluid), foul, not clear
mfn. confused āvila mfn. (ifc.) polluted by or mixed with. Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 āvila a. [āvilati dṛṣṭiṁ stṛṇāti vil stṛtau-ka Tv.] (1) Turbid, foul, dirty, muddy; paṁkacchidaḥ phalasyeva nikaṣeṇāvilaṁ payaḥ M. 2. 8; tasyāvilāṁbhaḥpariśuddhihetoḥ R. 13. 36. (2) Impure, spoiled; Ki. 8. 37; fig. also; tvadīyaiścaritairanāvilaiḥ Ku. 5. 37. (3) Dark-coloured, dark-blue, darkish; V. 5. 8. (4) Dim, obscure; āvilāṁ mṛgalekhāṁ R. 8. 42. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch āvila adj. f. ā “trübe”, von Flüssigkeiten AK. 1, 2, 3, 14. H. 1071. SUŚR. 1, 262, 1. RAGH. 13, 36. girindīṁ madaprasravaṇāvilām N. 13, 6. antarvikṣobhitajalāvila (Meer) MBH. 1, 1216. vāṣpaphenajalāvila R. 2, 59, 29. von Augen SUŚR. 1, 121, 1. 256, 1. 2, 304, 6. sāsrāvilekṣaṇa MBH. 14, 1963. R. 2, 37, 10. 1, 17, 24. 4, 19, 10. RAGH. 18, 28. “trübe, glanzlos”: candrarekhāmivāvilām R. 5, 18, 3. bibhradāvilāṁ mṛgalekhāmuṣasīva candramāḥ RAGH. 8, 42. auf moralische Zustände übertr.: madāvilaḥ (mohaḥ) ŚĀNTIŚ. 3, 2. tvadīyaiścaritairanāvilaiḥ KUMĀRAS. 5, 37. — Vgl. anāvila, paryāvila. āvila , rudhirāvila “mit Blut besudelt” MBH. 5, 7277. kāsāśrulālāvila Spr. 5321. candanaṁ vapuṣi kuṅkumāvilam so v. a. “vermischt mit” 2192. sthūlaśilāvilā “besäet mit” RĀJA-TAR. 1, 265. pralambamālāvila (ātapatra) “bedeckt mit” VARĀH. BṚH. S. 73, 2. Zu ŚĀNTIŚ. 3, 2 (Z. 2 vom Ende) vgl. Spr. 1158. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 āvila āvila, adj., f. lā. 1. Turbid, Nal. 13, 7(6). 2. Without splendour, Rām. 5, 18, 3. 3. Stained, Chr. 40, 11; Foul, Śāutiś. 3, 2. — Comp. an-, adj. 1. pure, Rām. 3, 76, 11. 2. healthy, Man. 7, 69. pari-, adj. very turbid, Ragh. 7, 37. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 āvila a. turbid; disturbed by, covered or mixed with (–°). Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 āvila āvila, a. turbid, dim; tainted by, filled with (-°). Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 āvila tri° āvilati dṛṣṭiṁstṛṇāti vil–stṛtau ka . 1 kaluṣe aya bila bhedane bilaprakṛtikatvāt vargya bamadhyaitirāyamu° samalakṣyata bibhradābi (vi)lām tasyābi(vi)lāmbhaḥpariśuddhihetoḥ . nanandurānandajalāvi(bi) lākṣāḥ, raghuḥ yathā tvadīyaiścaritairanāvi(bi)laiḥ kumā . |
इंद्रः – iṁdraḥ | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
iṁdraḥ [iṁd-ran; iṁdatīti iṁdraḥ; idi aiśvarye Malli.] (1) The lord of gods. (2) The god of rain, rain; cloud. (3) A lord or ruler (as of men &c.); first or best (of any class of objects), always as the last member of comp.; nareṁdraḥ a lord of men i. e. a king; so mṛgeṁdraḥ a lion; gajeṁdraḥ the lord or chief of elephants; so yogīṁdraḥ, kapīṁdraḥ. (4) A prince, king. (5) The pupil of the right eye. (6) N. of the plant kuṭaja. (7) Night. (8) One of the divisions of bhāratavarṣa. (9) N. of the 26th Yoga. (10) The human or animal soul. (11) A vegetable poison. (12) The Yoga star in the 26th Nakshatra. (13) Greatness. –drā The wife of Indra, Indrāṇī. [Indra, the god of the firmament, is the Jupiter Pluvius of the Indian Āryans. In the Vedas he is placed in the first rank among the gods; yet he is not regarded as an uncreated being, being distinctly spoken of in various passages of the Vedas as being born, and as having a father and a mother. He is sometimes represented as having been produced by the gods as a destroyer of enemies, as the son of Ekāṣṭaka, and in Rv. 10. 90. 13 he is said to have sprung from the mouth of Purusha. He is of a ruddy or golden colour, and can assume any form at will. He rides in a bright golden chariot drawn by two tawny horses. His most famous weapon is the thunderbolt which he uses with deadly effect in his warfare with the demous of darkness, drought and inclement weather, variously called Ahi, Vṛtra, Śambara, Namuchi &c. He storms and breaks through their castles, and sends down fertilizing showers of rain to the great delight of his worshippers. He is thus the lord of the atmosphere, the dispenser of rain, and governor of the weather. He is represented as being assisted by the Maruts or storm-gods in his warfare. Besides the thunderbolt he uses arrows, a large hook, and a net. The Soma juice is his most favourite food, and under its exhilarating influence he performs great achievements (cf. Rv. 10. 119), and pleases his devout worshippers, who are said to invite the god to drink the juice. He is their friend and even their brother; a father, and the most fatherly of fathers; the helper of the poor, and the deliverer and comforter of his servants. He is a wall of defence; his friend is never slain or defeated. He richly rewards his adorers, particularly those who bring him libations of Soma, and he is supplicated for all sorts of temporal blessings, as cows, horses, chariots, health, intelligence, prosperous days, long life, and victory in war. In the Vedas Indra’s wife is Indrani, who is invoked among the goddesses. Such is the Vedic conception of Indra. But in later mythology he falls in the second rank. He is said to be one of the sons of Kaśyapa and Dākṣāyaṇi or Aditi. He is inferior to the triad Brahma, Viṣṇu and Maheśa (though in some places Viṣṇu is regarded as his younger brother, cf. R. 14. 59, 15. 40), but he is the chief of all the other gods, and is commonly styled Sureśa, Devendra &c. As in the Vedas so in later mythology, he is the regent of the atmosphere, and of the east quarter, and his world is called Svarga. He sends the lightning, uses the thunderbolt and sends down rain. He is frequently at war with Asuras, whom he constantly dreads, and by whom he is sometimes defeated. The Indra of mythology is famous for his incontinence and adultery, one prominent instance of which is his seduction of Ahalya, the wife of Gautama (see Ahalyā), and for which he is often spoken of as Ahalyā-jāra. The curse of the sage impressed upon him a 1000 marks resembling the female organ, and he was therefore called Sayoni; but these marks were afterwards changed into eyes, and he is hence called Netra-yoni and Sahasrākṣa. In the Rāmāyaṇa Indra is represented as having been defeated and carried off to Laṅkā by Rāvaṇa’s son called Meghanāda, who for this exploit received the title of ‘Indrajit.’ It was only at the intercession of Brahmā and the gods that Indra was released, and this humiliation was regarded as a punishment for his seduction of Ahalya. He is also represented as being in constant dread of sages practising potent penances, and as sending down nymphs to beguile their minds (see. Apsaras). In the Purāṇas he is said to have destroyed the offspring of Diti in her womb, and to have cut off the wings of mountains when they grew troublesome. Other stories are also told in which Indra was once worsted by Raja, grandson of Purūravas, owing to the curse of Durvāsas, and other accounts show that he and Kṛṣṇa were at war with each other for the Pārijāta tree which the latter wanted to remove from Svarga, and which he succeeded in doing in spite of Indra’s resistance. His wife is Indrani, the daughter of the demon Puloman, and his son is named Jayanta. He is also said to be father of Arjuna. His epithets are numerous; mostly descriptive of his achievements, e. g. vṛtrahan, balabhid, pākaśāsana, gotrabhid, puraṁdara, śatakratu, jiṣṇu, namucisūdana &c. (see Ak. I. 1. 44-47). The Heaven of Indra is Svarga; its capital, Amarāvati; his garden, Nandana; his elephant, Airāvata; his horse, Uchchaiśravas; his bow, the rain-bow, and his sword, Paranja]. — Comp. –agniḥ the fire produced from the contact of clouds; -dhūmaḥ frost, snow; -devatā the 16th lunarmansion. –anujaḥ, –avarajaḥ an epithet of Viṣṇu and of Narayaṇa. –ariḥ an Asura or demon. –avasānaḥ a desert. –aśanaḥ 1. hemp (dried and chewed). –2. the shrub which bears the seed used in jeweller’s weight, (guṁjāvṛkṣa) –āyudhaṁ Indra’s weapon, the rainbow; iṁdrāyudhadyotitatoraṇāṁkaṁ R. 7. 4, 12. 79; K. 127. ( –dhaḥ) 1. N. of horse in Kādambarī (i. e. Kapinjala changed into a horse). –2. a horse marked with black about the eyes. ( –dhā) a kind of leech. –āsanaṁ 1. the throne of Indra. –2. a throne in general. –3. a foot of five short syllables. –ijyaḥ N. of bṛhaspati the preceptor of gods. –īśvaraḥ one of the forms of Śiva-linga. –utsavaḥ a festival honouring Indra. –ṛṣabha a. having Indra as a bull, or impregnated by Indra, an epithet of the earth. –karman m. an epithet of Viṣṇu (performing Indra’s deeds). –kīlaḥ 1. N. of the mountain maṁdara. –2. a rock. ( –laṁ) the banner of Indra. –kuṁjaraḥ Indra’s elephant, Airāvata. –kūṭaḥ N. of a mountain. –kṛṣṭa a. ‘ploughed by Indra,’ growing exuberantly or in a wild state. ( –ṣṭaḥ) a kind of corn produced by rain-water. –ketuḥ Indra’s banner. –kośaḥ –ṣaḥ, –ṣakaḥ 1. a couch, sofa. –2. a plat-form. –3. a projection of the roof of a house. –4. a pin or bracket projecting from the wall (nāgadaṁta). –giriḥ the maheṁdra mountain. –guruḥ, ācāryaḥ the teacher of Indra; i. e. bṛhaspati. –gopaḥ, — gopakaḥ [iṁdro gopo rakṣako’sya, varṣābhavatvāttasya] a kind of insect of red or white colour; K. 100. –caṁdanaṁ the white sandal wood. –cāpaṁ, –dhanus n. 1. a rainbow; vidyutvaṁtaṁlalitavanitāḥ seṁdracāpaṁ sacitrāḥ Me. 64; Śi. 7. 4. –2. the bow of Indra. –chaṁdas n. [iṁdra iva sahasranetreṇa sahasragucchena chādyate] a necklace consisting of 1000 strings. –jananaṁ Indra’s birth. –jananīya a. treating of Indra’s birth (as a work). –jā a. Ved. born or arising from Indra. –jālaṁ [iṁdrasya parameśvarasya jālaṁ māyeva] 1. the net of Indra. –2. a weapon used by Arjuna; a stratagem or trick in war. –3. deception, cheating. –4. conjur ing, jugglery, magical tricks; svapneṁdrajālasadṛśaḥ khalu jīvalokaḥ Śānti. 2. 2; K. 105. –jālika a. [iṁdrajāla-ṭhan] deceptive, unreal, delusive. ( –kaḥ) a juggler, conjurer. –jit m. ‘conqueror of Indra’, N. of a son of Rāvaṇa who was killed by Lakṣmaṇa. [Indrajit is another name of Meghanāda, a son Rāvaṇa. When Rāvaṇa warred against Indra in his own heaven, his son Meghanāda was with him, and fought most valiantly. During the combat, Meghanāda, by virtue of the magical power of becoming invisible which he had obtained from Śiva, bound Indra, and bore him off in triumph to Lanka. Brahmā and the other gods hurried thither to obtain his release, and gave to Meghanāda the title of Indrajit, ‘conqueror of Indra’; but the victor refused to release his prisoner unless he were promised immortality. Brahmā refused to grant this extravagant demand, but he strenuously persisted, and achieved his object. In the Rāmāyaṇa he is represented to have been decapitated by Lakṣmaṇa while he was engaged in a sacrifice]. -haṁtṛ or vijayin m. N. of Lakṣmaṇa. –jyeṣṭha a. Ved. led by Indra. –tāpanaḥ the thundering of clouds. –tūlaṁ, tūlakaṁ a flock of cotton. –damanaḥ the son of Bāṇāsura. –dāruḥ the tree Pinus Devadāru. –druḥ, drumaḥ 1 the plant Terminalia Arjuna (arjuna). –2. the plant kuṭaja. –dvīpaḥ –paṁ one of the 9 Dvīpas or divisions of the continent (of India). –dhvajaḥ a flag raised on the 12th day of the bright half of Bhādra. –nakṣatraṁ Indra’s lunar mansion phalgunī. –netraṁ 1. the eye of Indra. –2. the number one thousand. –nīlaḥ [iṁdra iva nīlaḥ śyāmaḥ] a sapphire; R. 13. 54; 16. 69; Me. 46, 77. –nīlakaḥ an emerald. –patnī Indra’s wife, śacī. –parṇī, –puṣpā N. of a medicinal plant. –parvataḥ 1. the maheṁdra mountain. –2. a blue mountain. –putrā N. of aditi. –purogama, –puraḥsara, –śreṣṭa a. led or preceded by Indra, having Indra at the head. –purohitaḥ N. of bṛhaspati. (–tā) the asterism Pushya. –prasthaṁ N. of a city on the Yamunā, the residence of the Pāṇḍavas (identified with the modern Delhi); iṁdraprasthagamastāvatkāri mā saṁtu cedayaḥ Śi. 2. 63. –praharaṇaṁ Indra’s weapon, the thunderbolt. –bheṣajaṁ dried ginger. –makhaḥ a sacrifice in honour of Indra. –mahaḥ 1. a festival in honour of Indra. –2. the rainy season; – kāmukaḥ a dog. –mādana a. animating or delighting Indra. –medin a. Ved. whose friend or ally is Indra. –yavaḥ, –vaṁ seed of the Kutaja tree. –luptaḥ, –ptaṁ, –luptakaṁ 1. excessive baldness of the head. –2. loss of beard. –lokaḥ Indra’s world, Svarga or Paradise. –lokeśaḥ 1. lord of the Indra’s world, i. e. Indra. –2. a guest (who, if hospitably received, confers paradise on his host). –vaṁśā, –vajrā N. of two metres, see Appendix. –vallarī, –vallī N. of a plant (pārijāta) or of iṁdravāruṇī. –vastiḥ [iṁdrasya ātmanaḥ vastiriva] the calf (of the leg). –vātatama a. Ved. desired by Indra. –vāyū (du) Indra and Vayu. –vāruṇī, –vāruṇikā Colocynth, a wild bitter gourd (Mar. moṭhī kaṁvaḍaLa). –vāh a. carrying Indra. –vṛkṣaḥ the Devadaru tree. –vṛddhā a kind of abscess. –vaiḍūryaṁ a kind of precious stone. –vrataṁ Indra’s rule of conduct; one of the duties of a king (who is said to follow iṁdravrata when he distributes benefits as Indra pours down rain); vārṣikāṁścaturo māsān yarthedropyabhivarṣati . tathābhivarṣetsvaṁ rāṣṭraṁ kāmairiṁdravrataṁ caran … –śaktiḥ f. Indrāṇī, the wife of Indra, or his energy personified. –śatruḥ 1. an enemy or destroyer of Indra (when the accent is on the last syllable), an epithet of prahlāda; R. 7. 35. –2. [iṁdraḥ śatruḥ yasya] one whose enemy is Indra, an epithet of vṛtra (when the accent is on the first syllable). (This refers to a. legend in the Śat. Br., where it is said that Vṛtra’s father intended his son to become the destroyer of Indra, and asked him to say iṁdraśatrurvadhasva &c., but who, through mistake, accented the word on the first syllable, and was killed by Indra; cf. Śik. 52: –maṁtro hīnaḥ svarato varṇato vā mithyāprayukto na tamarthamāha . sa vāgvajro yajamānaṁ hināsti yatheṁdraśatruḥ svaratoparādhāt … –śalabhaḥ a kind of insect. –saṁdhā connection or alliance with Indra. –sārathiḥ. 1. N of Mātalī. –2. an epithet of Vāyu, driving in the same carriage with Indra. –sutaḥ, –sūnuḥ 1. N. of (a) Jayanta; (b) Arjuna; (c) Vāli, the king of monkeys. –2. N. of the arjuna tree. –surasaḥ, –surā a shrub the leaves of which are used in discutient applications (nirguṁḍī). –senā Indra’s missile or host. –senānīḥ the leader of Indra’s armies, epithet of Kārtikeya. –stut m., –stomaḥ 1. praise of Indra, N. of a particular hymn addressed to Indra in certain ceremonies. –2. a sacrifice in honour of Indra. –havaḥ invocation of Indra. –hastaḥ a kind of medicament. |
उत्पल – utpala | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899utpala “ut-pala” n. (and m. , ( “pal” “to move” ; fr. “pal” = “paṭ”, “to
burst open” , the blossom of the blue lotus (Nymphaea Caerulea) &c. n. a seed of the Nymphaea n. the plant Costus Speciosus n. any water-lily n. any flower n. a particular hell () utpala “ut-pala” m. N. of a Nāga utpala “ut-pala” m. of an astronomer utpala “ut-pala” m. of a lexicographer utpala “ut-pala” m. of several other men utpala “ut-pala” (fr. “pala”, “flesh”, with 1. “ud” in the sense of “apart”), fleshless, emaciated ; n. N. of a hell Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 utpala a. [utkrāṁtaḥ palaṁ māṁsaṁ] Fleshless, emaciated, lean. –lī A kind of cake made with unwinnowed corn. –laṁ (1) A blue lotus, any lotus or water-lily; navāvatāraṁ kamalādivotpalaṁ R. 3. 36, 12. 86; Me. 26; nīlotpalapatradhārayā S. 1. 18; so rakta,- (2) The plant Costus Speciosus. (3) A plant in general. — Comp. –akṣa, –cakṣus a. lotuseyed. –ābha a. lotus-like. –gaṁdhikaṁ a variety of sandal of the colour of brass (which is very fragrant). –patraṁ 1. a lotus-leaf. –2. a wound caused by a female’s finger- nail, nail-print. –3. a Tilaka or mark on the forehead made with sandal. –4. a broad-bladed knife or lancet. –patrakaṁ a broad-bladed knife or lancet. –bhedyakaḥ a kind of bandage. –mālā N. of a lexicon. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch utpala 1) n. a) “eine Nymphaea” (Pflanze) AK. 1, 2, 3, 36. TRIK. 1, 2, 32. H. 1163 (nach dem Sch. und SIDDH. K. 251, “a”, 4 auch m.). an. 3, 626 (= indīvara). MBH. 3, 433. SUŚR. 1, 29, 5. 41, 9. 141, 26. 145, 22. 220, 7. 223, 16. 226, 2. 2, 30, 7. RAGH. 3, 36. 12, 86. MEGH. 27. kamalotpalamālinī MBH. 3, 11604. nalinīṁ prabhūtakamalotpalām 16093. R. 4, 25, 15. 44, 29. sāśrunetrotpalābhiḥ (yuvatibhiḥ) AMAR. 2. 26. karṇotpalatāṁ prapede RAGH. 7, 23. “Saamenkorn einer Nymphaea” SUŚR. 2, 20, 15. Vgl. nīlotpala, raktotpala. Nach AK. 2, 4, 4, 14. H. an. und MED. l. 62 auch “Costus speciosus” (kuṣṭha); nach MED. überdies “jede Blume.” — b) N. einer Hölle (buddh.) BURN. Intr. 201. — 2) m. N. pr. eines Mannes RĀJA-TAR. 4, 494. 707. 5, 127. 460. erbaut ein Heiligthum utpalasvāmin 4, 694. ein Astronom Verz. d. B. H. No. 883. ein Nāga Lot. de la b. l. 3. — 3) f. a) -lā N. pr. eines Flusses HARIV. LANGL. t. 1, p. 508. Vgl. utpalavatī. — b) -lī “eine Art Gebäck” (tuṣacarpaṭī) MED. l. 62. — 4) adj. “fleischlos” H. an. 3, 626. — In der ersten Bed. wohl von pal = paṭ mit ud (“bersten”), in der letzten ud + pala. utpala 1) a) “die Blüthe der Nymphaea”, nicht die Pflanze selbst, welche utpalinī heisst. saṁpatsu mahatāṁ cittaṁ bhavatyutpalakomalam Spr. 3188. Vgl. mahotpala. — 2) Verfasser des Wörterbuchs Utpalamālā Verz. d. Oxf. H. 126,a,11. ein Astronom, = bhaṭṭotpala 329,a, N. 780. 338,a,2. KERN in Pref. zu VARĀH. BṚH. S. 6. fg. 61. fg. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 utpala utpala, i. e. probably ud-paṭ + a (with l for ṭ), I. n. A blue lotus, Nymphaea caerulea, Bhartṛ. 2, 56. II. m. A proper name, Rājat. 5, 127. — Comp. nīla-, m. a blue lotus, Nymphaea cyanea Roxb., Rām. 4, 44, 91. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 utpala n. the blue lotus. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 utpala ut-pala, n. (blue) lotus at a later stage called kamala; m. N.: m. id.; -pura, n. N. of a town built by Utpala; -vana, n. bed of lotuses; -śāka, n. N. of a plant; -akṣa, m. N. of a king; -āpīḍa, m. N. of a king. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 utpala na° ud + pala–ac . 1 nīlapadme, 2 kumudādau, 3 kuṣṭhoṣaghau ca . utkrāntaṁ palaṁ māsam atyā° samā° . 4 māṁsaśūnye tri° . gaṇḍasvedāpanayanarujāklāntakarṇotpalānān megha° . yatrotpaladalaklaivyamastrāṇyāpuḥ suradviṣām muhūrtakarṇotpalatāṁ prapede navāvatāraṁ kamalādivotpalam raghuḥ anyonyamutpīḍayadutpalā kṣyāḥ kumā° . tacca trividhaṁ nīlaṁ raktaṁśvetañca dhruvaṁsa nīlotpalapatradhārayā śaku° . |
कर्ण – karṇa | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899karṇa m. (“kṛt” ; 1. “kṝ” , the ear (“api karṇe”, behind the ear or back,
from behind [cf. “apikarṇa”]; “karṇe”, [in dram.] into the ear, in a low voice, aside ; “karṇaṁ” “dā”, to give ear to, listen to ; “karṇam ā-gam”, to come to one’s ear, become known to m. the handle or ear of a vessel &c. m. the helm or rudder of a ship karṇa m. (in geom.) the hypothenuse of a triangle or the diagonal of a tetragon &c. m. the diameter of a circle, Sūryas karṇa m. (in prosody) a spondee m. Cassia Fistula m. Calotropis Gigantea m. N. of a king of Aṅga (and elder brother by the mother’s side of the Pāṇḍu princes, being the son of the god Sūrya by Pṛithā or Kuntī, before her marriage with Pāṇḍu; afraid of the censure of her relatives, Kuntī deserted the child and exposed it in the river, where it was found by a charioteer named Adhi-ratha and nurtured by his wife Rādhā; hence Karṇa is sometimes called Sūta-putra or Sūta-ja, sometimes Rādheya, though named by his foster-parents Vasu-ṣeṇa) &c. m. N. of several other men karṇa m. (mfn. “karṇa”), eared, furnished with ears or long ears m. furnished with chaff (as grain) Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 karṇa a. Ved. (1) Having long ears. (2) Furnished with chaff (as grain). –rṇaḥ (1) The ear; aho khalabhujaṁgasya viparītavadhakramaḥ . karṇe lagati cānyasya prāṇairanyo viyujyate .. Pt. 1. 305, 304 also; karṇaṁ dā to listen; karṇamāgam to come to the ear, become known; R. 1. 9; karṇe kṛ to put round the ear; Ch. P. 10; karṇe kathayati whispers in the ear; cf. ṣaṭkarṇa, catuṣkarṇa &c. also. (2) The handle or ear of a vessel. (3) The helm or rudder of a ship. (4) The hypotenuse of a triangle. (5) (In prosody) A spondee. (6) N. of a celebrated warrior on the side of the Kauravas mentioned in the Mahabhārata. [He was the son of Kuntī begotten on her by the god Sun while she was yet a virgin residing at her father’s house (see Kuntī). When the child was born, Kunti, afraid of the censure of her relatives and also of public scandal, threw the boy into the river where he was found by Adhiratha, charioteer of Dhṛtarāṣṭra and given over to his wife Rādhā who brought him up like her own child; whence Karṇa is often called Sūtaputra, Rādheya &c. Karṇa, when grown up, was made king of Anga by Duryodhana, and became by virtue of his many generous acts a type of charity. On one occasion Indra (whose care it was to favour his son Arjuna) disguised himself as a Brāhmaṇa and cajoled him out of his divine armour and ear-rings, and gave him in return a charmed javelin. With a desire to make himself proficient in the science of war, he, calling himself a Brāhmaṇa went to Paraśurāma and learnt that art from him. But his secret did not long remain concealed. On one occasion when Paraśurāma had fallen asleep with his head resting on Karṇa’s lap, a worm (supposed by some to be the form assumed by Indra himself to defeat Karṇa’s object) began to eat into his lap and made a deep rent in it; but as Karṇa showed not the least sign of pain, his real character was discovered by his preceptor who cursed him that the art he had learnt would avail him not in times of need. On another occasion he was cursed by a Brāhmaṇa (whose cow he had unwittingly slain in chase) that the earth would eat up the wheel of his chariot in the hour of trial. Even with such disadvantages as these, he acquitted himself most valiantly in the great war between the Pāṇḍavas and Kauravas, while acting as generalissimo of the Kaurava forces after Bhīṣma and Droṇa had fallen. He maintained the field against the Pāṇḍavas for three days, but on the last day he was slain by Arjuna while the wheel of his chariot had sunk down into the earth. Karṇa was the most intimate friend of Duryodhana, and with Śakuni joined him in all the various schemes and plots that were devised from time to time for the destruction of the Pāṇḍavas.] — Comp. –aṁjaliḥ the auditory passage of the outer ear. –anujaḥ Yudhiṣṭhira. –aṁtika a. close to the ear; svanasi mṛdu karṇāṁtikacaraḥ S. 1. 24. –aṁduḥ –dū f. an ornament for the ear, ear-ring. –arpaṇaṁ giving ear, listening. –āsphālaḥ the flapping of the elephant’s ears. –iṁduḥ f. a semicircular ear-ring. –uttaṁsaḥ an ear-ornament or merely an ornament (according to some authorities). (Mammaṭa says that here karṇa means karṇāsthitatva; cf. also his remark ad loc: –karṇāvataṁsādipade karṇādidhvaninirmitaḥ . saṁnidhānārthabodhārthaṁ sthiteṣvetatsamarthanaṁ .. K. P. 7). –upakarṇikā rumour; (lit. ‘from ear to ear’). –ūrṇaḥ a kind of deer. –kīṭā –ṭī] 1. a worm with many feet and of a reddish colour. –2. a small centipede. –kṣveḍaḥ (in medic.) a constant noise in the ear. –gūthaṁ ear-wax. (–thaḥ) –gūthakaḥ hardening of the wax of the ear. –gocara a. audible –grāhaḥ a helmsman. –japa a. (also karṇejapa) a secret traducer, talebearer, informer. –japaḥ –jāpaḥ slandering, tale-bearing, calumniating. –jalūkā a small centipede. –jāhaṁ the root of the ear; api karṇajāhaviniveśitānanaḥ Māl. 5. 8. –jit m. ‘conqueror of Karṇa’, epithet of Arjuna, the third Pāṇḍava prince. –jvaraḥ pain to the ear; U. 5. 6. –tālaḥ the flapping of the elephant’s ears, the noise made by it; vistāritaḥ kuṁjarakarṇatālaiḥ R. 7. 39, 9. 71; Śi. 17. 37. –darpaṇaḥ an ear-ring. –duduṁbhiḥ = karṇakīṭā. –dhāraḥ a helmsman, a pilot; akarṇadhārā jaladhau viplaveteha nauriva H. 3. 2; avinayanadīkarṇadhāra karṇa Ve. 4. –dhāriṇī a female elephant. –pathaḥ the range of hearing. –paraṁparā from ear to ear, hearsay; iti karṇapaṁraparaya . śrutaṁ Ratn. 1. –parvan n. the eighth (i. e. Karṇa) section of the Mahābhārata. –pākaḥ inflammation of the outer ear. –pāliḥ –lī f. 1. the lobe of the ear. –2. the outer edge of the ear. ( –lī) an ornament of the ear. –pāśaḥ a beautiful ear; U. 6. 27. –puṭaṁ the auditory passage of the ear. –pūraḥ 1. an ornament (of flowers &c.) worn round the ear, an ear-ring; idaṁ ca karatalaṁ kimiti karṇapūratāmāropitaṁ K. 60. –2. the Aśoka tree. –3. the Śirīṣa tree. –4. the blue lotus. –pūrakaḥ 1. an earring. –2. the Kadamba tree. –3. the Aśoka tree. –4. the blue lotus. –praṇādaḥ, –pratināhaḥ a disease of the ear. –prāṁtaḥ the lobe of the ear. –phalaḥ a kind of fish. –bhūṣaṇaṁ, –bhūṣā an ear-ornament. –mūlaṁ the root of the ear; R. 12. 2. –moṭī a form of Durgā. –yoni a. having the ear as a source. –latā-latikā the lobe of the ear. –vaṁśaḥ a raised platform or dais of bamboo. –varjita a. earless. ( –taḥ) a snake. –vivaraṁ, –chidraṁ,-puraṁ,-raṁbhraṁ the auditory passage of the ear. –viṣ f. ear-wax. –viṣaṁ ‘poisoning the ear’, slandering, backbiting. –vedhaḥ piercing the ears to put ear-rings on. –vedhanī,-vedhanikā an instrument for piercing the ear. –veṣṭaḥ, –veṣṭanaṁ an ear-ring. –śaṣkulī the outer part of the ear (leading to the auditory passage); N. 2. 8. –śūlaḥ, –laṁ ear-ache. –śrava a. audible, loud; karṇaśrave’nile Ms. 4. 102. –śrāvaḥ, –saṁśravaḥ ‘running of the ear’, discharge of pus or ichorous matter from the ear. –sūḥ f. Kuntī, mother of Karṇa. –hīma a. earless ( –naḥ) a snake. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch karṇa m. Uṇ. 3, 10. ŚĀNT. 2, 6. 1) “Ohr” NIR. 1, 9. AK. 2, 6, 2, 45. TRIK. 2, 6, 31. 3, 3, 124. H. 574. an. 2, 134. MED. ṇ. 4. eṣṭā narā nicetārā ca karṇaiḥ ṚV. 1, 184, 2. 2, 39, 6. 4, 23, 8. śrāvayedasya karṇā vājayadhyai 29, 3. 6. 9, 6. 10, 106, 9. AV. 10, 2, 6. karṇagṛhya “am Ohr fassend” ṚV. 8, 59, 15. karṇagṛhīta TS. 6, 1, 7, 6. karṇatas “aus dem Ohre weg” AV. 9, 8, 3. bhadrāya karṇaḥ krośatu KAUŚ. 58. M. 8, 125. 234. SUŚR. 1, 337, 7. PAÑCAT. 167, 15. MEGH.45. 68. 101. ŚĀK. 8. karṇaśirīṣa “eine am Ohr befestigte Śir.-Blume” 29. karṇe “in’s Ohr” (als scenische Bemerk.) MṚCCH. 63, 20. ceṭyāḥ karṇe 89, 17. 18. 20. MĀLAV. 45, 18. karṇāvapidhāya ŚAT. BR. 14, 8, 10, 1. M. 2, 200. MṚCCH. 123, 16. karṇaṁ dā “sein Ohr hinhalten, hinhorchen” 163, 21. ŚĀK. 8, 21. 18, 8. 27, 10. 44, 7. 48, 22. 59, 2. 30. karṇamāgam “zu Jmdes Ohren kommen” RAGH. 1, 9. karṇe ‘paraṁ spṛśati hantyaparaṁ samūlam PAÑCAT. I, 339. karṇe lagati (bhujaṁgaḥ) cānyasya prāṇairanyo viyujyate 340. tacchrutvā mārjāro bhūmiṁ spṛṣṭvā karṇau spṛśati (als Zeichen, dass sie das Gesagte nicht hören wolle) HIT. 19, 20. karṇanāsā f. sg. “Ohren und Nase” R. 3, 24, 22. ṣaṭkarṇo (“woran sechs Ohren Theil genommen haben”) bhidyate mantraścatuṣkarṇaḥ sthiro bhavet. dvikarṇasya tu mantrasya brahmāpyantaṁ na gacchati.. VET. 3, 10. 11. Adj. compp. auf karṇa sind paroxytona, wenn das vorangehende Wort eine Farbe oder ein am Ohr angebrachtes Merkmal (beim Viehe; der Auslaut eines solchen Wortes häufig verlängert P. 6, 3, 115) ist; so auch bei Vergleichungen und wenn das comp. ein nomen appell. oder propr. ist P. 6, 2, 112. 113. śuklakarṇa, śaṅkukarṇa, gokarṇa, maṇikarṇa Sch. Das f. der adj. compp. geht bald auf ā, bald auf ī aus P. 4, 1, 55, 64. śaṅkukarṇā (go) MBH. 1, 6662. (rākṣasīḥ) trikarṇīḥ śaṅkukarṇīśca lambakarṇīḥ – ekakarṇīśca R. 5, 17, 24. Vgl. āviddhakarṇā, -karṇī, ākhukarṇī, pūtikarṇa, plīhākarṇa, vikarṇa, hiraṇyakarṇa. — 2) Irrig scheint die Trennung api karṇe zu sein statt apikarṇe “hinter den Ohren” d. i. “im Rücken, von hinten, hinterher” in den Stellen: śvā nvasya jambhiṣadapi karṇe varāhayuḥ ṚV. 10, 86, 4. ā vāmatyā api karṇe vahantu 5, 31, 9. sudītayo vo adruho ‘pi karṇe tarasvinaḥ samṛkvabhiḥ 8, 86, 12. Vgl. apikarṇa (wo das Citat in 6, 48, 16 zu verbessern ist). — 3) “Handhabe” oder “eine andere Hervorragung auf beiden Seiten eines Gefässes u.s.w.”: ubhā karṇā hiraṇyayā ṚV. 8, 61, 12. karṇasahitāḥ (iṣṭakāḥ) KĀTY. ŚR. 17, 6, 3; vgl. MAHĪDH. zu VS. 13, 54. — 4) “Steuerruder”: hatakarṇeva naurjale R. 6, 23, 30. Vgl. karṇagrāha, karṇadhāra. — 5) N. einer Pflanze, = suvarṇāli MED. “Cassia Fistula Lin.” und “Calotropis gigantea” WILS. — 6) “Spondeus” COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 151. — 7) “Hypotenuse, Diagonale eines Tetragons” COLEBR. Alg. 59. 106. Misc. Ess. II, 403. fgg. — 8) N. pr. eines Königs von Añga und eines der Führer der Kuruiden, eines Sohnes der Kuntī (vor ihrer Verheirathung mit Pāṇḍu) und des Sonnengottes. Als Adoptivsohn von Sūta Adhiratha heisst er auch sūtaputra und sūtaja. TRIK. 2, 8, 19. 3, 3, 124. H. 711. H. an. MED. MBH. 1, 2427. 2764. fgg. 4411. fgg. 5379. fgg. 3, 16098. fgg. 5, 5301. fgg. 15, 826. fgg. BHAG. 11, 26. HARIV. 1709. 4058. BHĀG. P. 9, 23, 13. VP. 437. 446. Ursprung der Namen Vaikartana und Karṇa MBH. 1, 2783. 4411. Unter den Söhnen Dhṛtarāṣṭra’s MBH. 1, 2730. 4542. ein Sohn Viśvajit’s HARIV. 1704. im Gefolge Śiva’s VYĀḌI zu H. 210. Bei den Buddhisten ein Sohn Mahāsaṁmata’s und König in Potāla LALIT. 411 (SCHIEEFNER, Lebensb. 2322: karṇika). karṇa adj. “auritus, geöhrt, langohrig”: gardabha VS. 24, 40. śvāvidh AV. 5, 13, 9. karṇāstrayo yāmāḥ TS. 5, 6, 15, 1. VS. 24, 3. “geöhrt” von Getraidekörnern heisst viell. so. v. a. “mit Spelzen versehen”: karṇāṁścākarṇāṁśca taṇḍulānvicinuyāt TS. 1, 8, 9, 3. Zum adj. ist vermuthlich auch zu ziehen: ukṣante aśvāṁ atyāṁ ivājiṣu nadasya karṇaisturayanta āśubhiḥ ṚV. 2, 34, 3. karṇa 1) karṇagṛhya KĀṬH. 23, 10. — 3) paśavo vā etasyāḥ karṇaḥ KĀṬH. 21, 9; vgl. paśavo vai karṇakāḥ ŚAT. BR. 9, 2, 3, 40. Füge “Oehr, Oese” hinzu; auch am Joch Comm. zu TS. 1, 427, 5. — 4) akarṇā naurivāmbhasi R. GORR. 2, 82, 6. — 5) es ist wohl suvarṇālu gemeint. — 7) SŪRYAS. 2, 41. 51. GOLĀDHY. 5, 16. 36. Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 8, 5, 11. — 8) N. pr. eines Fürsten, Sohnes des Rāmacandra und Vaters des Ratnasena, Inschr. im Journ. of the Am. Or. S. 7, 5, Śl. 8. Vaters des Viśokadeva Verz. d.Oxf. H. 280,b,1. karṇa 1) Sp. 122, Z. 5 lies karṇamārgam. — 7) “Durchmesser” SŪRYAS. 1, 59. 12, 84. ardha- “Halbmesser” 2, 61. 13, 5. karṇārdha dass. 3, 41. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 karṇa 1 I The eldest son of Kuntī. Though he was the brother of the Pāṇḍavas he joined sides with the Kauravas and became the King of Aṅga. So the name of Karṇa comes in the genealogy of the Aṅga royal family. karṇa 2 II A son of Dhrtarāṣṭra. Bhīmasena killed this Karṇa. (Chapter 67, Bhīṣma Parva). karṇa 3 III Younger brother of Ghaṇṭa. See under Ghaṇṭākarṇa. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 karṇa karṇa, m. 1. The ear, Man. 8, 125; with dā, To listen, Śāk. 8, 21. 2. A rudder, Rām. 6, 23, 30. 3. A proper name, MBh. 1, 2427. — Comp. When the latter part of a comp. adj. the f. ends in ṇā and ṇī. Aśva-, m. a timber tree, Vatica robusta, Rām. 1, 26, 15. utkarṇa, i. e. ud-, adj. with the ears erect, Ragh. (Calc. ed. 15, 11. kumbha-, m. 1. a name of Śiva, MBh. 12, 10350. 2. the name of a Rākṣasa, Rām. 1, 3, 34. go-, m. 1. a kind of deer, Antelope picta, Rām. 2, 103, 41. 2. a kind of arrow, MBh. 8, 4668. 3. a span from the tip of the thumb to that of the little finger, MBh. 2, 2324. 4. the name of a holy place, Rām. 1, 42, 13. 5. a name of Śiva, Kathās. 22, 218. catuṣkarṇa, i. e. catur-, adj. heard only by four ears, Pañc, i. d. 112. tri-, adj., f. ṇī, having three ears, Rām. 5, 18, 24. dadhi-, m. a proper name, Pañc. 165, 9. lamba-, m. 1. a goat. 2. an elephant. 3. a Rākṣasa. vi-, adj. earless. śaṅku-, I. adj., f. ṇā, having ears like a javelin, MBh. 1, 6662; ṇī, Rām. 5, 18, 24. II. m. 1. an ass. 2. a proper name, Pañc. 87, 12. ṣaṭkarṇa, i. e. ṣaṣ-, adj. heard by six ears, Lass. 3, 10. stabdha- (vb. stambh), adj. having the ears erect. hastikarṇa, i. e. hastin-, m. 1. the castor oil tree. 2. the Butea frondosa. 3. a demigod. 4. the name of a district, Rājat. 5, 32. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 karṇa [1] m. (adj. –° f. ā & ī) ear (lit. & fig.), rudder; N. of a hero etc. karṇa [2] karṇa a. having (long) ears. karṇa a. having (long) ears. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 karṇa karṇa, m. (-° a., f. ā, ī) ear; handle; rudder; N. of several men, esp. of a son of Kuntī; a. having care or handles; long-eared (also ā); -kuvalayam, n. lotus attached to the ear; -cāmara, n. whisk adorning the ears of elephants; -jāpa, m. tale-bearing; -tā, f. condition, of an ear; -tāla, m. flapping of elephant’s ears (-°); -dhāra, m. helmsman; sailor: -tā, f. helmsmanship; -nīlotpala, n. blue lotus attached to the ear; -pa, m. N.; -pattraka, m. flap of the ear (tragus); -patha, m. ear-shot, hearing: -m, ā-yā, or upa+i, come to the ears: – atithi, m. = come to the ears; -paraṁparā, f. passing from ear to ear, gossip; -pāśa, m. beautiful ear; -pūra, m. n. ear ornament, esp. flowers: -pūraka, m. N. of a chattering servant; -pūrī-kṛ, turn into an ear ornament; -bhaṅga, m. curve of the ears; -bhūṣana, n. ear ornament; -mūla, n. root of the ear (where it is attached to the head); -vaṁśa, m. flat projecting bamboo roof; -vat, a. having ears; -viṣ, f. ear-wax; -viṣa, n. poison for the ears; -veṣṭa, m. ear-ring: *-na, n. id.; -śirīṣa, n. Śirīṣa flower attached to the ear; -śrava, a. audible; -su-bhaga, a. pleasant to the ear. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 karṇa bhedane adantacurādi° ubha° saka° seṭ . karṇayati te acakarṇat ta . karṇayām–babhūva āsa . cakāra cakre . karṇayitā karṇayiṣyati . karṇanam karṇaḥ karṇitaḥ karṇayitum . karṇayan karṇayamānaḥ . karṇayitvā ākarṇya karṇī . karṇyate akarṇi akarṇiṣātām akarṇayiṣātām ā + karṇa–śravaṇe . ākarṇayannutsukahaṁsanādān bhaṭṭiḥ . mithastadākarṇanasajjakarṇayā devākarṇaya suśrutena carakasyoktena jāne’svilam . adastadā’karṇiphalāḍhyajīvilam iti ca naiṣa° . ākarṇya samprati rutaṁ caraṇāyudhānām sā° da° . karṇa pu° . karṇyate ākarṇyate’nena karṇa karaṇe ac kīryante śabdā vāyunā’tra kṝ–nan vā . 1 śrotre śabdajñānasādhane indriyabhede tadādhāre 2 golake ca . śrotrañca karṇaśaṣukalyavacchinnanabhorūpamiti naiyāyikādayaḥ . sātvikākāśasūkṣmāṁśa iti vedāntinaḥ sāṁkhyādayaśca svīcakruḥ . tatrādyamate śabdotpattideśe śrotrasya gamanābhāvena anyatrotpannaśabdagrahaṇāsambhavaḥ . tathā hi ākāśasyaikatve’pi upādhibhedena bhedāt yadīyakarṇaśaṣkulīpradeśe śabdasamavāyastasyaiva śrāvaṇam nānyasya, tataśca vīcitaraṅganyāyena kadambakorakakanyāyena vā śabdotpattāvapi śabdotpattideśasya śrotuśca vibhinnadeśasthatayā na śabdopalabdhiḥ syāt . atastattaddeśasthasya śīghraṁ dhāvamānasya vāyoḥ saṁyogavibhāgādayaḥ śrotuḥ śabdādabhivyañjakāḥ . tadetat śaṅkāpūrvakam mīmāṁsābhāṣye samarthitam yathā . yadi śabdaṁ saṁyogavibhāgā evābhivyañjanti na kurvanti, ākāśaviṣayatvācchabdasya, ākāśasyaikatvāt, ya evāparatra śrotrākāśaḥ, sa eva deśāntareṣvapīti srughnasyaiḥ saṁyogavibhāgairabhivyaktaḥ pāṭakiputre’pyupalabhyeta? . yasya punaḥ kurvanti, tasya vāyavīyāḥ saṁyogavibhāgā vāyvāśritatvādvāyuṣveva kariṣyanti . yathā, tantavaḥ tantuṣveva paṭaṁ, tasya pāṭaliputreṣvanupalalambhī yuktaḥ, srughnasthatvātteṣām . yasyāpyabhivyañjanti, tasyāpyeṣa na doṣaḥ, dūre satyāḥ karṇaśaṣkalyāḥ anupakārakāḥ saṁyogavibhāgāḥ . tena dūre yacchrotraṁ tena nopalamyate iti . naidadevaṁ, aprāptāścet saṁyogavibhāgāḥ śrotrasyopakuryuḥ sannikṛṣṭaviprakṛṣṭadeśasthau yugapacchabdamupalabheyātām na ca yugapadupalabhete . tasmānnāprāptāḥ upakurvanti, na cedupakurvanti, tasmādanimittaṁ śabdopalambhane saṁyogavibhāgau iti . naitadevaṁ, abhighātena hi preritāḥ vāyavastimitāni vāyvantarāṇi pratibādhamānāḥ sarvyatodikkān saṁyogavibhāgān utpādayanti, yāvadvegamabhipratiṣṭhante . te ca (saṁyogavibhāgāḥ) vāyorapratyakṣatvāt nopalabhyante . anuparateṣveva teṣu śabdaḥ upalabhyate, noparateṣu . ato na doṣaḥ . ata eva cānuvātaṁ dūrādupalabhyate śabdaḥ . vedāntyādimate śabdasya pañcamūtaguṇatayā śabdādhāraṁ vāyunā jhaṭiti kaṇṇadeśe yathāvegaṁ dhāvamānena karṇaprāpaṇasambhava stena śabdopalambhaḥ . tanmate śravaṇendriyasya prāpyakāritvoktirapyetatpareti bodhyam . karṇasyāviṣṭhātṛdevaśca dik iti karaṇādhiṣaśabde uktam . karṇagrāhyāśca śabdāstadbhedāstaddharmāśca karṇekṛtaṁ kanakapatramanālapantyā cogapa° . mithastadākarṇa nasajjakarṇayā naiṣa° tadguṇaiḥ karṇamāgatya cāpalāya praṇoditaḥ raghuḥ śravaṇendriyasya sūkṣmatve’pi tadādhārābhiprāyeṇa avalambitakarṇaśaṣkulīkalasīkaṁ racayannavocata naiṣa° vākyam . 3 suvarṇālīvṛkṣe medi° . trikoṇādikṣetre 4 bhujakoṭisaṁyojakarekhābhede tadrekhāmānajñānopāyaśca līlā° uktaḥ yathā iṣṭādbāho yaḥ syāttatspardhinyāṁ diśītarobāhuḥ . tryasre caturasre vā sā koṭiḥ kīrtitā tajjñaiḥ . tatkṛtyoryogapadaṁ karṇo, doḥkarṇavargayorvivarāt . mūlaṁ koṭiḥ, koṭiśrutikṛtyorantarāt padaṁ bāhuḥ iti udā° diṅmātramatrocyate bhujaḥ 4 koṭiḥ 3 anayorvargaḥ 16, 9, tayoryogaḥ 25 tasya mūlam 5 tathāca caturhastabāhuke trihastakoṭike kṣetre karṇamānam pañca hastāḥ . adhikaṁ kṣetravyavahāraśabde vakṣyate . asya ca bhujakoṭibhedanāt kṛtidvārā tayorvargavyāpanāccakarṇatvam . 5 kuṭile ca vyāghāraṇavat prāṇabhṛtaḥ karṇasahitāḥ kātyā° 17, 6, 0 . karṇena akṣṇayā sahitāḥ saṁgra° vyā° akṣṇayā kauṭilyena iti kātyā° 5, 4, 15 sū° vyā° karkaḥ . kuntyāḥ kanyāvasthāyāṁ sūryāt jāte svanāmakhyāte 6 vasuṣeṇe tadutpattikathā yathā śūronāma yaduśreṣṭovamudevapitā’bhavat . tasya kanyā pṛthā nāma rūpeṇāsadṛśī bhuvi . pituḥ svasrīyaputrāya so’napatyāya vīryavān . agramagra pratijñāya svasyāpatyasya vaitadā . agrajāteti tāṁ kanyāṁ śūro’nugrahakāṅkṣayā . adadat kuntibhojāya sa tāṁ duhitaraṁ tadā . sā niyuktā piturgeha brāhmaṇātithipūjane . ugramparyacaradghoraṁ brāhmaṇaṁ śa si tavratam . nigūḍhaniścayaṁ dharmavantaṁ durvāsasaṁ viduḥ . tamugraṁ śaṁsitātmānaṁ sarvayatnairatoṣayat . tuṣṭo’bhicārasaṁyuktamāca cakṣe yathāvidhi . uvācacaināṁ bhagavān prīto’smi subhage! tava . yaṁ yaṁ devaṁ tvametena mantreṇāvāhayiṣyasi . tasya tasya prasādāttva devi . putrān janiṣyasi . evamuktā ca sā bālā tadā kautūhalānvitā . kanyā satī devamarkamājuhāva yaśasvinī . prakāśakartā bhagavāṁstasyāṁ garbhaṁ daghau tadā . ajījanat sutaṁ tasyāṁ sarvaśastrabhṛtāṁparam . sakuṇḍalaṁ sakavacaṁ devagarbhaṁ śriyānvitam . divākarasamaṁ dāptyā cārusaṁrvāṅgabhūṣitam . nigūhamānā jātaṁ vai bandhupakṣabhayāt tadā . utsasarja jale kuntī taṅkumāraṁ yaśasvinam . tamutsṛṣṭaṁ jale garbhaṁ rādhābhartā mahāyaśāḥ . rādhāyāḥ kalpayāmāsa putraṁ so’dhirathistadā . cakraturnāmadheyañca tasya bālasya tāvubhau . dampatī vasuṣeṇeti dikṣu sarvākhu viśrutam . sa vardhamāno balavān sarvāstreṣūttamo ‘bhavat . vedāṅgāni ca sarvāṇi samāpa jayatāṁvaraḥ . yasmin kāle japannāste ghīmān satyaparākramaḥ . nādeyaṁ brāhmaṇeṣvāsīttasmin kāle mahātmanaḥ . tamindro brāhmaṇobhūtvā putrārthebhūtabhāvanaḥ . yayāce kuṇḍale vīraṁ kavacañca sahāṅgajam . utkṛtya karṇohyadadat kavacaṁ kuṇḍale tathā . śaktiṁ śakrodadau tasmai vismitaścedamabravīt . devāsuramanuṣyāṇāṁ gandharvoragarakṣasām . yasmin kṣepsyasi durdharva . sa ekona bhaviṣyati . ṣurā nāma ca tasyāsīdvasuṣeṇa iti kṣitau . tato vaikartanaḥ karṇaḥ karmaṇā tena so’bhavat . āmuktakavacovīroyastu jajñe mahāyaśāḥ . sa karṇa iti vikhyātaḥ pṛthāyāḥ prathamaḥ sutaḥ . sa tu sūtakule vīro vavṛdhe rājasattama . karṇaṁ naranaraśreṣṭhaṁ sarvaśastrabhṛtāṁ varam . duryodhanasya sacivaṁ mitraṁ śatruvināśanam . divākarasya taṁ viddhi rājannaṁ śamanuttamam . tasyāṅgadeśāṣipatāprāptiḥ aṅgādhipaśabde uktā . karṇo’styasya prāśastyena arśa° ac . 7 lambakarṇe tri° . khaḍgovaiśvadevaḥ śvā kṛṣṇaḥ karṇogardabhaḥ yaju° 24, 40 . karṇo lamvakarṇaḥ vedadī° . 8 aritre ca pu° karṇaḥ śrotramaritrañceti durgaḥ . karṇadhāraḥ . hatakarṇeva naurjale rāmā° . |
काल – kāla | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (fr. 3. “kal”?), black, of a dark colour, dark-blue &c.
kāla m. a black or dark-blue colour kāla m. the black part of the eye kāla m. the Indian cuckoo kāla m. the poisonous serpent Coluber Nāga (= “kālasarpa”) kāla m. the plant Cassia Sophora kāla m. a red kind of Plumbago kāla m. the resin of the plant Shorea robusta kāla m. the planet Saturn kāla m. N. of śiva kāla m. of Rudra kāla m. of a son of Hrada 189 kāla m. of the prince Kāla-yavana kāla m. of a brother of king Prasena-jit kāla m. of a future Buddha kāla m. of an author of Mantras (= Aśva-ghosha) kāla m. of a Nāga-rāja kāla m. of a Rakshas kāla m. of an enemy of śiva kāla m. of a mountain kāla m. of one of the nine treasures kāla m. a mystical N. of the letter “m” kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ā”) f. N. of several plants (Indigofera tinctoria ; Piper longum ; (perhaps) Ipomoea atropurpurea ; Nigella indica ; Rubia Munjista ; Ruellia longifolia ; Physalis flexuosa ; Bignonia suaveolens kāla m. the fruit of the Kālā g. “harītaky-ādi” kāla m. N. of a “śakti” kāla m. of a daughter of Daksha (the mother of the Kāleyas or Kālakeyas, a family of Asuras) kāla m. N. of Durgā kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. black colour, ink or blacking kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. abuse, censure, defamation kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. a row or succession of black clouds kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. night kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. a worm or animalcule generated in the acetous fermentation of milk (= “kṣīra-kīṭa” or “kṣāra-kīṭa”) kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. the plant Kālāṇjanī kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. Ipomoea Turpethum kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. a kind of clay kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. Bignonia suaveolens kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. one of the seven tongues or flames of fire kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. a form of Durgā kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. one of the Mātṛis or divine mothers kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. N. of a female evil spirit (mother of the Kālakeyas) 11552 kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. one of the sixteen Vidyā-devīs kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. N. of Satyavatī, wife of king śāntanu and mother of Vyāsa or Kṛiṣṇa-dvaipāyana (after her marriage she had a son Vicitra- vīrya, whose widows were married by Kṛiṣṇa-dvaipāyana, and bore to him Dhṛita-rāṣṭra and Pāṇḍu ; according to other legends Kālī is the wife of Bhīmasena and mother of Sarvagata kāla mf (“ī” ) n. (“ī”) f. (with or without “gaṅgā”) N. of a river kāla n. a black kind of Agallochum kāla n. a kind of perfume (“kakkolaka”) kāla n. iron kāla m. (3. “kal”, “to calculate or enumerate”), [ifc. f. “ā” , a fixed or right point of time, a space of time, time (in general) &c. m. the proper time or season for (gen. dat. loc., in comp., inf., or Pot. with “yad” e.g. “kālaḥ prasthānasya” or “-nāya” or “-ne”, time for departure; “kriyā-kāla”, time for action ; “nāyaṁ kālo vilambitum”, this is not the time to delay ; “kālo yad bhuṇjīta bhavān”, it is time for you to eat &c. m. occasion, circumstance m. season &c. m. meal-time (twice a day, hence “ubhau kālau”, “in the morning and in the evening” ; “ṣaṣṭhe kāle”, “in the evening of the third day” ; “ṣaṣṭhānna-kāla”, “one who eats only at the sixth meal-time, i.e. who passes five meals without eating and has no meal till the evening of the third day” ; or without “anna” e.g. “caturtha-kālam”, “at the fourth meal- time i.e. at the evening of the second day” m. hour (hence “ṣaṣṭhe kāle ‘hnaḥ”, “at the sixth hour of the day, i.e. at noon” m. a period of time, time of the world (= “yuga”) m. measure of time, prosody m. a section, part m. the end m. death by age m. time (as leading to events, the causes of which are imperceptible to the mind of man), destiny, fate &c. m. time (as destroying all things), death, time of death (often personified and represented with the attributes of Yama, regent of the dead, or even identified with him: hence “kālam-i” or “kālaṁ-kṛ”, “to die” &c.; “kāla” in this sense is frequently connected with “antaka, mṛtyu” e.g. “abhy-adhāvata prajāḥ kāla ivāntakaḥ”, “e attacked the people like Time the destroyer” ; cf. “kālāntaka; kāla” personified is also a Devarshi in Indra’s court, and a son of Dhruva kāla m. (“am”) acc. ind. for a certain time (e.g. “mahāntaṁ kālam”, for a long time kāla m. “nitya-k-“, constantly, always kāla m. “dīrgha-k-“, during a long time kāla m. (“ena”) instr. ind. in the course of time &c. m. with “gacchatā” id. kāla m. “dīrgheṇa kālena”, during a long time m. after a long time kāla m. “kālena mahatā” or “bahunā” id. kāla m. (“āt”) abl. ind. in the course of time kāla m. “kālasya dīrghasya” or “mahataḥ” id. &c. kāla m. “kasya-cit kālasya”, after some time kāla m. (“e”) loc. ind. in time, seasonably (cf. “a-kāle”) kāla m. “kāle gacchati”, in the course of time kāla m. “kāle yāte”, after some time kāla m. “kāle kāle”, always in time kāla m. ([cf. [characters]; Lat. ‘calen-doe’: Hib. ‘ceal’, “death and everything terrible.”]) Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 kāla a. (lī f.) (1) Black, of a dark or dark-blue colour. (2) Injuring, hurting. –laḥ (1) The black or dark-blue colour. (2) Time (in general); vilaṁbitaphalaiḥ kālaṁ nināya sa manorathaiḥ R. 1. 33; tasminkāle at that time; kāvyaśāstravinodena kālo gacchati dhīmatāṁ H. 1. (1) the wise pass their time &c. (3) Fit or opportune time (to do a thing), proper time or occasion; (with gen., loc., dat., or inf.); R. 3. 12, 4. 6, 12. 69; parjanyaḥ kālavarṣī Mk. 10. 60. (4) A period or portion of time (as the hours or watches of a day); ṣaṣṭhe kāle divasasya V. 2. 1; Ms. 5. 153. (5) The weather. (6) Time considered as one of the nine dravyas by the Vaiśeṣikas. (7) The Supreme spirit regarded as the destroyer of the universe, being a personification of the destructive principle; kālaḥ kālyā bhuvanaphalake kraḍiti prāṇiśāraiḥ Bh. 3. 39. (8) (a) Yama, the god of death; kaḥ kālasya na gocarāṁtaragataḥ Pt. 1. 146. (b) Death, time of death. (9) Fate, destiny. (10) The black part of the eye. (11) The (Indian) cuckoo. (12) The planet Saturn. (13) N. of Śiva. (14) A measure of time (in music or prosody). (15) A person who distils and sells spirituous liquor. (16) A section, or part (17) A red kind of plumbago. (18) Resin, pitch (19) N. of an enemy of Śiva. (20) (with the Jainas) One of the nine treasures. (21) A mystical name for the letter m. –lā (1) N. of several plants. (2) N. of a daughter of Daksha. (3) An epithet of Durgā. –lī (1) Blackness. (2) Ink, black ink. (3) An epithet of Pārvatī, Śiva’s wife. (4) A row of black clouds. (5) A woman with a dark complexion. (6) N. of Satyavatī, mother of Vyāsa. (7) Night. (8) Censure, blame. (9) One of the seven tongues of Fire. (10) A form of Durgā; kālītanayaḥ a buffalo. (11) One of the Mātṛs or divine mothers. (12) N. of a wife of Bhīma. (13) A sister of Yama. (14) A kind of learning (mahāviḍyā). (15) A small shrub used as a purgative. –laṁ (1) Iron. (2) A kind of perfume. — Comp. –ayasaṁ iron. –akṣarikaḥ a scholar, one who can read and decipher. –agaru n. a kind of sandal tree, black kind of aloe; Bv. 1. 70, R. 4. 81. (–n.) the wood of that tree; Rs. 4. 5; 5. 5. –agniḥ, –analaḥ 1. the destructive fire at the end of the world. –2. an epithet of Rudra. –3. a kind of bead (rudrākṣa). –aṁga a. having a dark-blue body (as a sword with a dark-blue edge). –ajinaṁ the hide of a black antelope. –aṁjanaṁ a sort of collyrium; Ku. 7. 20, 82. ( –nī) a small shrub used as a purgative. –aṁḍajaḥ the (Indian) cuckoo. –atikramaḥ –maṇaṁ delay, being late; Pt. 1. 154. –atipātaḥ, –atirekaḥ loss of time, delay; Māl 2. –atīta a. elapsed, passed by. –atyayaḥ 1. delay, lapse of time. –2. loss by lapse of time. –adhyakṣaḥ 1. ‘presiding over time’, epithet of the sun. –2. the Supreme soul. –anunādin m. 1. a bee. –2. a sparrow. –3. the Chātaka bird. –anusārakaḥ 1. Tagara tree. –2. yellow sandal. –anusāriḥ, –anusārin, –anusārivā, –anusāryaḥ, –ryakaḥ benzoin. –aṁtakaḥ time, regarded as the god of death, and the destroyer of every thing. –aṁtaraṁ 1. an interval. –2. a period of time. –3. another time or opportunity. -āvṛta a. hidden or concealed in the womb of time. -kṣama a. able to bear delay; akālakṣamā devyāḥ śarīrāvasthā K. 263; S. 4. -prekṣin Pt. 3. 172. -viṣaḥ an animal venomous only when enraged, as a rat. –abhraḥ a dark, watery cloud. –avadhiḥ appointed time. –avabodhaḥ knowledge of time and circumstances; Mal. 3. 11. –aśuddhiḥ f., –aśaucaṁ period of mourning, ceremonial impurity caused by the birth of a child or death of a relation in the family; see aśauca. –ākṛṣṭa a. 1. led to death. –2. produced or brought by time. –ātmaka a. depending on time or destiny. –ātman m. the Supreme spirit. –āyasaṁ iron. –upta a. sown in due season. –kaṁjaṁ a blue lotus. –kaṭaṁkaṭaḥ an epithet of Śiva. –kaṁṭhaḥ 1. a peacock. –2. a sparrow. –3. a wagtail. –4. a gallinule. –5. an epithet of Śiva; U. 6. –kaṁṭhakaḥ –kaṁṭakaḥ a gallinule. –kaṁḍakaḥ a water-snake. –karaṇaṁ appointing or fixing time. –karṇikā, –karṇī misfortune. –karman n. death. –kalāyaḥ dark pulse. –kalpa a. fatal, deadly. –kālaḥ Supreme being. –kīlaḥ noise. –kuṁṭhaḥ Yama. –kuṣṭhaḥ a myrrh. –kūṭaḥ, –ṭaṁ (a) a deadly poison; S. 6. (b) the poison churned out of the ocean and drunk by Śiva; adyāpi nojjhati haraḥ kila kālakūṭaṁ Ch. P. 50. –kṛt m. 1. the sun. –2. a peacock. –3. Supreme spirit. –kṛta 1. produced by time. –2. fixed, appointed. –3. lent or deposited. –4. done for a long time. (–taḥ) the sun. –kramaḥ lapse of time, course of time; kālakrameṇa in course or process of time; Ku. 1. 19. –kriyā 1. fixing a time. –2. death. –kṣepaḥ 1. delay, loss of time; Me. 22; maraṇe kālakṣepaṁ mākuru Pt. 1. –2. passing the time. –khaṁjaṁ, –khaṁjanaṁ, –khaṁḍaṁ the liver. — gaṁgā the river Yamunā. –grāṁthiḥ a year. –ghātin a. killing by degrees or slowly (as a poison) –cakraṁ 1. the wheel of time (time being represented as a wheel always moving). –2. a cycle. –3. (hence fig.) the wheel of fortune, the vicissitudes of life. (–kraḥ) an epithet of the sun. — cihnaṁ a symptom of approaching death. codita a. summoned by the angel of death. –jyeṣṭha a. senior in years, grown up; U. 5. 12. –jña a. knowing the proPer time or occasion (of any action); atyārūḍho hi nārīṇāmakālajño manobhavaḥ R. 12. 33; Śi. 2. 83. (–jñaḥ) 1. an astrologer. –2. a cock. –jñānin m. an epithet of Śiva. –trayaṁ the three times; the past, the present, and the future; -darśī K. 46. –daṁḍaḥ death. –damanī an epithet of Durgā. –dharmaḥ, –dharman m. 1. the line of conduct suitable to any particular time. –2. the law or rule of time. –3. effects proper to the time. –4. fated time, death; na punarjīvitaḥ kaścitkāladharmamupāgataḥ Mb.; parītāḥ kāladharmaṇā &c. –dhāraṇā prolongation of time. –naraḥ (in astrology) the figure of a man’s body. — nāthaḥ, –nidhiḥ Śiva. –niyogaḥ decree of fate or destiny; laṁdhyatena khalu kālaniyogaḥ Ki. 9. 13. –nirūpaṇaṁ determination of time, chronology. –nemiḥ 1. the rim of the wheel of time. –2. N. of a demon, uncle of Rāvaṇa, deputed by him to kill Hanūmat. –3. N. of a demon with 100 hands killed by Viṣṇu. -ariḥ, ripuḥ, haraḥ, han m. epithets of Kṛṣṇa. –pakva a. ripened by time, i. e. spontaneously; Ms. 6. 17, 21; Y. 3. 49. –parivāsaḥ standing for a time so as to become stale. –pāśaḥ the noose of Yama or death. –pāśikaḥ a hangman. –pṛṣṭhaṁ 1. a species of antelope. –2. a heron. (–kaṁ) 1. N. of the bow of Karṇa; Ve. 4. –2. a bow in general. –prabhātaṁ autumn or Śarad; (the two months following the rainy season considered as the best time). –bhakṣaḥ an epithet of Śiva. –bhṛt m. the sun. –bhairavaḥ an epithet of Śiva. –mānaṁ a measure of time. –mukhaḥ a species of ape. –meṣī f. the Mañjiṣṭha plant. –yavanaḥ a king of Yavanas and enemy of Kṛṣṇa and an invincible foe of the Yadavas. Kṛṣṇa, finding it impossible to vanquish him on the field of battle, cunningly decoyed him to the cave where Muchakunda was sleeping who burnt him down. –yāpaḥ, –yāpanaṁ procrastination, delay, putting off. –yogaḥ fate, destiny. -taḥ according to the requirements of the time; Pt. 1. 184. –yogin m. an epithet of Śiva. –rātriḥ, –rātrī f. 1. a dark night. –2. a sister of Yama. –3. the Amāvasyā on which lamps are lighted (in the Divālī holidays). –4. the night of destruction at the end of the world (identified with Durgā). –5. a particular night in the life of man, on the 7th day of the 7th month of the 77th year. –lohaṁ –lauhaṁ steel. –viprakarṣaḥ prolongation of time. –vṛddhiḥ f. periodical interest (payable monthly, quarterly, or at stated times); Ms. 8. 153. –velā the time of Saturn, i. e. a particular time of the day (half a watch every day) at which any religious act is improper. –saṁkarṣā a girl 9 years old personating Durga at a festival. –saṁrodhaḥ 1. keeping back for a long time; Ms. 8. 143. –2. lapse of a long period of time. –sadṛśa a. opportune, timely. –saṁpanna a. dated, bearing a date. –sarpaḥ the black and most poisonous variety of the snake. –sāraḥ the black antelope. (–raṁ) a yellow sort of sandal wood. –sūtraṁ, –sūtrakaṁ 1. thread of time or death. –2. N. of a particular hell; Y. 3. 222; Ms. 4. 88. –skaṁdaḥ the Tamāla tree. –svarūpa a. terrible as death, (deathlike in form). –haraḥ an epithet of Śiva. –haraṇaṁ loss of time, delay; S. 3; U. 5; Mv. 4. 41. –hāniḥ f. delay; R. 13. 16. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch kāla 1) adj. f. ī P. 4, 1, 42. “blauschwarz, schwarz”; als m. “die blauschwarze Farbe, Schwärze” AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. TRIK. 3, 3, 382. H. 1397. an. 2, 478. MED. l. 7. P. 5, 4, 33. (rathe) kālāśvayukte R. 6, 67, 2. kālāḥ kāñcanasaṁnāhāstasmiṁstamasi rākṣasāḥ. samadṛśyanta 19, 5. kālāni bhūtvā māṁsāni śīryante yasya dehinaḥ SUŚR. 1, 299, 19. kālajīmūta R. 3, 55, 13. kālamegha 4, 10, 26. 6, 79, 13. MBH. 1, 7184. VET. 4, 20. kālabāla und kālabāla ŚĀNT. 4, 4. MBH. 1, 1236. tasyāḥ – dīrdhaveṇī – dadṛśe svasitā snigdhā kālī vyālīva mūrdhani 3, 16191. kālī strī pāṇḍurairdantaiḥ 16, 57. timirābhyāhatāṁ kālīmaprakāśāṁ niśāmiva R. 2, 114, 2. pramadā 5, 27, 17. — 2) m. a) “das Schwarze im Auge” SUŚR. 2, 336, 20. Vgl. kālaka. — b) “der indische Kuckuck” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) = kālasarpa VET. 16, 13. — d) “Cassia Sophora Lin.” (s. kāsamarda). — e) “eine Art Plumbago” (raktacitraka). — f) “das Harz der Shorea robusta” (rāla) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — g) “der Planet Saturn” (vgl. nīlavāsas) DĪPIKĀ im ŚKDR. — h) ein Bein. Śiva’s H. an. H. ś. 45. MED.; vgl. kālakaṇṭha, mahākāla und kālī Durgā. = Rudra BHĀG. P. 3, 12, 12. — i) N. pr. eines Sohnes von Hrada HARIV. 189. eines Fürsten (kālayavana) BHĀG. P. 3, 3, 10. eines Bruders des Königs Prasenajit BURN. Intr. 173. eines künftigen Buddha Lot. de la b. l. 126. eines Nāgarāja VYUTP. 85. eines Rakshas R. 6, 69, 12. eines Feindes von Śiva (s. kālāsuhṛd). — k) N. pr. eines Berges R. 4, 44, 21. — l) N. eines der 9 Schätze bei den Jaina H. 193, Sch. — m) myst. Bez. des “Buchstabens m” Ind. St. 2, 316. — 3) f. kālā a) N. verschiedener Pflanzen: “Indigofera tinctoria Lin.” AK. 2, 4, 3, 13. H. an. MED.; “Piper longum Lin.” AK. 2, 4, 3, 15; eine der “Ipomoea Turpethum” nahe verwandte Pflanze, viell. “Ipomoea atropurpurea Chois.” AK. 2, 4, 3, 27. H. an. MED. SUŚR. 1, 131, 19. 2, 106, 19. 528, 16; “Nigella indica Roxb.” AK. 2, 9, 37; “Rubia Munjista” (mañjiṣṭhā, kālameṣikā) “Roxb.” H. an. (lies jiṅgyām). MED.; “Ruellia longifolia” (kulika) RATNAM. im ŚKDR.; “Physalis flexuosa Lin.” (aśvagandhā) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.; “Bignonia suaveolens Roxb.” (pāṭalā) BHĀVAPR. im ŚKDR. Nach dem gaṇa harītakyādi zu P. 4, 3, 167 ist kālā auch “die Frucht der” Kālā. — b) N. pr. einer Tochter des Daksha, der Mutter der Kāleya oder Kālakeya MBH. 1, 2520. 2542. HARIV. 11521. 11552. 12465. PADMA-P. in VP. 122, N. 19. Vgl. kālakā. — c) ein Bein. der Durgā AK. 1, 1, 1, 32, Sch.; vgl. kālī. — 4) f. kālī a) = kālikā “schwarze Farbe, Tinte” H. an. MED. — b) “Anschwärzung, üble Nachrede” H. an. — c) “Nacht” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — d) “eine schwarz aufziehende Wolkenmasse” H. an. HĀR. 71. — e) “ein best. in Milch vorkommendes Thierchen”, = kṣīrakīṭa H. an. = kṣārakīṭa (sic) MED. — f) N. verschiedener Pflanzen: a) = kālāñjanī; b) “Cajanus indicus Spreng.” (tuvarī); g) “Ipomoea Turpethum” (trivṛt) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.; d) “Bignonia suaveolens Roxb.” AK. 2, 4, 2, 35, Sch. — g) N. einer der sieben Zungen Agni’s JAṬĀDH. im ŚKDR. MUṆḌ. UP. 1, 2, 4. GṚHYASAṁGR. 1, 14. — h) eine Form der Durgā AK. 1, 1, 1, 32. H. 203. H. an. MED. MBH. 4, 195. HARIV. 10239. KUMĀRAS. 7, 39. DEV. 9, 27. itthaṁ cemau rajanidivasau dolayandvāvivākṣau kālaḥ kālyā bhuvanaphalake krīḍati prāṇiśāraiḥ BHARTṚ. 3, 43. Hier wie bei kāla als Bein. von Śiva hat man mit dem Begriff “der Schwärze” wohl auch den “der Alles zerstörenden Zeit” vor Augen gehabt. Vgl. Ind. St. 1, 286. 287. mahākālī und bhadrakālī. — i) N. einer der göttlichen Mütter H. an. MED. — k) N. pr. einer Unholdin (vgl. kālakā), der Mutter der Kālakeya, HARIV. 11552. — l) N. einer der 16 Vidyādevī H. 239. — m) Bein. der Satyavatī, der Gemahlin Śāntanu’s und Mutter Kṛṣṇadvaipāyana’s TRIK. 2, 8, 10. LIA. I, 629, N. 1. MBH. 1, 2209. 4244. BENF. Chr. 6, 1. Mutter Vicitravīrya’s, mit dessen Gemahlin Kṛṣṇadvaipāyana die drei Kinder Dhṛtarāṣṭra, Pāṇḍu und Vidura zeugt HARIV. 1825. fg. Gemahlin Bhīmasena’s und Mutter Sarvagata’s BHĀG. P. 9, 22, 30. — n) mit oder ohne Beis. von gaṅgā N. eines Flusses LIA. I, 50. 56. 441. fg. — 4) n. a) “eine dunkle Art Sandelholz” (kālīyaka) ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — b) “ein best. Parfum” (kakkolaka) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) “Eisen” (vgl. kālāyasa) VĀCASP. bei BHAR. zu AK. ŚKDR. kāla m. 1) “ein bestimmter” oder “richtiger Zeitpunkt; Zeit” überh. AK. 1, 1, 3, 1. 3, 4, 26, 196. TRIK. 1, 1, 103. H. 126. an. 2, 478. MED. l. 7. Im ṚV. nur an einer Stelle: uta prahāmatidīvyā jayāti kṛtaṁ yacchvaghnī vicinoti kāle 10, 42, 9. AV. 19, 53 und 54 sind Lieder, welche von Macht und Wesen der Zeit handeln, deren Begriff an den der “Weltordnung” oder des “Schicksals” streift (vgl. unter 2.). Einigermaassen gebräuchlich wird das Wort (st. des alten ṛtu) erst in den BRĀHMAṆA: sa eṣa sviṣṭakṛtaḥ kālaḥ ŚAT. BR. 1, 7, 3, 3. 3, 8, 3, 36. yadi kāle yadyanākāle ‘thaivāśnanti 2, 4, 2, 4. juhoti kāla eva 4, 5, 1, 16. KĀTY. ŚR. 10, 5, 14. 25, 7, 2. ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 4, 15. M. 2, 80. 3, 105. 7, 164. 204. N. 2, 17. 25, 1. R. 1, 77, 13. 2, 40, 30. 3, 4, 7. SUŚR. 1, 124, 3. PAÑCAT. I, 253. 254. ŚĀK. 151. RAGH. 3, 12. 12, 69. kāle kāle MBH. 1, 1680. RAGH. 4, 6. svakāle M. 4, 93. prāpte kāle 9, 307. kṣetre kālopapādite 36. kāloptāni vījāni 38. kālayuktaṁ vacaḥ R. 5, 46, 2. parjanyaḥ kālavarṣī MṚCCH. 178, 10. PAÑCAT. 149, 14. nainaṁ purā kālātprāṇo jahāti ŚAT. BR. 14, 5, 1, 11 (vgl. AIT. BR. 8, 25, wo āyuṣaḥ st. kālāt). kālameva pratīkṣeta M. 6, 45. kālamanveṣayantau PAÑCAT. 182, 24. kālavid R. 4, 32, 13. kālaṁ gacchati “er gelangt zum Endpunkt” (beim coitus) CHĀND. UP. 2, 13, 1. “die zu Etwas bestimmte –, geeignete Zeit”; die Ergänz. im gen., dat., loc., im comp. vorang., im inf. oder im potent. mit yad (P. 3, 3, 167. 168): saṁpratiṣṭhāmahe kālaḥ prasthānasya R. 2, 56, 2. tasya kālo ‘yamāgataḥ “dazu ist jetzt die Zeit gekommen” VIŚV. 12, 9. eṣa dvaidhībhāvasya kālaḥ PAÑCAT. 155, 9. 143, 12. VID. 241. nāyaṁ vaktavyasya kālaḥ PAÑCAT. 194, 23. na rāma kālaḥ paridevanāya MBH. 3, 10259. na kālo ‘sti vilambane R. 6, 8, 45. dakṣiṇākāla KĀTY. ŚR. 17, 2, 21 (vgl. dakṣiṇānāṁ kāle ŚAT. BR. 7, 2, 2, 21). karmakāla R. 1, 65, 34. kriyākāla SUŚR. 1, 5, 13. paṇakālamamanyata N. 7, 8. VIKR. 32, 15. 64, 18. nāyaṁ kālo vilambitum N. 20, 11. DRAUP. 3, 7. R. 6, 93, 23. kālo yadbhuñjīta bhavān P. 3, 3, 168, Sch. — kālamāsādya “in Berücksichtigung der Zeitumstände”: kālamāsādya kāryaṁ ca daṇḍaṁ rājā prakalpayet M. 8, 324. 9, 293. skandhenāpi vahecchatruṁ kālamāsādya buddhimān PAÑCAT. III, 247. kālamāsādya kaṁcana “nach einer Weile”: yathā kāṣṭhaṁ ca kāṣṭhaṁ ca sameyātāṁ mahārṇave. sametya ca vyapeyātāṁ kālamāsādya kaṁcana.. R. 2, 105, 24. — kālasaṁkhyāṁ na vedmi PAÑCAT. 242, 19. kālaṁ kālavibhaktīśca M. 1, 24. evaṁ sarvaṁ sa sṛṣṭvedaṁ māṁ cācintyaparākramaḥ. ātmanyantardadhe bhūyaḥ kālaṁ kālena pīḍayan 51. kālasyānavasthitatvāt KĀTY. ŚR. 18, 6, 31. kālāvasthā SUŚR. 1, 113, 14. 151, 21. aitasmātkālāt ŚAT. BR. 4, 2, 4, 5. ūrdhvaṁ tu kālādetasmāt M. 9, 90. etasminneva kāle N. 2, 12. anyeṣvapi tu kāleṣu M. 7, 183. sarveṣu kāleṣu R. 1, 46, 11. viṣame kāle 2, 88, 15. kāle śubhe prāpte N. 5, 1. tasminnatisukhe kāle DAŚ. 1, 19. deśakālau “der rechte Ort und die rechte Zeit, Zeit und Ort” M. 3, 126. 7, 10. 16. 64. 8, 126. 156. 157. deśe ca kāle ca 233. HIT. I, 14. deśakālajña N. 8, 12. kālaṁ kar “eine Zeit festsetzen”: kālaśca kriyatāmasya svapne jāgaraṇe tathā R. 6, 38, 29. Eine andere Bed. von kālaṁ kar wird u. 3 besprochen werden. trikālajña R. 1, 1, 8. iṣṭapañcakālajña MBH. 12, 12797. agnau juhvadubhau kālāvubhau kālāvupaspṛśan “bei Sonnenauf – und Niedergang” 1, 4623. ṣaṣṭhe kāle ‘hnaḥ “zur 6ten Stunde am Tage” d. i. “um Mittagszeit” VIKR. 20. ṣaṣṭhānnakāla “der nur die sechste Esszeit hat” d. i. “der 5 Mahlzeiten vorübergehen lässt und erst am Abend des 3ten Tages seine Mahlzeit hält”; davon nom. abstr. ṣaṣṭhānnakālatā M. 11, 200. Gewöhnlich mit Weglassung von anna “Speise”: caturthakālam “zur vierten Esszeit” d. i. “am Abend des zweiten Tages” 109. ṣaṣṭhe kāle “am Abend des dritten Tages” MBH. 13, 5175. 14, 1663. 1665. kadāciddvādaśe kāle kadācidapi ṣoḍaśe. āhāramakarodrājā mūlāni ca phalāni ca.. 1, 8118. Vgl. caturthakālika und aṣṭamakālika adjj. “der erst am Abend des zweiten” und “vierten Tages seine Mahlzeit hält” M. 6, 19. ṛtukāla “die Zeit der monatlichen Reinigung” NIR. 1, 19. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 3, 13, 47. M. 5, 153. āpatkāle 2, 241. mantrakāle 7, 149. niśā- N. 15, 14. pradoṣa- HIT. 22, 1. śīta-, uṣṇa- I, 186. śiśukāla “die Kinderjahre” PAÑCAT. 192, 3. kiyānkālastavaivaṁ sthitasya saṁjātaḥ “wie viel Zeit ist verflossen, seitdem du stehst?” 242, 14. evaṁ tasya tāṁ nityaṁ sevamānasya kālo yāti 45, 10. kāvyaśāstravinodena kālo gacchati dhīmatām HIT. Pr. 48. athaivaṁ gacchati kāle PAÑCAT. 34, 14. gacchatā kālena “im Verlauf der Zeit, nach einiger Zeit” 47, 6. 76, 10. 224, 7. kāle gacchati dass. VID. 61. evaṁ tena saha sakalāṁ rātriṁ yāvadvigrahaparasya kālo vrajati PAÑCAT. 117, 9. 163, 22. tasya ca kṛṣiṁ kurvatastadaiva niṣphalaḥ kālo ‘tivartate “die Zeit, welche er auf das Bebauen des Ackers verwendet, geht ihm fruchtlos dahin” 174, 9. tasyaivaṁ vartamānasya kālaḥ samabhivartsyati. agniṁ śuśrūṣamāṇasya pitaraṁ ca yaśasvinam.. R. 1, 8, 10. sa ca vakabālakān – sadaiva bhakṣayankālaṁ nayati PAÑCAT. 98, 10. sadaikasthānavihāriṇau kālaṁ nayataḥ 43, 2. bhakṣaṇapānaviharaṇakriyābhiḥ kālo neyaḥ 25, 10. HIT. 37, 20. RAGH. 1, 33. kālaṁ yāpayati PAÑCAT. 183, 24. kva cāyaṁ vihṛtastvayā. kālaḥ MBH. 1, 7. nityakālam “stets” M. 2, 58. 73. dīrghakālam “eine lange Zeit hindurch” 8, 145. SUND. 1, 10. CĀT. 1. mahāntaṁ kālam dass. PAÑCAT. 114, 24. dīrgheṇa kālena dass. SUND. 1, 8. “nach langer Zeit” R. 1, 45, 40. kālena mahatā dass. VIŚV. 10, 10. kālena bahunā ŚṚÑGĀRAT. 8. kenacittvatha kālena “nach einiger Zeit” VIŚV. 5, 13. kālena “im Verlauf der Zeit, mit der Zeit” M. 9, 246. MBH. 3, 8843. BHAG. 4, 38. R. 4, 15, 34. PAÑCAT. 32, 24. KATHĀS. 4, 20. 6, 21. VID. 16. 184. 193. dīrghasya kālasya “nach langer Zeit” N. 18, 1. M. 8, 216. R. 3, 4, 37. 4, 8, 49. kālasya mahataḥ dass. 1, 17, 12. kasyacitkālasya “nach einiger Zeit” ŚĀK. 110, 15. kasyacittvatha kālasya MBH. 1, 5299. HARIV. 6386. R. 1, 26, 25. kālāt “im Verlauf der Zeit, mit der Zeit” M. 8, 251. kālatas dass. KATHĀS. 6, 101. — 2) Ereignisse, deren Ursachen sich dem Verstande entziehen, werden, da sie im Verlauf der “Zeit” geschehen, als unmittelbare Wirkungen “der thätig gedachten Zeit” aufgefasst. Schon oben u. 1. haben wir zweier Lieder des AV. gedacht, in denen der Begriff der “Zeit” an den der “Weltordnung” oder des “Schicksals” streift. na kartā kasyacitkaścinniyoge nāpi ceśvaraḥ. svabhāve vartate kālaḥ kasya kālaḥ parāyaṇaḥ.. R. 4, 24, 5. fgg. SUŚR. 1, 18, 18. BHARTṚ. 3, 43. Verz. d. B. H. No. 948. sarve kālena sṛjyante hriyante ca punaḥ punaḥ MBH. 13, 56. kālasyāhaṁ vaśānugaḥ 51. R. 6, 12, 1. pracodito ‘haṁ kālena pannaga tvāmacūcudam MBH. 13, 50. ayaṁ rāmastvayaṁ rāma iti kālena coditāḥ. anyo ‘nyaṁ samare jaghnuḥ R. 3, 31, 47. kālacodita 1, 1, 50. 3, 8, 8. ARJ. 10, 31. DRAUP. 8, 4. — 3) “die Alles zu Ende führende, vernichtende Zeit; Tod”, sowohl der, welcher nur das einzelne Individuum trifft, als auch der, welcher am Ende der Welt Alles zerstört. Nach SUŚR. 1, 122, 11 “der Tod der durch die Zeit, durch’s Alter kommt”: tatraikaḥ kālasaṁjñastu śeṣāstvāgantavaḥ smṛtāḥ (mṛtyavaḥ). Sehr häufig personificirt mit den Attributen Jama’s und mit diesem bisweilen auch identificirt. AK. 1, 1, 1, 54. 3, 4, 26, 196. TRIK. 3, 3, 382. H. 323. 184. H. an. MED. kālameyivān “er starb” BHĀG. P. 9, 9, 2. kālaṁ kar “sterben” MBH. 14, 1784. R. 2, 64, 52; vgl. kālakarman und kālakriyā. kālasamāyukta “gestorben” 6, 93, 23. kālasya nayane yuktā yamasya puruṣāśca ye MBH. 2, 343. so ‘yaṁ vyaktaṁ bhavatāṁ kālahetuḥ 2096. sa hi meghācalaprakhyaḥ kālaḥ puruṣavigrahaḥ. varāyudhadharaḥ śrīmānutpapāta vihāyasā.. R. 5, 89, 45. kālo hi vyasanaprasāritabhujo gṛhṇāti dūrādapi PAÑCAT. II, 21. upetya muniveṣo ‘tha kālaḥ provāca rāghavam RAGH. 15, 92. pitṝṇāṁ (patiṁ) sarvanidhanaṁ kālaṁ vaiśvānaraṁ prabhum HARIV. 12492. kālāyāḥ kālakalpastu gaṇaḥ paramadāruṇaḥ 12465. prahrādastu – yuyudhe saha kālena raṇe kāla iva sthitaḥ 13191. (nivātakavacāḥ) kālarūpāḥ MBH. 3, 12107. ARJ. 7, 5. svaṁ rūpaṁ kālarūpābhaṁ bheje vaiśravaṇānujaḥ R. 3, 55, 3. kālarūpin 4, 59, 20. kālopamau yuddhe 1, 22, 24. RĀJA-TAR. 1, 289. kālamivolvaṇam 5, 148. nidrayā kālarūpiṇyā HARIV. 3237. śūnyamāsījjagatsarvaṁ kāleneva hataṁ tadā SUND. 2, 18. saṁjihīrṣurdurādharṣaṁ kālo lokakṣaye yathā R. 6, 70, 35. kālasya kālaśca bhavetsa rāmaḥ saṁkṣipya lokāṁśca sṛjedathānyān 3, 43, 42. mṛtyurdaṇḍaṁ sapāśaṁ ca kālaḥ śaktimagṛhṇata HARIV. 12146. khaḍgadaṇḍaṁ dhanuṣpāśaṁ śaraughajaṭharaṁ prabhum. rāmakālamakālena na kālayitumarhasi.. R. 3, 41, 26. kālapāśa 1, 21, 13. 29, 9. 3, 31, 16. 35, 73. 45, 19. 5, 47, 35. VIŚV. 6, 8. 9, 18. MṚCCH. 163, 7. HIT. 21, 11. kāladaṇḍa MBH. 1, 984. R. 3, 35, 43. VIŚV. 6, 2. kālāstra 11. kālamudgara R. 3, 54, 10. kālajihva MBH. 1, 2932. kālaviṣa 3, 10884. kālāgninā yathā pūrvaṁ trailokyaṁ dahyate ‘khilam VIŚV. 15, 16. 6, 19. MBH. 3, 10393. kālāgnisadṛśaḥ krodhe R. 1, 1, 19. kālāgnimiva duḥsaham 74, 17. 4, 33, 32. 50, 9; vgl. kālānala. In Verbindung mit antaka (vgl. kālāntaka) und mṛtyu “Tod”: antakaścābhaddogdhā kālo lokaprakālanaḥ HARIV. 374. abhyadhāvata saṁkruddhaḥ prajāḥ kāla ivāntakaḥ R. 3, 7, 9. mṛtyukālasama 4, 37, 20. kālamṛtyuyugāntābha 31, 17. yathā yamo yathā mṛtyuryathā kālo yathā vidhiḥ hantāsmi rākṣasānadya 3, 69, 20. kāla und mṛtyu in Jama’s sabhā MBH. 2, 340. Kāla (kann hier wie im Folgenden auch als Personif. der “Zeit” oder des “Schicksals” aufgefasst werden) als Devarshi in Indra’s sabhā 295. Kāla ein Sohn Dhruva’s, “des Polarsterns”: dhruvasya putro bhagavānkālo lokaprakālanaḥ (vgl. oben HARIV. 374) 1, 2585. HARIV. 154. VP. 120. kāla = māṭhara im Gefolge des Sonnengottes VYĀḌI zu H. 103. — 4) “Zeitalter, Weltalter” (= yuga): tūrye kāle RĀJA-TAR. 5, 73. — 5) “Zeit” so v. a. “Zeitmaass; Prosodie”: ekādaśidvādaśinorlaghāvaṣṭamamakṣaram (plabate). udaye saṁhitākāle ṚV. PRĀT. 8, 21. hrasvo dīrghaḥ pluta iti kālato niyamā ṛci ŚIKṢĀ 11. AV. PRĀT. 2, 39. P. 1, 1, 70. 2, 27. — 6) “Abtheilung, Abschnitt” VS. PRĀT. 3, 4. 5. — Vgl. akāla, ākāla, ekakālam, yathākālam. kāla 1) KATHĀS. 64, 118. — 2) i) ein Sohn Vasu’s (vgl. kālin) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 80,b,40. Verfasser von Mantra 101,b,16. = aśvaghoṣa WASSILJEW 35. 45. 58. 75. 200. — 4) f) b) nicht “Cajanus indicus”, sondern “eine best. Lehmart.” — h) N. der Dākṣāyaṇī auf dem Berge Kālañjara Verz. d. Oxf. H. 39,b,4. ein Aṁśa der Prakṛti 23,b,1. WILSON, Sel. Works 1,246. kāla 1) yathaiva śṛṅgaṁ goḥ kāle vardhamānasya vardhate “mit der Zeit, allmählich” Spr. 4802. paritoṣakālāḥ “Zeit” so v. a. “Gelegenheit” 3012. brāhmaṇastriṣu kāleṣu śastraṁ gṛhṇanna duṣyati. ātmatrāṇe varṇadoṣe durdamyaniyameṣu ca.. MBH. 12, 2950. — 3) mṛtyukālau R. 7, 22, 22. — 5) ṚV. PRĀT. 6, 9. 11. 11, 1. 16. varṇāpattīnāṁ trayaḥ kālā bhavanti mātrārdhamātrāṇumātropalakṣitāḥ Schol. zu VS. PRĀT. 4, 146. — 7) in den Verbindungen pada-, krama-, saṁhitā- so v. a. pāṭha Schol. zu AV. PRĀT. 4, 123. fg. kāla 1) kālena “von Zeit zu Zeit, dann und wann” (Gegens. pade pade) Spr. (II) 6900. “zu spät” 6007. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 kāla 1 (yama) I (YAMA)>span class=”red”>* The god of Death. When the life span of each living being allotted by Brahmā is at an end Yama sends his agents and takes the soul to Yamapurī (the city of Yama). From there, the holy souls are sent to Vaikuṇṭha (Heaven, the abode of Viṣṇu) and the sinful souls to Hell. kāla 2 II A Maharṣi. Mahābhārata, Sabhā Parva, Chapter 7, Verse 14, refers to this sage as offering worship to Indra, in Indra’s assembly. kāla See under the word Kālamāna. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 kāla 1. kāla, m. 1. Due season, Man. 2, 80; instr. kālena, In due season, Man. 9, 246. 2. Time, Man, 1, 24; 7, 183; instr. kālena, and abl. kālāt, In the long run, Pañc. 32, 24; Man. 8, 251; gen. dīrghasya kālasya, After a long time, Nal. 18, 1; kasya cit kālasya, After some time, Śāk. 110, 15. 3. Mealtime; there are two meal-times a day, therefore, ṣaṣṭha kāla, The sixth meal-time = the evening of the third day, MBh. 13, 5175; Rām. 3, 31, 47. 4. A period, Rājat. 5, 73. 5. Death, Bhāg. P. 9, 9, 2. 6. Time personified, fate, MBh. 13, 56; Rām. 6, 70, 35; endowed with the attributes of Yama, the regent of the dead, Rām. 1, 21, 13; 3, 35, 43, etc. — Comp. a-, m. unseasonableness, Sund. 2, 31; loc. le, unseasonably, Man. 3, 105. ādi-, m. beginning of time, Rām. 3, 20, 6. ṛtu-, m. 1. seasonable time, MBh. 3, 14763. 2. time approved for sexual intercourse, Man. 3, 45. eka-kāla + m, adv. once, Man. 6, 55. kārya-, m. time of action, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 1809. kṛta-, I. m. appointed time, Yājñ. 2, 184. II. adj. having waited a certain time, MBh. 2, 1875. caturtha-kāla + m, adv. at the fourth meal-time, i. e. on the evening of every second day, Man. 11, 109. tad-kāla + m, adv. instantly, Pañc. 192, 6. tāvatkāla + m, i. e. tāvant-, adv. such a long time, MBh. 3, 16889. tri-, n. 1. past, future, and present time, Bhāg. P. 5, 23, 8. 2. morning, noon, and evening, MBh. 13, 6607. duṣkāla, i. e. dus-, m. the formidable, all-destroying, time, Rām. 2, 33, 21; a name of Śiva, MBh. 12, 10418. nitya-kāla + m, adv. continually, Man. 2, 58. purva(n)-, m. the periodic change of the moon. prāpta-kāla + m (vb. āp with pra), adv. in due season, Pañc. 16, 6. a- prāpta-kāla + m, adv. Out of due season, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 173. yathā-kāla + m, adv. At the proper time, Man. 2, 39. sa-kāla + m, adv. Betimes, early in the morning. sūrya-, m. day. kāla 2. kāla (cf. kalaṅka), I. adj., f. lī, Dark blue, black, Rām. 6, 67, 2; MBh. 16, 57. II. m. 1. A black and poisonous snake, Coluber naga, Lass. 16, 13. 2. The black in the eye, Suśr. 2, 336, 20. 3. A name of Rudra, Bhāg. P. 3, 12, 12. 4. A proper name, Hariv. 189. 5. The name of a mountain, Rām. 4, 44, 21. III. f. lā. 1. The name of several plants, Suśr. 1, 131, 19, etc. 2. A proper name, MBh. 1, 2520. 3. The name of a female demon, Hariv. 11552. IV. f. lī. 1. A name of Durgā, MBh. 4, 195. 2. A surname of Satyāvatī, Chr. 6, 1. — Comp. bhadra-kālī, f. 1. a name of Durgā. 2. a fragrant grass, Cyperus. mahā-, I. m. a name of Śiva. II. f. lī, Durgā. — Cf. [greek] etc., under kalaṅka. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 kāla f. ī1 dark-blue, black, m. the black part of the eye, E. of Rudra-Śiva; N. of sev. kings etc., also = kālasarpa q.v.; f. ī E. of Durga etc. kāla [2] m. time, esp. the right or proper time (w. gen., dat., loc., inf., or –°); opportunity, case; season, mealtime (twice a day); the half of a day, hour, age, era, measure of time, prosody; time as ruler or destroyer of the world, i.e. destiny, fate; end; death or the god of death. –paraḥ kālaḥ high time (w. inf.). kālaṁ kṛ appoint a time for (loc.). kālena in course of time (also -gacchatā; kālāt or kālatas), at times; kālena dīrgheṇa bahunā, or mahatā (also gen.) after a long time. kasya citkālasya after some time. kāla & kāle in time, at the right or appointed time; (also kāle gacchati) in course of time, little by little. kāle kāle always in time or at the right time. kasmiṁścitkāle one day. — ubhau kālau morning and evening. ṣaṣṭhe kāle on the sixth half-day i.e. after three days; pancaśate kāle after 250 days. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 kāla 1. kāla, a. (ī) dark blue, black; m. the black in the eye; ep. of Śiva. kāla 2. kāla, m. due season, appointed or right time (for d., g., lc., inf., – °); time; opportunity; season; meal-time (of which there are two day); half a day; hour; age, era; measure, prosody; Time, fate; death, god of death; -°, at the right time; in time, gradually; paraḥ kālaḥ, high time (w. inf.); kālaṁ kṛ, fix a time for (lc.); kālam āsādya, according to circumstances; in. kālena, in due season; in course of time: -gacchatā, as time goes on, in course of time; dīrgheṇa-, mahatā -or bahunā-, after a long time; kenacit-, after some time; tena-, at that time; ab. kālāt, in the long run, in course of time; kālatas, id.; with regard to time; g. dīrghasya or mahataḥ kālasya, after a long time; kasya -cit-, after some time; lc. kāle, at the right or appointed time, opportunely; in time = gradually; — prāpte, when the time has come; -gacchati, in course of time; -yāte, after the lapse of some time; -kaśmiṁś cit-, one day; kāle kāle, always at the right time; ṣaṣṭhe –, at the end of the third day: –‘hnaḥ, at the sixth hour of the day, i. e. at noon; pañ- caśate-, = after 250 days; ubhau kālau, morning and evening. Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 kāla t ka kālopadeśe . iti karikalpadrumaḥ . (adantacurāṁ–paraṁ– sakaṁ–seṭ .) yathā acakālat kālamiyattayā gaṇakaḥ . etāvatī veleti kathitavānityarthaḥ . iti durgādāsaḥ .. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 kāla kālopadeśe (iyattayā kālaniścayārthopradeśe) ada° cu° ubha° saka° seṭ . kālayati te avakālat–ta, kalayām–babhūva–āsa–cakāra–cakre . kālayiṣyati–te kāla pu° īṣadalati ala–ac koḥ kā° . 1 kṛṣṇabarṇe tasya varṇeṣu īṣadbhūṣakatvāt tathātvam . astyarthe arśa ādyac . 2 tadvarṇayukte tri° . 3 lauhe na° vācaspatiḥ . dhātuṣu tasya kṛṣṇatvāt tathātvam . 4 kakkole na° rājani° 5 kāloyake gandhadravyabhede na° śabdaca° . tayaurgrandhadravyeṣu kṛṣṇatvāttathātvam . 6 kokile puṁstrī° rājani° tasya pakṣiṣu kṛṣṇatvāttathātvam striyāṁ ṅīṣ . 7 rāle 8 raktacitrake 9 ka samarde (kālaka sendā) vṛkṣe ca pu° rājani° . 10 śanigrahe medi° kṛṣṇatvāttasya tathātvam . kalayatisarvaṁ cu° kala–ac kālasamayavelāsviti pā° nirdeśāt ni° upadhārdardhaḥ . 11 yamarāje 12 mahākāle śive medi° . 13 parameśvare kālo’smi lokakṣayakṛtpravṛddhaḥ kālaḥ kalayatāmaham iti ca gītā ṛtuḥ sudarśanaḥ kālaḥ parameṣṭhī parigrahaḥ viṣṇusa° . trayīmayo’yaṁ bhagavāna kālātmā kālakṛdvibhuḥ sū° si° . svanāmakhyāte paratvāparatvadhīhetau nyāyādimatasiddhe 1 4 dravyabhede . tannirūpaṇaṁ kaṇādasūtre upaskaravṛttau ca yathā aparasminnaparaṁ yugapat ciraṁ kṣipramiti kālaliṅgāni ka° sū° . itiśabdo jñānaprakāraparaḥ pratyekamabhimambadhyate tathācāparamiti pratyayo yugapaditipratyayaḥ ciramitipratyayaḥ kṣipramitipatyayaḥ kālaliṅgānītyarthaḥ aparasminnaparamityanena parasmit paramityapi draṣṭavyaṁ, tenāyamarthaḥ– bahutaratapanaparispandāntaritajanmani sthāpire yuvānamavadhiṁ kṛtvā ‘paratvamutpadyate taccāparatvamasamavāyikāraṇasāpekṣam, na ca rūpādyasamavāyikāraṇaṁ vyabhicārāt trayāṇāṁ gandhādīnāṁ vāyau paratvādyanutpādakatvāt sparśasyāpyuṣṇādibhedena bhinnasya pratyekaṁ vyabhicārāt na cāvacchinnaparimāṇaṁ tathā tasya vijātīyānārambhakatvāt tapanaparispandānāñca vyadhikaraṇatvāt tadaṣacchinnadravyasaṁyoga evāsamavāyikāraṇaṁ pariśiṣyate tacca dravya piṇḍamārtaṇḍobhayasaṁyuktaṁ vibhu syāt ākāśasya tatsvābhāvyakalpane kvacidapi bheryabhidhātāt sarvabherīṣu śabdotpattiprasaṅgaḥ . tathāca kālasyaiva mārtaṇḍasaṁyuktasya piṇḍena saṁyogo’paratvāsamavāyikāraṇaṁ kāla eva mārtaṇḍakriyopanāyakaḥ ātmanaśca dravyāntaradharmeṣu dravyāntarāvacchedāya svapratyāsattyatiriktasannikarṣāpekṣatvāt anyathā vārāṇasīsthena mahārajanāruṇimnā pāṭaliputre’pi sphaṭikamaṇerāruṇyaprasaṅgāt . kālasya tu tatsvabhāvatayaiva kalpanādayamadoṣaḥ . kālenāpi rāgasaṁkramaḥ kathaṁ na iti cet niyatakriyopanāyakatvenaiva tatsiddheḥ evaṁ sthaviramavadhiṁ kṛtvā yūni paratotpattirnirūpaṇīyā . yugapaditi yugapajjāyante yugapattiṣṭhanti yugavat kurvanti ityādi– pratyayānāñca ekasmin kāle ekasyāṁ sūryagatau ekasmin sūryagatvavacchinnakāle ityarthaḥ, na cāprāptā e sūryagatayo viśeṣaṇatāmanubhavanti . na ca svarūpapratyayāsannāeva tāḥ tasmādetāvṛśaviśiṣṭapratyayānyathānupapattyā viśeṣaṇa prāpakaṁ yad dravyaṁ sa kālaḥ upaskaravṛttiḥ . nanu sidhyatu kālaḥ, sa tu nityo dravyaṁ veti na pramāṇamata āha . dravyatvamityatve vāyunā vyākhyāte ka° sū° . yathā vāyuparamāṇorguṇavattvāddravyatvam adravyadravyatvācca nityatvaṁ tathā kālasyāpītyarthaḥ upa° . tathāpi santu bahavaḥ kālā ityata āha . tattvambhāvena ka° sū° . vyākhyātamiti bipariṇatenānvayaḥ . cirādiprayayānāṁ kālaliṅgānāṁ sarvatrāviśeṣādanekatve’pyāratmanāmiva viśeṣaliṅgābhāvāt sattāvadekatvaṁ kālasyetyarthaḥ . nanvevaṁkṣaṇalavamuhūrteyāmadivasāhorātrapakṣamāsartvayanasaṁva tsarādibhedena bhūyāṁsaḥ kālāstat kathamekaḥ iti cenna bhedabhānasya upādhinibandhanatvāt yathā eka eva sphaṭikamaṇirjavātāpiñjādyupādhyaparāgeṇa bhinna iva bhāsate tathaika eva kālaḥ sūryaspandādyavacchedabhedenatattatkāryāvacchedakabhedena ca bhinna iva bhāsat ityayupagamāt tathāca kālopādhyavyāpakaḥ kālopādhiḥ, svādheyakādācitkābhāvapratiyogyanādhāraḥ kālo vā kṣaṇaḥ pratikṣaṇaṁ kasyacidutpatteḥ kasyacidvināśādetadadhyavaseyam . kṣaṇadvayañca lavaṁ ityādyāgamaprasiddham . nanu tathāpyatītānāgatavartamānabhedena kālatrayastu, śradhūyate hi trekālyamupāvartate traikālyāsiddhiḥ ityādīti cenna traikālyavyavahārāt yena hi vastunā yaḥ kālo’vacchidyate sa tasya vartamānaḥ yatprāgabhāvena yaḥ kālo’vacchidyate sa tasya bhaviṣyatkālaḥ yatpradhvaṁ sena yaḥ kālo’vacchidyate sa tasyātītakālaḥ tathācāvacchedakatritvādhīnaḥ kālatritvavyavahāraḥ upaskaravṛttiḥ! idānīṁ sarvotpattimatāṁ kālaḥ kāraṇamityāha . nityaṣvabhāvādanityeṣu bhāvāt kāraṇe kālākhyeti ka° sū° . itiśabdo hetau itihetoḥ kāraṇe–sarvotpattimatkāraṇe kālaḥ ityākhyā . hetumāha nityeṣvabhāvāt anityeṣu bhāvāditi nityeṣu ākāśādiṣu yugapajjātaḥ ciraṁjātaḥ kṣipraṁ jātaḥ idānīṁ jātaḥ divā jātaḥ rātrau jāta ityādipratyayasyābhāvāt anityeṣu ghaṭapaṭādiṣu yaugapadyādipratyayānāṁ bhāvāt anvayavyatirekābhyāṁ kāraṇaṁ kāla ityathaḥ . na kevalaṁ yaugapadyādipratyayabalāt kālasya sarvotpattimannimittakāraṇatvam api tu puṣpaphalādīnāṁ haimantikavāsantikaprāvṛṣeṇyādisajñābalādeva tadadhyavaseyam upa° . bhāṣāmuktāvalyośca saṅkṣepeṇa tannirṇayo yathā janyānāṁ janakaḥ kālojagatāmāśrayomataḥ . parāparatvadhīhetuḥ kṣaṇādiḥ syādupādhitaḥ bhāṣā . kālaṁ nirūpayati janyānāmiti tatra pramāṇaṁ darśayitumāha jagatāmiti tathāhi idānīṁ ghaṭaityādipratītiḥ sūryaparispandādikaṁ yadi viṣayīkaroti tadā sūryaparispandādinā ghaṭādeḥ sambandhovācyaḥ sa ca saṁyogādirna sambhavatīti kālaeva tatsambandhaghaṭakaḥ kalpyate itthañca tasyāśrayatvamapi samyak . pramāṇāntaraṁ darśayati parāparatveti paratvāparatvabuddherasādhāraṇaṁ nimittaṁ ka laeva paratvāparatvayorasamavāyikāraṇasaṁyogāśrayolāghavādatiriktaḥ kalpyataiti bhāvaḥ . nanvekatya kālasya siddhau kṣaṇadinamāsavarṣādisamayabhedona syādataāha kṣaṇādiriti kālastveko’pi upādhibhedāt kṣaṇādivyāhāraviṣayaḥ . upādhistu svajanyavibhāgaprāgabhāvāvacchinnaṁ kamma, pūrbasaṁyogāvacchinnavibhāgovā pūrbasaṁyogāvacchinnauttarasaṁyogaprāgabhāvo vā uttarasaṁyāgāvacchinnaṁ karma vā . nacottarasaṁyogānantaraṁ kṣaṇavyavahārī na syāditi vācyaṁ karmāntarasattvāditi . mahāpralaye kṣaṇādivyavahāroyadyapi, tadā’nāyattyā dhvaṁ senopapādanāyaḥ . dinādivyavahārastu tattatkṣaṇakūṭaireveti muktābalī . tārkikaśiromaṇinā raghunāthaśiromaṇinā ca padārthanirūpaṇaprakaraṇe tatra dikkālau neśvarādatiricyete iti vadatā vibhurūpasyaikasya kālasya khaṇḍanaṁ kṛvam . raghudevarāmabhadrābhyāṁ tadvivṛtaṁ tataḥ saṁkṣipya padārthatattvasāre ca jayanārāyaṇatarkapañcānanena darśitaṁ yathā dikkālau neśvarādatiriktau prācyāṁ ghaṭa idānīṁ ghaṭaḥ ityādivyavahārasya īśvarātmakavibhuviṣayakatvenaivograpatteḥ, naca tayorbhinnaviṣayakatvamanubhavasiddhamiti vācyaṁ tathā sati prācyāṁ ghaṭaḥ pratīcyāṁ ghaṭaḥ idānīṁ ghaṭaḥ tadānīṁ ghaṭa ityāderapi bhinnabhinnaviṣayakatvānubhavāt kāladiśorapi bahutvāṅgokāraprasaṅgāt, tathā ca upādhibhedādekayā diśā ekena kālena ca yathā bhavatāṁ bahūnāṁ vyavahārāṇa apaprattistathā’smākamapi ekeneśvareṇāgamānumānāpyāṁ siddhena sarveṣāmeva tādṛśavyavahāṇāsupadhibhedāduṣapatti sambhavati, suryakriyādau svasaṁyukteśvarasaṁyogitapanāśritatvādisambandhena ghaṭādeḥ sattvasambhavena tatsambandhaghaṭakatayā’pyati raktakālādyasiddheḥ . ayavā kṣaṇā evātiriktāḥ idānāmityādivyavahāraviṣayāḥ, vibhāgaprāgabhāvāvacchinnakarmaṇaḥ kṣaṇatvāsambhavāt bhābikarmāntarajanyavibhāgāntaraprāgabhāvāvacchinnasya karmaṇaḥ kṣaṇacatu yādisthāyitvena tādṛśasyopā dhitvāmambhavāt naca vibhāge svajanyatvaṁ viśeṣaṇīyam, svavānanugamādanangaptāpatteḥ, vibhāgajananādidaśāyāmupādhyantarasya vācyatayā tāvatāpyananugamācca, evañcopādhīnāmatiriktānāṁ kṣaṇikapadārpamvarūpāṇāṁ kṣaṇānāmavaśyābhyupeyatayā tere . tādṛśāḥ sarve vyavahārā upapādanīyāḥ kimatiriktena kāleveti . sāṁkhyamate tasya kāśalarbhāvaḥ na pṛthakatattvāntaratvaṁ tadetatsāṁkhyasūtrabhāṣyayordarśitam khaṇḍadikkālayoḥ sṛṣṭimāha bhā° . dikkālābākāśādibhyaḥ sāṁ° sū° . nityau yau dikkālautāvākāśaprakṛtibhūtau pakṛterguṇaviśeṣaveva . ato dikkālayorvibhatvopapattiḥ . ākāśavat savagataśca nitya itya diśrutyaktaṁ vibhutvaṁ cākāśasyopapannam . yau tu khaṇḍadikkālau tau tu tacadupādhisayogādākāśādatpadyete ityathaḥ ādaśabdenopādhigrahaṇāditi . yadyapi tattadupādhiviśiṣṭākāśameba khaṇḍadikka lau tathāpi ṣiśiṣṭasyātiriktatābhyupagamavādena vaiśeṣikanaye śrotrasya kāryatāvat tatkābhāpamatroktam pra° bhā° . atapadaṁ darśayiṣyamāṇamādhavagranthe ca vācaspatimatena kālakhaṇḍanaṁ tu nityapibhukālakhaṇḍanaparaṁ tathāhi upādhibhidyate na tu tadvāniti sā° sū° upādhibhedeca dharmibhedāsambhavasya vyāsthāpanāt dharmiṇaḥ kālasya ekatvena upādhinā bhedāsambhavāt upādhinā nā’nāgatādi bhedavyavahārasambhavaḥ tathā ca kriyādereva upādhibhūtasyānāgatādivyavahāropapādakatayā tasyaiva kālatvam . ataeva kriyaiva kāla ityabhiyuktoktiḥ . kālamādhavīye ca mādhavena śaṅkāpūrvakaṁ kālaścetthaṁ nyarūpi nanu nāyamudyamaḥ saphalaḥ kālasya gaganakusumāyamānatvāta tadetatparamarahasyamabhijānānaḥ kapilamahāmunistattvāni nirvivektukāmaḥ kālamupekṣyānyānyeva pañcaviṁśatitattvāni viveca mūlaprakṛtiravikṛtirmahadādyāḥ prakṛtivichatayaḥ sapta . ṣāḍaśakastu vikārā na prakṛtina vikṛtiḥ puruṣaḥ iti . na caiteṣveva tattveṣakālamyāntarbhāvo muninā vivajita iti śaṅūnīyam tvadabhimatamya kālamya pañcaviṁśatitattvānāṁ cānyādṛśāni lakṣaṇāni . satvarajastamoguṇānāṁ sāmyāvasthā malaprakṛtirmadahaṅkārapañcataktātrākhyānāṁ svaptānāṁ prakṛtivikṛtīnām madhyetdhyavasāyaheturmattattvava abhimānaheturahaṅkāraḥ . śabdasparśaruparasagandhātmakāni pañcatanyātrāṇi pṛthivyādipañcamahābhūtānāṁmekādaśendiyāṇāñca ṣoḍaśavikārāṇāṁ lakṣaṇāni prasiddhāni . apra kṛtiravikṛtiḥ puruṣaścidātmakaḥ . na hyevaṁlakṣaṇakeṣ tattveṣu kālamyāntarbhāvaḥ sambha vyate nāpi ṣaḍvaṁśaṁ tattvāntaraṁ muniranubhanyate . kathaṁ tarhi munipraṇītāni tattvāni āryābhiḥ saṁgṛhṇāna īśvarakṛṣṇau bahiḥkaraṇāntaḥkarane vicinvan kālaṁ vyājahāra? sāṁpratakālaṁ bāhya trikālamābhyantara karaṇamiti . paraprasiddhyāparo bodhanīya iti nyāyenāyaṁ vyavahāro na tu sasiddhāntābhipāyeṇeti vadāmaḥ . ata evaitadvaco vyācakṣāṇā vācaspatimiśrāstattvakaumuhyāmevamāhuḥ kālastu vaiśeṣikābhibhata eko nānāgatātītādi bhedaṁ pravartayitumarhati . tasmādayaṁ yairupādhibhedairatītānāgatādibhedabhāvaṁ pratipadyate santu taevopādhayo vyavahārahetavaḥ kṛtamantargaḍunā kāleneti sāṁkhyācaryāḥ . tasvānna kālarūpatattvāntarābhyupagama iti . athocyeta–bhūtakālo vartamānakāloṁ bhaviṣyatkāla iti evaṁ triṣvapi bhūtādiṣvanugataḥ kālapratyaya ekamanugataṁ kālatvamantareṇānupapanna iti tanna padārthapratyayavadupapatteḥ yathā bhavanmate dravyapadārtho guṇapadārtha iti ṣaṭsu bhāveṣu caturṣvabhāveṣvanugataḥ padārthapratyaya ekamanugata padārthaśabdavācyaṁ tattvāntaramantareṇāpyupapannaḥ . tathā kālaprayogo’pi kuto nopapadyeta! . tasmānnistattvaṁ kāla nirṇetuṁ mahānayamudyamaḥ prekṣāvacchiromaṇermādhavācāryasya na kathañcidapyapapanna ityevaṁ prāpte brūmaḥ āyuṣmataśce tasyevaṁ nirūḍhakālatattve yaḥ pradvaṣaḥ sa kasya hetoḥ? itivaktavyam . ki kapilamahāmuninā nirākṛtatvāt? 1 kiṁvā sāṁkhyaśāstrapraṇoteṣutattveṣu asaṁgṛhītatvāt? 2 uta lakṣaṇābhāvāt? 3 āhosvitpramāṇā bhāvān? 4 athavā prayojanāmāvāt? 5, athavā tattvagatapañcaviṁśatisaṁ khyābhyāsapāṭavenābhyasitāt śraddhājāḍyāt? 6, na prathamaḥ kālanirākaraṇasūtrasya muninā praṇītasyānupalambhāt . na dvitīyaḥ atiprasaṅgāt ṛgvedaproktānā jyotiṣṭomādīnāmāyurvedadhanurvedagāndharvavedaproktānāsaitradhapas trasvarādīnāṁ māsaṁgṛhītatvena teṣvapi bhāvataḥ pradveṣaḥ phana vāryeta? . aya teṣāṁ viṣaśaṣyā’maṁgrahe’pi sukhaduḥkhamohātmakatvena guṇatrayāntargatatvādastyevārthāt saṁgrahaiyacyate tarhi kālasyāpyasau na daṇḍavārita iti buddhiṁ samādhatasva . kālasya guṇavayapariṇāmatve sāvayavatvama nityatā ca ghaṭāderiva prasajyeteti cet? nityaniraptayava kālatattvābhiniveśavato vaiśeṣikādeḥ patatvayaṁ vajraprahāraḥ śirasi . vedavādināṁ tu na kāpi kṣatiḥ . kālasyotapattisāvayatvayoḥ pratyakṣaśrutāvapalabhyamānatvāta . taittiroyaśa khāyāṁ nārāyaṇīye kālotpattirāmnāyate sarve nimeṣajijñire vidytaḥ puruṣādadhi kalāmuhūrtā kāṣṭhāścāhorātrāśca sarvaśaḥ . ardhasāmā māmā ṛtavaḥ saṁvatsaraśca kalpattāmiti tamyāmeva śāsvayāmāruṇakrtukacayana brāhmaṇe māvayavatvaṁ śrūyate uktoveṣo vāsāṁsi ca ka lābayavānāmitaḥ pratīcyeṣiti . itosmādanuvākātpranocyeṣ adhastaneṣu anuvākeṣa kālāvayavānāmṛtnāṁ dhyātavyo beṣa uktaḥ vastrāṇi coktānītyathaḥ . nityatvaniravayavatvābhidhāyino vaiśeṣikādiśāstrasya amṛtā devatā iti badāpekṣikanityatāyāmantardhānaśaktyupetayakṣarākṣasādivat saṁṛrśayogyāvayavaśvanyatāthā ca tātparye varṇanīyam . atha manyase mahatā tapasā śivamārādhya tatprasāda labbasarvajñatvapadaḥ kaṇādamunirvedavātparyaṁ mamyagvettīti ved syaiva mandamatipratītādarthādarthāntaraṁ netavyasiti . evamapi yasya prasādādayaṁ sarvaṁjñatāmalabhata saeva śivo mukhyaḥ sarvajña iti tanmatānusāreṇa kaṇādamatasyaivātyathānayanamatyantamucitam . śivo hi śaiveṣu āgameṣu ṣaṭatriṁ śattattvāni nirūpayat kālavattvasyotpattimaṅgīncakāra . nikhilaśaivāgamasāramāryābhiḥ saṁgṛhṇāno bhojarājaḥ śuddhāni pañca tattvaḥni śivaśaktisadāśiveśvaravidyākhyāni nirdiśyetarāṇi nirdiśanmāyākāryatvoktipūrvakameva kālaṁ niradikṣat puṁso jagataḥ kṛtaye māyātastattva pañcakaṁ bhavati . kālo niyatiśca tathā kalā ca vidyā ca rāgaśca iti tāni māyāsahitānyekādaśa tattvāni sāṁkhyaprasiddhapañcaviṁśatitattvāni coddiśya vivṛṇvannidamāha nānāvidhaśaktimayī sā janayati kālatattvamevādau . bhāvi bhavadbhūtamayaṁ kalayati jagadeṣa kālo’taḥ iti . taṭṭīkākāra itthaṁ vyācakhyau . nanveṣa kālo naiyāyikādibhinityo’bhyapagataḥ ata āha māvibhavadbhūtamayamiti . bhūtādi rūpeṇa trividhatvāt acetanatvenāsyānityataṁ siddhamiti bhāvaḥ . kena ka ryeṇāsya siddharataāha kalayavi jagadeṣa kālo’taḥ iti . cirakṣiprādipratyayopādhidvāreṇa kalayatyākṣipatatyartha’iti . ittha pratyakṣaśrutisahakṛtaśaitāptamaiḥ kaṇādaśāstrasya bādhe sati uttaramāmāṁsāgataḍitīyādhyāyaprathamādhikaraṇanyāyo’nugṛhyate tasya ca nyāyasya saṁgrāhakau ślokau sāṁkhyasmṛtyaḥsti saṅkoco na vā yedasamanvaye . dharme vedaḥ sāvakāśaḥ saṅkocyo’navakāśayā . pratyakṣaśrutimūlābhirmanvādismṛtibhi smṛtiḥ amūlākāpilo bādhyā na saṅkoca’nayā tataḥ iti . ayamarthaḥ . ṛgvedadi bharagnihotrādidharmo brahmaṇo jagatkartṛtvaṁ ca prati pādyate . sāṁkhyasmṛtyādistu padhānasya jagatkāraṇatva pratipāṭayati tatra tayā smṛtyā vedasya saṅkoco’sti . veti saṁśaye smṛterjagatkāraṇatvamantareṇānavakāśatvāt prābalya vedasya tu dharme’pi caritārthacāddaurbalyam . tataḥ smṛtyanusāreṇa vedaḥ samkucita iti pūrvaḥ pakṣaḥ . pratyakṣaśrutibhirbahva bhiranugṛhītābahvyo manvādimṛtayo brahmakāraṇatāmācakṣate sāṁkhyasmṛtistvekā mūlahīnā ceti durbalatvāt saiva bādhyā ato nāsti vedasya saṅkoca iti siddhānta iti . atha tārkikatvābhimānagrahagṛhītaḥ sana paravaśa evaṁ brūṣe bhūtādonāmaupādhikānāṁ kālaviśeṣāṇāmevotpattirna tu nirupādhikasya mukhyasya kālasyeti tarhi kapardikānveṣaṇāya pravṛttaścintāmaṇimalabhatetyevaṁvāsiṣṭarāmāyaṇa proktasyābhāṇakamya tvameva viṣayo’bhūḥ . yataḥ sādharyavaidharmyajñānāya dravya dīnyanviṣyan parabrahmatattvamavāgamaḥ . vyavahārahetūnāṁ bhūtādikālaviśeṣāṇāmādhāraḥ svayaṁ vyāhārātīto nityo niracayavo mukhyoyaḥ kālaḥ sa paramātmaiva . tathāca śvetāśvatarā āmananti . yaḥ kālakālo guṇī sarvavidya iti . āstāṁ nityatvānityatvasāvayavatvacintā . sarvathāpyasti sāṁkhyatattveṣu ārthikaḥ kālasargrahaḥ sākṣātsaṁgrahābhāvastu jyotiṣṭomādivat prakṛtipuruṣavivekānupayogādityavagantavyam . tṛtīyacaturthapakṣau tu bhavato vaiśeṣikaparicayagandho’pi nāstīti prakaṭayataḥ . vaiśeṣika grantheṣu sarveṣvapi kālaprakaraṇeṣu tallakṣaṇasya tatsādhakānumānasya ca papañcitvāt pramāṇāntarāṇi tu kālasādhakāni śrutyaivopanyastāni tathā ca taittirīyā āruṇaketuke mantramāmananti smṛtiḥ pratyakṣamaitihyam anumānaścatuṣṭayam . etairādityamaṇḍalai sarvaireva vidhāsyate iti . tatra smṛti anumeyaśrutimūlaṁ manvādiśāstraṁ prayakṣaṁ śrotragrāhyo ‘kṛtrimo vedākhyo’kṣararāśiḥ, yogipratyakṣamaupaniṣadābhimataṁ sākṣipratyakṣaṁ vā . aitihyamitihāsapurāṇādike jyotiḥśāstrasyāpyatrāntarbhāvo draṣṭavyaḥ . anumīyate svamūlabhūtaṁ smṛtivākyamanenetyenumānaḥ śiṣṭācārastasya ca smṛtyanumāpakatvaṁ . bhaṭṭācāryarvispaṣṭamabhihitam . ācā rācca smṛtiṁ jñātvā smṛteśca śrutikalpanamiti, tadevaṁ smṛtyādīnāṁ catuṣṭayaṁ saphalam, etaiścaturbhiḥ sarvairapyādityamaṇḍalaṁ pramīyata iti mantrasyārthaḥ . nanu smṛtyādīni maṇḍalasādhakatvenātropanyastāni na tu kālasādhakatveneti cet maivaṁ maṇḍalasya sārvajanīnapratyakṣasiddhatvena tatra smṛtyādyanupayogāt, kālavivakṣayevātra kālanirvāhakamaṇḍale tānyupanyastāni, tathā ca maṇḍaladvārā kālaḥ pramīyate . kālavivakṣā cottaramantreṣvatisphuṭā tatrānantaro mantraevamāmnāyate, sūryo marīcimādatte sarvasmādbhuvanādadhi, tasyāḥ pākaviśeṣeṇa smṛtaṁ kālaviśeṣaṇamiti tasyāyamarthaḥ . bhuvanagataṁ sarvabhūtajātamadhikṛtyarasavīryapākādibhistattadanugrahasamarthaṁ marīciṁ sūryaṁ svīkaroti tatkṛtena bhūtapākabhedena nimeṣādiḥ parārdhaparyantaḥ kālavibhedo’smābhiravagato bhavatīti . kālaprati pādakāni ca smṛtyādītyudāharāmaḥ . tatra manuḥ kālaṁ kālavibhaktiñceti sṛṣṭiprakaraṇe kālaṁ vyavajahāra . yājñavalkyo’pi, śrāddhakālaḥ prakīrtitaḥ iti . evamanyāsvapi smṛtiṣūdāhāryam . śrutiṣvapi kṛtaṁ svapne vicinoti kālaḥ iti bahvṛcāḥ . ahameva kālonāhaṁ kālasyeti taittirīyāḥ . kā ca sandhyā kaśca sandhyāyāḥ kāla iti sāmagāḥ . yogaśāstre’pi saṁyamaviśeṣāddhāraṇādhyānasamādhitrayarūpādyogino’tītādikālaṁ pratyakṣataḥ paśyantīti abhihitam tathā ca pātañjalabhūtram pariṇāmatrayasaṁyamādatītānāgatādijñānamiti . sāṁkṣipratakṣamapi, ahamasminakāle nivasāmi, ityanubhavastāvatsārvajanīnaḥ . na cāsau bāhyendriyakṛtaḥ kālasya rūpādihīnatvāt . nāpi mānasastārkikaistadanaṅgīkārāt . nāpyanumānādijanyaḥ aparokṣapratyayatvāt . ataḥ sāmagryabhāva’pyaparokṣadarśanātsākṣipratyakṣametadityaupaniṣadām anyante . itihāse’pi mahābhārate praharau ghaṭikānyūnau praharau ghaṭikādhikau . sa kālaḥ kutapojñeya pitṝṇāṁ, dattamakṣayamiti . purāṇe’pi anādireṣa bhagavānkālo’santā’jaraḥ paraḥ iti śiṣṭāśca paurṇamāsyākhyakāle svasvakalocitān devaviśeṣebhyaḥ kṣīradadhyādisamarpyaṇādikāndharmaviśeṣānbhānuvārādikālaviśeṣe ca samācaranti . tadevamanekapramāṇapramite kāle pramāṇābhāvarūpaścaturthaḥ pakṣaḥ kathamāśaṅkyeta? . nāpi prayojanābhāvāditi pañcamaḥ pakṣo yujyate . tārkikaistāṣat sarvotpattinimittakāraṇatvamuddhoṣitam . loke kṛṣyādyupayogaḥḥkālaviśeṣya kṛṣīvalādibhirvyavahriyate . gṛhapraveśaprayāṇādyupayogo jyotiḥśāstraprasiddhaḥ . śrautasmārtakarnopayogastu pradarśayiṣyate . tasmāt sāṁkhyaśraddhājāḍyakṛtasrava pradveṣa ityayaṁ ṣaṣṭaḥ pakṣaḥ pariśipyate . tathāca pāpā tmanaḥ svasya budbyaparādhaṁ puṇyātmani mādhavācārye samāro payan kayā vā śikṣayā na daṇḍyo’si . tadevaṁ kālasyapratyā khyātumaśakyatvānnirṇayodyamaḥ saphala iti sthitam . nanu katarakālo’tra nirṇīyate . kiṁ kevalaḥ kālaḥ kiṁ vā kālakālaḥ . nanu kimityaprasiddhabhāṣayā bhīṣayasi, na bhīṣayāmyahaṁ kiñcāstyeva kalayitavyabhedātkāladvaividhyam . yena prāṇidehādayo’tītavartamānādirūpeṇa kalayitavyāḥ sa kevalaḥ kālaḥ . sa ca tattvaprakāśavacanena pūrvam udāhṛtaḥ kalayati jagadeṣa kālo’taḥ iti . tādṛśo’pi kāryotpattisthitivināśakāriṇā yena kalayitavyaḥ sa kālakāla iti . sa ca vāsiṣṭharāmāyaṇedaśitaḥ kāle pi kalyte yeneti śrutiśca bhavati sa viśvakṛdviśvavidātma yonirjñaḥ kālakālo guṇī sarvavidyaḥ pradhānakṣatrajñaḥ iti guṇī sasāramokṣasthitibandhaheturiti ca kūrmapurāṇe’pi anādireṣa bhagavān kālo’nanto’jaraḥ paraḥ . sarvagatvāt svatantratvāt sarvātmatvānmaheśvaraḥ . brahmāṇo bahavo rudrā anye nārāyaṇādayaḥ . ekohi bhagavānīśaḥ kālaḥ kaviriti smṛtaḥ . brahmanārāyaṇeśānāṁ trayāṇāṁ prākṛtolayaḥ . procyate kālayogena punareva ca sambhavaḥ . paraṁ brahma ca bhūtāni vāsudevo’pi śaṅkaraḥ . kālenaiva ca sṛjyante saeva grasate punaḥ . tasmāt kālatmakaṁ viśvaṁ sa eva parameśvaraḥ iti . viṣṇudharmottare’pi . anādinidhanaḥ kālo rudraḥ saṅkarṣaṇaḥ smṛtaṁ . kalanātsarvabhutānāṁ sa kālaḥ parikīrtitaḥ . karṣaṇāt sarvabhūtānāṁ sa tu saṅkaṣaṇaḥ smṛtaḥ . sarvabhūtaśamitvācca sa rudraḥ parikīrtitaḥ anādinidhanatvana sa mahān parameśvara iti jyotiḥśa stre’pi bhūtānāmantakṛtkālaḥ kālo’nyaḥ kalanātmakā iti . tatraivaṁ sati dvayormadhye kālakālotra na nirṇetaka tasya dharmānuṣṭhāneṣvahetutvema heyatvādanupādeyatvācca . yastvitaro māsapakṣatithyādirūpaḥ so’pi jyotiḥśāstre samyaṅnirṇīta iti kṛtamanayā kālanirṇayapravṛttyeti prāpte brūmaḥ umayamapyatra nirṇetavyaṁ kālakālasya jagadīśvarasya sarveṣu karmārambheṣu anusmartavyatvāt ataeva śiṣṭāḥ puṇyāhavācanādāvīśvaramanusmaranti . sarveṣu kāleṣu samasta deśeṣvaśeṣakāryeṣu tayeśvareśvaraḥ . sarvaiḥsvarūpairbhagavānanādimānmamāstu māṅgalyavivṛddhaye hariḥ . yasya smṛtyā ca nāmoktyā tapoyajñakriyādiṣu . nyūnaṁ saṁpūrṇatāṁ yāti sadyovande tamacyutamiti . māsādirūpabhedasya tu svarūpeṇa jyotiṣe nirṇītatve’pi śrautasmārtakarmaviśeṣeṇa saha kālasyāṅgāṅgibhāvī nirṇetavyaḥ . yadyapyasau hemādiprabhṛtiṣu grantheṣu nirṇītastathāpyanekatra viprakīrṇasyaikatra saṁgrahārthamatra yatnaḥ kriyate . tadevaṁ cikīrṣitasya granyasya kālarūpo viṣayaḥ saṁgraharūpaṁ prayojanaṁ cāstīti ayaṁ grantha ārabhyate . nityo janyaśca kālau dvau tayorādyaḥ pareśvaraḥ . so’vāṅamanasagamyo’pi dehī bhaktānukampayā nityakālasya parameśvaratve pramāṇaṁ pūrvamevopanyastam . parameśvarasya cāvāṅmanasagocaratve sarve vedāntāstadanusārismṛtipurāṇāni tattvavidanubhavaśca pramāṇam . bhaktānugrāhimūrtisvīkāraśca ta lavakārākhye sāmavedaśākhāviśeṣe kasyāṁ cidākhyāyikāyāmāmnāyate tasyāṁ hyāstyāyikāyāmevamuktam– agnivāyvi ndrādayo devā īśvarānugṛhītāḥ sarvatra vijayamānāḥ svakīyameva tatsāmarthyamityamimanyante sma . tān bodhāyitumavāṅmanasagamyaṁ parameva brahma pūjyāṁ cakṣurgamyāṁ kāñcinmūrtiṁ dhārayitvā prādurbabhūva . tayā saha vādaṁ kṛtvāpi rājasacittāvagnivāyū tadbrahmatattvaṁ naiva bubudhāte indrastu sātvika cittobubudhe iti . vāsiṣṭharāmāyaṇe’pi śukropākhyāne śukraṁ mṛtamavalokya tatpitā bhṛguḥ kruddho mārayitāraṁ kālaṁ śapnumudyata tadānīṁ kālo’nugrahītumīdṛśena rūpeṇāvirbabhūveti paṭhyate athākalitarūpo’sau kālaḥ kavalitaprajaḥ . ādhibhautikamāsthāya vapurmunimupāyayau . bahupāśadharaḥ śrīmān kuṇḍalī kavacānvitaḥ . ṛtuṣaṭkamayodāravaktraṣaṭkasamanvitaḥ . māsadvādaśakoddāsabhujadvādaśakodbhaṭaḥ . svākārasamayā bahvyā vṛtaḥ kiṅkarasenaya . sa upetya praṇamyādau kupitaṁ taṁ mahāmunim . kalpakṣubdhāvdhigambhīraṁ sāntvapūrvamuvāca h . tvamatyantatapā vipra! vayaṁ niyatiprālakā tena saṁpūjyase pūjya . sādho! netaravīkṣayā . mā tapaḥ kṣapayā’buddha! kalpakālamahānalaiḥ . yo na dagdho’smi me tasya kiṁ tvaṁ śapena dhakṣyasi? . saṁsārāvalayo grastā nigīrṇārudrakoṭayaḥ . bhuktāni viṣṇuvṛndāni kena śaptā vayaṁ mune! . bhoktāro hivayaṁ brahman bhojanaṁ yuṣmadādayaḥ . svayaṁ niyatireṣā hi nāvayoretadokṣitamiti . na ca bhaktānujighṛkṣayā svekṛtā mūrtirīdṛśyeveti kaścinniyamosti sarvātmakasya parameśvarasya bhaktacittapriyāyāḥ sarvasyā api mūrte svakīyatvāt ataeva bhagavadgītāyām yo yo yāṁ yāṁ tanu bhaktaḥ śraddhayārcitumicchati . tasya tasyācalāṁ śraddhāṁ tāmeva vidadhāmyaham . sa tayā śraddhayā yuktastasyā rādhanamīhate . labhate ca tataḥ kāmān mayaiva vihitān hitāniti . viṣṇurudrādivat acetanamūrtayo’pi tattatphalaviśaṣārthibhirośvaratvenopāsyāḥ . tadetadṛgvede samāmnāyate . etaṁ hyeva bahvyaca mahatyukthe mīmāṁsa ntaetamagnāvadhvaryava, etaṁ mahāvratecchandogā, etamasyām (pṛthivyām) etaṁ divyetaṁ vāyāvetamākāśa etamoṣadhīṣvetaṁ vanaspatiṣvetaṁ chandasyetaṁ nakṣatreṣvetaṁ sarveṣu bhūteṣviti vājasaneyino’pi maṇḍalabrāhmaṇe tametamagnimadhvaryava upāsata ityāramya paṭhanti viṣamiti sarpāḥ, sarpa iti sarpavidaḥ, urgiti devaḥ, rayiriti manuṣyāḥ, māyetyamurāḥ, svadheti pitaro, devajana iti devajanavido rūpamiti gandharvā, gandhaityapsarasastaṁ yathāyathopāsate tadeva bhavatīti . taittirīyāśca paṭhanti kṣema iti vāci, yogakṣemam iti prāṇāpānayorityādi . parabrahmaṇyāropitaṁ yadyāvajjagadrūpam asti tena sarveṇaḥpyupāsanayā parameśvaro rūpavānbhavatītihiraṇmayādhikaraṇatejomayādhikaraṇayoḥ prapañcitam . evaṁ ca sati yo yadā yatkarmārabhate sa tadā tatkarmopayuktāṁ kālātmakasyeścarasya mūrtimiṣṭadevaṁtārūpeṇānusmaret . ata eva mantraśāstreṣu nānāvidhāni dhyānānyupadiṣṭāni . loke’pyāvidvadāgopālāṅganaṁ sarvo’pi jana ekaikāṁ devatāṁ svecchayā pūjayati tadetadbhagavānāha yajante sātvikādevān yakṣarakṣāṁsi rājasāḥ pretān bhūtagaṇāṁścānthe yajante tāmasā janāḥ iti tasma dārabhyamāṇakarmaphalapradonijeṣṭadevatārūponityaḥ kālaḥ karmārambheṣu anusmartavya iti siddham . atha janyaṁ kālaṁ nirūpayāmaḥ . nanu kālasya janyatve sati kathaṁ pralaye kālavyavahāraḥ . pralayatvasya janyānadhikaraṇatvarūpatvāt . pralayo’tītaḥ pralayobhāvīti kālanityatvavādinastavāpi samodoṣaḥ . nityasya kālasya tapanaparisyandādyupādhibhiḥ paricchede satyetāvān kāla iti kāleyattā varṇayitavyā . na ca pralaye tadupādhayaḥ santi . atastava kathaṁ pralayakāle iyattānirṇayaḥ . atha satkāryavādābhyupagamenopādhayo’pi vāsanā rūpeṇa santi tarhi kāle’pi tatsamānaṁ, na caitāvatā nityatāprāptiḥ upādhiṣu tadanaṅgīkarāt . atha manyase iyattārahite’pi pralayakāle sṛṣṭikāleyattāvāsanāvaśādiyattā vyavahriyate . tatropādhyāyatvādirdṛṣṭāntaḥ . yathā kaścinmāṇavakaḥ triṁśadvarṣavayaskādadhyetumupakramya saṁvatsaramadhītyāsmadupādhyāya ekatriṁśadvarṣavayaska ityadhyayanarahite’pyatote vayasyvapādhyāyatvaṁ vyavaharati . tadvadiyattāvyavahāraḥ . evaṁ tarhyanena nyāyena kālarahitapralaye kālavyavahāraḥ kiṁ na syāt? . kālarahitaṁ ca pralayādikaṁ vastvastoti māṇḍūkyādiśrutayo’bhyupra gacchanti . tathā ca śrūyate, yaccānyattrikālātītaṁ tadapyoṅkāra eveti . prābhākarāścāpūrvasya kālatrayāsaṁsṛṣṭāṅkāñcidavasthābhāhuḥ . tasmātkālaḥ sukhena janyatāṁ sa ca sāmānyaviśeṣābhyāndvividhaḥ . tasya cobhayavidhasyeśvarākhyānnityātkālādutpattiṁ manurāha kālaṁ kālavibhaktiñca nakṣatrāṇi grahāṁstathā . sṛṣṭiṁ sasarja caivemāṁ sraṣṭumicchannimāḥ prajāḥ iti . tatra yaḥ sāmānyakālaḥ sa viśeṣānugatatvāttadapekṣayā nityograhagatyādibhiranumeyo bhūtotpattinimittakāraṇamiti tārkikajyautiṣikādayaḥ pratipedire . tatra jyautiṣikā evamāhuḥ prabhavaviratibhadhyajñānabandhyā nitāntaṁ viditaparamatattvā yatra te yogino’pi . tamahamiha nimittaṁ viśvajanmātyayānāmanumitamabhivande bhagrahaiḥ kālamīśam . yugavarṣamāsadivasāḥ samaṁ pravṛttāstu caitraśuklādeḥ . kālo’yamanādyanto graharbharanumīyate kṣetra iti kālaviśeṣeṣu ca saṁvatsaraḥ prādhānabhūtaḥ . anye sarve guṇabhūtāḥ . tathācāruṇaketuke samāmnāyate nada va prabhavā kācidakṣayyā syandate yathā . tāṁ nadyobhisamāyanti saha, sā na nivartate . evaṁ nānāsamutthānāḥ kālāḥ saṁvatsaraṁ śritāḥ . aṇuśaśca mahāntaścasarvesamavayanti tam . sa taiḥ sarvaiḥ samāviṣṭa ūhaḥ sanna nivartate iti . ayamarthaḥ . bhāgīrathīgodāvaryādikā nadīva kālaḥ kutaścidutpattisthānādutpadyate . taccotpattisthānaṁ sāṁkhyoktaṁ prakṛtiḥ śivāgamoktamāyā vā śrutismṛtyuditā nityakālātmaka īśvaro vā bhaviṣyati . yathā tāṁ gaṅgādikāṁ mahānadī manyāṁ svalpanadyo’bhitaḥ praviśanti sā ca praviṣṭairnadyantaraiḥ saha vistīrṇā pravahatpravāhā satī na kadācit śuṣyati . evaṁ nānāvidharūpaiḥ samutpannāḥ kālabhedāḥ saṁvatsarākhyaṁ pradhānaṁ kālamāśritāḥ . tatra nimeṣādyā ayanaparyantāḥ kālabhedāḥ saṁsatsarādaṇavo, yugādyāḥ parārdhaparyantāḥ saṁvatsarānmahāntaste sarve taṁ saṁvatsaraṁ samyak praviśanti . aṇū nāmavayavatvena praveśaḥ . mahatāntu saṁvatsarāvṛttiniṣpādyānāmadhyakṣaḥ saṁvatsaraiti tatra praveśo’bhidhīyate . tathāca yedāṅgajyotiṣagranthe paṭhyate pañcasaṁyatsaramayaṁ yugādhyakṣaṁ prajāpatim . dinartvayanamāsāṅga praṇamya śirasā sthita iti . sa ca saṁvatsarasteraṇubhirmahadbhiśca sarvaiḥ samāviṣṭo’tidīrghaḥ sannasmin jagati ta cchidyata iti . nanvaṇutvaṁ nimeṣe paryavasitaṁ mahattvotu parārdhe tathā ca tayoranyatarasya prādhānyamucitam . tatra kathaṁ saṁvatsarasya prādhānyam? iti cet īśvareṇa prathamaṁ sṛṣṭatvāditi brūmaḥ . tathā ca vājasaneyinaḥ samāmananti so’kāmayata dvitīyoma ātmājāyeteti sa manasā vācā mithunaṁ samabhavadyattadreta āsīt sa saṁvatsaro’bhavaditi . tasmātsaṁvatsaraḥ pradhānam, ataeva vayaṁ saṁvatsarabhāramya kālaviśeṣaṁ nirṇayāmaḥ . tatra saṁvatsaro’yanamṛturmāsaḥ pakṣaḥ tithirnakṣatraṁ yoga ityevaṁ vidhāḥ karmakālāḥ . yadyapi purāṇaṣu mṛtyumārkaṇḍeyādīnāṁ yugādikalpādiparimitaṁ tapaḥ smaryate tathāpi śatasaṁvatsarāyuṣo manuṣyānadhikṛtya dharmaśāstrapravṛtteḥ yugādinirṇayonoyayuktaḥ . śāstrāṇāṁ manuṣyādhikāratvaṁ cāsmābhiḥ pārāśarasmṛtivyākhyāne manuṣyāṇāṁ hitaṁ dharmam ityasminvacane prapañcitam . yetu kalau pañca vivarjayet ityādayomanuṣyadharmāsteṣvapi na yugādikaṁ nirṇetavya saṁdehābhāvāt . na ca śatāyuṣāmadhikāre kathaṁ sahasrasaṁvatsarasatraśrutiriti śaṅkanīyam tatra saṁvatsaraśabdodivasapara iti ṣaṣṭhādhyāye sapnamapādenirṇītatvāt . ye’pi caturdaśasavatsarāvṛttisādhyā anantavratādayasteṣvapi na saṁvatsarādhikaḥ kaścitkālo nirṇetavyo’sti . ataḥ saṁvatsaramārabhyāvāṁñca eva nirṇetavyāḥ karmāṅakālāḥ . na ca kālasya karmāṅgatve vivaditavyam sāyaṁ buhoti prātarjahotītiḥ śruteḥ tattatkarmaṇastāvadapūrvaviṣayatvāt (apūrvajanakatvāt, prādhānyamabhyugamya tathā ca kālasya guṇatvenānvayaḥ pariśiṣyate ataeva gargaḥ tithinakṣatravārādi sādhanaṁ puṇyapāpayoḥ . pradhānaguṇabhāvena svātasthyeṇa na te kṣamāḥ iti . tasmādaṅgabhūteṣa nirṇeyeṣa kāleṣvavayavitvena saṁvatsarasyābhyarhitatvādalpavaktavyatayā sūcīkaṭāhanyāyānusāreṇa ca saeva ādau nirṇīyataitisthitam . sū° si° raṅga° kālavibhāgaścetthaṁ pradarśitaḥ lokānāmamakṛtkālaḥ kālo’nyaḥ kalanātmakaḥ . sa dvidhā sthūlasūkṣmatvānmūrtaścāmūrta ucyate sū° si° . kālo dvidhā tatraikaḥ kālo’khaṇḍadaṇḍāyamānaḥ śāstrāntarapramāṇasiddhaḥ . lokānāṁ jīvānāmupalakṣaṇādacetanānāmapi . antakṛdvināśakaḥ . yadyapi kālasteṣāmutpattisthitikārakastathāpi vināśasyānantatvāt kālatvapratipādanāya cāntakṛdityuktam . antakṛdityanenaivotpattisthitikṛdityaktamanyathā nāśakatvāsambhavāt . ataeva kālaḥ sṛjati bhūtāni kālaḥ saṁharati prajāḥ ityādyuktaṁ granthāntare . anyo dvitīyaḥ kālaḥ khaṇḍakālaḥ . kalanātmako jñānaviṣayasvarūpaḥ . jñātuṁśakyaityarthaḥ . sa dvitīyaḥ kalanātmakaḥ kālo’pi dvidhā bhedadvayātmakaḥ . tadāha sthūlasūkṣmatvāditi mahattvāṇutvābhyām . mūrtaḥ–iyattāvacchinnaparimāṇaḥ . amūrtastadbhinnaḥ kālatattva vidbhiḥ kathyate . cakāro hetukrameṇa mūrtāmūrtakramārthakaḥ . tena mahān mūrtakālo’ṇṛramūrtaḥ kāla ityarthaḥ . athoktaṁ bhedadvayaṁ svarūpeṇa pradarśayan prathamabhedaṁ pratipipādayiṣustadavāntarabhedeṣu bhedadvayamāha raṅganāthaḥ . prāṇādiḥ kathito mūrtastruṭyādyo’mūrtasañjñakaḥ . ṣaḍabhiḥ prāṇairvināḍī syāt tatṣaṣṭhyā nāḍikā smṛtā sū° si° . prāṇaḥ svasthasukhāsīnasya śvāsocchāsāntarvartī kālo daśagurvakṣaroccāryamāṇa ādiryasyaitādṛśaḥ prāṇanāntargato mūrtaḥ kāla uktaḥ . truṭirādyā yasyaitādṛśaḥ kāla eva prāṇāntargatastraṭitatparādiko’mūrtasañjñaḥ . athāmūrtasya mūrtādibhūtasya vyadhahārāyogyatvenāpradhānatayānantaroddiṣṭasya bheda pratipādanamupekṣya mūrtakālasya vyavahārayogyatvena pradhānatayā prathamoddiṣṭabhedān vivakṣuḥ prathamaṁ palaghaṭyāvāha . ṣaḍbhiriti . ṣaḍabhiḥprāṇairasubhiḥ pānīyapalaṁ bhavati palānāṁ ṣaṣṭhyā caṭikoktā kālatattvajñaiḥ . atha dinamāsādikamāha raṅga° . nāḍīṣaṣṭyā tu nākṣatramahorātraṁ prakīrtitam . tattriṁśatā bhavenmāsaḥ sāvano’rkodayaignathā . aindavastithibhistadvat saṅkrāntyā saura ucyate . māsairdvādaśabhirvarṣaṁ divyaṁ tadaharucyate . surāsurāṇāmanyo’nyamahorātraṁ viparyavāt . tatṣaṣṭiḥ ṣaḍguṇā 360 divyaṁ varṣamāsurameśa ca . taddvādaśa sahasrāṇi caturyugamudāhṛttam . sūryābdasaṅkhyayā dvitrisāgarairayutāhataiḥ 4320000 . sandhyāsandhyāṁśasahitaṁ vijñeyaṁ taccaturyugam . kṛtādīnāṁ vyavastheyaṁ dharmapādavyavasthāyā . yugasya daśamo bhāgaścatustridvyekasaṅguṇaḥ . kramāt kṛtayugādīnāṁ, ṣaṣṭhāṁśāḥ sandhayaḥ svakāḥ . yugānāṁ saptatiḥ saikā manvantaramihocyate . kṛtābdasaṅkhya 1728000 stasthānte sandhiḥ proktojalaplavaḥ . sasandhayaste manavaḥ kalpe jñenyāścaturdaśa . kṛtapramāṇaḥ kalpādau sandhiḥ pañcadaśaḥ smṛtaḥ . ityaṁ yugasahasreṇa bhūtasahārakārakaḥ . kalpo brāhmamahaḥ proktaṁ śarvarī tasya tāvatī . paramāyuḥ śataṁ tasya tayā’horātnasaṅkhyayā . āyuṣordhamitaṁ tasya śeṣe kalpoyamādimaḥ sū° si° . aharādikālabhedāḥ (ahan) śabde uktāḥ . si° śi° tu nimeṣatatparatruṭirūpāḥ sūkṣmāḥ kālāvayavāḥ darśitāḥ tasya vākyaṁ 1788 pṛ° darśitam . sa ca kālastrividhaḥ vartamānabhūtabhaviṣyadbhedāt tatra bhūtabhaviṣyat kālāvapi pratyekaṁ dvidhā adyatanānadyatanabhedāt tadbhedenaiva lakāraviśeṣaṁ pāṇiniranuśaśāsa . so’yaṁ kālaḥ ṣaḍindriyavedyaḥ iti mīmāṁsakā manyante na so’sti pratyayoloke yatra kālo na bhāsate iti teṣāmukteḥ . vedāntinastu tasya sākṣipratyayabhāsyatvamaṅgīcakruḥ tatra pramāṇaṁ kālamā° anupadameva darśitam . so’yaṁ kālaḥ deśavṛttaravyāpyavṛttitāniyāmakaḥ . tathāhi yaḥ padārthaḥ svādhikaraṇavṛttyabhāvapratiyogī so’vyāpyavṛttiriti bhaṇyate tattānirvāhakaśca kālodeśaśca . kvaciddeśe sthitasya tādṛśapadārthasya kālabhedena tatraivādhikaraṇe’bhāvastiṣṭhati yathā jñānāśraye ātmani suṣuptikāle icchādiviśeṣaguṇāntarakāle ca jñānābhāvaḥ . yathā vā guṇavati janyadravye utpattikāle guṇābhāvaḥ śyāmale apakve ghaṭe raktatvābhāvaḥ raktatvasya pākīttaraṁ jāyamānatvāt . kālasattva ca deśo’pi tathā . yathā ātmani jñānakāle śarārāvacchedena jñānaṁ, ghaṭādyavacchedena tadabhāvaḥ . tathā vṛrkṣa kapisaṁyogakāle’pi mūle tadabhāvaḥ . kālena kṛtasambandhaśca kālikasambandhaḥ tena sambandhena sarveṣu janyabhāveṣu janyabhāvānāṁ vṛttimattā nityeṣu gu kālikasambandhena na kasyāpi sattvam nityānuyogikakālikatambanyānupagamāt iti naiyāyikāḥ . tasya ca pauruṣaṁ daivasampāyā kāle phalati pārthiva! . trayametanmanuvyasya piṇḍitaṁ syāt phalāvaham ityukteḥ kāryamātre nimittakāraṇatā . yadyapi kṛṣervṛṣṭisamāyoge dṛśyante phalasiddhayaḥ . tāstu kāle pradṛśyante naivākāle kathañcaneti śāstrāntareṇa tattatkālānāmeva yattatkāryotpattau hetutā ‘dhigatā tathāpi yadviśeṣayoḥ kāryakāraṇabhāvastatsāmānyayorapīti nyāyāt sāmānyataḥ kāryamātraṁ prati kālasāmānyasya hetutvam . kālaḥ krīḍati gacchatyāyustadapi na muñcatyāśāvāyuḥ mohamu° . kāle bhavaḥ ṭhañ . kālika kālabhave tri° samāsapratyayabidhau pratiṣedho vaktavyaḥ bā° ukteḥ tadantavidhiparibhāṣāyāḥ apravṛtteḥ kālāntaśabdānnāsya pravṛttiḥ tena tadanta śabdāt khaeva sādhuḥ samānakānīnaḥ prākkālīna ityādi bhūriprayogāt . si° kau° samānakālonaprākkālonaśabdayoraprāmāṇikatoktiḥ prauḍhoktireva udāhṛtavārtikasya jāgarūkatvāt iti gauḍāāhuḥ . pratīcyāstu kaumudīkāraśraddhāvaśāt ṭhañvidhāyakasūte kālasāmānyatadviśeṣaparyāyāṇāṁ grahaṇāt samānakālaprākkālayorapi kālaviśeṣatvena tataḥ ṭhañeva pravṛttirna khasyeti bhāṣyādiprayogastu ārṣatvāt samādheyaḥ iti manyante . kālena nirvṛttaḥ ṭhañ kālika kālasādhye tri° striyāṁ ṅīp . kartustātkālikī śuddhiriti smṛtiḥ tatra tatkālaśabdasyaiva ṭhañaḥ prakṛtitvāt tena na pūrvoktavārtikasaṅkocaḥ ataeva tatra tacchabdasyaivādyacovṛddhiḥ tena nivṛttamityadhikārāt prakṛtimātrasyaiva grahaṇāt na kālatvena tatraprakṛtitā . kāle sādhuḥ puṣyan pacyamāno vā aṇ . kāla–kāle sādhau kāle yikaśa māne kāle pacyamāne ca tri° . atra sūtre kālaviśeṣasyaiva grahaṇaṁ na svarūpasya tena na tato’ṇ ityanye . kālaḥ prāpto’sya yat . kālya prāptakāle śītādau tri° kālodevatā’sya kālebhyobhavavat pā° ṭhañ . kālika kāla devatāke havirādau striyāṁ ṅīp . 15 tattatkarmocitakāle varamekāhutiḥ kāle nākāle lakṣakoṭayaḥ tri° ta° . akāle’pyatha vā kāle gaṅgāṁ prāpya saridvarām prā° ta° . kāle kālakṛto naśyet phalabhogyo na naśyati yā° smṛ° . ardhayāmaśabde 376 pṛ° darśite ravyādivāreṣu kālavelākhye 16 divāniśorardhayāmabhede yātrāyāṁ maraṇaṁ kāle vaidhavyaṁ pāṇipīḍane . brate brahmabadhaḥ proktaḥ sarvaṁ karma tatastajet jyo° ta° tasya sarvakarmasu varjyatāmāha 17 sāṁkhyīkte meghāsvye vivekasākṣātakārāntarāye tuṣṭibhede yathā ādhyātmikyaścatasraḥ prakṛtyupādānakālabhāgyākhyāḥ . bāhyāviṣayoparamāt pañca, nava tuṣṭayobhavanti sā° kā0 yā tu pravrajyāpi na sadyonirvāṇadeti saiva kālaparipākamapekṣya siddhinte vidhāsyati alamuttaptatayā tavetyapadeśe yā tuṣṭiḥ sā kālākhyā megha (1) ucyate kau° . vivṛtañjaitadasmābhiḥ . pravrajyāmātrasya vivekakhyātihetutve prabrajyāgrahaṇamātreṇa vivekakhyātyāpattirūpam upadeśe asattavaprayojakaṁ dūṣaṇam sahakāryantarāpekṣākalpanāt pariharannupadeśāntaraṁ darśayati na sadyo nirvāṇadeti . sadyaḥ, grahaṇamātrāt na tu kālarūpasahakāryantarāpekṣaṇāta na nirvāṇadā vivekakhyātijananadvārā na muktidetyarthaḥ . tathā ca kṛṣervṛṣṭisamāyoge vṛśyante phalasiddhayaḥ . tāstu kāle pradṛśyante naivākāle kathañcana iti śāstreṇa kāryamātraṁ prati kālasya sahakāritāyā anvayavyatirekābhyāṁ ca prasiddhatvāt kālasyaiva taddhetutvamastu kṛtaṁ dhyānābhyasādineti samuditārthaḥ . kālasyasādhanatāsādhakaśāstreṇa kṛṣyādeḥ pradhāna phalahetutvaṁ tatra kālasya sahakāritāmātraṁ pratipāditaṁ na tu tanmātrasya hetutvamevañca kālasya sādhāraṇakāraṇatvam asādhāraṇakāraṇatvantu kṛṣyādereva evañca prakṛte’pi vivekakhyātiṁ prati dhyānābhyāsāderevārādpakārakatvāt asādhāraṇahetutvaṁ, kālasya sādhāraṇahetutvamityasyāsadudhadeśatva miti bodhyam iti . varsavācikālaśabdasya striyāṁ janapadā° ni° ṅīṣ . kālī kākālī kāmadhurā kāśītalavāhino gaṅgā . bidagdha mu° samānapraśnottaram . 18 hiṁsake tri° tataḥ striyāṁ na ṅīṣ . kālāt vaṇṇaścet vārtikokteḥ . kālānyā si° kau° . kālasyeyam aṇ ṅīp kālasya patnī ṅīṣ vā . kālī kālaśaktau śivakāntāyāñca strī . adhikaṁ kālīśabde vakṣyate . 19 mṛtyau medi° sarvasyāgrahaṇānāttasya tathātvam . aśumāṁśca tapastepe gaṅgānayanakāmyayā . kālaṁ mahāntaṁ nāśaknīt tataḥ kālena saṁsthitaḥ . dilīpastatsutastadbadaśaktaḥ kālameyikān bhāga° 9 9 2 3 1 kālaṁ mṛtyum śrīdharaḥ . varṇavācakāt tasya bhāva ityarthe imanic kāliman pu° tal kālatā strī, tva kālatva na° . kṛṣṇavarṇe . tatra yame upetya muniveśo’tha kālaḥ provāca rāghavam raghuḥ . yamaparatve 20 dvitvasaṁkhyāyāṁ 21 tatsaṁkhyānvite ca bharaṇyāyamadaivatatvāt tasyāśca aśvinyādinakṣatracakre dvitīyatvāt lakṣitalakṣaṇayā tatparatvam . śivaparatve 22 ṣaṭsaṁkhyāyāṁ 23 tadanvate ca śivadaivatārdrāyā aśvinyādiṣu ṣaṣṭhatvāduktarītyā tathātvam . ṛṇidhanicakraśabde 1428 pṛ° darśitaṁ ṣaṭkālakāletyādi vākyam udā° kālasya velā ravitaḥ śarākṣikālānalāgāmbudhayo gajendū jyo° ta° . candrādigrahāṇāṁ dṛṣṭiyogyatāprāpakakālātmake 24 aṁśabhede ca . sa ca si° śi° darśito yathā dasrendavaḥ 12 śaulabhuvaśca 17 śakrā 14 rudrāḥ 11 khacandrā 10 stithayaḥ 15 krameṇa . candrāditaḥ kālalavā niruktāḥ jñaśukrayorvakragayordvihīnāḥ si° śi° . candrādīnāmene 12 . 17 . 14 . 11 10 . 15 . kālāṁśā jñeyāḥ . budhaśukrayostu vakragatayordvihīnā 12 . 8 dvivarjitā jñeyāḥ . atropapattiḥ . kālāṁśā iti kālātmakā aṁśāḥ ṣaḍbhira śairekā ghaṭikā . ekasyāṁśasya daśa pānīyapalāni . atraitaduktaṁ bhavati . candrasya kila dvādaśa 12 kālāṁśāḥ . arkasyāstamayādudayādvā ghaṭikādvayādhike’ntare candro dṛṣṭiyogyo bhavati . tadūne tatprabhācchāditatvādadṛśyaḥ . atastasya dvādaśa kālāṁśāḥ . evaṁ bhaumasya saptadaśa 17 ṣaḍaṁśonāstisro ghaṭikāḥ 2 . 50 ityarthaḥ . ebamanyeṣāṁ yathāpaṭhitāsteṣāṁ vimbasya sthūlasūkṣmatāvaśāt nyūnādhikatā . ata eva budhaśukrayorvakragatayorvimbasya sthūlatvāddvihīnāḥ . atropalabdhireva vāsanā prami0 yatrodayo vāstamayo’vagamyastaddigbhavo dṛkkhacaro raviśca . astodayāsannadine kadācit sādhyastu paścāt taraṇiḥ saṣaḍbhaḥ si° śi° . iha kendrabhāgairgrahasyodayo’stamayo vā yasmin dina āyātastasyāsanne kasmiṁściddine taṁ grahaṁ raviṁ ca sphuṭaṁ kṛtvā yasyāṁ diśi grahodayo’stamayo vā taddigbhavo dṛggrahaḥ kāryaḥ . yadi prācyāṁ tadaudayikaṁ grahaṁ kṛtvodayalagnaṁ sādhyam . yadi ca pratīcyāṁ tadāstamayikaṁ grahaṁ kṛtvāstalagnaṁ sādhyamityarthaḥ . yadā pratīcyāṁ, tadāraviḥ saṣaḍbhaśca kāryaḥ . idānīmiṣṭakālāṁśānayanamāha prami° . dṛkkhecarārkāntarajātanāḍyo rasāhatāḥ kālalavāḥ syuriṣṭāḥ si° śi° . dṛggrahārkayorantaraghaṭikāḥ sādhyāstā rasa 6 hatā iṣṭāḥ kālāṁśā bhavanti . atha tairudayāstayorgataiṣyāḥ nāḍyaḥ prami° . uktebhya ūnābhyadhikā yadīṣṭāḥ kheṭodayo gamyagatastadā syāt . ato’nyathā vā’stamayo’vagamyaḥ prokteṣṭakālāṁśaviyogaliptāḥ . khābhrāṣṭabhū 1800 ghnādyucarodayāptāḥ kheṭārkabhukyantarabhājitāśca . vakre tu bhuktyaikyahṛtā avāptāstadantarāle divasā gataiṣyāḥ . tātkālikābhyāṁ ravidṛggrahābhyāṁ muhuḥ kṛtāste sphuṭatāṁ prayānti si° śi° . evaṁ ya iṣṭakālāṁśā ānītāste proktebhyo yadi svalpā bhavanti tadā grahasyodayo gamyaḥ . yadyadhikāstadā gata iti veditavyam . ato’nyathāstamaya iti . atha proktāuktebhyoyadīṣṭāḥ svalpāstadā grahasyāstamayogatoyadyadhikastadā gamya iti . atha proktānāmiṣṭakālāṁśānāṁ ca yā antare kalāstā aṣṭādaśaśatai 1800 rguṇyā dṛggrahākrāntasya rāśeḥ svadeśodayāsubhirbhājyāḥ . phalakalānāṁ grahārkabhuktyantareṇa vakrage grahe bhuktiyogena bhāge gṛhīte yallabdhaṁ te gatā eṣyā vādivasā bhavantyudaye vāstamaye vā . tairdivasaistātkālikau dṛggrahārkau kṛtvaivamasakṛtkarmaṇā samyak tatkālajñānaṁ bhavati . atropapattiḥ . iṣṭakālāṁśasādhane lagnavāsanaiva . proktānāṁ kālāṁśānāmanantarvartī graho dṛśyo bhavati . ato yāvadiṣṭā nyūnāstāvadadṛśyaḥ . udaye vilokyamāne udeṣyati . aste bilokyamāne’staṁ gata ityarthājjñāyate . iṣṭā yadyadhikāstadā proktebhyo vilokyamāne’staṁgate bahirbhūtādgraho’dṛśya udaye vilokyamāna uditaḥ astaṁ yāsyatītyarthājjñāyate . atha teṣāṁ prokteṣṭānāṁ kālāṁśānāṁ ca yā antare kalāstāsāṁ kṣetraliptīnāṁ karaṇāyānupātaḥ . yāvatyaḥ kālakalāstāvanta evāsavo bhavanti . atha yadi dṛggrahodayāsubhiraṣṭādaśaśatāni 1800 kṣetraliptā labhyante tadā tadantarakalāsubhiḥ kimiti . phalaṁ kṣaitraliptāḥ . tā grahārkabhuktyantareṇa bhājyāḥ . bhuktyantaraṁ hi kṣetraliptāntarātmakamataḥ sajātīyakaraṇāya kṣetraliptīkaraṇam . bhuktyantareṇaiko divaso labhyata iti yuktamuktam . vakre tu bhuktiyoga eva bhuktyantaram . dūrāntare sthūlakālo bhavatītyasakṛtkarma sūkṣmārtham . atra viśeṣamāha . prami0 prāgdṛggarhaścedadhiko raveḥ syādūno’tha vā paścimadṛggrahaśca . prokteṣṭakālāṁśayuteḥ kalābhiḥ sādhyastadānīṁ divasāgataiṣyāḥ . tathā yadīṣṭakālāṁśāḥ proktebhyo’bhyadhikāstadā . vyatyayaścagataiṣyatve jñeyo’hnāṁ sudhiyā khalu si° śi0 yadi prāgdṛggraho raveradhiko bhavati . atha vā paścimadṛggraho nyūno bhavati tadāye iṣṭakālāṁśā ānītāsteṣāṁ proktānāṁ ca yogakalābhirdivasāḥ sādhyāḥ . nāntarakalābhiḥ tathā prāgdṛggrahe’rkādadhike sati paścāddṛggrahe vā nyūne ya iṣṭakālāṁśā āgatāste ca yadi proktebhyo’dhikāntarāḥ tadā prokteṣṭakālāṁśayuteḥ kalābhirye divasāḥ sādhitāsteṣāṁ divasānāṁ gataiṣyatve viparyayojñeyaḥ . atropapattiḥ . yo grahaḥprācyāmudeti pratitiṣṭhati vā asau raverūnaḥ san praścimāyām adhikaḥ san prācyāṁ diśi proktakālāṁśairūnaḥ san dṛśyatāmeti . tāvadbhireva paścimā yāmadhikaḥsan . ato raveḥ pṛṣṭhataḥ prācyāṁ proktakālāṁśāḥ pratīcyāmagrataḥ . prācyāmūne grahe ya iṣṭakālāṁśāḥ sādhyante te raveḥ pṛṣṭhataḥ . ataḥ pṛṣṭhagataireva proktakālāṁśaisteṣāmantaraṁ kartuṁ yujyate . atha prācyāṁ raveradhike dṛggrahe ya iṣṭakālāṁśāḥ sādhyante te raveragrato bhavanti . ato’gragatānāṁ pṛṣṭhagatānāñca kālāṁśānāṁ yoge kṛtesatyantaraṁ kṛtaṁ bhavati tathā uktebhya ūnābhyadhikā yadīṣṭā iti yadgatagamyalakṣaṇamuktaṁ tat sajātīyānāmeva . yadā punareke pṛṣṭhagatā eke’gragatāstadā tadgatagamyalakṣaṇaṁ vyatyayena bhavati . ata uktaṁ vyatyayaśca gataiṣyatva ityādi . atra sudhiyeti viśeṣaṇādubuddhimataidadanuktamapi jñāyate prami° . vyavahāre vādiprativādinoḥ pratijñātārthasāghanāya rājñādeye 25 avasararūpe samayabhede ca tatkālaviśeṣaḥ smṛtau darśito yathā pratyarthī labhate kālaṁ tryahaṁ saptāhameva ca . arthī tu prārthayan kālaṁ tatkṣaṇādeva hīyate . pratyarthino’pi kvacidviṣayena kālo deyaḥ kvaciccārthipratyarthinoricchayā kālodeyaḥ yathāha yājña° sāhasasteyapāruṣyago’bhiśāpātyaye striyām . vivādayet sadyaeva kālo’nyatrecchayā smṛtaḥ . samayarūpakālasya vaiśeṣikamate saṁyogavibhāgapṛthaktvasaṁkhyāparimāṇarūpā pañca guṇāḥ . bhīmo bhīmasenavat uttarapadalopaḥ . kāladaṇḍarūpe 26 yoge kāladaṇḍaśabde udā° . vāraviśeṣe digbhedena jyotiṣokte yātrādau niṣiddhe 27 yogabhede . sa ca yogaḥ mu° ci° uktaḥ . kauverīto vaiparītyena kālo’rkādye vāre sammukhe tasya pāśaḥ . rātrāvetau vaiparītyena gamyau yātrā yuddhe saṁmukhau varjanīyau . ayamaryaḥ . ravāvuttarasyāṁ kālaḥ, some vāyavyāṁ, bhaume paścimāyām, budhe nairṛtyām, gurau dakṣiṇasyām, śukre āgneyyāṁ, śanau pūrvasyām . ravāvuttarataḥ kālaḥ some vāyavyabhāgake . bhaume tu paścime bhāge budhe nairṛtabhāgake . jīve ca yāmyadigbhāge śukre cāgneyakoṇake . śanau tu pūrvadigbhāge kālacakraṁ prakīrtitam . svarodaye yatrasthastatrakālaḥ syāt pāśastasya tu sammukhaḥ . dakṣiṇasthaḥ śubhaḥ kālaḥ pāśo vāmadigāśrayaḥ . yātrāyāṁ samare śreṣṭhastato’nyatra na śobhavaḥ . rātrau ca vaiparītyena yathā ravau rātrau dakṣiṇasyāṁ kālaḥ uttarasyāṁ pāśa ityādikrameṇetyūhyam . 28 kalāye (maṭara) śimbībhede, vaija° . vikasatkalāyakusumam māghavyā° kālakusumamiti malli° dhruvanāmakavasoḥ 29 putrabhede pu° . dhruvasya putro bhagavān kālo lokaprakālanaḥ harivaṁ° 3 a° . |
कालक – kālaka | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kālaka mfn. ( 5-4, 33) dark-blue, black
mfn. freckled (? or “dark”, as with anger) kālaka m. a freckle (? “black colour”) kālaka m. the black part of the eye kālaka m. a water-snake kālaka m. a kind of grain kālaka m. (in alg.) the second unknown quantity, Bījag. kālaka m. N. of a Rakshas kālaka m. of an Asura kālaka m. pl. N. of a people kālaka m. of a dynasty kālaka mfn. (“kālakā”) f. a kind of bird kālaka m. (g. “sthūlādi”) N. of a female evil spirit (mother of the Kālakeyas; daughter of Daksha ; also of Vaiśvānara & &c. kālaka mfn. (“kālikā”) f. blackness or black colour kālaka m. ink or blacking kālaka m. a dark spot, rust kālaka m. a fault or flaw in gold kālaka m. change of complexion kālaka m. the liver on kālaka m. a particular blood-vessel in the ear kālaka m. the line of hair extending from the pudenda to the navel kālaka m. a multitude of clouds kālaka m. snow kālaka m. fog kālaka m. the female of the bird Aṅgāraka kālaka m. a female crow kālaka m. the female of the bird Turdus macrourus (commonly “śyāmā”) kālaka m. a scorpion kālaka m. a small worm or animalcule formed by the fermentation of milk kālaka m. N. of several plants (Vṛiścika-pattra, Valeriana Jaṭāmāṁsī, a kind of Terminalia, a branch of Trichosanthes dioeca) kālaka m. a kind of fragrant earth kālaka m. a N. or form of Durgā kālaka m. a girl of four years old who personates the goddess Durgā at a festival held in honour of that deity kālaka m. a kind of female genius 9532 kālaka m. one of the mothers in Skanda’s retinue kālaka m. N. of a Vidyādharī cviii, 177 kālaka m. of a Kiṁnarī kālaka m. of a Yoginī kālaka m. of an attendant of the fourth Arhat kālaka m. of a river kālaka n. a worm-hole (in wood) kālaka n. the liver kālaka n. N. of a pot-herb kālaka mf (“ikā”) n. to be paid monthly (as interest, “vṛddhi”). Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 kālaka a. Black, dark-blue. –kaḥ (1) A mole, freckle, mark. (2) A water-snake. (3) The black part of the eye. (4) A kind of grain. –kā Ved. (1) A kind of bird. (2) A daughter of Daksha. –kaṁ (1) The liver. (2) An unknown quantity (in alg.). Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch kālaka (von 1. kāla) 1) adj. “dunkelblau” (wenn die Farbe vorübergehend ist, nicht constant am Gegenstande haftet), “dunkelblau gefärbt” P. 5, 4, 33. kālakaṁ mukhaṁ kopena, kālakaḥ paṭaḥ Sch. Neben nīlaka COLEBR. Alg. 228. — 2) m. a) “Leberfleck am Körper, Sommersprosse” AK. 2, 6, 1, 49. H. 618. — b) “das Schwarze im Auge” SUŚR. 2, 304, 2. — c) “Wasserschlange” (alagarda) ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — d) “eine Getraideart” SUŚR. 1, 73, 5. — e) N. pr. eines Rakshas R. 3, 29, 30 (kālakākhya, welches auch ungetrennt als N. pr. gefasst werden könnte). eines Asura HARIV. 2286. 14289. pl. N. eines Dānava-Geschlechts (s. kālakañja, kālakeya) VP. 148, N. 9 (kūlaka, im Index aber kālaka). — f) N. pr. eines Gebirges (?) VARĀH. BṚH. S. 14, 19 in Verz. d. B. H. 241. — 3) f. kālakā a) “ein best. Vogel” VS. 24, 35. — b) N. pr. einer Unholdin (vgl. kālā, kālikā), der Mutter der Kālakeya, gaṇa sthūlādi zu P. 5, 4, 3. MBH. 3, 12203. einer Tochter Daksha’s R. 3, 20, 12. 14. 17. Vaiśvānara’s ( = kāla HARIV. 12492) HARIV. 208. BHĀG. P. 6, 6, 33. — 4) n. a) “Leber” H. 604. — b) Name einer Pflanze (s. kālaśāka) BHĀVAPR. im ŚKDR. — Vgl. tilakālaka. kālaka 4) c) “Wurmstich im Holze” VARĀH. BṚH. S. 79, 32. 35. 37. kālaka 2) a) hierher wohl das erste kālaka in kālakā yeṣāṁ te kālakāḥ PAT. a. a. O.6,58,b. — e) N. pr. eines Volkes MĀRK. P. 58, 32. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 kālaka An Asura born to Kālikā by Kaśyapa. (Vālmīki Rāmāyaṇa, Araṇya Kāṇḍa, Chapter 14). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 kālaka kāla + ka, I. m. 1. The black in the eye, Suśr. 2, 304, 2. 2. A sort of grain, Suśr. 1, 73, 5. 3. The name of a Rākṣasa, or demon, Rām. 3, 29, 30; of an Asura, Hariv. 2286. II. f. kā, The name of a female demon, MBh. 3, 12203. — Comp. tila-, m. a mole, a dark spot on the body, Suśr. 1, 31, 18. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 kālaka [1] a. dark-blue, black. m. mole, freckle, a sort of grain. f. kālakā a kind of bird; kālikā black spot, E. of Durgā. kālaka [2] (f. kālikā) monthly. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 kālaka kāla-ka, a. dark blue, black; -kañja, m. pl. N. of a tribe of Asuras; -kaṇṭhaka, m. sparrow; -karman, n. death; -kāṅkṣin, a. waiting or impatient for the right moment; -kārita, pp. temporary; -kūṭa, m. kind of poison (esp. that produced at the churning of the ocean); -kṛta, pp. produced by time; temporary; -krama, m. course of time: in., ab. in course of time; -kṣepa, m. waste of time, delay; d. to gain time; -ṁkṛ, waste time (w. lc.); -gaṇḍikā, f. N. of a river; -gupta, (pp.) m. N. of a Vaisya. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 kālaka na° kāla–svārthe ka kalayati raktatāṁ kala–nodane ṇvul vā . 1 kālaśāke bhāvapra° tasya kṛṣṇavarṇatvāt tathātvam . 2 yakṛti hemaca° . nikhiladeharaktaprerakatvāt tasya tathātvam . yathoktaṁ bhāvapra° . yadā raso yakṛt yāti tatra rañjakapittataḥ . rāgaṁ pākaṁca saṁprāpya sa bhavedraktasaṁjñakaḥ . yakṛt plīhā ca raktasya mukhyasthānaṁ tayoḥ sthitam . anyatra saṁsthitavatāṁ raktānāṁ poṣakaṁ bhavet iti ca . dehasthe kṛṣṇavarṇe (jaḍula) 3 cihnabhede jatuke pu° amaraḥ 4 alagardhe jalavyāle (kālaḍhoḍā) sarpe pu° strī śabdara° . anitye varṇe tena rakte cārthe kālācca pa° kan . kālaka kālavarṇena rakte 5 paṭādau tri° tasya varṇasyānityatvāt rāgeṇa raktatayā’nityatvācca tathātvam . striyāṁ ṭāp . kālikā śāṭī si° kau° . vījagaṇitokte 6 avyaktarāśisaṁ jñābhede pu° avyaktaśabde 467 pṛ° vivṛtiḥ . |
कृष्ण – kṛṣṇa | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kṛṣṇa mf (“ā”) n. black, dark, dark-blue (opposed to “śveta, śukla,
rohita”, and “aruṇa”) &c. mf (“ā”) n. wicked, evil kṛṣṇa m. (with or without “pakṣa”) the dark half of the lunar month from full to new moon kṛṣṇa m. the fourth or Kali-yuga kṛṣṇa mf (“ā”) n. (“kṛṣṇas”) m. black (the colour) or dark-blue (which is often confounded with black by the Hindūs) kṛṣṇa m. the antelope kṛṣṇa m. a kind of animal feeding on carrion (“kṛṣṇa”) kṛṣṇa m. the Indian cuckoo or Kokila (cf. kṛṣṇa m. a crow kṛṣṇa m. Carissa Carandas kṛṣṇa m. N. of one of the poets of the (descended from Aṅgiras) kṛṣṇa m. (a son of Devakī and pupil of Ghora āṅgirasa) kṛṣṇa m. N. of a celebrated Avatār of the god Viṣṇu, or sometimes identified with Viṣṇu himself ([ v, 2563; xiv, 1589 ff. 2359 &c.]) as distinct from his ten Avatārs or incarnations (in the earlier legends he appears as a great hero and teacher [; in the more recent he is deified, and is often represented as a young and amorous shepherd with flowing hair and a flute in his hand; the following are a few particulars of his birth and history as related in 3304 ff. and in the Purāṇas &c.: Vasu-deva, who was a descendant of Yadu and Yayāti, had two wives, Rohiṇī and Devakī; the latter had eight sons of whom the eighth was Kṛiṣṇa; Kaṁsa, king of Mathurā and cousin of Devakī, was informed by a prediction that one of these sons would kill him; he therefore kept Vasu-deva and his wife in confinement, and slew their first six children; the seventh was Balarāma who was saved by being abstracted from the womb of Devakī and transferred to that of Rohiṇī; the eighth was Kṛiṣṇa who was born with black skin and a peculiar mark on his breast; his father Vasu-deva managed to escape from Mathurā with the child, and favoured by the gods found a herdsman named Nanda whose wife Yaśo-dā had just been delivered of a son which Vasu-deva conveyed to Devakī after substituting his own in its place. Nanda with his wife Yaśo-dā took the infant Kṛiṣṇa and settled first in Gokula or Vraja, and afterwards in Vṛindāvana, where Kṛiṣṇa and Bala-rāma grew up together, roaming in the woods and joining in the sports of the herdsmen’s sons; Kṛiṣṇa as a youth contested the sovereignty of Indra, and was victorious over that god, who descended from heaven to praise Kṛiṣṇa, and made him lord over the cattle [ 3787 ff.; 7456 ff. ; Kṛiṣṇa is described as sporting constantly with the Gopīs or shepherdesses [ 4078 ff.; 8301 ff. of whom a thousand became his wives, though only eight are specified, Rādhā being the favourite [ 6694 ff.; 9177 ff. ; Kṛiṣṇa built and fortified a city called Dvārakā in Gujarāt, and thither transported the inhabitants of Mathurā after killing Kaṁsa; Kṛiṣṇa had various wives besides the Gopīs, and by Rukmiṇī had a son Pradyumna who is usually identified with Kāma-deva; with Jains, Kṛiṣṇa is one of the nine black Vasu-devas; with Buddhists he is the chief of the black demons, who are the enemies of Buddha and the white demons) kṛṣṇa m. N. of an attendant in Skanda’s retinue kṛṣṇa m. of an Asura 12936 on kṛṣṇa m. of a king of the Nāgas kṛṣṇa m. of Arjuna (the most renowned of the Pāṇḍu princes, so named apparently from his colour as a child) kṛṣṇa m. of Vyāsa 11089 kṛṣṇa m. of Hārita see “-hārita” kṛṣṇa m. of a son of śuka by Pīvarī (teacher of the Yoga) 980 ff. kṛṣṇa m. of a pupil of Bharad-vāja kṛṣṇa m. of Havir-dhāna 83 kṛṣṇa m. of a son of Arjuna 1892 kṛṣṇa m. of an adopted son of A-samaṇjas, 2039 kṛṣṇa m. of a chief of the Andhras kṛṣṇa m. of the author of a on the kṛṣṇa m. of a poet kṛṣṇa m. of the author of a on the Dayā-bhāga kṛṣṇa m. of the son of Keśavārka and grandson of Jayāditya kṛṣṇa m. of the father of Tāna-bhaṭṭa and uncle of Raṅga-nātha kṛṣṇa m. of the father of Dāmodara and uncle of Malhaṇa kṛṣṇa m. of the father of Prabhūjika and uncle of Vidyā-dhara kṛṣṇa m. of the father of Madana kṛṣṇa m. of the grammarian Rāma-candra kṛṣṇa m. of the son of Vāruṇendra and father of Lakṣmaṇa kṛṣṇa m. of the father of Hīra-bhaṭṭa (author of the called Carakabhāṣya, and of the work Sāhitya-sudhā-samudra) kṛṣṇa m. N. of a hell kṛṣṇa mf (“ā”) n. (“au”) m. du. Kṛiṣṇa and Arjuna kṛṣṇa m. pl. N. of the śūdras in śālmala-dvīpa kṛṣṇa mf (“ā”) n. (“ā”) f. a kind of leech kṛṣṇa m. a kind of venomous insect kṛṣṇa m. N. of several plants (Piper longum ; the Indigo plant ; a grape ; a Punar-navā with dark blossoms ; Gmelina arborea ; Nigella indica ; Sinapis ramosa ; Vernonia anthelminthica ; = “kākolī” ; a sort of Sārivā kṛṣṇa m. a kind of perfume (= “parpaṭī”) kṛṣṇa m. N. of Draupadī kṛṣṇa m. of Durgā kṛṣṇa m. of one of the seven tongues of fire kṛṣṇa m. of one of the mothers in Skanda’s retinue kṛṣṇa m. of a Yoginī kṛṣṇa m. (with or without “gaṅgā”) N. of the river Kistna kṛṣṇa mf (“ā”) n. (“ī”) f. night kṛṣṇa mf (“ā”) n. (“am”) n. blackness, darkness, i, 123, 1 and 9 kṛṣṇa m. the black part of the eye kṛṣṇa m. the black spots in the moon kṛṣṇa m. a kind of demon or spirit of darkness kṛṣṇa m. black pepper kṛṣṇa m. black Agallochum kṛṣṇa m. iron kṛṣṇa m. lead kṛṣṇa m. antimony kṛṣṇa m. blue vitriol kṛṣṇa m. ([cf. “kārṣṇa”, &c.; cf. also Russ. ‘cernyi’, “black.”]) kṛṣṇa Nom. P. “-ṣṇati”, to behave or act like Kṛiṣṇa Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 kṛṣṇa a. [kṛṣ-nak] (1) Black, dark, dark-blue. (2) Wicked, evil. –ṣṇaḥ (1) The black colour. (2) The black antelope. (3) A crow. (4) The (Indian) cuckoo. (5) The dark half of a lunar month (from full to new moon). (6) The Kali age. (7) Viṣṇu in his eighth incarnation, born as the son of Vasudeva and Devakī. [Kṛṣṇa is the most celebrated hero of Indian mythology and the most popular of all the deities. Though the real son of Vasudeva and Devakī and thus a cousin of Kamsa, he was, for all practical purposes, the son of Nanda and Yaśodā by whom he was brought up and in whose house he spent his childhood. It was here that his divine character began to be gradually discovered, when he easily crushed the most redoubtable demons, such as Baka, Pūtanā &c., that were sent to kill him by Kamsa, and performed many other feats of surprising strength. The chief companions of his youth were the Gopis or wives of the cowherds of Gokula, among whom Rādhā was his special favourite; (cf. Jayadeva’s Gitagovinda). He killed Kamsa, Naraka, Keśin, Ariṣṭa and a host of other powerful demons. He was a particular friend of Arjuna, to whom he acted as charioteer in the great war, and his staunch support of the cause of the Pāṇḍavas was the main cause of the overthrow of the Kauravas. On several critical occasions, it was Kṛṣṇa’s assistance and inventive mind that stood the Pāṇḍavas in good stead. After the general destruction of the Yādavas at Prabhāsa, he was killed unintentionally by a hunter named Jaras who shot him with an arrow mistaking him at a distance for a deer. He had more than 16000 wives, but Rukmiṇi and Satyabhāma, (as also Rādhā) were his favourites. He is said to have been of dark-blue or cloud-like colour; cf. bahiriva malinataraṁ tava kṛṣṇa manopi bhaviṣyati nūna Gīt. 8. His son was Pradyumna]. (8) N. of Vyāsa, the reputed author of the Mahābhārata. (9) N. of Arjuna. (10) Aloe wood. (11) The Supreme spirit. (12) Black pepper. (13) Iron. –ṣṇā (1) N. of Draupadī, wife of the Pāṇḍavas; Ki. 1. 26. (2) N. of a river in the Deccan that joins the sea at Masulipattam. (3) A kind of poisonous insect. (4) N. of several plants. (5) A grape. (6) A kind of perfume. (7) An epithet of Durgā. (8) One of the 7 tongues of fire. –ṣṇī A dark night. –ṣṇaṁ (1) Blackness, darkness (moral also). (2) Iron. (3) Antimony. (4) The black part of the eye. (5) Black pepper. (6) Lead. (7) An inauspicious act. (8) Money acquired by gambling. — Comp. –aguru n. a kind of sandal-wood. –acalaḥ an epithet of the mountain Raivataka. –ajinaṁ the skin of the black antelope. –adhvan, –arcis m. an epithet of fire; cf. kṛṣṇavartman. –ayas n., –ayasaṁ, –āmiṣaṁ iron, crude or black iron. –aṣṭamī, janmāṣṭamī the 8th day of the dark half of Śrāvaṇa when Kṛṣṇa was born; also called gokulāṣṭamī. –āvāsaḥ the holy fig-tree. –udaraḥ a kind of snake. –kaṁdaṁ a red lotus. –karman a. of black deeds, criminal, wicked, depraved, guilty, sinful. –kākaḥ a raven. –kāyaḥ a buffalo. –kāṣṭhaṁ a kind of sandal-wood, agallochum. –kohalaḥ a gambler. –gaṁgā the river kṛṣṇaveṇī. –gati fire: āyodhate kṛṣṇagatiṁ sahāyaṁ R. 6. 42. –garbhāḥ (f. pl.) 1. the pregnant wives of the demon Kṛṣṇa. –2. waters in the interiors of the clouds. –godhā a kind of poisonous insect. –grīvaḥ N. of Śiva. –caṁcukaḥ a kind of pea. –caṁdraḥ N. of Vasndeva. –cara a. what formerly belonged to Kṛṣṇa. –cūrṇaṁ rust of iron. –tāmraṁ a kind of sandal wood. –tāraḥ 1. a species of antelope. –2. an antelope (in general). –dehaḥ a bee. –dhanaṁ money got by foul means. –dvaipāyanaḥ N. of Vyāsa: tamahamarāgamakṛṣṇa kṛṣṇadvaipāyanaṁ vaṁde Ve. 1. 4. –pakṣaḥ the dark half of a lunar month. –2. an epithet of Arjuna. –padī a female with black feet. –paviḥ an epithet of Agni. –piṁgala a. dark-brown. ( –lā) N. of Durgā. –mṛgaḥ the black antelope; śṛṁge kṛṣṇamṛgasya vāmanayanaṁ kaṁḍūyamānāṁ mṛgīṁ S. 6. 16. –mukhaḥ, –vaktraḥ, –vadanaḥ the blackfaced monkey. –yajurvedaḥ the Taittirīya or black Yajurveda. –yāmaḥ an epithet of Agni. –raktaḥ dark-red colour. –rūpya= -cara q. v. –lavaṇaṁ 1. a kind of black salt. –2. a factitious salt. –lohaḥ the loadstone. –varṇaḥ 1. black colour. –2. N. of Rahu. –3. a Śūdra. –vartman m. 1. fire; R. 11. 42; Ms. 2. 94. –2. N. of Rāhu. –3. a low man, profligate, black-guard. –viṣāṇā Ved. the horns of the black antelope. –veṇī N. of a river. –śakuniḥ a crow. –śāraḥ, –sāraḥ, –sāraṁgaḥ the spotted antelope; kṛṣṇasāre dadaccakṣustvayi cādhijyakārmuke S. 1. 6, V. 4. 31. –śṛṁgaḥ a buffalo. –sakhaḥ, –sārathiḥ an epithet of Arjuna. ( –khī) cummin seed. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch kṛṣṇa 1) adj. f. ā oxyt. Uṇ. 3, 4. ŚĀNT. 1, 12. “schwarz, dunkel” (Gegens. śveta, śukla; rohita, aruṇa) AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. TRIK. 3, 3, 123. H. 1397. 17. an. 2, 136. MED. ṇ. 8. nabhaḥ ṚV. 8, 85, 14. tamaḥ AV. 5, 3, 11. rātriḥ 13, 3, 26. rajaḥ ṚV. 1, 35, 2. 4. 9. ema 58, 4. tvak 130, 8. 9, 41, 1. abhvam 1, 140, 5. 92, 5. lomāni ŚAT. BR. 1, 1, 4, 2. śakuna 14, 1, 1, 31. ṚV. 10, 16, 6. AV. 7, 64, 1. Kuh ŚAT. BR. 2, 2, 4, 15. 9, 2, 3, 30. Pferd LĀṬY. 3, 1. Kleid ŚAT. BR. 5, 2, 5, 17. Schuhe KĀTY. ŚR. 22, 4, 21. anyadrocate kṛṣṇamanyat ṚV. 3, 55, 11. (oṣadhe) rāme kṛṣṇe asikni ca AV. 1, 23, 1. 8, 7, 1. ṚV. 8, 41, 10. 82, 13. VS. 24, 1. 10. 40. AV. 5, 23, 4. TS. 5, 2, 4, 2. 3, 1, 4. 4, 9, 3. kṛṣṇā asedhadapa sadmano jāḥ ṚV. 6, 47, 21. 8, 62, 18. yasyāṁ kṛṣṇamaruṇaṁ ca saṁhite ahorātre vihite bhūmyāmadhi AV. 12, 1, 52. kṛṣṇaṁ ca varṇamaruṇaṁ ca saṁ dhuḥ ṚV. 1, 73, 7. KĀTY. ŚR. 7, 3, 23. puruṣaḥ kṛṣṇaḥ piṅgākṣaḥ ŚAT. BR. 11, 6, 1, 7. 13. (ṛtvik) anatikṛṣṇo ‘natiśvetaḥ (Sch.: = nātibālo nātivṛddhaḥ) LĀṬY. in Ind. St. 1, 51. lohitakṛṣṇavarṇā (v. l. lohitaśuklakṛṣṇā) ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 4, 5. tila SUŚR. 1, 377, 13. asau sukṛṣṇo vihagaḥ kokilaḥ R. 2, 52, 2. VET. 4, 8. H. 49. kṛṣṇanetra “schwarzäugig”, ein Beiw. Śiva’s MBH. 14, 200. kṛṣṇavāsa 13,882. kṛṣṇavāsas R. 2, 69, 14. kṛṣṇa mit und ohne pakṣa “die dunkle Monatshälfte, die Zeit vom Vollmond bis zum Neumond” AK. 1, 1, 3, 12. M. 1, 66. 6, 20. 11, 216. YĀJÑ. 3, 324. BHAG. 8, 25. SUŚR. 1, 19, 6. kṛṣṇacaturdaśī “der 14te Tag der dunklen Monatshälfte” TRIK. 1, 1, 107. KATHĀS. 25, 180. VET. 3, 15. “schwarz” in moralischem Sinne so v. a. “böse” (s. kṛṣṇakarman). kṛṣṇīkaroti, kṛṣṇībhavati, kṛṣṇīsyāt VOP. 7, 82. — 2) m. a) “die schwarze Farbe” AK. TRIK. H. H. an. — b) parox. “die schwarze Antilope” (in einigen Veda – Stellen ist ein anderes, aasfressendes Thier gemeint): kṛṣṇo mṛgasaṁyoge (ādyudātto bhavati) VS. PRĀT. 2, 25. ŚĀNT. 1, 12. ākhare kṛṣṇā iṣirā anartiṣuḥ ṚV. 10, 94, 5. VS. 2, 1. 24, 36. TS. 5, 2, 6, 5. 6, 1, 3, 1. śune kroṣṭre mā śarīrāṇi kartamaliklavebhyo gṛdhrebhyo ye ca kṛṣṇā (die Betonung wird wohl zu ändern sein) aviṣyavaḥ AV. 11, 2, 2. ŚAT. BR. 1, 1, 4, 1. 3, 2, 1, 28. BHĀG. P. 3, 10, 20. 8, 2, 20. Vgl. kṛṣṇamṛga, kṛṣṇaviṣāṇā, kṛṣṇājina. — c) “Krähe” H. an. MED. — d) “der indische Kuckuck” H. an. VIŚVA im ŚKDR. Vgl. R. 2, 52, 2. — e) N. eines Strauchs, “Carissa Carandas Lin.” (karamardaka), ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — f) “die dunkle Monatshälfte” (s. u. 1.) am Ende. — g) “das vierte” Juga (kali) H. an. — h) N. pr. oxyt. oder parox. ŚĀNT. 2, 13. parox. ṚV. 8, 74, 3. 4 (nach der ANUKR. ein Āñgirasa). KAUṢ. BR. 30, 9 in Ind. St. 1, 190. 3, 214 (Kāṇva und Āñgirasa). kṛṣṇo devakīputraḥ ein Schüler des ghora āṅgirasaḥ CHĀND. UP. 3, 17, 6. Der im MBH. verherrlichte Held und treue Bundesgenosse der Pāṇḍava, der Yādava Kṛṣṇa, ist gleichfalls ein Sohn der Devakī von Vasudeva. Er verbringt seine Jugend, um den Nachstellungen Kaṁsa’s zu entgehen, beim Hirten Nanda und dessen Frau Yaśodā und gilt für deren Sohn. Hieraus hat man schliessen wollen, dass Kṛṣṇa in der älteren Sage der wirkliche Sohn des Kuhhirten und seiner Frau gewesen sei, wogegen aber zu bemerken ist, dass eine spätere Anknüpfung an die in einer älteren Schrift auftretende Devakī Kṛṣṇa keinen besondern Glanz verliehen hätte, und dass hierdurch die natürliche Verbindung mit dem in der CHĀND. UP. erwähnten Lehrer Kṛṣṇa ohne Noth zerrissen würde. Kṛṣṇa ist in der älteren Sage ein vergötterter Held und Lehrer (vgl. die BHAGAVADGĪTĀ), in der jüngeren tritt neben dem siegreichen Helden auch der dem Liebesgenuss überaus ergebene junge Hirt hervor. Schon im MBH. wird Kṛṣṇa als Gottheit betrachtet und mit Viṣṇu identificirt, so z. B. 14, 1589. 1591. kṛṣirbhūvācakaḥ śabdo ṇaśca nirvṛttivācakaḥ. viṣṇustadbhāvayogācca kṛṣṇo bhavati sāttvataḥ.. 5, 2563. HARIV. 2359. fgg. Vgl. hierüber LIA. I, 488. Seine Geburt wird erzählt HARIV. 3304. fgg. VP. 502. fgg. hat Tausende von Frauen, unter denen acht besonders hervorgehoben werden, HARIV. 6694. fgg. 9177. fgg. VP. 427. fg. 573. fg. 578. 590. seine Liebesspiele mit den Hirtinnen HARIV. 4078. fgg. 8301. fgg. VP. 531. GĪT. sein Kampf mit Indra HARIV. 3787. fgg. 7456. fgg. VP. 522. fgg. 584. fgg. Indra von Kṛṣṇa besiegt, weiht seinen Nebenbuhler zum König der Kühe: ahaṁ kilendro devānāṁ tvaṁ gavāmindratāṁ gataḥ.. govinda iti lokāstvāṁ stoṣyanti bhuvi śāśvatam. mamopari yathendrastvaṁ sthāpito gobhirīśvaraḥ.. upendra iti kṛṣṇa tvāṁ gāsyanti divi devatāḥ. HARIV. 4004. fgg. Kṛṣṇa ist der Vater Pradjumna’s oder des Liebesgottes; dieser heisst daher: kṛṣṇaja 9322. kṛṣṇanandana 9331. kṛṣṇasūnu 9324. WEBER hat die Ansicht ausgesprochen, dass eine Bekanntschaft mit Christus und dem Christenthum stark auf die Entwickelung der Sage von Kṛṣṇa eingewirkt habe, eine Ansicht, die an LASSEN einen entschiedenen Gegner gefunden hat. Ind. St. 1, 400. 2, 398. fgg. 409. fg. ZdmG.VI, 92. fgg. LIA. II, 1106. fgg. Die Lexicographen führen kṛṣṇa als Beinamen von viṣṇu auf, AK. 1, 1, 1, 13. TRIK. 1, 1, 31. 3, 3, 123. H. 215. H. an. MED. Im System der Jaina ist Kṛṣṇa einer der neun “schwarzen” Vāsudeva H. 697. Bei den Buddhisten erscheint Kṛṣṇa als Haupt der “schwarzen” Dämonen, welche als Gegner von Buddha und der “weissen” Dämonen auftreten, LALIT. 147. 287. 289. 325. Einen andern Charakter trägt Kṛṣṇa ebend. 127. 166. — Den Namen Kṛṣṇa führen ferner: ein König der Nāga MBH. 2, 360. BURN. Intr. 269. — ein Asura HARIV. 12936. SĀY. zu ṚV. 1, 101, 1. — Arjuna, der Sohn Pāṇḍu’s, H. an. MED. kṛṣṇa ityeva daśamaṁ nāma cakre pitā mama. kṛṣṇāvadātasya sataḥ priyatvādbālakasya vai.. MBH. 4, 1389. Der du. kṛṣṇau bezeichnet den Gott Kṛṣṇa und Arjuna 1, 8287. 3, 8279. — Vyāsa TRIK. 3, 3, 123. H. an. MED. MBH. 1, 60. dvaipāyanena kṛṣṇena (vgl. kṛṣṇadvaiyāyana) 2, 2573. yo vyasya vedāṁścaturo bhagavānṛṣiḥ. loke vyāsatvamāpede kārṣṇyātkṛṣṇatvameva ca.. 1, 4236. HARIV. 11089. — Kṛṣṇa Hārīta Ind. St. 1, 391, N. — ein Sohn Śuka’s von der Pīvarī, ein Lehrer des Joga, HARIV. 980. fg. — ein Schüler Bharadvāja’s KATHĀS. 7, 15. — Kṛṣṇa Dāśārha LIA. I, Anh. XXVIII. — ein Sohn Havirdhāna’s HARIV. 83. VP. 106. BHĀG. P. 4, 24, 8. — ein Sohn Arjuna’s HARIV. 1892. — ein Adoptivsohn von Asamañjas 2039. — ein Fürst der Andhra VP. 472. — verschiedene Autoren, namentlich Scholiasten COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 452. fg. Verz. d. B. H. No. 109 u.s.w. — śrīkṛṣṇa ebend. No. 739 u.s.w. — i) Name einer Hölle VP. 207. 209. — 3) f. kṛṣṇā a) (sc. śatapadī) “ein best. giftiges Insect” SUŚR. 2, 290, 3. — b) N. verschiedener Pflanzen: “Piper longum Lin.” AK. 2, 4, 3, 15. TRIK. 3, 3, 124. H. 421. H. an. MED. HĀR. 261 (masc.); “die Indigopflanze; der Weinstock mit dunklen Trauben” H. an. MED. = nīlapunarnavā; gambhārī; kṛṣṇajīraka; sārivāviśeṣa; rājasarṣapa RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. = somarājī; kākolī JAṬĀDH. im ŚKDR. – SUŚR. 1, 162, 16. 2, 88, 1. 206, 5. 222, 12. 322, 12. 439, 19. 504, 5. 506, 7. kṛṣṇāvījam 330, 16. — c) “ein best. Parfum” (s. parpaṭī) BHĀVAPR. im ŚKDR. — d) ein Bein. der Draupadi TRIK. 2, 8, 18. 3, 3, 124. H. 710. H. an. MED. MBH. 3, 10. DRAUP. 3, 5. ARJ. 3, 1. LIA. I, 641. fg. — e) ein Bein. der Durgā H. ś. 47. MBH. 4, 184. Vgl. kālī. — f) N. einer der sieben Zungen des Feuers H. 1099, Sch. Vgl. kālī. — g) N. pr. eines Flusses, = kṛṣṇasamudbhavā, kṛṣṇagaṅgā, kṛṣṇaveṇyā RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. VP. 184. kṛṣṇā gaṅgā MBH. 13, 4888. Vgl. LIA. I, 167 und kṛṣṇagaṅgā. — 4) f. kṛṣṇī “die Nacht”: riṇakti kṛṣṇīraruṣāya panthām ṚV. 7, 71, 1. — 5) n. a) “Schwärze, Dunkelheit”: śukrā kṛṣṇādajaniṣṭa ṚV. 1, 123, 9. 1. 10, 127, 7. — b) “das Schwarze im Auge” ŚAT. BR. 10, 5, 2, 7. 12, 8, 2, 26. 13, 4, 2, 3. 14, 5, 2, 3. SUŚR. 1, 10, 18. 2, 303, 13. 311, 12. — c) “Dunkelwesen” (von Dämonen): pañcāśatkṛṣṇā ni vapaḥ sahasrā ṚV. 4, 16, 13. — d) “schwarzer Pfeffer” AK. 2, 9, 36. TRIK. H. 419. H. an. MED. — e) “schwarzes Aloeholz” RATNAM. im ŚKDR. — f) “Eisen” TRIK. H. an. MED. — g) “Blei” H. ś. 159. — h) “Spiessglanz” H. 1051. — i) “blauer Vitriol” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — Vgl. kārṣṇa, kārṣṇāyana, kārṣṇi, kārṣṇya. kṛṣṇa 2) h) N. pr. eines Wesens im Gefolge Skanda’s MBH. 9, 2559. — 3) f) HALĀY. 1, 68. — g) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 10,a, N. 1. 16,b,16. 102,a, No. 158. -revāsaṁgama 65,b,42. HALL 75. — h) N. pr. einer der Mütter im Gefolge Skanda’s MBH. 9, 2640. — 5) b) “das Schwarze im Monde” TBR. 1, 2, 1, 2. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 kṛṣṇa (ŚRĪ KṚṢṆA). Born in the Yādava dynasty as the son of Vasudeva and Devakī, Śrī Kṛṣṇa was the ninth of the ten incarnations of Mahāviṣṇu. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 kṛṣṇa kṛṣṇa, i. e. kṛṣ + na (the origin of the signification is dubious). I. adj., f. ṇā. 1. Black, or dark blue, Rām. 3, 55, 5. 2. With or without pakṣa, m. The dark half of a month, from the full moon to that of the new moon, Man. 1, 66; 6, 20. II. m. 1. kṛṣṇa, The most celebrated incarnation of Viṣṇu, MBh. 14, 1589. 2. The black antelope, Bhāg. P. 3, 10, 20. III. f. ṇā. 1. A name of Durgā, MBh. 4, 184. 2. The name of several plants, Suśr. 1, 162, 16. — Comp. ati-, adj. very black, Pañc. 104, 15. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 kṛṣṇa a. black, dark. –m. (±pakṣa) the dark half month, the black antelope (mostly kṛṣṇa); N. of an ancient hero and teacher, later as the god Kṛṣṇa identified with Viṣṇu; du. kṛṣṇau = Kṛṣṇa and Arjuna. f. kṛṣṇā a. black kind of leech. N. of sev. plants, E. of Durgā and Draupadī; f. kṛṣṇī night. n. blackness, darkness. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 kṛṣṇa kṛṣ-ṇa, n. black; dark; w. pakṣa, dark half of the month (from full new moon); m. (kṛṣṇa) black antelope; N. of a god (incarnation of Viṣṇu): du. Kṛṣṇa and Arjuna; ā, f. kind of leech; N. of several plants; ep. of Draupadī, and of Durgā; n. blackness, darkness. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 kṛṣṇa pu° kṛṣa–nak . bhagavato’vatārabhede vāsudeve 1 devakīnandane . kṛṣirbhūvācakaḥ śabdaḥ ṇaśca nirvṛtivācakaḥ . tayoraikyaṁ paraṁ brahma kṛṣṇaityabhidhīyate ityukte 2 parabrahmaṇi, 3 vedavyāse, 4 arjune madhyamapāṇḍave ca . kṛṣṇavarṇatvāt 5 kokile, viśvaḥ 6 kāke, medi° karamardake (karamacā) 7 vṛkṣe, śabdara° 8 nīle, varṇe 9 tadvati tri° amaraḥ 10 kālāguruṇi rājani° . 11 aśubhakarmaṇi ca na° . kṛṣṇakarmā amaraḥ 12 draupadyāṁ, 13 nīlīvṛkṣe, 14 pippalyāṁ, 15 drākṣāyāṁ, strī medi° 16 nīlapunarnavāyām, 17 kṛṣṇajīrake, 18 gāmmāryā 19 kaṭukāyām, 20 sāvirābhede 21 rājasarṣape, rājani° 22 parpaṭyāṁ, bhāvapra° . 23 kākolyāṁ, 24 somarājyāñca strī ṭāp jaṭā° kṛṣṇavarṇatvācca tāsāṁ tathātvam 25 dhanamede na° kṛṣṇadhanaśabdī vivṛtiḥ . 26 nīlāñjane, 27 lauhe, 28 marice ca pu° jaṭādharaḥ . tatra bhagavadavatāraviśeṣaḥ atha bhādrapade māsi kṛṣṇāṣṭamyāṁ kalau yuge . aṣṭāviṁśatime jātaḥ kṛṣṇo’sau devakīsutaḥ brahmapu° . vasudevadevakyau ca kaśyapāditī . tau ca varuṇasya goharaṇāt brahmaṇaḥ śāpena gopālatvamāpatuḥ . yathāha harivaṁ° 56 a° ityambupatinā prokto varuṇenāhamacyuta! . gavāṁ kāraṇatattvajñaḥ kaśyape śāpamutsṛjam . yenāṁśena hṛtā gāvaḥ kaśyapena mahātmanā . sa tenāṁśena jagatīṁ gatvā gopatvameṣyati . yā ca sā surabhirnāma aditiśca surāraṇī . ubhe te tasya vai bhārye saha tenaiva yāsyataḥ . tābhyāṁ saha sa gopatve kaśyapo bhuvi raṁsyate . tadasya kaśyapasyāṁśastejasā kaśyapopamaḥ vasudeva iti khyāto goṣu tiṣṭhati bhūtale . girirgovardhano nāma mathurāyāstvadūrataḥ . tatrāsau goṣvabhirataḥ kaṁsasya karadāyakaḥ . tasyabhāryādvayañcaiva aditiḥ surabhistathā . devakī rohiṇī caiva vasudevasya dhīmataḥ . tatrāvatara lokānāṁ bhavāya madhusūdana! . jayāśīrvacanaistvete vardhayanti divaukasaḥ . ātmānamātmanā hi tvamavatārya mahītale . devakīṁ rohiṇīñcaiva garbhābhyāṁ paritoṣaya . tatratvaṁ śiśurevādau gopālakṛtalakṣaṇaḥ . vardhayasva mahābāho! purā traivikrame yathā .. chādayitvātmanātmānaṁ māyayā goparūpayā . gopakanyāsahasrāṇi ramayaṁścara medinīm . gāśca te rakṣitā viṣṇo! vanāni paridhāvataḥ . vanamālāparikṣiptaṁ dhanyā drakṣyanti te vapuḥ . viṣṇo! padmapalāśākṣa! gopālavasatiṅgate . bāle tvayi mahābāho . loko bālatvameṣyati . tvadbhaktāḥ puṇḍarīkākṣa! tava cittavaśānugāḥ . goṣu gopā bhaviṣyanti sahāyāḥ satatantava . vane cārayato gāstu goṣṭheṣu paridhāvataḥ . majjato yamunāyāntu ratimāpsyanti te bhṛśam . jīvitaṁ vasudevasya bhaviṣyati sujīvitam . yastvayā tāta ityuktaḥ sa putra iti vakṣyati . atha vā kasyaṁ putratvaṁ gacchethāḥ kaśyapādṛte . kā vā dhārayituṁ śaktā viṣṇo! tvāmaditiṁ vinā . yogenātmasamutthena gacchatva vijayāya vai iti viṣṇuṁ prati brahmoktiḥ . tābhyāṁ tasyotpattikathā ca tatra 60 a° yathā yadarthaṁ sapta te garbhāḥ kaṁsena vinipātitāḥ . tantu garbhaṁ prayatnena rarakṣustasya rakṣiṇaḥ . sa tatra garbhavasatau vasatyātmecchayā hariḥ . samadhatta yaśodā’pi garbhaṁ tadahareva tu . viṣṇoḥ śarīrajāṁ nidrāṁ viṣṇornirdeśakāriṇīm garbhakāle tvasaṁpūrṇe aṣṭame māsi te striyau . devakī ca yaśodā ca suṣuvāte samaṁ tadā . yāmeva rajanīṁ viṣṇurjajñe vṛṣṇikulaṁ prabhuḥ . tāmeva rajanīṁ kanyā yaśodāto vyajāyata . nandagopasya bhāryaikā vasudevasya cāparā . tulyakālaṁ hi garbhiṇyau yaśodā devakī tathā . devakyajanayadviṣṇuṁ yaśodā tāntu kanyakām . muhūrte’bhijite prāpte sārdharātre vibhūṣite . sāgarāḥ samakampanta celuśca dharaṇīdharāḥ . jajvaluścāgnayaḥ śāntā jāyamāne janārdane . śivāḥ saṁpravavurvātāḥ praśāntamabhavadrajaḥ . jyotīṁṣi vyatyakāśanta jāyamāne janārdane . abhijinnāma nakṣatraṁ jayantī nāma śarvarī . muhūrto vijayo nāma yatra jāto janārdanaḥ . avyaktaḥ śāśvataḥ kṛṣṇo harirnārāyaṇaḥ prabhuḥ . jāyate bhagavāṁstatra nayanairmohayan jagat . tato’natidūre vasudevastu taṁ rātrau jātaṁ puttramadhokṣajam . śrīvatsalakṣaṇaṁ dṛṣṭvā yutaṁ divyaiśca lakṣaṇaiḥ . uvāca vasudevastaṁ rūpaṁ saṁhara vai prabho! . bhīto’haṁ deva! kaṁsasya tasmādevaṁ vadāmyaham . mama puttrā hatāstena tava jyeṣṭhā’mbujekṣaṇa! . vaiśampāyana upāca . vasudevavacaḥ śrutvā rūpaṁ saṁharadacyutaḥ . anujñāpya pitṛtvena nandagopagṛhaṁ naya . vasudevastu saṁgṛhya dārakaṁ kṣiprameva ca . yaśodāyā gṛhaṁ rātrau viveśa sutavatsalaḥ . yaśodāyāstvavijñātastatra nikṣipya dārakam . gṛhītvā dārikāṁ tāñca devakīśayane nyasat . parivarte kṛte tābhyāṁ garbhābhyāṁ bhayaviklavaḥ . vasudevaḥ kṛtārtho vai nirjagāma niveśanāt . yathā rūpeṇa tasyāvirbhāvastathā rūpaṁ bhāga° 103 a° vaṇṇitam devakyāṁ devarūpiṇyāṁ viṣṇuḥ sarvaguhāśayaḥ . āvirāsīdyathā prācyāṁ diśīnduriva puṣkalaḥ . tamadbhutaṁ bālakamambujekṣaṇaṁ caturbhujaṁ śaṅkhagadādyudāyudham . śrīvatsalakṣmaṁgalaśobhikaustubhaṁ pītāmbaraṁ sāndrapayodasaubhagam . mahārghavaidūryakirīṭakuṇḍalatviṣā pariṣvaktasahasrakuntalam . uhṛāmakāñcyaṅgadakaṅkaṇādibhirvirocamānaṁ vasudeva aikṣata . savismayītphullavilocano hariṁ sutaṁ vilokyānakadundubhistadā . kṛṣṇāvatārotsavasambhramo’spṛśanmudā dvijebhyo’yutamāplutogavām . ityāvirbhārva varṇayitvā janma te mayyasau pāpomā vidyānmadhusūdana! . samudvije bhavaddhetoḥ kaṁsādahamadhīradhīḥ . upasaṁhara viśvātma nnadorūpamalaukikam . śaṅkhacakragadāpadmaśriyā juṣṭaṁ caturbhujam . viśvaṁ yadetat svatanau niśānte yathāvakāśaṁ puruṣaḥ paro bhavān . vibharti, so’yaṁ mama garbhajo’bhū daho nṛlokasya viḍambanaṁ tat . itthaṁ devakyāḥ prārthane tāṁ sāntvayitvā tasya prākṛtarūpadhāraṇaṁ tatraivoktaṁ yathā ityuktvā tāṁ haristūṣṇṇīṁ bhagavānātmamāyayā . pitroḥ saṁpaśyatoreva babhūva prākṛtaḥ śiśuḥ . evañca caturbhujarūpeṇotpattāvapi prākṛtarūpatvoktyā tasmādanantaraṁ dvibhujatvamiti vaiṣṇavā manyante . gītāyāntu tenaiva rūpeṇa caturbhujena sahasrabāho! bhava viśvamūrte! iti bhāratayuddhakāle tasya caturbhujatvakīrtanāt caturbhujatva mevāsīt śaṅkhacakrādyāyudhaśūnyatvena prākṛtatvamiti tu yuktamutpaśyāmaḥ . tasyedānīṁ janmasamayonirūpyate prāguktabrahmapu° kalau jātatvābhidhānāt kaliyugaevāsya prādurbhāvaḥ . yadi ca ekaikamanvantare bahavaḥ kalayaḥ sambhavanti tathāpi vartamānavaivasvatamanvantare aṣṭāviṁśatime mahāyuge yaḥ kalistatraivābhirmūtaḥ . tatrāpi jyotirnibandhe uccasthāḥ śaśibhaumacāndriśanayo lagnaṁ vṛṣolābhago jīvaḥ siṁhatulāliṣu kramavaśāt pūṣośanorāhavaḥ . naiśīthaḥ samayā’ṣṭamī budhadinaṁ bāhmarkṣamatra kṣaṇe śrīkṛṣṇābhidhamambujekṣaṇamabhūdāviḥ paraṁ brahma tat grahāṇāṁ viśeṣarāśyavasthānakāle tasyāvirbhāvokteḥ tādṛśasamayasya ca kaleḥ 647 varṣeṣu gataṣu sambhavaḥ kalau tataḥ pūrvaṁ tādṛśasamayāsambhavāt . rājataraṁṅgiṇyāṁ ca śateṣu ṣaṭsu sārdheṣu tryadhikeṣu ca bhūtale . kalergateṣu varṣāṇāma bhayan kurupāṇḍavāḥ ityanena kaleḥ 653 varṣeṣu gateṣu tatsamakālīnayoḥ kurupāṇḍavayorutpattiruktā atastasyāpi tatkālotpattikatvam . tadavatāracaritaṁ ca harivaṁ° 42 a° varṇitaṁ yathā aparaḥ keśavasyāyaṁ prādurbhāvo mahātmanaḥ . vikhyāto māthure kalpe sarvalokahitāya vai . yatra śālvañca maindañca kaṁsaṁ dvividameva ca . ariṣṭaṁ vṛṣabhaṁ keśiṁ pūtanāṁ daityadārikām . nāgaṁ kubalayāpīḍaṁ cānūraṁ muṣṭikaṁ tathā . daityānmānuṣadehasthān sūdayāmāma vīryavān . chinnaṁ bāhusahasrañca vāṇasyādbhutakarmaṇaḥ . narakaśca hataḥ saṅkhye yavanaśca sahābalaḥ . hṛtāni ca mahīpānāṁ sarvaratnāni tejasā . durāccārāśca nihatāḥ pārthivā ye mahītale . tasya ca kṛṣṇanāmatā gargeṇa tathā nāmakaraṇāt yathāha bhāga° 10 . 8 . 9 āsan vaṇṇāstrayohyasya grahṇato’nuyugaṁ tanūḥ . śukloraktastathā’pīta idānīṁ kṛṣṇatāṁ gataḥ iti apītaḥ śyāma ityarthaḥ bhāga° 11 a° yugāvatāre dvāpare śyāmamūrtitvokteḥ yathā kṛte śuklaścaturbāhurjaṭilo balkalāmbaraḥ . kṛṣṇājinopavītākṣān bibhraddaṇḍakamaṇḍalū . tretāyāṁ raktavarṇo’sau caturbāhustrimekhalaḥ . hiraṇyakeśastrayyātmā sruksruvādyu palakṣaṇaḥ . dvāpare bhagavān śyāmaḥ pītavāsā nijāyudhaḥ . śrīvatsādibhiraṅkaiśca lakṣaṇairupalakṣitaḥ . nānātantravidhānena kalāvapi yathā śṛṇu . kṛṣṇavarṇaṁ tviṣā’kṛṣṇaṁ sāṅgopāṅgāstrapārṣadaḥ . yajñai saṁkīrtanaprāyairyajantīha sumedhasaḥ . asya tannāmanirbacanaṁ ca bhā° u° 69 a° kṛṣirbhūvācakaḥ śabdoṇaśca nirvṛtivācakaḥ . viṣṇustadbhāvayogācca kṛṣṇobhavati sātvataḥ kalpabhede’pi vaivasvatamanoraṣṭāviṁśatime yuge yuge tasyābhi bhāṁvaḥ ataeva chā° u° kalpabhedādiprāyeṇaiva taddhaitat ghora āṅgirasaḥ kṛṣṇāya devakīputrāyoktvovāca ityuktam . vastutastasya bhagavadavatārāt bhinnatvameva tasya ghorāṅgirasaśiṣyatvokteḥ . parameśvarasya tathātvāsambhavāt . atastannāmni 29 aparasninneva kṛṣṇaśabdasya vṛttiḥ . kṛṣṇeti maṅgalaṁ nāma yasya vāci pravartate . masmībhavanti rājendra! mahāpātakakoṭayaḥ purā° . arjunasya tannāmanirvacanaṁ bhā° vi° 44 a° . kṛṣṇa ityeva daśamaṁ nāma cakre pitā mama . kṛṣṇāvadātasya sataḥ priyatvāt bālakasya ca . vyāsasya kārṣṇyāttathātvam yovyasya vedāṁścaturastapasā bhagavānṛṣiḥ . loke vyāsatvamāpade kārṣṇyāt kṛṣṇatvameva ca bhā° ā° 105 a° . kṛṣṇasyedam aṇ kārṣṇa tatsambandhini tri° kārṣṇaṁ vedamimaṁ vidvān śrāvayitvārthamaśnute bhā° ā° 1 a° ukte . apatye tu iñ . kārṣṇi tadapatye puṁstrī . candrahrāsakaraprathamādipañcadaśakalākriyārūpe pratipadādidarśāntātmakapañcadaśatithyātmake 30 kālabhede ardhamāse candravṛddhikaraḥ śuklaḥ kṛṣṇaścandrakṣayātmakaḥ ti° ta° ṣaṭtri° . indukalākṣayaprakāraḥ induśabde 611 pṛ° uktaḥ . tadupalakṣite 31 pitṛyāne śuklakṛṣṇe gatī hyete jagatāṁ śāśvate mate . ekayā yātyanāvṛttimanyayā vartate punaḥ gītā . pitṛyāne ca yathā kṛṣṇapakṣasaṁbandhastathā ātivāhikaśabde 651 pṛ° darśitam . dhūmorātristathā kṛṣṇaḥ ṣaṇmāsā dakṣiṇāyanam gītā . kṛṣṇapakṣābhimānini pitṛyānasthe karmiṇāmativāhake īśvaraniyojite 32 devabhede ātivāhikaśabda vivṛtiḥ . 33 dyūtādyupārjite dhane na° kṛṣṇadhanaśabde arthaśabde ca vivṛtiḥ . kṛṣṇasya bhāvaḥ ṣyañ . kārṣṇya tadbhāve na° kārṣṇyāt kṛṣṇatvameva ca bhā° ā° 105 a° . imanic . kṛṣṇiman tadbhāve pu° kṛṣṇimānaṁ dadhānena . tal, kṛṣṇatā strī, tva kṛṣṇala, na0, kṛṣṇavarṇe . kṛṣṇā’pi śuddheradhikaṁ vidhātṛbhiḥ māvaḥ . abhivṛṣya marucchasyān kṛṣṇameghastirodadhe raghuḥ . 34 netragate’śabhede akṣiśabde vivṛtiḥ . 35 kṛṣṇasāramṛge puṁstrī° eṇaḥ kṛṣṇaḥ sa kīrtitaḥ chando° pa° . kṛṣṇājinam |
कृष्णवर्ण – kṛṣṇavarṇa | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kṛṣṇavarṇa “kṛṣṇa-varṇa” mfn. of a black colour, dark-blue
Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch kṛṣṇavarṇa (kṛṣṇa + varṇa) adj. “von schwarzer Farbe, schwarz” H. 1238. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 kṛṣṇavarṇa a. black-coloured. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 kṛṣṇavarṇa kṛṣṇa-varṇa, a. black-coloured; -vartman, m. fire (black-tracked): (a) -vāla, a. black-tailed; -śakti, m. N.; -sarpa, m. kind of black snake; -sāra, a. chiefly black, spotted black and white; m. spotted antelope; (a) -sāraṅga, a.; m. f.; id.. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 kṛṣṇavarṇa pu° kṛṣṇo varṇo’sya . 1 rāhau grahe . rāhoḥ chāyārūpatvena tamorūpatyāt tathātvāropāt tathātvam kṛṣṇaḥ aśuddhī varṇaḥ . 2 śūdre pu° . karma° . kāle varṇe pu° kṛṣṇavarṇavati tri° . kṛṣṇavarṇaṁ tvipā’kṛṣṇam bhāgava° 11 ska° . |
गो – go | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899go “gaus” (acc. “gām” instr. “gavā” dat. “gave”, gen. abl. “gos” loc.
“gavi”; du. “gāvā” [Ved.], “gāvau”; pl. nom. “gāvas” acc. “gās” [rarely “gāvas” ii] instr. “gobhis” dat. abl. “gobhyas”, gen. “gavām” [once at the end of a Pāda at the end of Pādas only cf. “gonām” loc. “goṣu”) m. an ox f. a cow, (pl.) cattle, kine, herd of cattle &c. (in comp. before vowels [cf. “gav, gava”, qq. vv.; cf. also “gavām, gavi, gāṁ” ss.vv.; “gavāṁ vrata” N. of a Sāman; “gavāṁ tīrtha” see “go t-; goṣu-gam”, to set out for a battle [to conquer cows] ; “anything coming from or belonging to an ox or cow”, milk (generally pl.), flesh (only pl. ; “fat” ( x, 27, 22 ; = “go-ṣṭoma” (q.v.) (see also “go-āyus”); (pl.) “the herds of the sky”, the stars ; (m. [also f. rays of light (regarded as the herds of the sky, for which Indra fights with Vṛitra) 2943 &c.; m. the sign Taurus xl f. ; the sun (cf. “-putra”) ; the moon ; a kind of medicinal plant (“ṛṣabha”) ; a singer, praiser (fr. “gai”) ; “a goer”, horse (fr. 1. “gā”) on ; N. of two ṛiṣis of the (with the patr. āṅgirasa [ xvi] and Māyūka); N. of a man (who with Pushkara is said to be the “balādhyakṣa” of the sons and grandsons of Varuṇa) (cf. ; m. or f. (?) the sun’s ray called Suṣumṇa ; water f. pl., xi, 7, 50); an organ of sense ; the eye 70; a billion ; mf. the sky ; the thunderbolt on ; the hairs of the body ; f. an offering in the shape of a cow (= “dhenu” q.v.) ; a region of the sky ; ( i, 1) the earth (as the milk-cow of kings) &c.; (hence) the number “nine” ; = “go-vīthī” on ; a mother (cf. ; ( i, 11) speech, Sarasvatī (goddess of speech) ; voice, note (fr. “gai”) ; N. of Gaurī ; of the wife [or of a daughter-in-law of śuka (a daughter of the manes called Sukālas) 986 ; N. of a daughter of Kakut-stha and wife of Yayāti ; ([cf. [characters]; Lat. ‘bos’; Old Germ. ‘chuo’; Mod. Germ. ‘Kuh’; Eng. ‘cow’; Lett. ‘gohw’; cf. also [characters]; Goth. ‘gavi’ and Mod. Germ. ‘Gau’.]) Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 go m. f. (Nom. gauḥ) [gacchatyanena, gam karaṇe ḍo Tv.] (1) Cattle, kine (pl.). (2) Anything coming from a cow; such as milk, flesh, leather &c. (3) The stars. (4) The sky. (5) The thunder-bolt of Indra. (6) A ray of light. (7) A diamond. (8) Heaven. (9) An arrow. –f. (1) A cow; jugopa gorūpadharāmivorvī R. 2. 3; kṣīriṇyaḥ saṁtu gāvaḥ Mk. 10. 60. (2) The earth; dudoha gāṁ sa yajñāya R. 1. 26; gāmāttasārāṁ raghurapyavekṣya 5. 26, 11. 36; Bg. 15. 13; seko’nugṛhṇātu gāṁ Mu. 3. 2; Me. 30. (3) Speech, words; raghorudārāmapi gāṁ niśamya R. 5. 12, 2. 59; Ki. 4. 20. (4) The goddess of speech, Sarasvatī. (5) A mother. (6) A quarter of the compass. (7) Water (pl.). (8) The eye. (9) A region of the sky. –m. (1) A bull, an ox; asaṁjātakiṇaskaṁdhaḥ sukhaṁ svapiti gaurgaḍiḥ K. P. 10; Ms. 4. 72; cf. jaradgava. (2) The hair of the body. (3) An organ of sense. (4) The sign Taurus of the zodiac. (5) The sun. (6) The number ‘nine’ (in math.). (7) The moon. (8) A singer. (9) A billion. (10) A cowsacrifice. (11) A house. — Comp. –kaṁṭakaḥ, –kaṁ 1. a road or spot trodden down by oxen and thus made impassable. –2. the cow’s hoof. –3. the print of a cow’s hoof. –karṇa a. having cow’s ears. ( –rṇaḥ) 1. a cow’s ear. –2. a mule. –3. a snake. –4. a span (from the tip of the thumb to that of the ring-finger). –5. N. of a place of pilgrimage in the south, sacred to Śiva; śritagokarṇaniketamīśvaraṁ R. 8. 33. –6. a kind of deer. –7. a kind of arrow. –kirāṭā-kirāṭikā the Sārikā bird. –kilaḥ, –kīlaḥ 1. a plough. –2. a pestle. –kulaṁ 1. a herd of kine; vṛṣṭivyākulagokulāvanarasāduddhṛtya govardhanaṁ Gīt. 4; gākulasya tṛṣārtasya Mb. –2. a cow-house. –3. N. of a village (where Kṛṣṇa was brought up). –kulika a. 1. one who does not help a cow in the mud. –2. squint-eyed. –kulodbhavā an epithet of Durgā. –kṛtaṁ cow-dung. –kṣīraṁ cow’s milk. –kṣuraṁ –rakaṁ a cow’s-hoof. –khā a nail. –gṛṣṭiḥ a young cow which has had only one calf. –goyugaṁ a pair of oxen. –goṣṭhaṁ a cow-pen, cattle-shed. –graṁthiḥ 1. dried cowdung. –2. a cow-house. –grahaḥ capture of cattle. –grāsaḥ the ceremony of offering a morsel (of grass) to a cow when performing an expiatory rite. –ghātaḥ, –ghātakaḥ, –ghātin m. a cow-killer. –ghṛtaṁ 1. rain-water. –2. clarified butter coming from a cow. –ghna a. 1. destructive to cows. –2. one who has killed a cow. — 3. one for whom a cow is killed, a guest. –caṁdanaṁ a kind of sandal-wood. –cara a. 1. grazed over by cattle. –2. frequenting, dwelling, resorting to, haunting; pitṛsadmagocaraḥ Ku. 5. 77. –3. within the scope, power, or range of; avāṅmanasagocaraṁ R. 10. 15; so buddhi-, dṛṣṭi-, śravaṇa- &c. –4. moving on earth. –5. accessible to, attainable. –6. circulating, having a particular meaning, prevalent. ( –raḥ) 1. the range of cattle, pasturage; upāratāḥ paścimarātrigocarāt Ki. 4. 10. –2. (a) a district, department, province, sphere. (b) an abode, dwelling-place. –3. range of the organs of sense, an object of sense; śravaṇagocare tiṣṭha be within ear-shot; nayanagocaraṁ yā to become visible. –4. scope, range, in general; harturyāti na gocaraṁ Bh. 2. 16. –5. (fig.) grip, hold, power, influence, control; kaḥ kālasya na gocarāṁtaragataḥ Pt. 1. 146; gocarībhūtamakṣṇoḥ U. 6. 26; Māl. 5. 24; api nāma manāgavatīrṇo’si ratiramaṇabāṇagocaraṁ Māl. 1. –6. horizon. –7. the range of the planets from the Lagna or from each other. (gocarīkṛ to place within the range (of sight), make current.). –carman n. 1. a cow’s hide. –2. a particular measuse of surface thus defined by Vasiṣṭha: –daśahastena vaṁśena daśavaṁśān samaṁtataḥ . paṁca cābhyadhikān dadyādetadgocarma cocyate … -vasanaḥ an epithet of Śiva. –cārakaḥ cowherd. –cāraṇaṁ the tending or feeding of cows. –ja a. born in the earth (rice &c). –jaraḥ an old ox or bull. –jalaṁ the urine of a bull or cow. –jāgarikaṁ auspiciousness, happiness. (–kaḥ) a preparer of food, baker. –jāta a born in the heaven (gods). –tallajaḥ an excellent bull or cow. –tīrthaṁ a cowhouse. –traṁ [gāṁ bhūrmi trāyate trai-ka] 1. a cowpen. –2. a stable in general. –3. a family, race, lineage; gotreṇa māṭharo’smi Sk.; so kauśikagotrāḥ, vasiṣṭhagotrāḥ &c.; Ms. 3. 109, 9. 141. –4. a name, appellation; jagāda gotraskhalite ca kā na taṁ N. 1. 30; S. 6. 4; see -skhalita below; madgotrāṁkaṁ viracitapadaṁ geyamudgātukāmā Me. 86. –5. a multitude. –6. increase. –7. a forest. –8. a field. –9. a road. –10. possessions, wealth. –11. an umbrella, a parasol. –12. knowledge of futurity. –13. a genus, class, species. –14. a caste, tribe, caste according to families. (–traḥ) a mountain. (–trā) 1. a multitude of cows. –2. the earth. -kartṛ, –kārin m. the founder of a family. -kīlā the earth. -ja a. born in the same family, gentile, a relation; Y. 2. 135. -paṭaḥ a genealogical table, pedigree. -pravaraḥ the oldest member or founder of a family. -bhida m. an epithet of Indra; hṛdi kṣato gotrabhidapyamarṣaṇaḥ R. 3. 53, 6. 73; Ku. 2. 52. -skhalanaṁ, -skhalitaṁ blundering or mistaking in calling (one) by his name, calling by a wrong name; smarasi smara mekhalāguṇairuta gātraskhaliteṣu baṁdhanaṁ Ku. 4. 8. –da a. giving cows. (–daḥ) brain. (–dā) N. of the river Godāvarī. — datra a. Ved. giving cows. (–traḥ) an epithet of Indra. (–traṁ) a crown (protecting the head). –daṁta a. armed with a coat of mail. (–taṁ) 1. yellow orpiment. –2. a white fossil substance. –dānaṁ 1. the gift of a cow. –2. the ceremony of tonsure or cutting the hair; athāsya godānavidheranaṁtaraṁ R. 3. 33; (see Mallinātha’s explanation of the word); kṛtagodānamaṁgalāḥ U. 1; (Ram. explains the word differently). –3. the part of the head close to the right ear. –dāya a. intending to give cows. –dāraṇaṁ 1. a plough. –2. a spade, hoe. –dāvarī N. of a river in the south. –duh m., –duhaḥ ‘cow-milker’ a cowherd. –dohaḥ 1. the milking of cows. –2. the milk of cows. –3. the time of milking cows. — dohanaṁ 1. the time of milking cows. –2. the milking of cows. –dohanī a milk-pail. –dravaḥ the urine of a bull or cow. –dhanaṁ 1. a herd or multitude of cows, cattle. –2. possession of cows. (–naḥ) a broadpointed arrow. –dharaḥ a mountain. –dharmaḥ the law of cattle, rules relating to cattle. –dhuptaḥ, –dhūptaḥ 1. wheat. –2. the orange. -cūrṇaṁ wheat- flour; -saṁbhavaṁ a sour paste. –dhūliḥ ‘dust of the cows,’ the time of sunset or evening twilight (so called because cows, which generally return home at about sunset, raise up clouds of dust by their treading on the earth). –dhenuḥ a milch-cow with a calf. –dhraḥ a mountain. — naṁdā an epithet of the wife of Śiva. –naṁdī the female of the Sārasa bird. –nardaḥ 1. the (Indian) crane. –2. an epithet of Śiva (bellowing like a bull). –3. N. of a country. –nardīyaḥ an epithet of Patanjali, author of the Mahābhāṣya. –nasaḥ, –nāsaḥ 1. a kind of snake. –2. a kind of gem. –nasā the mouth of a cow. –nāthaḥ 1. a bull. –2. an owner of land. –3. a herdsman. –4. an owner of kine. –nāyaḥ a cowherd. –nāsā the projecting snout of a cow or ox. –nāsaṁ a kind of gem. –niṣyaṁdaḥ cow’s urine. –paḥ 1. a cowherd (considered as belonging to a mixed tribe); gopaveśasya viṣṇoḥ Me. 15. –2. the chief of a cowpen. –3. the superintendent of a village. –4. a king. –5. a protector, guardian. -anasī the wood of a thatch. -āṭavikā a cowherd. -kanyā 1. the daughter of a cowherd. –2. a nymph of Vṛndāvana. -adhyakṣaḥ, -iṁdraḥ, -īśaḥ the chief of herdsmen, an epithet of Kṛṣṇa. -dalaḥ the betel-nut tree. -bhadraṁ the fibrous root of a water-lily. -rasaḥ gum myrrh -vadhūḥ f. a cowherd’s wife. -vadhūṭī a young cowherdess, a young wife of a cowherd; gopavadhūṭīdukūlacaurāya Bhāṣā P. 1. (–pakaḥ) 1. the superintendent of a district. –2. myrrh. (–pikā) 1. a cowherdess. –2. protectress. (–pī) a cowherd’s wife (especially applied to the cowherdesses of Vṛndāvana, the companions of Kṛṣṇa in his juvenile sports). –2. a milk-maid. –3. a protectress. –4. Nature, elementary nature. –patiḥ 1. an owner of cows. –2. a bull. –3. a leader, chief. –4. the sun. –5. Indra. –6. N. of Kṛṣṇa –7. N. of Śiva. –8. N. of Varuṇa. –9. a king. –paśuḥ a sacrificial cow. –pāḥ m. Ved. 1. a herdsman. –2. protector, or guardian. 1. –pānasī a curved beam which supports a thatch. –pālaḥ 1. a cowherd. –2. a king. –3. an epithet of Śiva. –4. an epithet of Kṛṣṇa. -dhānī a cow-pen, cow-shed, — pālakaḥ 1. a cowherd. –2. a king. –3. an epithet of Śiva; also of Kṛṣṇa. –pāliḥ an epithet of Śiva. –pālikā, –pālī the wife of a cowherd. –pittaṁ bile of cows, ox-bile (from which the yellow pigment gorocanā is prepared; Pt. 1. 94.). –pītaḥ a species of wagtail. –pīthaḥ protec tion. (–thaṁ) a holy place, a place of pilgrimage. –pucchaṁ a cow’s tail. (– cchaḥ) 1. a sort of monkey. –2. a sort of necklace consisting of two or four or thirty-four strings. –puṭikaṁ the head of Śiva’s bull –putraḥ 1. a young bull. –2. an epithet of Karṇa. –puraṁ 1. a town-gate; Māl. 9. 1. — 2. a principal gate; Ki. 5. 5. –3. the ornamental gate-way of a temple. — purīṣaṁ cowdung. –prakāḍaṁ an excellent cow or bull. –pracāraḥ pasture-ground, pasturage for cattle; Y. 2. 166. –prata(tā)raḥ 1. a ford for cattle. –2. a place of pilgrimage on the Sarayū. –praveśaḥ the time when cows return home, sunset or evening-twilight. –phaṇā 1. a bandage hollowed out so as to fit the chin or nose &c. –2. a sling. –bālaḥ the hair of cows. –bhuj m. a king. –bhṛt m. a mountain. –makṣikā a gadfly. –magha a. granting cattle or cows. –maṁḍalaṁ 1. the globe. –2. a multitude of cows. –mataṁ = gavyūti q, v. –matallikā a tractable cow, an excellent cow. –mathaḥ a cowherd. –mahiṣadā N. of one of the Mātṛs attending on kārtikeya. –māṁsaṁ beef. –māyu 1. a kind of frog. –2. a jackal anuhuṁkurute ghanadhvaniṁ na hi gomāyurutāni kesarī Śi. 16. 25. –3. bile of a cow. –4. N. of a Gandharva. –mukhaḥ, –mukhaṁ [gormukhamiva mukhamasya] a kind of musical instrument; Bg. 1. 13. (–khaḥ) 1. a crocodile, shark. –2. a hole of a particular shape in a wall made by thieves. (–khaṁ) 1. a house built unevenly. –2. spreading unguents, smearing. (–khaṁ, –khī) a cloth-bag of the shape of a gnomon containing a rosary, the beads of which are counted by the hand thrust inside. (–khī) the chasm in the Himālaya mountains through which the Ganges flows. –mūḍha a. stupid as a bull. –mūtraṁ cow’s urine. — mūtrikā 1. an artificial verse, the second of which repeats nearly all the syllables of the first (Malli. thus defines it: –vaṁrṇānāmekarūpatvaṁ yadyekāṁtaramardhayoḥ gomūtriketi tatprāhurduṣkaraṁ tadvido viduḥ .. see Śi. 19. 46). –2. a form of calculation. –mṛgaḥ a kind of ox (gavaya). –medaḥ a gem brought from the Himālaya and Indus, described as of four different colours: –white, paleyellow, red, and dark-blue. –medakaḥ 1. see gomeda. –2. a kind of poison (kākola). –3. smearing the body with unguents. –medhaḥ, –yajñaḥ a cowsacrifice. –yānaṁ a carriage drawn by oxen. –yukta a. drawn by oxen. –yutaṁ a cattle-station. –rakṣaḥ 1. a cowherd. –2. keeping or tending cattle. –3. the orange. –4. an epithet of Śiva. -jaṁbū f. wheat. –raṁkuḥ 1. a water-fowl. –2. a prisoner. –3. a naked man, a mendicant wandering about without clothes. –4. a chanter. –ravaṁ saffron. –rasaḥ cow’s milk. –2. curds. –3. buttermilk. –4. the flavour of a sentence, ko raso gorasaṁ vinā Udb. -jaṁ buttermilk. –rājaḥ an excellent bull. –rāṭikā, –rāṭī the Sārikā bird. –rutaṁ a measure of distance equal to two Krośas. –rūpaṁ the form of a cow. (–paḥ) N. of Śiva. –rocaṁ yellow orpiment. –rocanā a bright yellow pigment prepared from the urine or bile of a cow, or found in the head of a cow. –lavaṇaṁ a measure of salt given to a cow. –lāṁgu (gū) laḥ a kind of monkey with a dark body, red cheeks. and a tail like that of a cow; Mal. 9. 30. –lokaḥ a part of heaven, cowworld. –lomī a prostitute. –vatsaḥ a calf. -ādin m. a wolf. –vardhanaḥ a celebrated hill in vṛṁdāvana the country about Mathurā. (This hill was lifted up and supported by Kṛṣṇa upon one finger for seven days to shelter the cowherds from a storm of rain sent by Indra to test Kṛṣṇa’s divinity.’) -dharaḥ, -dhārin m. an epithet of Kṛṣṇa. –vaśā a barren cow. –vāṭaṁ, –vāsaḥ a cow-pen. –vāsana a. covered with an ox-hide. –vikartaḥ, –vikrartṛ m. 1. the killer of a cow. –2. a husbandman. –vitataḥ a horse-sacrifice having many cows. –viṁdaḥ 1. a cowkeeper, a chief herdsman. –2. N. of Kṛṣṇa. –3. Bṛnaspati. -dvādaśī the twelfth day in the light half of the month of phalguna. –viṣ f., –viṣṭhā cowdung. — visargaḥ day-break (when cows are let loose to graze in forests). –vīthiḥ f. N. of that portion of the moon’s path which contains the asterisms bhādrapadā, revatī and aśvinī, or according to some, hasta, citrā and svātī. –vīryaṁ the price received for milk. –vṛṁdaṁ a drove of cattle. — vṛṁdārakaḥ an excellent bull or cow. –vṛṣaḥ, –vṛṣabhaḥ an excellent bull. -dhvajaḥ an epithet of Śiva. –vaidyaḥ a quack doctor. –vrajaḥ 1. a cow- pen. –2. a herd of cows. –3. a place where cattle graze. –vrata, –vratin a. one who imitates a cow in frugality. –śakṛt n. cowdung. –śataṁ a present of a hundred cows to a Brāhmaṇa. –śālaṁ, –lā a cow-stall. — śīrṣaḥ, –rṣaṁ a kind of sandal. –ṣaḍgavaṁ three pairs of kine. –ṣan, –ṣā a. Ved. acquiring or bestowing cows. –ṣā (sā) tiḥ 1. acquiring cattle. –2. giving cattle. –ṣṭomaḥ a kind of sacrificelasting for one day. –saṁkhyaḥ a cowherd. –sadṛkṣaḥ a species of ox (gavaya). –sargaḥ the time at which cows are usually let loose, day-break; see govisarga. –savaḥ a kind of cow-sacrifice (not performed in the Kali age). –sahasraṁ a kind of present (mahādāna). (–srī) N. of two holidays on the fifteenth day of the dark half of kārtika and jyeṣṭha. –sūtrikā a rope fastened at both ends having separate halters for each ox or cow. –stanaḥ 1. the udder of a cow. –2. a cluster of blossoms, nosegay &c. –3. a pearl-necklace of four strings. –stanā, –nī a bunch of grapes. –sthānaṁ, –kaṁ a cow-pen. — svāmin m. 1. an owner of cows. –2. a religious mendicant. –3. an honorary title affixed to proper names; (e. g. vopadevagosvāmin). –hatyā cow-slaughter. –hallaṁ (sometimes written hannaṁ) cowdung. –hita a. cherishing or protecting kine. (–taḥ) N. of Viṣṇu. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch go m. f. SIDDH.K.251,a,5 v. u. gaus, gām, gavā, gave, gos, gavi; gāvau; gāvas, gās und bisweilen auch gāvas (TBR. 3, 1, 2, 12. TAITT. UP. 1, 4, 2. MBH. 4, 1506. R. 2, 32, 38), gobhis, gobhyas, gavām und gonām (dieses nur am Ende eines Pāda im Veda P. 7, 1, 57; gavām am Pāda- Ende ṚV. 4, 1, 19), goṣu P. 6, 1, 93. 7, 1, 90. VOP. 3, 68. 69. Verhalten des o vor Vocalen im comp. P. 6, 1, 122. fgg. VOP. 2, 18. Am Ende eines comp. zu gu (vgl. 1. gu) geschwächt. 1) “Rind, Stier, Kuh”; pl. “Rinder, Kühe, Rinderheerden” (f. P. 1, 2, 73, Sch.) AK. 2, 9, 60. 66. 3, 4, 3, 26. 25, 167. TRIK. 3, 3, 59. H. 1257. 1265. an. 1, 6. MED. g. 1. HĀR. 79. Uṇ. 2, 66, Sch. gavāṁ gotram ṚV. 2, 23, 18. sākaṁ gāvaḥ suvate pacyate yavaḥ 1, 135, 8. yadi no gāṁ haṁsi yadyaśvaṁ yadi pūruṣam AV. 1, 16, 4. sthirau gāvau bhavatām ṚV. 3, 53, 7. 5, 27, 1. aśvāvati prathamo goṣu gacchati 1, 83, 1. 8, 60, 5. puruṣo ‘jo ‘viko gauraśva iti pañca paśavaḥ ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 9, 23, 4. ŚAT. BR. 2, 4, 3, 13. 3, 1, 2, 13. 4, 5, 5, 10. 14, 1, 1, 32. gāva ukṣaṇaḥ ṚV. 1, 168, 2. VS. 21, 20. AV. 3, 11, 8. gāvo dhenavaḥ ṚV. 1, 173, 1. 6, 45, 28. 10, 95, 6. VS. 21, 19. sarve te goṣu jīvinaḥ R. 1, 9, 61. gavāṁ ca yānaṁ pṛṣṭhena M. 4, 72. anargheyā mahārāja dvijā varṇeṣu cottamāḥ. gāvaśca MBH. 13, 2689. fgg. kaliścaiva vṛṣo bhūtvā gavām N. 7, 6. paṅke gauriva sīdati M. 4, 191. 8, 21. HIT. Pr. 23. gaurandhā M. 3, 141. yathā gaurgavi cāphalā 2, 158. gohiraṇya n. sg. “Kühe und Gold” MBH. 2, 1833. gobrāhmaṇa n. sg. “eine Kuh und ein Brahman” 13, 3350. HARIV. 3157. fg. M. 5, 95. 11, 79. hastigo’śvoṣṭradamaka 3, 162. gavāmayaḥ (MBH. 3, 8176. 13, 5177. 7128) und gavāmayanam (MBH. 3, 8080) N. einer Festfeier; s. u. ayana und ZdmG.IX, LXXII. gavāṁ medhaḥ (vgl. gomedha) MBH. 13, 5378. gavāṁ vratam N. eines Sāman Ind. St. 3, 215. gavāṁ tīrtham BHĀG. P. 3, 1, 22; Vgl. gotīrtha. Eine grosse Anzahl von Zusammensetzungen mit go verlieren mit der Zeit ihre ursprüngliche enge, auf das “Rind” oder, die “Kuh” bezügliche Bedeutung und nehmen eine allgemeine an; so z. B. gaviṣ, gaviṣa, gaviṣṭi, gaveṣ, gaveṣaṇa, gavy, gup, gocara, gotra, gopā, gopītha, gopīthya, goyuga, goṣṭha, ṣaṅgava u. s. w. — 2) m. “das Sternbild des Stiers” VARĀH. BṚH. S. 39 (38), 7. 40 (39), 3. BṚH. 11, 4. 17, 2. 18, 1. L. JĀT. 13, 1. — 3) “was vom Rinde” oder “von der Kuh kommt” (s. NIR. 2, 5), namentlich: a) “Milch”, meist pl.: gobhiḥ śrīṇīta matsaram ṚV. 9, 46, 4. 71, 5. gobhiraktam 4, 27, 5. gorna seke 1, 181, 8. 33, 10. 151, 8. 153, 4. 2, 30, 7. — b) “Fleisch”: agnervarma pari gobhirvyayasva ṚV. 10, 16, 7. — c) “Haut, Rindsleder, daraus geschnittene Riemen u.s.w.”: aṁśuṁ duhanto adhyāsate gavi ṚV. 10, 94, 9. gobhiḥ saṁnaddho asi 6, 47, 26. 75, 11. 8, 48, 5. asmadryakśuśucānasya yamyā āśurna raśmiṁ tuvyojasaṁ goḥ 4, 22, 8. tvamāyasaṁ prati vartayo gordivo aśmānam “du schleudertest aus dem Riemen (funda) das eherne Geschoss” 1, 121. 9. — d) “Sehne”: vṛkṣe vṛkṣe niyatā mīmayadgauḥ ṚV. 10, 27, 22. AV. 1, 2, 3. — 4) go, abgekürzt für goṣṭoma (s. d.), heisst ein Opfertag im Abhiplava: jyotirgaurāyuriti trīṇyahāni gaurāyurjyotiri trīṇi AIT. BR. 4, 15. ŚAT. BR. 13, 5, 4, 3. goāyuṣī 12, 1, 2, 2. KĀTY. ŚR. 23, 1, 26. ĀŚV. ŚR. 9, 1. 11, 1. LĀṬY. 4, 7, 1. MAŚ. 2, 9. 3, 1 in Verz. d. B. H. 72. go = gomedhayajña BHĀNUD. bei einem Sch. zu AK. ŚKDR. m. = kratubheda Uṇ., Sch. — 5) pl. “die Heerde am Himmel, die Gestirne”: tā vāṁ vāstūnyuśmasi gamadhyai yatra gāvo bhūriśṛṅgā ayāsaḥ ṚV. 1, 154, 6. vi raśmibhiḥ sasṛje sūryo gāḥ “mit ihren Strahlen hat die Sonne die Gestirne verscheucht” 7, 36, 1. — 6) “Himmel” NAIGH. 1, 4. AK. 3, 4, 3, 26. H. 87. H. an. masc. TRIK. MED. (lies: svarga st. sarga). m. f. Uṇ., Sch. Diese Bed. wurde. wenn sie nur sonst nachzuweisen wäre, recht gut passen zur folgenden Stelle: indraḥ pṛthivyai varṣīyāngostu mātrā na vidyate VS. 23, 48. — 7) “die Sonne” NIR. 2, 6. 14. masc. Uṇ., Sch. BHĀNUD. bei einem Sch. zu AK. ŚKDR. Vgl. goputra. — 8) m. “der Mond” VIŚVA im ŚKDR. — 9) pl. “die Lichtstrahlen (die Rinderheerde des Himmels”, um welche Indra mit Vṛtra kämpft) NAIGH. 1, 5. NIR. 2, 6. 14, 25. AK. 3, 4, 3, 26. H. 99. H. an. masc. TRIK. MED. m. = kiraṇa, m. f. = raśmi Uṇ., Sch. gobhirbhāsayase mahīm MBH. 3, 182. tvamevaikastapase jātavedo nānyastaptā vidyate goṣu deva 1, 8414. gavāṁ sūryo guruḥ smṛtaḥ HARIV. 2943. tejomayairgobhirivodito ‘rkaḥ (dīptimavāpa) R. 1, 7, 18. 4, 40, 64. BHĀG. P. 2, 6, 21. gogaṇaiḥ 4, 16, 14. sg. “der Strahl” Suṣumṇa NIR. 2, 6. — 10) “Donnerkeil” AK. H. an. SĀY. zu ṚV. 5, 30, 7. masc. TRIK. MED. m. f. Uṇ., Sch. — 11) “Weltgegend” AK. H. an. fem. TRIK. MED. Uṇ., Sch. — 12) “die milchende Kuh der Fürsten, die Erde” NAIGH. 1, 1. AK. H. 936. H. an. fem. TRIK. MED. Uṇ., Sch. nādharmaścarito loke sadyaḥ phalati gauriva M. 4, 172. khaṁ saṁniveśayetkheṣu ceṣṭanasparśane ‘nilam. paktidṛṣṭyoḥ paraṁ tejaḥ snehe ‘po gāṁ ca mūrtiṣu.. 12. 120. imāṁ sāgarāpāṅgīṁ gām MBH. 1, 2468. 3, 1281. 15828. taṁ janāḥ kathayantīha yāvadbhavati gauriyam 13, 3168. BHAG. 15, 13. R. 1, 41, 18. 44, 19. MṚCCH. 173, 17. MEGH. 31. (rājā) dudoha gāṁ sa yajñāya śasyāya maghavā divam RAGH. 1, 26; vgl. payodharībhūtacatuḥsamudrāṁ jugopa gorūpadharāmivorvīm 2, 3 und kasmāddadhāra gorūpaṁ dharitrī bahurūpiṇī. yāṁ dudoha pṛthustatra ko vatso dohanaṁ ca kim.. BHĀG. P. 4, 17, 3. – 1, 10, 3. 4, 17, 7. Vgl. auch dhenu. — 13) “Wasser” AK. H. an. m. f. Uṇ., Sch. f. pl. TRIK. MED. m. n. (also gu) BHĀNUD. im ŚKDR. gaviṣṭho gāṁ gatastadā BHĀG. P. 1, 10, 36. — 14) “Pfeil” AK. H. an. fem. TRIK. MED. m. f. Uṇ., Sch. — 15) “Auge” AK. H. an. fem. TRIK. MED. m. f. Uṇ., Sch. — 16) “das Haar auf dem Körper”, m. f. Uṇ., Sch. m. n. (also gu) BHĀNUD. Vgl. 2. godāna. — 17) f. “Mutter” EKĀKṢARAK. im ŚKDR. Vgl. prajāpatirditiścaiva gāvo viśvasya mātaraḥ VARĀH. BṚH. S. 47, 68. — 18) m. “eine best. Arzeneipflanze” (ṛṣabha) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 19) “Rede, die Göttin der Rede” (Sarasvatī) NAIGH. 1, 11. NIR. 6, 2. AK. H. 241. H. an. fem. TRIK. MED. Uṇ., Sch. janmaprabhṛti matyāṁ te vedmi gāṁ brahmavādinīm MBH. 1, 72. tasyārdhyamāsanaṁ caiva gāṁ cāvedya 3, 16696. yo ‘satsevī vṛthācāro ca śrotā suhṛdāṁ satām. parānvṛṇīte svāndveṣṭi taṁ gaustyajati bhārata.. 5, 4149. tatheti gāmuktavate RAGH. 2, 59. raghorudārāmapi gāṁ niśamya 5, 12. Diese und die folgende Bed. hat man wohl in Folge der Herleitung von gā “singen” angenommen. — 20) “Lobsänger” NAIGH. 3, 16. — 21) “Gänger, Ross” (von gam oder gā “gehen”) SĀY. zu ṚV. 1, 121, 9. 4, 22, 8. — 22) “Billion”: yadā daśabhirakṣitairyajate ‘tha gaurbhavati (akṣita = “100,000 Millionen”) PAÑCAV. BR. 17, 14. — 23) N. pr. a) m. eines Ṛṣi: gorāṅgirasasya sāma LĀṬY. 6, 11, 3. Ind. St. 3, 215. (vāruṇaśca tathā mantrī) putrapautraiḥ parivṛto gonāmnā puṣkareṇa ca MBH. 2, 381. — b) f. der Gemahlin Śuka’s, einer Tochter der Manen Sukāla HARIV. 986. der Schwiegertochter Śuka’s BHĀG. P. 9, 21, 25. einer Tochter Kakutstha’s und Gemahlin Yayāti’s HARIV. 1601. go 4) WEBER, Nax. 2, 282. — 9) RĀJA-TAR. 5, 1. Spr. 2842 (zugleich “Kuh”). BHĀG. P. 11, 7, 50. — 13) f. pl. BHĀG. P. 11, 7, 50. — 15) Spr. 2842. “Sinnesorgan” überh. BHĀG. P. 7, 5, 30. — 19) Spr. 2373 (zugleich “Kuh”). — 23) a) gorāṅgirasasya sāma PAÑCAV. BR. 16, 7, 7. gormāyūkasya Ind. St. 3, 459. Zu MBH. 2, 381 vgl. R. 7, 23, 28; nach dem Comm. sind Go und Pushkara balādhyakṣau der Söhne und Enkel Varuṇa’s. — b) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 39,b,43. — 24) Bez. “der Zahl neun” WEBER, JYOT. 101. Nax. 2, 382. go 24) (Nachträge) SŪRYAS. 1, 42. 2, 36. 3, 44. wegen “der neun Erden.” Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 go (gau) (GAU) A wife of sage Pulastya. Vaiśravaṇa was born of her. The son left his father and went to Brahmā. (Śloka 12, Chapter 274, Vana Parva). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 go go, I. m. 1. A bull; f. A cow, Man. 3, 141; pl. Bulls and cows, cattle, Man. 4, 72. 2. m. pl. Rays of light, Rājat. 5, 1. II. f. The earth, Rām. 1, 41, 18. III. m. and f. Water, Bhāg. P. 1, 10, 36. IV. f. Speech, Ragh. 5, 12. V. The deity of speech, MBh. 5, 4149. VI. m. The name of a Ṛṣi, MBh. 2, 381. VII. f. A proper name, Bhāg. P. 9, 21, 25. — Cf. [greek] Lat. bos, ceva; OHG. ko; AS. cū; probably also [greek] Goth. gavi, gauja. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 go m. bull, ox, ox-hide, leather, sinew; pl. cattle, herds, the stars or rays of light (as the herds of the sky); pieces of flesh, cow-milk (also sgl.). –f. cow, the earth (as the milch cow of kings); speech and Sarasvati, the goddess of speech. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 go go, ox, bull; cow’s milk (gnly. pl.); ox-hide; thong: pl. host of heaven, stars; rays; f. cow; earth; speech. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 go puṁstrī gacchatyanena gama–karaṇe ḍo . 1 svanāmakhyāte paśubhede vṛṣasya yānasādhanatvāt strīgavyāśca dānadvārā svargagatisādhanatvācca tathātvam . gatisādhanatayā tasya tathārthatvayogena yaugikatve’pi yogarūḍhatvam . etena darṣaṇakṛtā vyutpattilabhyasya mukhyārthatve gauḥ śete ityatrāpi lakṣaṇā syāt gamerḍoḥ iti vyutpāditasya gośabdasya śayanakāle’pi prayogāt iti yaduktaṁ tat grāmādikameva gamerḍoḥ ityūṇādipratyayasya kartṛvācakatvāniyamāt tābhyāmanyatroṇādayaḥ pā° sūtre ūṇādīnāṁ apādānasaṁpradānabhinnārthatvaniyamāt atra karaṇārthakaḍopratyayena vyutpāditasya gośabdasya śayanakāle’pi gatisādhanasvarūpayogyavācakatvāt phalopadhāyakatvaniyame yānāsanaśayanādīnāmapi gatiśayanādivigamakāle tacchabdavācyatānupapatteḥ . gamyate jñāyate anena karaṇe, śīghraṁ gacchati kartari vā ḍo . 2 raśmau kiraṇe tasya śīghra gāmitvāt cākṣuṣajñānahetutvācca tathātvam sūryādikiraṇa saṁparkaṁ vinā cākṣuṣajñānāsambhavāt raśmerjñānasādhanatvāt tathātvam . 3 vajre 4 hīrake tasyāpi kaṭhinadravye’pi gatimattvāt tathātvam . karmaṇi ḍo . 5 svarge karmibhi rgamyamānatvāt tasya tathātvam medi° . 6 candre viśvaḥ karmibhistallokagamanāttasya tathātvam 7 sūrye 8 gomedhayajñe bhānudīkṣitaḥ . sūryasya śīghragatikatvāt arcirādiṣvadhiṣṭhātṛtayā ātivāhikatvāt tathātvam . saṁvatsarādādityamādityāccandramasam chā° u° . ātivāhikaśabde 651 pṛ° dṛśyam 9 ṛṣabhanāmauṣadhe rājani° . tasya gonāmakatvāt tathātvam . karaṇe ḍo . 10 betre strī tasya cākṣuṣajñānasādhanatvāt tathātvam . kartari ḍo . 11 vāṇe strī tasya śīghragtikatvāt tathātvam . karmaṇi ḍo . 12 diśi strī diśāṁ palāyanakāle gamyamānatvāttayātvam . 13 vāci strī tasyāḥ jñānahetutvāt tathātvam . ādhāreḍo . 14 bhuvi strī tasyāḥ gamanādhāratvāt tathātvam 15 jale ca strība° va° kecit tasya nimnagatitvāt 16 paśumātre amaraḥ 17 mātari 18 lomani bhānudīkṣitaḥ . 19 vṛṣarāśau 20 navasaṁkhyāyām gorbhūmernavakhaṇḍātmakatvāt ākāśe sadāgatimadgrahāṇāṁ navatvādvā tatsaṁkhyāsāmyāt tathātvam . 21 pulastyabhāryāyāṁ gavijātaśabde 2566 pṛ° dṛśyam . jñānahetutvāt 22 indriye gocaraḥ . padāntasthitasyopasarjanasya samā° hrasvaḥ śītaguḥ sahasraguḥ . asya uttarapadasthatve tatpuruṣe ṣac samā° . puṁsi paramagavaḥ striyāṁ ṣittvāt ṅīṣ dugdhagavī goḥ purīṣaṁ mayaṭ . gomaya (govara) khyāte padārthe na° gaurvidyate’sya mini gomin . matup . gomat goviśiṣṭe gosvāmini ca tri° striyāṁ ṅīp . goḥsthāne goṣṭhac gogoṣṭha gosthāne na° gomāṁsaguṇā bhāvapra° uktā yathā gomāṁsaṁ tu guru snigdhaṁ pittaśleṣmavivardhanam . vṛṁhaṇaṁ vātahṛt balyamapathyaṁ pīnasapraṇut . goridaṁ yat āntoyi pratyaye pā° avādeśaḥ . gavya godugdhādau bhāvapra° tadguṇādyuktaṁ yathā gavyaṁ dugdhaṁ viśeṣeṇa madhuraṁ rasapākayoḥ . śītalaṁ stanyapṛt snigdhaṁ vātapittāsranāśanam . doṣadhātubalasrotaḥkiñcitkledakaraṁ guru . jarāsamastarogāṇāṁ śāntikṛt sevināṁ sadā . kṣīravargaśabde 2377 pṛ° vivṛtiḥ . gavyadadhiguṇāḥ bhāvapra° uktā yathā gavyaṁ davi viśeṣeṇa svādvamlañca rucipradam . pabitraṁ dīpanaṁ hṛdyaṁ puṣṭikṛt pavanāpaham . uktaṁ dadhnāmaśeṣāṇāṁ madhye gavyaṁ guṇādhikam tannavanītaguṇāḥ tatroktā yathā navanītaṁ kṣitaṁ gavyaṁ vṛṣyaṁ varṇabalāgnikṛt . saṁgrāhi vātapittāsṛkkṣayārśo’rditakāsahṛt . taddhitaṁ vālake vṛddhe viśeṣādamṛtaṁ śiśoḥ tadghṛtaguṇāḥ bhāvapra° uktā yathā gavyaṁ ghṛtaṁ viśeṣeṇa cakṣuṣyaṁ vṛṣyamagnikṛt . svādupākakaraṁ śītaṁ vātapittakaphāpaham . medhālāvaṇyakāntyojastejovṛddhikaraṁ param . alakṣmīpāparakṣoghnaṁ vayasaḥ sthāpakaṁ guru . balyaṁ pavitramāyuṣyaṁ sumaṅgalyaṁ rasāyanam . sugandhaṁ rocanaṁ cāru sarvājyeṣu guṇādhikam . tanmūtraguṇā bhāvapra° uktā yathā gomūtraṁ kaṭu tīkṣṇoṣṇaṁ kṣāraṁ tiktaṁ kaṣāyakam . laghvagnidīpanaṁ medhyaṁ pittakṛtkaphavātahṛt . śūlagulmodarānāha kaṇḍvakṣimukharogajit . kilāsagadavātāmavastiruk kuṣṭhanāśanam . kāsaśvāsāpahaṁ śothakāmalāpāṇḍurogahṛt . kaṇḍūkilāsagadaśūlamukhākṣirogān gulmātisāramarudāmayamūtrarodhān . kāsaṁ sakuṣṭhajaṭhara krimipāṇḍurogān gomutramekamapi pītamapākaroti . sarveṣvapi ca mūtreṣu gomūtraṁ guṇato’dhikam . ato’viśeṣāt kathane mūtraṁ gomūtramucyate . plīhodaraśvāsa kāsaśothavarcāgrahāpaham . śūlagulmarujānāhakāmaṁlāpāṇḍurogahṛt . kaṣāyaṁ tiktatīkṣṇañca pūraṇāt karṇaśūlanut . tatra saurabhyām paṅke gauriva sīdati bhā° vi° 191 . yathā gaurgavi cāphalā manuḥ goghnavat vihitaḥ kalpaḥ prā° ta° viśvā° . vāci pannagagavīgumpheṣu cājāgarīt malli° preyodūtapataṅgapuṅgavagabīhaiyaṅgavīnaṁ rasāt naiṣa° netrādiṣu gomadhyamadhye! mṛgagodhare! he sahasragobhūṣaṇakiṅkarāṇām . nādena gobhṛcchikhareṣu mattā nṛtyanti gokarṇaśarīrabhakṣāḥ cauraḥ . gāmāttasārāṁ raghurapyavekṣya raghuḥ kṣiptāvarodhāṅganamutpathena gām māghaḥ . hitādau yat . gavya gauhitaudau bhuvi padānte gośabdasya atipare pararūpaṁ go’graṁ prakṛtivadbhāvaśca go agraṁ acipare vā avaṅa gavāgram . aśvaśabde pare gavāśvādi° dvandva ekavadbhāvaḥ . gavāśvam . |
देवहूती – devahūtī | Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975devahūtī A daughter of Svāyambhuva Manu, the son of Brahmā. The
Manu had two sons called Priyavrata and Uttānapāda and three daughters named Ākūti, Devahūti and Prasūti. Ākūti was married by Ruciprajāpati and Devahūti by Kardamaprajāpati and Prasūti to Dakṣprajāpati. Kapila, the mighty exponent of the Sāṅkhya system of philosophy and great ascetic was the son born to Kardama by Devahūti. Kapila taught his mother the world famous Kapila Śāstra, (Devibhāgavata, Aṣṭama Skandha) and when the teaching was over he bade farewell to her and took to forest life. And, his mother performed a yajña on the lines advised by her son, on the banks of river Sarasvatī. Because she took three baths daily her hairs became a mixture of black and blue in colour and she got emaciated due to fasting. She wore the bark of trees. Devahūti, who realised all the principles and the truth became blind to all external objects like gardens, maids, mansions etc. Thus immersed in meditation she in course of time attained siddhi (realisation). The particular spot on the banks of Sarasvatī where she attained Siddhi is called Siddhapada. |
नील – nīla | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899nīla mf (“ā” or “ī”; cf. ) n. of a dark colour, (esp.) dark-blue or dark-green
or black &c. &c. nīla dyed with indigo 2 nīla m. the sapphire (with “maṇi” nīla m. the Indian fig-tree (= “vaṭa”) nīla m. = “nīla-vṛkṣa” nīla m. a species of bird the blue or hill Maina nīla m. an ox or bull of a dark colour nīla m. one of the 9 Nidhis or divine treasures of Kubera nīla m. N. of a man g. “tikādi” nīla m. of the prince of Māhiṣmatī nīla m. of a son of Yadu nīla m. of a son of Aja-mīḍha nīla m. of a son of Bhuvana-rāja nīla m. of an historian of Kaśmīra nīla m. of sev. authors (also “-bhaṭṭa”) nīla m. N. of Maṇjuśrī nīla m. of a Nāga nīla m. of one of the monkey-chiefs attending on Rāma (said to be a son of Agni) &c. nīla m. the mountain Nīla or the blue mountain (immediately north of Ilāvṛita or the central division; cf. “nīlādri”) nīla (“ā”) f. the indigo plant (Indigofera Tinctoria) (cf. “nīlī”) nīla (“ā”) f. a species of Boerhavia with blue blossoms nīla (“ā”) f. black cumin nīla (“ā”) f. a species of blue fly nīla (“ā”) f. (du.) the two arteries in front of the neck nīla (“ā”) f. a black and blue mark on the skin nīla (“ā”) f. N. of a goddess nīla (“ā”) f. (in music) of a Rāgiṇi (personified as wife of Mallāra) nīla (“ā”) f. of a river (v.l. “nālā”) nīla (“ī”) f. the indigo plant or dye &c. Blyxa Octandra. nīla (“ī”) f. m. a species of blue fly nīla (“ī”) f. m. a kind of disease nīla (“ī”) f. m. N. of the wife of Aja-mīḍha (v.l. “nalinī” and “nīlinī”) nīla n. dark (the colour), darkness nīla n. any dark substance nīla n. = “tālī-pattra” and “tālīśa” nīla n. indigo iii. 38 nīla n. black salt nīla n. blue vitriol nīla n. antimony nīla n. poison nīla n. a partic. position in dancing nīla n. a kind of metre Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 nīla a. (lā-lī f.; the former in relation to clothes &c., the latter in relation to animals, plants &c.) (1) Blue, dark-blue; nīlasnigdhaḥ śrayati śikharaṁ nūtanastoyavāhaḥ U. 1. 33. (2) Dyed with indigo. –laḥ 1 The dark-blue or black colour. (2) Sapphire. (3) The Indian fig tree. (4) N. of a monkey-chief in the army of Rāma. (5) ‘The blue mountain’, N. of one of the principal ranges of mountains. (6) A kind of bird, the blue Mainā. (7) An ox of a dark-blue colour. (8) One of the nine treasures of Kubera; see navanidhi. (9) A mark. (10) An auspicious sound or proclamation. –lā (1) The indigo plant. (2) A Ragiṇī. –le f. du. (1) (1) The two arteries in front of the neck. (2) A black and blue mark on the skin; (for other senses see nīlī.) — laṁ (1) Black-salt. (2) Blue vitriol. (3) Antimony. (4) Poison. (5) Indigo, indigo dye. (6) Darkness. — Comp. –akṣaḥ a goose. –aṁgaḥ the Sārasa bird. –aṁjanaṁ 1. antimony. –2. blue vitriol. –aṁjanā-aṁjasā lightn ing. –abjaṁ-aṁbujaṁ, –aṁbujanman n., utpalaṁ the blue lotus. –abhraḥ a dark cloud. –aṁbara a. dressed in dark blue clothes. ( –raḥ) 1. a demon. goblin. –2. the planet Saturn. –3. an epithet of Balarāma. –aruṇaḥ early dawn, the first dawn of day. –aśman m. a sapphire. –upalaḥ the blue stone, lapis lazuli. –kaṁṭhaḥ 1. a peacock; Māl. 9. 30; Me. 79. –2. an epithet of Śiva. –3. a kind of gallinule. –4. a blue-necked jay. –5. a wag-tail. –6. a sparrow. –7. a bee. ( –ṭhaṁ) a radish. -akṣa = rudrākṣa q. v. –keśī the indigo plant. –grīvaḥ an epithet of Siva. –chadaḥ 1. the date-tree. –2. an epithat of Garuḍa. –jaṁ blue steel. –taruḥ the cocoanut tree. –tālaḥ, –dhvajaḥ the Tamāla tree. –paṁkaḥ, –kaṁ darkness. –paṭalaṁ 1. a dark mass, a black coating or covering. –2. a dark film over the eye of a blind man; Pt. 5. –patraḥ the pomegranate tree. (–traṁ) –padmaṁ the blue water-lily. –picchaḥ a falcon. –puṣpikā 1. the indigo plant. –2. linseed. –bhaḥ 1. the moon. –2. a cloud. –3. a bee. –maṇiḥ, –ratnaṁ 1. the sapphire; nepathyocitanīlaratnaṁ Git. 5; Bv. 2. 42. –2. an epithet of Kṛṣṇa; also nīlamādhavaḥ. –mīlikaḥ a fire-fly. –mṛttikā 1. iron pyrites. –2. black earth. –rājiḥ f. a line of darkness, dark mass, thick darkness,; niśāśaśāṁkakṣatanīlarājayaḥ Rs. 1. 2. –lohita a. dark-blue, purple. ( –taḥ) 1. a purple colour. –2. an epithet of Śiva; S. 7. 35; Ku. 2. 57. –varṇa a. dark-blue, bluish. ( –rṇaṁ) a radish. –vasana-vāsas a. dressed in darkblue clothes; see nīlāṁbara. — vṛṁtakaṁ cotton. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch nīla 1) adj. f. ā und ī (nach P. 4, 1, 42 ī in anderer Verbindung als mit Kleidern, nach dem Vārtt. zu diesem Sūtra in Verbindung mit Pflanzen und lebenden Wesen) “dunkelfarbig”; namentlich “blau, dunkelblau, schwarzblau” AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. H. 1397. an. 2, 495 (wo nīlo va- zu lesen ist). HALĀY. 4, 49. n. “das Dunkle, Schatten” AV. 14, 2, 48. nīlamasyodaraṁ lohitaṁ pṛṣṭham 15, 1, 7. 8. nāsya nīlaṁ na haro vyeti TS. 3, 1, 1, 2. śuklam, nīlam ŚAT. BR. 14, 7, 2, 12. 1, 20. CHĀND. UP. 1, 6, 5. 8, 6, 1. KAUṢ. UP. in Ind. St. 1, 410. nīlatoyamadhyasthā vidyullekhā TAITT. ĀR. 10, 13. 1, 9, 1. KAUŚ. 18. 93. dhenu 126. vṛṣa (vgl. nīlaṣaṇḍa und unten u. 2, d) M. 11, 136. YĀJÑ. 3, 271. pataṁga ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 4, 4. nāga R. 5, 18, 11. makṣikā AK. 2, 5, 26. kānana R. 2, 55, 8. 3, 11, 2. nīlābhirvanarājibhiḥ 5, 54, 3. śādvalāni 9, 5. nadī nīlā 4, 44, 81. samudrasya salilam 5, 7, 16. jalasrāva SUŚR. 2, 305, 7. MEGH. 42. vaidūrya R. 2, 91, 29. maṇi 3, 58, 26. kuṣṭha SUŚR. 2, 68, 8. śoṇita 1, 45, 3. megha HIḌ. 4, 29. 1, 37. N. 16, 13. R. 3, 28, 19. 58, 25. PRAB. 95, 1. VET. in LA. 5, 9. DAŚAK. in BENF. Chr. 186, 14. netra DHŪRTAS. 91, 14. pakṣman BHARTṚ. 1, 59. mūrdhajāḥ VARĀH. BṚH. S. 74, 4. BHĀG. P. 2, 2, 11. nīlāṅga R. 3, 58, 26. 1, 58, 10. (śivam) kaṇṭhaprabhāsaṅgaviśeṣanīlāṁ kṛṣṇatvacaṁ granthimatiṁ dadhānam KUMĀRAS. 3, 46. nīlāṁ patākām MBH. 4, 1738. mahānīla (dhvaja) INDR. 1, 8. nīlavastraprāyaścitta VĀRĀHA-P. in Verz. d. B. H. No. 485. nīlā jhiṇṭī AK. 2, 4, 2, 55. HALĀY. 2, 50. ānīlamukhaṁ stanadvayam RAGH. 3, 8. “mit Indigo gefärbt” P. 4, 2, 2, Vārtt. 2. MED. l. 29. — 2) m. a) “Sapphir” H. an.; vgl. nīlaṁ maṇim R. 3, 58, 26 und nīlamaṇi. — b) “der indische Feigenbaum” (vaṭa) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) “ein best. Vogel, the blue or hill Maina” WILS. nach ŚABDAR. — d) = nīlavṛṣa “ein dunkelfarbiger Stier” Verz. d. B. H. No. 1227. — e) N. eines der 9 Schätze Kuvera’s TRIK. 1, 1, 79. H. 193. H. an. MED. — f) N. pr. eines Mannes gaṇa tikādi zu P. 4, 1, 154. Fürst von Māhiṣmati MBH. 1, 2697. 6990. 2, 1124. 3, 15250. 5, 79. 592. anūpādhipatiścaiva nīlaḥ 6, 4153. HARIV. 8019. nīlaṁ cāpi nadīsutam 8098. ein Sohn Jadu’s 1843. VP. 416, N. 2. Ajamīḍha’s 453. BHĀG. P. 9, 21, 30. Bhuvanarāja’s RĀJA-TAR. 7, 253. – LIA. II, 955. fg. Geschichtschreiber von Kāśmīra RĀJA-TAR. 1, 14.16. — g) Bein. Mañjuśrī’s TRIK. 1, 1, 21. — h) N. pr. eines Nāga MBH. 1, 1552. RĀJA- TAR. 1, 28. 182. fg. — i) N. pr. eines Affen im Gefolge Rāma’s, eines Sohnes des Feuergottes, H. an. MED. MBH. 3, 16287. R. 1, 16, 14. 4, 13, 4. 31, 29. 41, 3. 6, 2, 29. 22, 2. BHĀG. P. 9, 10, 19. — k) N. pr. eines Gebirges H. 947, Sch. H. an. MED. antarā niṣadhaṁ nīlaṁ ca videhāḥ H. 1538, Sch. MBH.3,12918.6,198. 247. 13,1700. 7658. 14,1174. HARIV. 9736. 11447. VP. 167. 180, N. 3. BHĀG. P.5,16,8. 19,16. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 148,b,16. Vgl. nīlādri. — 3) f. ā und ī P. 4, 1, 42, Vārtt. 3. a) nīlā a) “die Indigopflanze” H. an. RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.; vgl. nīlī. — b) “eine blaublühende Boerhavia” (nīlapunarnavā) ebend. — g) “eine blaue Fliegenart” nach den Erklärern zu AK. 2, 5, 26, während das Wort dort offenbar adj. ist; vgl. nīlī. — d) du. “die beiden hervortretenden Schlagadern vorn am Halse”: grīvādhamanyau (u. dhamani 2 am Ende ist aus Unachtsamkeit nach dieser Stelle dhamani mit grīvā gleichgesetzt) prāgnīle H. 587. — e) “Flecken” (als Krankheit?) H. an. — z) die Gemahlin des Rāga Mallāra BṚHADDHARMA-P. 44 im ŚKDR. — b) nīlī a) “die Indigopflanze” AK. 2, 4, 3, 13. 3, 4, 14, 82. MED. M. 10, 89. SUŚR. 1, 162, 14. 163, 2. 2, 25, 14. 151, 19. 285, 12. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 76, 5. -rasa PAÑCAT. 62, 24. -varṇa 63, 1. — b) “Blyxa Saivala” (śaivala) H. 1167; vgl. jalanīlī. — g) “eine blaue Fliegenart” COLEBR. und LOIS. zu AK. 2, 5, 26. — d) “eine best. Krankheit”, = rugbheda MED.; vgl. nīlīroga, nīlikā. — e) N. pr. der Gemahlin Ajamīḍha’s MBH. 1, 3722. HARIV. 1756; vgl. nalinī und nīlinī. — 4) n. a) “Indigo” YĀJÑ. 3, 38. Diese Bed. geben ŚKDR. und WILS. nach MED., aber hier heisst es nīlaṁ nīlīrakte; s. u. 1 am Ende. — b) “schwarzes Salz” (kācalavaṇa). — c) “blauer Vitriol” (tuttha). — d) “Antimonium” (sauvīrāñjana). — e) “Gift.” — f) = tālīśapattra RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — g) “eine best. Stellung beim Tanze”, nṛtyāṅgāṣṭottaraśatakaraṇāntargatakaraṇaviśeṣaḥ SAṁGĪTAD. im ŚKDR. — h) “ein best. Metrum, metrical sequence”COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 162 (XI, 6). Das Geschlecht ist nicht angegeben, doch ist das n. wahrscheinlicher. — Nach H. an. giebt WILSON für das n. auch die Bedeutung “a mark, a characteristick sign” und “a medical plant, apparently distinct from the Indigofera.” Beide Bedeutungen kommen aber dem f. nīlā zu. Die ganze Stelle lautet: nīlavarṇe (lies nīlo va-) maṇau śaile nidhivānarabhedayoḥ. nīlauṣadhyāṁ (d. i. nīlā o-) lāñchane ca.. — Vgl. kāṁsya-, kākanīlā. nīla 2) b) nīlaṁ vanaspatim Spr. 3605. — h) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 348,b, No. 818. — 3) a) greek N. pr. einer Göttin WILSON, Sel. Works 1, 145. — b) a) auch “Indigo” Spr. 4955. -vastra “ein mit Indigo gefärbtes Gewand” Verz. d. Oxf. H. 282,b,2 v. u. — Vgl. mahā-. nīla , nāsya pāpaṁ cakruṣo (so lesen wir) mukhānnīlaṁ vyeti (wohl so zu lesen) KAUṢ. UP. 3, 1; vgl. TS. 3, 1, 1, 2. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 nīla I. A prominent nāga born to Kaśyapa Prajāpati of Kadrū. (Ādi Parva, Chapter 35, Verse 7). nīla 2 II nīla 3 III A monkey-chief, who was a dependant of Śrī Rāma. He was Agni’s son. ‘Nīla, son of Pāvaka (fire) shone forth like agni (fire). He stood foremost among the monkeys in the matter of effulgence, reputation and prowess’. (Vālmīki Rāmāyaṇa, Bālakāṇḍa, Canto 17). nīla 4 IV A warrior who fought on the Pāṇḍava side. He was king of Anūpadeśa. He fought against Durjaya and Aśvatthāmā and was killed by Aśvatthāmā. (Droṇa Parva, Chapter 31, Verse 25). nīla 5 V A famous king in nothern Pāñcāla. The Purāṇas refer to sixteen famous kings of this royal dynasty from Nīla to Pṛṣata. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 nīla nīla, i. e. niś + la, I. adj., f. lā and lī, Black or dark-blue, Man. 11, 136. II. m. 1. A proper name, MBh. 1, 2697. 2. The name of a mountain, 6, 198. III. f. lī, 1. The indigo plant, Man. 10, 89. 2. A proper name, MBh. 1, 3722. IV. n. Indigo, the dye, Yājñ. 3, 38. — Comp. ā-, adj. blackish, Kir. 5, 31. indra-, m. a sapphire, Megh. 47. kāṁsya-, m. the name of a monkey, Rām. 4, 39, 23. makā-, m. 1. the sapphire. 2. one of the Nāgas. rāja(n)-, n. the emerald. — Cf. Lat. niger for nigro = niś + ra. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 nīla a. dark-coloured, esp. dark-blue or black. –m. sapphire; N. of a serpent-demon, sev. men, etc.; f. nīlā a woman’s name, nīlī indigo (plant or dye); n. dark colour or substance, indigo. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 nīla nīla, a. swarthy, black; esp. dark blue; m. sapphire; Indian fig-tree; N.; n. indigo; -kaṇṭha, a. blue-necked; m. peacock; ep. of Śiva; N., esp. of a commentator on the Mahābhādrata; -giri, m. Blue Mountain, N. of a mountain-range (Nīlgiri); -jā, f. ep. of the river Vitastā; -tā. f. blueness; dark-blue colour; -nicolin, a. wearing a dark cloak; -nīraja, n. blue lotus; -pakṣman, n. feathered with black eyelashes; -paṭa, m. dark garment; -paṭala, n. dark film (on a blind eye); -pura, n. N. of a town; -purāṇa, n. T. of a Purāṇa; -bhāṇḍa-svāmin, m. indigo-vat proprietor; -bhū, f. N. of a river, -maṇi, m. sapphire; -ratna, n. id.; -rāji, f. dark streak, darkness; -lohita, a. dark-blue and red, dark red; -vat, a. blackish, dark; -varṇa, a. blue-coloured: -śṛgāla-vat, ad. like the blue jackal; -vasana, n. blue cloth; -vṛṣa, m. dark-coloured bull; -saṁ-dhāna-bhāṇḍa, n. vat for preparing indigo; -saroruha, n. blue lotus; -aṁśuka, n. blue garment; -aṅga, a. dark-bodies; -abja, n. blue lotus; -abhra-saṁvṛta, pp. obscured by dark clouds; -ambhoja, n. blue lotus. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 nīla pu° nīla–aca . svanāmakhyāte varṇe 1 śyāmavarṇe 2 tadvati tri° amaraḥ . 3 parvatabhede 4 vānarabhede ca medi° . 5 nīlyoṣadhau 6 nidhibhede 7 lāñchane ca pu° hemaca° . 8 maṅkalaghoṣe trikā° 9 vaṭavṛkṣe rājani° . nīlaparvataśca ramyakavarṣasya sīmāparvataḥ yathoktaṁ bhāga° 5169 ślo° uttarottareṇelāvṛtaṁ nīlaḥ śvetaḥ śṛṅgavāniti trayoramyakahiraṇmayakurūṇāṁ varmāṇāṁ maryādāgirayaḥ prāgāyatā ubhayataḥ kṣārodābadhayodvisāhasravṛthava ekaikaśaḥ pūrvasmāt pūrvasmāduttarottareṇa daśāṁśādhikāṁśena dairghya eva hrasanti . bhāratavarṣadakṣiṇasthe svanāmakhyāte 10 girau ca 11 indranīlamaṇau śanituṣṭyarthaṁ dhārye deye ca maṇibhede . tasyotpattyādiparīkṣā garuḍapu° uktā yathā tatraiva siṁhalavadhūkarapallavāgravyālūnabālalavanīkusuma pravāle . deśe papāta ditijasya nitāntakāntaṁ protphulla nīrajasamadyuti netrayugmam . tatpratyayādubhayaśobhana vīcībhāsā vistāriṇī ūlanidherupakacchabhūmiḥ . prodbhinnaketakavanapratibaddhalekhā sāndrendranīlamaṇiratnavatī vibhāti . tatrāsitābjahalabhṛdvasanāsibhṛṅgaśārṅgāyudhābhaharakaṇṭhakalāyapuṣ paiḥ . śukletaraiśca kusumairgiri karṇikāyāstasmin bhavanti maṇayaḥ sadṛśāvabhāmaḥ . anye prasannapayasaḥ payasāṁ nidhāturambutviṣaḥ śikhigala pratimāstathānye . nīlīrasaprabhavabudvudabhāśca kecit kecittathā samadakokilakaṇṭhabhāsaḥ . ekaprakārā vispaṣṭa tarṇaśobhāvabhāsinaḥ . jāyante maṇayastasminnindranīlā mahāguṇāḥ . mṛtpāṣāṇaśilāvajrakarkarābhāsasaṁyutāḥ . avbhrikāpaṭalacchāyā varṇadoṣaiśca dūṣitāḥ . tata eva hi jāyante maṇayastatra bhūrayaḥ . śāstrasambodhita dhiyastān praśaṁsanti sūrayaḥ . dhāryamāṇasya ye dṛṣṭāḥ padmarāgamaṇerguṇāḥ . dhāraṇādindranīlasya tānevāpnoti mānavaḥ . yathā ca padmarāgāṇāṁ jātu kartṛbhayaṁ bhavet . indranīleṣvapi tathā draṣṭavyamaviśeṣataḥ . parīkṣāpratyayairyauśca padmarāgaḥ parīkṣyate . taeva pratyayā dṛṣṭā indranīlamaṇerapi . yāvantañca kramedagniṁ padmarāgaḥ prayogataḥ . indranīlamaṇistasmāt krameta sumahattaram . tathāpi na parīkṣārthaṁ guṇānāmativṛddhaye . maṇiragnau samādheyaḥ kathañcidapi kaścana . magnimātrā’parijñāne dāhadoṣaiśca dūṣitaḥ . so’narthāya bhavedbhartuḥ kartuḥ kārayitustathā . śyāmotpalakaravīrasphaṭikādyā iha budhaiḥ savaidūryāḥ . kathitā vijātaya ime sadṛśā maṇinendranīlena . gurubhāvakaṭhinabhānāścaiteṣāṁ nityameva vijñeyāḥ . kācādyāyāvaduttaravivardhamānā viśeṣeṇa . indranīlo yadā kaścit vibharti tāmravarṇatām . rakṣaṇīyau tathā tāmrau karavīrotpalābubhau . yasya madhyagatā bhāti nīlasyendrāyudhaprabhā . tadindranīlamityāhurmahārdhaṁ bhuvi durlabham . yastu varṇasya bhūyasvāt kṣīre śata guṇe sthitaḥ . nīlatāṁ tannayet sarvaṁ mahānīlaḥ sa ucyate . yat padmarāgasya mahāguṇasya mūlyaṁ bhavenmāṣa samunmitasya . tadindranīlasya mahāguṇasya savarṇasaṁkhyātulitasya mūlyam 12 nāgabhede pu° nīlānīlau tathā nāgau kalmāṣaśavalau tathā bhā° ā° 35 a° . krodhavaśagaṇāṁśajāte dvāparayugīye 13 nṛpabhede gaṇaḥ krodhavaśo nāma yaste rājan! prakīrtitaḥ . tataḥ saṁjajñire vīrāḥ kṣitāviha narādhipāḥ ityuprakrame krathovikṣitraḥ surathaḥ śrīmān nīlaśca bhūmipaḥ bhā° ā° 670 uktam . 14 ajamīḍhasya nīlyaparanāmnyāṁ nīlinyāṁ jāte putrabhede ajamīḍhasya nīlinī nāma ṣatnī tasyāṁ nīlanaṁjñaḥ putro’bhavat viṣṇupu° 4 aṁśe 19 a° . ajamīḍhasya 15 patnībhede strī ṅīp . ajamīḍhasya patnyastu tisro vai yaśasānvitā . nīlī ca keśinī caiva dhūminī ca varāṅganā harivaṁ° 22 a° vānarabhedaśca rāmasenāntargataḥ nalanīlāṅgadakrāthasundadvividapālitā . yayau sumahatī senā rāghavasyārthasiddhaye bhā° va° 282 a° . nīla + oṣadhijātau ṅīp . 16 nīlyoṣadhau strī nīlyā raktam an . nīla 17 nīlīrakte tri° 18 yamabhede pu° vaivasvatāya kālāya nīlāya parameṣṭhine yamatarpaṇamantraḥ . 19 kālikāśaktibhede strī nīlā ghanā valākā ca mātrā mudrā mitā ca mām kālīkavacam . 20 kācalavaṇe 21 tālīśapatre 22 viṣe śabdārthaci° . 23 nṛtyāṅgāṣṭottaraśatakaraṇāntargatakaraṇe saṁgītadā° . nīlavastradhāraṇādiniṣedhaḥ mitākṣarāyām yathā nīlīraktaṁ yadā vastraṁ vrāhmaṇo’ṅreṣu dhārayet . ahorātroṣito bhūtvā pañcagavyena śudhyati romakūpe yadā gacchedraso nīlyāstu kasyacit . trivarṇeṣu ca sāmānyantaptakṛcchraṁ viśodhanam . pālanaṁ vikrayaścaiva tadvṛttyā copajīvanam . pātanañca bhavedvipre tribhiḥ kṛcchrairvyapohati . nīlīdāru yadā bhindyādbrāhmaṇasya śarīrataḥ . śoṇitaṁ dṛśyate yatra dvijaścāndrāyaṇañcaret . strīṇāṁ krīḍārthasambhone śayanīye na duptyati smṛtiḥ bhṛguṇāpyuktam strīkrīḍāśayane nīlī brāhmaṇasya na duṣyati . nṛpasya vṛddhau vaiśyasya parvavarjaṁ vighāraṇam tathā vastraviśeṣakṛtaśca pratiprasavaḥ kambale pradṛsūtre ca nīlīrāgo na duṣyati iti smaraṇāt . nīlīraktaṁ yadā vastra vipraḥ svāṅgeṣu dhārayet . tantusanta tisaṁkhyāke vaset sa narake dhruvam . skānde kāśīkhaṇḍe nīlīraktaṁ tu yadvastraṁ dūratastadvivarjayet . strīṇāṁ krīḍārthasaṁyoge śayanīye ga duṣyati . mṛte bhartari yā nārī nīlīvastraṁ tu ghārayet . bhartāgre narakaṁ yāti sā nārī tadanantaram . kambale paṭṭasūtre ca nīlīdomo na vidyate . śūdre viśeṣaḥ brāhmaṇasya sitaṁ vastraṁ nṛpate raktamulvaṇam . pītaṁ vaiśyasya śūdrasya nīlaṁ malavadiṣyate . nīlaṁ malavat kṛṣṇamiti vithā° pā° katicit nīlavastūni kavikalpalatāyāṁ darśitāni yathā śukaḥ śaivālaṁ dūrvā bālatṛṇaṁ budhagrahaḥ vaṁśāṅkuraḥ marakata indranīlamaṇiḥ . 24 mātrāvṛttabhede na° tālapayodharanāyakatomarayajradharam pāṇiyutañca vidhāya bhāminī vṛttavaram . nīlamidam phaṇināyakapiṅgalasaṁlapitam paṇḍitamaṇḍalikāsukhadaṁ sakhi! karṇagatam pariśīlaya nīlanicolam gītago° . śukrāṅganīlopalanirmitānām māghaḥ kaṇṭhaprabhāsaṅgaviśeṣanīlāṁ kṛṣṇakhacaṁ granthimatīṁ dadhānam kumā° . nīlaśyāmalakālānāmīṣadbhedāt ekaparyāyatā amare paryāyatayā teṣāmukteḥ . 25 diggajabhede nīrājanaśabde dṛśyam . |
नीलक – nīlaka | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899nīlaka mfn. blue (esp. as N. of the third unknown quantity or of its
square) nīlaka m. Terminalia Tomentosa nīlaka m. a male bee nīlaka m. Antilope Picta nīlaka m. a dark-coloured horse nīlaka m. a partic. medicinal plant nīlaka m. the indigo plant nīlaka m. Nyctanthes Arbor Tristis nīlaka m. Vitex Negundo nīlaka m. a kind of malady (black and blue marks in the face) nīlaka m. a partic. disease of the lens of the eye (also “-likā-kāca”, m.) nīlaka m. N. of a river nīlaka n. blue steel Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch nīlaka (von nīla) 1) adj. “blau”, als Bez. “der dritten unbekannten Grösse, ihres Quadrats u.s.w.” COLEBR. Alg. 139. 228. — 2) m. a) N. eines Baumes, “Terminalia tomentosa W. u. A.” (asana) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — b) “eine Bienenart(?)”: yathā madhukarīṁ dhyāyannīlakastanmayo bhavet. taddhyānācca tathā nārīgarbhaḥ syāttu naropamaḥ.. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 74, 4. — c) “eine Antilopenart, A. picta” RĀJAN. bei WILS. — d) “ein dunkelfarbiges Pferd, Rappe” H. 1239. — 3) f. nīlikā a) “eine best. stark wuchernde Wasserpflanze”: (jvaram) apāṁ tu nīlikāṁ vidyāt MBH. 12, 10260 = HARIV. 10558. = śephālikā “Nyctanthes arbor tristis” AK. 2, 4, 2, 51. MED. k. 111. HALĀY. 3, 61. = nīlī “die Indigopflanze” MED. = nīlasinduvāra RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — “eine best. Arzeneipflanze” SUŚR. 1, 183, 17. 2, 68, 16. — b) “eine best. Krankheit, das Erscheinen blauer Flecken im Gesicht” MED. SUŚR. 1, 90, 13. 2, 120, 11. — c) = nīlikākāca SUŚR. 2, 344, 19. — d) N. pr. eines Flusses MBH. 13, 7654. — 4) n. a) “schwarzes Salz” (kācalavaṇa). — b) “blauer Stahl” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) “blauer Vitriol” RĀJAN. bei WILS. — Vgl. kaṇṭhanīlaka, janinīlikā. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 nīlaka na° nīla + khārthe saṁjñāyāṁ kan vā . 1 kācalavaṇaṁ 2 vartalohe 3 asanavṛkṣe rājani° . nīlena varṇeca kāyati kai–ka . 4 bhramare kīṭabhede pu° . yathā madhukarīṁ dhyāyan nīlakastanmayo bhavet vṛha° saṁ° 75 a° pāṭhāntaram . vījagaṇitokte 5 avyaktarāśisaṁjñābhede pu° yāvattāvat kālako nīlako’nyovarṇaḥ pīto lohitaścaivamādyāḥ vījaga0 |
नीलकम् – nīlakam | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
nīlakam (1) Black salt. (2) Blue steel. (3) Blue vitriol. –kaḥ (1) A darkcoloured horse. (2) (In alg.) The third unknown quantity (corresponding to z of European Algebra). |
नीलता – nīlatā | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899nīlatā “nīla-tā” f. blueness, a dark colour
Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch nīlatā (von nīla) f. “blaue –, dunkle Farbe” SUŚR.1,305,11. KĀM. NĪTIS.7,16. VĀYU-P. in Verz. d. Oxf. H. 48,b,21. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 nīlatā nīla + tā, f. Dark-blue colour, Kām. Nītis. 7, 16. |
नीलति – nīlati | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
nīlati Den. P. (1) To be of a darkblue colour. (2) To dye blue. |
नीललोहित – nīlalohita | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899nīlalohita “nīla-lohita” mfn. dark-blue and red, purple, dark-red &c. &c.
nīlalohita “nīla-lohita” m. N. of śiva nīlalohita “nīla-lohita” m. N. of a Kalpa (see s.v.) nīlalohita “nīla-lohita” m. a mixture of blue and red, a purple colour nīlalohita “nīla-lohita” m. N. of a goddess (the wife of śiva) nīlalohita “nīla-lohita” m. “-tākṣa” m. “having dark-red eyes”, śiva nīlalohita “nīla-lohita” m. “-tāntevāsin” m. śiva’s pupil i.e. Paraśu-rāma Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch nīlalohita (nīla + lo-) 1) adj. “schwarzblau und roth, dunkelroth” ṚV. 10, 85, 28. VS. 16, 47. AV. 4, 17, 4. -tenāmūnabhyavatanomi 8, 8, 24. KAUŚ. 16. 32. 40. 48. 83. von Rudra-Śiva (auch subst.) AK. 1, 1, 1, 28. H. 198. HALĀY. 1, 13. VP. 58, N. 2. BHĀG. P. 3, 12, 7. 15. 4, 6, 41. MBH. 13. 1084. KUMĀRAS. 2, 57. ŚĀK. 194. BRAHMA-P. in LA. 53, 12. nīlalohitākṣa von Śiva ŚIV. — 2) m. N. eines Kalpa; s. u. kalpa 2,d. — 3) f. ā a) “eine best. Pflanze” (s. bhūmijambu) ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — b) N. einer Göttin BRAHMA-P. in Verz. d. Oxf. H. 19,a,39. Śiva’s Gemahlin ŚKDR. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 nīlalohita a. blue-red, E. of Śiva. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 nīlalohita pu° varṇāvarṇana pā° karma° . kaṇṭhena nīle keśeṣu lohitavarṇayukte 1 śive amaraḥ . aṁśāyute niṣikasya nīlalohitatisaḥ kṛpā° drāpe anyasaspate daridra! nīlalohita! yaju° 16 . 47 prajārthaṁ varayāmāsa nīlalohitasaṁjñitam bhā° ānu° 16 a° . 2 niśritanīlalohitavarṇe 3 tadyute tri° . 4 bhūbhijabyāṁ strī śabdaca° . |
नीलवर्ण – nīlavarṇa | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899nīlavarṇa “nīla-varṇa” mfn. blue-coloured, blue
nīlavarṇa “nīla-varṇa” m. or n. a radish nīlavarṇa “nīla-varṇa” m. Grewia Asiatica Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch nīlavarṇa (nīla + va-) 1) adj. “blaufarbig, blau” HIT. III, 57. — 2) m. oder n. a) “Grewia orientalis Lin.” — b) “Rettig” NIGH. PR. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 nīlavarṇa a. blue-coloured. |
नीलाय – nīlāya | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899nīlāya Nom. P. ā. “-yati” and “-te”, to begin to become blue or dark-
coloured (cf. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 nīlāya nīlā-ya, den. Ā. begin to be dark or blue. |
नीलिमन् – nīliman | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899nīliman m. blueness, blackness, darkness
Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 nīliman m. Blue colour, darkness, blueness; Māl. 5. 6. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch nīliman (von nīla) m. “eine dunkle Farbe, Schwärze” GĪT. 8, 3. Schol. zu KAUṢ. UP. in Ind. St. 1, 410, 6. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 nīliman nīliman, i. e. nīla + iman, m. Blackness, Gīt. 8, 3. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 nīliman m. blackness, dark colour. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 nīliman pu° nīlasya bhāvaḥ imanic . nīlavarṇe kañjakamalinavilocanacumbanaviracitanīlimarūpas gītayo0 |
नीली – nīlī | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899nīlī f. of “nīla” q.v.
Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 nīlī (1) The indigo plant; tatra nīlīrasaparipūrṇaṁ mahābhāṁḍamāsīt Pt. 1; eko grahastu mīnānāṁ nīlīmadyapayoryathā Pt. 1. 260. (2) A species of blue fly. (3) A kind of disease. — Comp. –rāga a. firm in attachment. ( –gaḥ) 1. affection as unchangeable as the colour of indigo, unalterable or unswerving attachment. –2. a firm and constant friend. –saṁdhānaṁ fermentation of indigo. -bhāṁḍaṁ an indigo vat. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 nīlī Second wife of King Ajamīḍha. Two sons called Duṣyanta and Parameṣṭhī were born to the king of Nīlī. (Ādi Parva, Chapter 94, Verse 32). Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 nīlī strī, (nīlo niṣpādyatvenāstyasyāḥ iti . nīla + ac tato ṅīṣ .) vṛkṣabhedaḥ . nīlera gācha iti bhāṣā .. tatparyāyaḥ . kālā 2 klītakikā 3 grāmīṇā 4 madhuparṇikā 5 rañjanī 6 śrīphalī 7 tutthā 8 tūṇī 9 dolā 10 nīlinī 11 . ityamaraḥ . 2 . 4 . 94 .. nīlā 12 tūlī 13 droṇī 14 melā 15 . iti bharataḥ .. nīlapatrī 16 rājñī 17 nīlikā 18 nīlapuṣpī 19 kālī 20 śyāmā 21 śodhanī 22 śrīphalā 23 grāmyā 24 bhadrā 25 bhāravāhī 26 mocā 27 kṛṣṇā 28 vyañjanakeśī 29 mahāphalā 30 asitā 31 klītanī 32 keśī 33 cāraṭikā 34 gandhapuṣpā 35 śyāmalikā 36 raṅgapatrī 37 mahābalā 38 sthiraraṅgā 39 raṅgapuṣpī 40 dūlī 41 dūlikā 42 droṇikā 43 . iti śabdaratnāvalī .. asyā guṇāḥ . kaṭutvam . tiktatvam . uṣṇatvam . keśyatvam . kāsakaphamarudviṣodaravyādhigulmajantuvraṇanāśitvañca . iti rājanirghaṇṭaḥ .. nīlikārogaḥ . iti medinī . le, 29 .. |
नीलीवर्ण – nīlīvarṇa | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899nīlīvarṇa “nīlī-varṇa” mfn. having the colour of indigo “-śṛgāla-vat” ind.
like the blue jackal Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 nīlīvarṇa a. having the colour of indigo. |
नैल्य – nailya | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899nailya n. (fr. “nīla”) dark-blue (the colour)
Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch nailya (von nīla) n. “die dunkelblaue Farbe” RĀMATARKAVĀGĪŚA zu VOP. ŚKDR. (śivasya) kaṇṭhe nailyam HARIV. 7592. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 nailya nailya, i. e. nīla + ya, n. Darkblue (the colour). Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 nailya nail-ya, n. dark-blue colour. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 nailya na° nīlasya bhāvaḥ ṣyañ . nīlavarṇe nilakaṇṭhaśabde udā° . |
नैल्यम् – nailyam | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
nailyam Blueness, dark-blue colour. |
परुष – paruṣa | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899paruṣa mf (“ā”) n. (older f. “paruṣṇī”) knotty (as reed)
mf (“ā”) n. spotted, variegated, dirty-coloured &c. &c. mf (“ā”) n. hard, stiff, rugged, rough, uneven, shaggy &c. mf (“ā”) n. intertwined with creepers (as a tree) mf (“ā”) n. piercing, keen, sharp, violent, harsh, severe, unkind (“am” ind.) paruṣa m. a reed paruṣa m. an arrow paruṣa m. Grewia Asiatica or Xylocarpus Granatum paruṣa mf (“ā”) n. (“paruṣa”) m. N. of a demon paruṣa mf (“ā”) n. (“ā”) f. a kind of riddle paruṣa m. (“-ṣṇī”) f. N. of one of the rivers of the Panjāb now called Rāvī paruṣa n. harsh and contumelious speech, abuse &c. paruṣa n. the fruit of Grewia Asiatica or Xylocarpus Granatum paruṣa n. a species of Barleria with blue flowers paruṣa see under “paru”. Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 paruṣa a. [pṝ-uṣan] (1) Hard, rough, rugged, stiff (opp. mṛdu or ślakṣṇa); paruṣaṁ carma, paruṣā mālā &c. (2) Harsh, abusive, severe, unkind, cruel, stern (as words); (vāk) aparuṣā paruṣākṣaramīritā R. 9. 8; Pt. 1. 50; said also of a person; snigdhe yatparuṣāsi Gīt. 9; Y. 1. 310. (3) Harsh or disagreeable to the ear (as a sound &c.); tena vajraparuṣasvanaṁ dhanuḥ R. 11. 46; Me. 61. (4) Rough, coarse, rough to the touch, shaggy (as hair); śuddhasnānātparuṣamalakaṁ Me. 91. (5) Sharp, violent, strong, keen, piercing (wind &c.); paruṣapavanavegotkṣiptasaṁśuṣkaparṇaḥ Rs. 1. 22; 2. 28. (6) Gross. (7) Dirty. (8) Spotted, variegated. (9) Ved. Knotted. –ṣaṁ A harsh or abusive speech, abuse. — Comp. –akṣara a. using harsh or abusive language; Pt. 1. 50 –itara a. other than rough, soft, mild; R. 5. 68. –ukti, f. vacanaṁ abusive or harsh language. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch paruṣa (von parus) UṆĀDIS. 4, 75. 1) adj. f. ā, in der älteren Sprache paruṣṇī. a) “knotig”, von Rohrpflanzen: paruṣṇī śīpālā AV. 6, 12, 3. — b) “fleckig, bunt, ungleichfarbig, schmutzig”; = karbura H. an. 3, 738. MED. sh. 39. ukṣaṇaḥ ṚV. 5, 27, 5. paruṣe gavi 6, 56, 3; vgl. NIR. 2, 6. tvametadadhārayaḥ kṛṣṇāsu rohiṇīṣu ca. paruṣṇīṣu ruśatpayaḥ ṚV. 8, 82, 13. (takmā) yaḥ paruṣaḥ pāruṣeyo ‘vadhvaṁsa ivāruṇaḥ AV. 5, 22, 3. śoṇita SUŚR. 1, 45, 2. 85, 18. 260, 1. asitavicitranīlaparuṣaḥ (dinakṛt) VARĀH. BṚH. S. 3, 39. śītakara 4, 29. rogānkaroti paruṣaḥ (agastyaḥ) kapilastvavṛṣṭim 12, 21. 17, 11. -vigraha HARIV. 12141. saṁmārjanavihīnāni paruṣāṇi (kuṭumbibhavanāni) R. 2, 71, 34. tamasā saṁvṛte loke ghoreṇa paruṣeṇa ca MBH. 3, 12145. cāṇḍāla R. 1, 58, 10. paruṣarajo’ruṇīkṛtatanu (dinakṛt) VARĀH. BṚH. S. 3, 38. -ghana VIKR. 142. tadaṅgarajasā paruṣībhavanti (v. l. für malinībhavanti) ŚĀK. 176. — c) “rauh, uneben”; = śukta, karkaśa, rūkṣa, asnigdha AK. 3, 4, 14, 85. H. 1386. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 4, 98. (gatim) prayāti paruṣāṁ ghorām MBH. 13, 5443. ghanāśmaparuṣe deśe RĀJA-TAR. 4, 308. -carman PAÑCAT. 21, 13. jihvā VARĀH. BṚH. S. 67, 53. “struppig”, von Haaren: śuddhasnānātparuṣamalakam MEGH. 88. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 67, 83. śmaśrubhiḥ 57. von Bäumen KATHĀS. 2, 4 (BROCKHAUS fasst hier das Wort als N. eines best. Baumes). — d) “rauh, stechend”, von Winden R. 6, 16, 4. 31, 38. 70, 51. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 26, 4 (su-). ṚT. 1, 22. adv.: paruṣaṁ pavano vavau HARIV. 9420. von der Sonnengluth: atiśayaparuṣābhirgrīṣmavahneḥ śikhābhiḥ ṚT. 2, 28. — e) “rauh”, von Tönen: vajraparuṣasvanaṁ dhanuḥ RAGH. 11, 46. śravaṇaparuṣairgarjitaiḥ MEGH. 62. garjanti paruṣaṁ (adv.) meghāḥ HARIV. 9295. bhinnabhairavadīnārtaparuṣakṣāmajarjarāḥ svarāḥ VARĀH. BṚH. S. 85, 36. śakuniḥ rauti paruṣaravaḥ 52, 106. “rauh, hart, barsch”, von Reden AK. 1, 1, 5, 19. H. 269. H. an. MED. vāc, vākya, ukti, gir MBH. 1, 7090. R. 3, 35, 56. Spr. 1425. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 52, 104. 77, 7. -vacana adj. BṚH. 22 (21), 17. paruṣāṇi “rauhe, harte, barsche Reden” MBH. 3, 15689. 7, 5659. Spr. 465. bhavanaṁ devasya viśveśiturno dauvārikanirdayoktiparuṣam 1550. tāmuvāca tato vīraḥ paruṣam (acc. neutr. oder adv.) R. 1, 1, 80. na paruṣaṁ vaktavyā nāpi tāḍanīyāste (turagāḥ) VARĀH. BṚH. S. 43, 7. PAÑCAT. ed. orn. 34, 8. -vaṇdinī 7. paruṣataramidamāha PAÑCAT. 89, 2. mṛduparuṣaguṇau yojanīyau svakāle “Milde und Strenge (Barschheit”) Spr. 1314. “barsch, grob, roh”, von Personen YĀJÑ. 1, 309 (a-). 3, 135. BHARTṚ. 2, 39. GĪT. 9, 10. — 2) m. a) “Rohr”: paruṣānamūnparuṣāhvaḥ kṛṇotu. kṣipraṁ śara iva bhajyantām “er mache sie zu Rohren” d. h. “zerbrechlich wie diese” AV. 8, 8, 4. — b) “Pfeil”: upotaparuṣā adhijyadhanvanaḥ ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 14, 22, 20. LĀṬY. 8, 5, 7. — c) = parūṣa; s. u. 5,b. — 3) f. paruṣā Bez. “einer Art Räthsel” Verz. d. Oxf. H. 204,a,28. — 4) f. paruṣṇī a) N. pr. eines Flusses des Pendshab, welcher später Irāvatī, heut zu Tage Ravi heisst (“die Knotige”, d. h. “an Ausbuchtungen” oder “Krümmungen Reiche”, NIR. 9, 26 oder “die Rohrige, arundinosa”) ṚV. 7, 18, 8. 9. satyamittvā mahenadi paruṣṇyava dediśam 8, 63, 15. 10, 75, 5. Vgl. paroṣṇī. — b) viell. “Wolke (die Knotige, Geballte” oder “die Bunte)”: uta sma te (marutaḥ) paruṣṇyāmūrṇā vasata śundhyuvaḥ ṚV. 5, 52, 9. (indraḥ) śriye paruṣṇīmuṣamāṇa ūrṇāṁ yasyāḥ parvāṇi sakhyāya vivye 4, 22, 2. — 5) n. a) “eine blaublühende Barleria” ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — b) = parūṣa n. BHĀVAPR. im ŚKDR. Nach ŚABDAC. und ŚABDAM. bei WILSON als m. auch N. des Baumes selbst. — Vgl. pāruṣya. paruṣa 1) b) “schmutzig”: bhinnaiśca paruṣaiḥ (= karkaśaiḥ NĪLAK.) pādaiḥ savraṇaiḥ śoṇitokṣitaiḥ MBH. 3, 16862. paruṣa 2) b) lies -dhanvānaḥ. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 paruṣa A Rākṣasa (demon). He was one among the twelve demons who supported Khara when the latter fought against Śrī Rāma. (Sarga 26, Araṇya Kāṇḍa, Vālmīki Rāmāyaṇa). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 paruṣa paruṣa, i. e. parus + a, adj., f. ṣā. 1. Knotty, huge, Vikr. d. 142. 2. Variegated, spotted. 3. Soiled, Rām. 2, 71, 34. 4. Rough, rugged, Rājat. 4, 308. 5. Harsh, MBh. 1, 7090. 6. Severe, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 1314. 7. Coarse, Yājñ. 1, 309. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 paruṣa (f. old paruṣṇī) knotty (reed), bristly, shaggy (hair); spotted, many-coloured, dirty; piercing, keen, rough, harsh. –m. reed, arrow; f. paruṣṇī cloud, N. of a river; n. sgl. & pl. harsh language. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 paruṣa par-uṣ-a, a. (ā, V. paruṣṇī) knotty (reed); spotted, variegated; dirty; rough, rugged; spotted, variegated; dirty; rough rugged; diṣevelled, shaggy; rough (wind), scorching (fire, sun); harsh (tone); severe, hard, rude, abusive (speech, person); n. sg., pl. contumelious speech, abuse: -vacana, n. harsh or contumelious speech; a. speaking harshly or rudely; -vādin, a. id.; -akṣara, a. rough, harsh (of speeches or persons): -m, ad. rudely, harshly. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 paruṣa na° pṝ–uṣan . 1 niṣṭhuravacane 2 nīsījhiṇṭyām amaraḥ 3 phalabhede parūṣake māvapra° . |
मणिः – maṇiḥ | Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890
maṇiḥ [maṇ-in strītvapakṣe vā ṅīp] (Said to be f. also, but rarely used) (1) A jewel, gem, precious stone; maṇirluṭhati padiṣu kācaḥ śirasi dhāryate . yathaivāste tathaivāstāṁ kācaḥ kāco maṇirmaṇiḥ H. 2. 68; alabdhaśāṇotkaṣaṇā nṛpāṇāṁ na jātu maulau maṇayo vasaṁti Bv. 1. 73; maṇau vajrasamutkīrṇe sūtrasyevāsti me gatiḥ R. 1. 4; 3. 18. (2) An ornament in general. (3) Anything best of its kind; cf. ratna. (4) A magnet, loadstone. (5) The wrist. (6) A water-pot. (7) Clitoris. (8) Glans penis. (9) A crystal. (10) The fleshy excrescence on the neck of a goat (also written maṇī in these senses). — Comp. –iṁdraḥ, –rājaḥ a diamond. –kaṁṭhaḥ the blue jay. –kaṁṭhakaḥ a cock. –karṇikā, –karṇī N. of a sacred pool in Benares. –kācaḥ the feathered part of an arrow. –kānanaṁ the neck. –kāraḥ a lapidary, jeweller. –tārakaḥ the crane or Sārasa bird. –daṁḍa a. having a handle adorncd with jewels. –darpaṇaḥ a jewelled mirror. –dīpaḥ 1. a lamp having jewels. –2. a jewel serving as a lamp. –doṣaḥ a flaw or defect in a jewel. –dvīpaḥ 1. the hood of the serpent Ananta. –2. N. of a fabulous island in the ocean of nectar. –dhanuḥ m., –dhanus n. a rainbow. –pālī a female keeper of jewels. –puṣpakaḥ N. of the ocean shell of Sahadeva; Bg. 1. 16. –pūraḥ 1. the navel. –2. a kind of bodice richly adorned with jeweles. ( –raṁ) 1. N. of a town in Kalinga. –2. the pit of the stomach, or a mystical circle on the navel (also maṇipūraka). —patiḥ. an epithet of Babhruvāhana. –pravekaḥ a most excellent jewel. –baṁdhaḥ 1. the wrist; S. 7. –2. the fastening of jewels; R. 12. 102. –baṁdhanaṁ 1. fastening on of jewels, a string or ornament of pearls. –2. that part of a ring or bracelet where the jewels are set, collet; S. 6. –3. the wrist; S. 3. 13. –bījaḥ, –vījaḥ the pomegranate tree. –bhittiḥ f. N. of the palace of Śeṣa. –bhūḥ f. a floor set with jewels. –bhūmiḥ f. 1. a mine of jewels. –2. a jewelled floor, floor inlaid with jewels. –maṁḍapaḥ N. of the residence of Śeṣa. –maṁthaṁ rock-salt. –mālā 1. a string or necklace of jewels. –2. lustre, splendour, beauty. –3. a circular impression left by a bite (in amorous sports). –4. N. of Lakṣmī. –5. N. of a metre. –mekhala a. girdled with gems. –yaṣṭiḥ m. f. a jewelled stick, a string of jewels. –ratnaṁ a jewel, gem. –rāgaḥ the colour of jewels ( –gaṁ) vermilion. –viśeṣaḥ an excellent jewel. –śilā a jewelled slab. –saraḥ a necklace. –sūtraṁ a string of pearls. –sopānaṁ a jewelled staircase. –staṁbhaḥ a pillar inlaid with jewels. –harmyaṁ a jewelled or crystal palace. Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 maṇiḥ puṁ, strī, (maṇa + sarvadhātubhya in . uṇā° 4 . 117 . itīn .) aśmajātiḥ . (yathā, raghau . 1 . 4 . maṇau vajrasamutkīrṇe sūtrasyevāsti me gatiḥ .) muktādikam . tatparyāyaḥ . ratnam 2 maṇī 3 . ityamaraḥ . 2 . 9 . 93 . (tathācāsya paryāyaḥ . ratnaṁ klīve maṇiḥ puṁsi striyāmapi nigadyate . tattu pāṣāṇabhedo’sti muktādi ca taducyate .. iti bhāvaprakāśasya pūrbakhaṇḍe prathame bhāge .) asya guṇāḥ . maṇiratnaṁ paraṁ śītaṁ kaṣāyaṁ svādu lekhanam . cakṣuṣyaṁ dhāraṇāttacca pāpālakṣmīvināśanam .. iti rājaballabhaḥ .. (tathācāsya guṇāḥ . muktāvidrumavajrendravaidūryasphaṭikādayaḥ . cakṣuṣyā maṇayaḥ śītā lekhanā viṣasūdanāḥ . pavitrā dhāraṇāyāśca pāpmālakṣmīmalāpahāḥ .. iti suśrute sūtrasthāne 46 adhyāye .) ajāyāḥ kaṇṭhasthitastanaḥ . liṅgāgram . aliñjaraḥ . iti medinī . 24 .. yonyagrabhāgaḥ . iti śabdaratnāvalī .. nāgaviśeṣaḥ . iti jaṭādharaḥ .. maṇibandhaḥ . iti hemacandraḥ .. (munibhedaḥ . yathā, mahābhārate . 2 . 11 . 22 . asito devalaścaiva jaigiṣavyaśca tattvavit . ṛṣabho jitaśatruśca mahāvīryastathā maṇiḥ ..) |
मणिक – maṇika | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899maṇika m. a jewel, gem, precious stone
maṇika m. (ifc. f: “ā”) a water-jar or pitcher maṇika pl. (accord. to globular formations of flesh on an animal’s shoulder Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch maṇika (von maṇi) m. gaṇa sthūlādi zu P. 5, 4, 3. gaṇa yāvādi zu 29. gaṇa caturvarṇādi zu 5, 1, 124, Vārtt. 1. 1) “ein grosser Wassertopf” AK. 2, 9, 31 (n.). H. 1022. HALĀY. 2, 162. ĀŚV. GṚHY. 2, 9, 3. 4, 6, 4. dvāvudakumbhau maṇika āsiñcet GOBH. 3, 9, 6. 7. 1, 1, 26. ŚĀÑKH. GṚHY. 2, 14. PĀR. GṚHY. 2, 9. avaṭe minoti maṇikam 5. ADBH. BR. bei WEBER, Omina 316. vivṛddhamūṣikā raghyā vibhinnamaṇikāstathā MBH. 16, 37. Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 728, 2. — 2) nach SĀY. “kugelförmige Fleischbildungen an der Schulter des Thieres”: skandhyā maṇikāstisraśca kīkasāḥ AIT. BR. 7, 1. Vielleicht “das muldenförmig ausgehöhlte Schulterbein.” — Vgl. māṇikya. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 maṇika maṇi + ka, I. m. A precious stone, a jewel. II. n. A small waterpot, Pārask. in Journ. of the German Oriental Society, ix. xxi. n. 4. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 maṇika m. a large water-jar. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 maṇika maṇi-ka, m. large water-pot: pl. fleshy excrescences on the shoulder of an animal: -karṇikā, f. earring of pearls or gems; N. of a sacred pool near Benares; N.; -kā-ra, m. jeweller; -daṇḍa, a. having a handle adorned with jewels; -datta, m. N. of a merchant; -dara, m. N. of a chief of the Yakṣas; -darpaṇa, m. jewelled mirror; -dīpa, m. jewel-lamp (in which gems supply the place of the burning wick): -ka, m. id.; -dhanu, m., -dhanus, n. rainbow; -puṣpa-ka, m. (gem-flowered), N. of the conch of Sahadeva; -puṣpa+īśvara, m. N. of an attendant of Śiva; -pūra, n. N. of a town in Kaliṅga situated on the sea-coast (also – pura); -pra-dīpa, m. jewel-lamp (= dīpa); -bandha, m. fastening or putting on of jewels; (place where jewels are fastened), wrist; -bandh-ana, n. string or ornament of pearls; wrist; -bhadra, m. N. of a brother of Kubera and prince of the Yakṣas; N. of a Śreṣṭhin; -mañjarī, f. rows of pearls; -maṇḍapa, m. hall of crystal, hall resting on crystal columns; -mat, a. jewelled; m. N.; -maya, a. (ī) consisting of jewels: -bhū, a. having floors –; -mālā, f. string of jewels, necklace; -yaṣṭi, f. id.; -ratna, n. jewel: -maya, a. (ī) consisting of jewels, crystal; -rāga, m. colour of a jewel; -varman, m. N. of a merchant; -śṛṅga, m. sun; -śyāma, a. blue like a sapphire; -sara, m. string of pearls, pearl necklace; -sūtra, n. string of pearls; -sopāna, n. jewelled or crystal staircase; -stambha, m. jewelled or crystal pillar; -sraj, f. wreath of jewels; -harmya, n. crystal palace, N. of a palace. |
मेचक – mecaka | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899mecaka mf (“ā”) n. dark-blue, black &c. (in alg. applied to the 15th
unknown quantity mecaka m. dark-blue colour, blackness mecaka m. the eye of a peacock’s tail mecaka m. a kind of gem mecaka m. smoke mecaka m. a cloud mecaka m. Moringa Pterygosperma mecaka m. (also n.) a teat, nipple mecaka n. darkness mecaka n. sulphuret of antimony, L: Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 mecaka a. [cf. Uṇ. 5. 37] Black, dark-blue, dark-coloured kurvanna janamecakā iva diśo meghaḥ samuttiṣṭhate Mk. 5. 23; U. 6. 25; Me. 59. –kaḥ (1) Blackness, the dark blue-colour. (2) An eye of a peacock’s tail; Māl. 6. 5. (3) A cloud. (4) Smoke. (5) A nipple. (6) A kind of gem. –kaṁ (1) Darkness. (2) Sulphuret of antimony. — Comp. –āpagā an epithet of the Yamunā. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch mecaka UṆĀDIS. 5, 37. 1) adj. f. ā “dunkelblau, dunkelfarbig”; m. “dunkelblaue Farbe, Schwärze” AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. 2, 9, 43. 3, 4, 14, 85. H. 1397. DURGA beim Schol. zu H. 1397. H. an. 3, 83. MED. k. 139. fg. HALĀY. 4, 49. MBH. 12, 10410. SUŚR. 1, 274, 17. 2, 293, 3. MṚCCH. 84, 24. MEGH. 60. KĀM. NĪTIS. 7, 17. Spr. 4811. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 21, 15. 34, 3. 54, 107. UTTARARĀMAC. 111, 1. ŚIŚ. 6, 26. — 2) m. a) “das Auge im Pfauenschweife” AK. 2, 5, 31. TRIK. 3, 3, 36. H. 1320. H. an. (lies – candrake). MED. HALĀY. 2, 87. Hierher ziehen WILSON und BENFEY MĀLAT. 90, 6, was aber wohl nicht richtig ist. — b) “Brustwarze” H. ś. 124. — c) “Rauch.” — d) “Wolke.” — e) “Moringa pterygosperma Gaertn.” ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — f) “ein best. Edelstein” VYUTP. 138. — 3) n. a) “Finsterniss” H. an. MED. — b) “Antimonium” MED. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 mecaka mechaka, I. adj. Black, Utt. Rāmac. 149, 15; dark blue, Pañc. ed. orn. i. d. 63; Megh. 60. II. m. 1. Black, or dark blue (the colour). 2. The eye of a peacock’s tail. 3. A cloud. 4. Smoke. III. m. and n. Darkness. IV. n. Antimony. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 mecaka a. dark blue, black; m. an eye in a peacock’s tail. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 mecaka meca-ka, a. dark-blue, dark-coloured, sable, sombre; m. eye in a peacock’s tail: i-ta, den. pp. having a dark-blue sheen. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 mecaka na° maca–vun pṛṣo° . 1 andhakāre 2 sroto’ñjane ca medi° 3 nīlāñjane rājani° . 4 mayūracandrake 5 kṛṣṇavarṇe medi° . 6 dhūme 7 meghe 8 śobhāñjane śabdara° 9 kṛṣṇavarṇayute tri° amaraḥ . |
मेचकित – mecakita | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899mecakita mfn. furnished with decorations which resemble the eyes of a
peacock’s tail mfn. having a dark blue-colour |
लोह – loha | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899loha mfn. (prob. fr. a “ruh” for a lost “rudh”, “to be red”; cf. “rohi, rohiṇa”
&c.) red, reddish, copper-coloured mfn. made of copper () mfn. made of iron loha m. n. red metal, copper &c. &c. loha m. (in later language) iron (either crude or wrought) or steel or gold or any metal loha m. a weapon loha m. a fish-hook loha m. blood loha m. the red goat (cf. “lohāja”) loha m. (prob.) a kind of bird loha m. N. of a man g. “naḍādi” loha m. (pl.) N. of a people loha n. any object or vessel made of iron loha n. aloe wood, Agallochum Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 loha a. (1) Red, reddish. (2) Made of copper, coppery. (3) Made of iron. –haḥ, –haṁ (1) Copper. (2) Iron. (3) Steel. (4) Any metal. (5) Gold. (6) Blood. (7) A weapon; Ms. 9. 321. (8) A fish-hook. –haḥ The red goat. –haṁ Aloe-wood. — Comp. –ajaḥ the red goat. –abhisāraḥ, –abhihāraḥ N. of a military ceremony resembling nīrājana q. v. –āmiṣaḥ the flesh of the red-haired goat. –uttamaṁ gold. –kāṁtaḥ a loadstone, magnet. –kāraḥ a blacksmith. –kiṭṭaṁ rust of iron. –ghātakaḥ a blacksmith. –cūrṇaṁ iron-filings, rust of iron. –jaṁ 1. bell-metal. –2. iron-filings. –jāṁlaṁ a coat of mail. –jit m. a diamond. –drāvin m. borax. –nālaḥ an iron arrow. –pṛṣṭhaḥ a heron. –pratimā 1. an anvil. –2. an iron image. –vaddha a. tipped or studded with iron. –māraka a. calcining a metal. –muktikā red pearl. –rajas n. rust of iron. –rājakaṁ silver. –liṁgaṁ a boil filled with blood. –varaṁ gold. –varman n. iron-armour, mail. –śaṁkuḥ an iron spike. –śleṣaṇaḥ borax. –saṁkaraṁ blue steel. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch loha 1) adj. “röthlich”: aja ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 14, 13, 1. 15, 15, 2. chāgena sarvalohenānantyam PAIṬHĪNASI. bei KULL. zu M. 3, 272. varāha MBH. 1, 5369 nach der Lesart der ed. Bomb. (lauha ed. Calc.). Vgl. lohita. — b) “kupfern” (Comm.): kṣura ŚAT. BR. 2, 6, 4, 5. “eisern” KAUŚ. 25. — 2) m. n. (n. AK. 3, 6, 3, 23) gaṇa ardharcādi zu P. 2, 4, 31. “röthliches Metall, Kupfer” (nach den meisten Comm. der älteren Schriften); später “Eisen” und “Metall” überh. (acht lohāni “Metalle” aufgezählt beim Schol. zu H. 1039) NAIGH. 1, 2. AK. 2, 9, 98. H. 1037. 1039. an. 2, 601. MED. h. 8. HALĀY. 2, 16. 21. 5, 71. ŚAT. BR. 13, 2, 2, 18. śyāmaṁ ca me lohaṁ ca me “dunkles und rothes Metall, Eisen und Kupfer” VS. 18, 13. ayolohahiraṇyāni KAUŚ. 46. LĀṬY. 2, 8, 4. suvarṇa, rajata, trapu, sīsa, loha CHĀND. UP. 4, 17, 7. 6, 1, 5 (“Gold” nach ŚAṁK.). aśmano lohamutthitam M. 9, 321 (= MBH. 5, 482. 12, 2010). 329. MBH. 14, 505. Spr. 2771. 3952. BHĀG. P. 2, 6, 5. 24. 3, 28, 10. -parīkṣā Verz. d. Oxf. H. 86,a,15. lohopalohaśodhanamāraṇa Verz. d. B.H. 290, 20. No. 969. -kṣura KĀTY. ŚR. 5, 2, 17. ŚĀÑKH. GṚHY. 1, 28. PĀR. GṚHY. 2, 1. -kaṭaka Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 417, 20. -kīla 336, 6. 366, 16. -paṭṭikā 356, 6. 363, 7. KAUŚ. 16. -bhāṇḍa VARĀH. BṚH. S. 42, 11. -nāḍī SUŚR. 2, 325, 21. -khaṅga WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 269. -śṛṅkhala MĀRK. P. 125, 13. -pratimā AK.2,10,35. SUŚR.1,35,13. fg. 96,12. 111,10. 228,3. RĀJA-TAR.4,298. BHĀG. P.4,11,17. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 320,b,10 v. u. PAÑCAT. 99,25. 100,23. Spr. 1042. 4267. -gandhi SUŚR. 1, 103, 9. 2, 18, 12. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 54, 8. 39. ŚĀÑG. SAṁH. 1, 7, 71. “Eisen” so v. a. “ein aus Eisen gemachter Gegenstand” VARĀH. BṚH. S. 28, 5. 41, 6. 50, 26 (= 54, 117). tāmralohaiḥ parivṛtā nidhayo ye so v. a. “in kupfernen und eisernen Behältern” MBH. 2, 2091. mīnastu sāmiṣaṁ lohamāsvādayati mṛtyave so v. a. “eiserner Haken” Spr. 1221. — 3) m. a) “die röthliche Ziege” (vgl. lohāja): khaḍgalohāmiṣam M. 3, 272. YĀJÑ. 1, 259. — b) wohl “ein best. Vogel”: haṁsakukkuṭalohānāṁ śikṣeta caritaṁ nṛpaḥ MĀRK. P. 27, 17. — c) pl. N. pr. eines Volkes MBH. 2, 1033. LIA. II, 135, N. 1. — d) N. pr. eines Mannes gaṇa naḍādi zu P. 4, 1, 99. — 4) n. “Agallochum” AK. 2, 6, 3, 28. H. 640. H. an. MED. — Vgl. a-, kṛṣṇa- (auch VARĀH. BṚH. S. 41, 7), tīkṣṇa-, tri-, nīla-, pīta-, mahā-, muṇḍa-, ravi-, sāra-. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 loha 1 I An Asura. When the Pāṇḍavas were living incognito they kept their weapons in a secret place. Availing of this opportunity Loha made an attack on the Pāṇḍavas. At once the devas made him blind and thus helped the Pāṇḍavas. That place later became famous as Lohaṇapura. (Skanda Purāṇa 1, 2, 65) loha II An ancient place of India. Arjuna conquered this place during his victory march. (Śloka 25, Chapter 27, Sabhā Parva). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 loha loha, i. e. luh, instead of rudh (see rudhira), + a, I. m. and n. 1. Iron, Man. 9, 321; Pañc. 100, 23 (cf. my transl.). 2. Steel. 3. Any metal, Hit. i. d. 92, M.M. 4. A weapon. 5. A fish-hook, Kām. Nītis. 1, 44. 6. Blood. 7. Aloe-wood. II. m. An iron-coloured kid, Man. 3, 272. — Comp. kṛṣṇa-, n. the loadstone, Suśr. 1, 142, 17. nīla-, n. blue steel, Rām. 3, 53, 57. pañcaloha, i. e. pañcan-, n. a metallic alloy containing five metals, copper, brass, tin, lead, and iron. mahā-, m. the loadstone. ravi-, n. copper. sāra-, n. steel. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 loha a. reddish, of copper or iron. m. n. reddish metal, copper, also iron & metal i.g.; n. an iron vessel. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 loha loh-a, a. [luh = 1. rudh] reddish (rare); made of copper (Br.1), — iron (S.1 ); m. n. reddish metal, copper (V.); iron, metal (C.); m. red goat; iron fish-hook; object or vessel made of iron; -kāra, m. blacksmith; -cūrṇa, n. iron rust; -ja, a. made of iron; -jaṅgha, m. N. of a Brāhman; -jāla, n. iron net, coat of mail; -daṇḍa, m. rod of iron; -nagara, m. N. of a town; -pāśa, m. iron chain; -maya, a. made of copper or iron. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 loha puṁna° lū–vic laustaṁ jahāti hā–ka . 1 dhātubhede amaraḥ . 2 dhātumātre medi° 3 rudhire rājani° 4 agurucandane na° amaraḥ . dhātubhedasvarūpādi bhāvapra° uktaṁ yathā atha lohasyotpattināmalakṣaṇaguṇāḥ purā lomiladaityānāṁ nihatānāṁ sureryudhi . utpannāni śarīrebhyo lohāni vividhāni ca . loho’strī śastrakaṁ tīkṣṇaṁ piṇḍaṁ kālāyasāyasī . gurutādṛḍhatotkledakaphadāhasya kāritā . aśmadoṣaḥ sudugandho doṣāḥ saptāyasasya tu . lohaṁ tiktarasaṁ śītaṁ madhuraṁ tuvaraṁ guru . rukṣaṁ vayasyaṁ cakṣuṣyaṁ lekhanaṁ vātalaṁ jayet . kaphaṁ pittaṁ paraṁ śūlaṁ śothārśaḥplīhapāṇḍutāḥ . medomehakṛmīn kuṣṭhaṁ tatkiṭṭaṁ tadvadeva hi . pāṇḍutvakuṣṭhāmayamṛtyudaṁ bha hṛdrogaśūlau kurute’śmarīñca . nānārujāñcāpi tathā prakopaṁ karoti hṛllāsamaśuddhaloham . jīpahāri madakāri cāyarsa cedaśuddhimadasaṁskṛtaṁ dhruvam . pāṭavaṁ na tanute śarīrake dāruṇāṁ hṛdi rujāñca yacchati . kudmāṇḍaṁ tilatailañca māṣānnaṁ rājikāṁ tathā . madyamamlarasañcāpi tyajellohasya sevakaḥ . tatra sāralohasya lakṣaṇaṁ guṇāśca kṣamāmṛcchikharākārāṇyaṅgānyamlena lepayet . lohe syuryatra sūkṣmāṇi tatsāramabhidhīyate . lohasāro hyayaṁ hanyādgrahaṇīmatisārakam . ardhasarvāṅgajaṁ vātaṁ śūlañca pariṇāmajam . chardiñca pīnasaṁ pittaṁ śvāsaṁ kāsaṁ vyapohati . atha kāntalohasya lakṣaṇaṁ guṇāśca . yat pātreṇa prasarati jale tailavinduḥ pratapte hiṅgurgandhaṁ tyajati ca nijaṁ tiktatāṁ nimbavalkaḥ . taptaṁ dugdhaṁ bhavati śikharākārakaṁ naiti bhūmiṁ kṛṣṇāṅgaḥ syāt sajalacaṇakaḥ kāntalohaṁ taduktam . gulmodarārśaḥśūlāmamāmavātaṁ bhagandaram . kāmalāśothakuṣṭhāni kṣayaṁ kāntamayo haret . plohānamamlapittañca yakṛccāpi śirorujam . sarvān rogān vijayate kāntalohaṁ na saṁśayaḥ . talaṁ vīryaṁ vapaḥpaṣṭiṁ kurute’gniṁ vivardhayet . atha kidamya dhmāyamānasya lohasya malaṁ maṇḍūramucyate . lohasiṁhānikā kiṭṭaṁ siṁhānañca nigadyate . yallohaṁ yadguṇaṁ proktaṁ tatkiṭṭa mapi tadguṇam . atha lohasya doṣaśāntaye śodhanamabhidhīyate pattalīkṛtapatrāṇi lohasyāgnau pratāpayet . niṣiñcet taptataptāni taile takre ca kāñjike . gomūtre ca kulatthānāṁ kaṣāye ca tridhātridhā . evaṁ lohasya patrāṇāṁ viśuddhiḥ saṁprajāyate . atha lohasya māraṇavidhiḥ śuddhalohabhavaṁ cūrṇaṁ pātālagaruḍīrasaiḥ . mardayitvā puṭedvahnau dadyādevaṁ puṭadvayam . puṭatrayaṁ kumāryāśca kuṭhāracchillikārasaiḥ . puṭaṣaṭkaṁ tato dadyādevaṁ tīkṣṇā mṛtirbhavet . anyacca . kṣipeddvādaśarmāśena daradaṁ tīkṣṇacūrṇataḥ . mardayet kanyakādrāvairyāmayugmaṁ tataḥ puṭet . evaṁ saptapuṭairmṛtyuṁ lohacūrṇamavāpnuyāt . satyā’nubhūto yogīndraiḥ kramo’nyo lohamāruṇe . kathyate rāmarājena kautūhaladhiyā’dhunā . sūtakaddviguṇa gandhaṁ dattvā kuryācca kajjalīm . dvayoḥ sarma lohacūrṇaṁ mardayet kanyakādravaiḥ . yāmayugmaṁ tataḥ piṇḍaṁ kṛtvā tāmrasya pātrake . gharme dhṛtvā rūcakasya patrairācchādavedvudhaḥ . yāmadvayādbhaveduṣṇaṁ dhānyarāśo nyasettataḥ . dattvopari śarāvañca tridinānte samuddharet . piṣṭvā ca gālayedvastrādevaṁ vāritaraṁ bhavet . dāḍimasya dalaṁ piṣṭvā taccaturguṇavāriṇā . tadrasenāyasaścūrṇaṁ sannīyāt plāvayedapi . ātape śodhayettacca puṭedevaṁ punaḥ punaḥ . ekaviśativāraistanmriyate nātra saṁśayaḥ . eva sarvāṇi lohāni svarṇādīnyapi mārayet . evaṁ māritalohasya guṇāḥ lohaṁ tiktaṁ saraṁ śītaṁ kaṣāyaṁ madhuraṁ guru . rūkṣaṁ vayasyaṁ cakṣuṣyaṁ lekhanaṁ vātalaṁ jayet . kaphaṁ pittaṁ garaṁ śūlaṁ śophārśaḥplīhapāṇḍutāḥ . medomehakramīn kuṣṭhaṁ tatkiṭṭaṁ tadvadeva hi . guñjāmekāṁ samārabhya yāvat syurnava rattikāḥ . tāvallohaṁ samaśnīyādyathādoṣānalaṁ paraḥ . kuṣmāṇḍaṁ tilatailañca māṣānnaṁ rājikāntathā . madyamamlarasañcava varjayellohasevakaḥ bhāvapra° . yadā tu āyase pātre pakvamaśnāti vai dvijaḥ . sa pāpiṣṭho’pi bhuṅkte’nnaṁ raurave paripacyate matsyapu° . ayaḥpātre payaḥpānaṁ gavyaṁ siddhānnameva ca . bhṛṣṭādikaṁ madhu guḍaṁ nārikelodakaṁ tathā . phalaṁ mūlañca yat kiñcidabhakṣya manurabravīt brahmavai° . |
लोहित – lohita | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899lohita mf (“ā” or “lohinī”) n. (cf. “rohita”) red, red-coloured, reddish &c.
&c. mf (“ā” or “lohinī”) n. made of copper, copper, metal lohita m. red (the colour), redness lohita m. a partic. disease of the eyelids, SarṅgS. lohita m. a kind of precious stone lohita m. a species of rice lohita m. a sort of bean or lentil lohita m. Dioscorea Purpurea lohita m. Cyprinus Rohita lohita m. a sort of deer lohita m. a snake, serpent lohita m. the planet Mars lohita m. N. of a serpent-demon lohita m. of a man (pl. his descendants) (cf. lohita m. of a country lohita m. of a river (the Brahma-putra) lohita m. of a sea lohita m. of a lake lohita m. (pl.) of a class of gods under the 12th Manu lohita mf (“ā” or “lohinī”) n. (“ā”) f. N. of one of the 7 tongues of Agni lohita m. Mimosa Pudica lohita m. a Punar-navā with red flowers lohita mf (“ā” or “lohinī”) n. (“lohinī”) f. a woman with a red-coloured skin or red with anger lohita n. any red substance lohita n. (also m. g. “ardharcādi”; ifc. f. “ā”), blood &c. &c. (“-taṁ” “kṛ”, to shed blood) lohita n. ruby lohita n. red sanders lohita n. a kind of sandal-wood lohita n. a kind of Agallochum lohita n. an imperfect form of rainbow lohita n. a battle, fight lohita Nom. P. “-tati”, to be or become red Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 lohita a. (lohitā or lohinī f.) [ruh-itac rasya laḥ Tv.] (1) Red, redcoloured; srastāṁsāvatimātralohitatalau bāhū ghaṭotkṣepaṇāt S. 1. 30; Ku. 3. 29; muhuścalatpallavalohinībhiruccaiḥśikhābhiḥ śikhinovalīḍhāḥ Ki. 16. 53. (2) Copper, made of copper. –taḥ (1) The red colour. (2) The planet Mars. (3) A serpent. (4) A kind of deer. (5) N. of the river Brahmaputra. (6) A kind of rice. –tā N. of one of the seven tongues of fire. –taṁ (1) Copper. (2) Blood; Ms. 8. 284. (3) Saffron. (4) Battle. (5) Red sanders. (6) A kind of sandal. (7) An imperfect form of a rainbow. (8) A kind of agallochum. — Comp. –akṣaḥ 1. a red die. –2. a kind of snake. –3. the (Indian) cuckoo. –4. an epithet of Viṣṇu. ( –kṣaṁ) 1. the armpit, thigh-joint; hip. –aṁgaḥ 1. the kāṁpilla tree. –2. the planet Mars. –ayas n. copper. –arman n. a red swelling in the whites of the eyes. –aśokaḥ a variety of Asoka (having red flowers). –aśvaḥ fire. –ānanaḥ an ichneumon. –ārdra a. dripping with blood. –īkṣaṇa a. redeyed. –uda a. having red or bloodred water. –kalmāṣa a. red-spotted. –kṛṣṇa a. dark-red. –kṣayaḥ loss of blood. –grīvaḥ an epithet of Agni. –caṁdanaṁ saffron. –puṣpakaḥ the granate tree. –mṛttikā red chalk. –śatapatraṁ a red lotus-flower. –śavala a. dappled with red. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch lohita (= älterem rohita) UṆĀDIS. 3, 94. 1) adj. f. lohitā (SUŚR. 1, 135, 1) und lohinī VOP. 4, 27. a) “röthlich, roth” AK. 1, 1, 4, 24. TRIK. 3, 3, 180. H. 1395. an. 3, 290. fg. (wo wohl varṇabhede st. balabhede zu lesen ist, welches WILSON durch “a form of array” wiedergiebt). MED. t. 148. HALĀY. 4, 48. VIŚVA bei UJJVAL. AV. 6, 127, 1. 14, 2, 48. 15, 1, 7. 8. niryāsa TS. 2, 5, 1, 4. lohinī AV. 7, 74, 1. 10, 2, 11. tvac 13, 3, 21. tanū 54. mṛttikā AIT. BR. 3, 34. ŚAT. BR. 3, 5, 4, 23. 14, 5, 2, 3. KIR. 16, 53. – ŚAT. BR. 5, 4, 1, 2. 5, 4, 1. 6, 6, 2, 11. -piṇḍa 14, 6, 11, 3. -rasa 13, 4, 4, 10. -sūtra KAUŚ. 85. aja 19. 35. 39. aśvattha 48. lohitoṣṇīṣa ĀŚV. ŚR. 9, 7, 4. GṚHY. 2, 9, 7. roman ŚĀÑKH. GṚHY. 1, 24. -pāṁsu GOBH. 4, 2, 7. ṚV. PRĀT. 17, 9. M. 5, 6. ghanāḥ MBH. 3, 14269. lohitāditya R. 3, 49, 4. HARIV. 12794. bhūmi SUŚR. 1, 135, 1. lākṣā ṚT. 1, 5. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 21, 15. 65, 2. Ind. St. 8, 273. karman BHĀG. P.4,29,27.5,19,19. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 175,b, No. 398. bhāskaraḥ sarvalohitaḥ R. 4, 60, 17. ati- KUMĀRAS. 3, 29. ŚĀK. 119. atimātra- 29. mṛdu- MAITRJUP. 6, 30. — b) “kupfern, metallen”: pātra KAUŚ. 29. svadhiti AV. 6, 141, 2. GOBH. 3, 6, 6. — 2) m. a) “eine best. Krankheit der Augenlider” ŚĀRÑG. SAṁH. 1, 7, 87. — b) “ein best. Edelstein” (nicht “Rubin”) Spr. 2693. — c) “eine Reisart” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. SUŚR. 1, 228, 10. — d) “Linsen” ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — e) “Dioscorea purpurea” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — f) “ein best. Fisch, Cyprinus Rohita Ham.” — g) “eine best. Hirschart” TRIK. ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — h) “Schlange” DHAR. im ŚKDR. — i) “der Planet Mars” H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 6, 8. Ind. St. 2, 261. — k) N. pr. a) eines Nāga MBH. 2, 360. — b) pl. einer Klasse von Göttern unter dem 12ten Manu VP. 268. = surāntara DHAR. im ŚKDR. — g) eines Mannes P. 4, 1, 18. -smṛti MAŚK. Coll. I, 19. pl. “seine Nachkommen” PRAVARĀDHY. in Verz. d. B. H. 57, 11. HARIV. 1465 (st. lohitā yāmadūtāśca liest die neuere Ausg. lohitāyanapūtāśca, 1771 lesen beide Ausgg. lauhityāḥ). — d) “eines Flusses” (der Brahmaputra) H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. MBH. 13, 7647. — e) eines Meeres: lohitasyodadheḥ kanyā krūrā lohitabhojanā MBH. 3, 14366. 14494. raktajalaṁ ghoraṁ lohitaṁ nāma sāgaram. gatvā R. 4, 40, 39; vgl. lohitodo varuṇālayaḥ MBH. 3, 14269. — z) eines Sees: lohite (lohito die neuere Ausg.) hrade HARIV. 9791; vgl. 9145 und LIA. I, 155, N. — h) eines Landes MBH. 2, 1025. — 3) f. lohitā a) Bez. einer der sieben Zungen des Agni GṚHYASAṁGR. 1, 14. — b) Bez. zweier Pflanzen: = varāhakrāntā und raktapunarnavā RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 4) f. lohinī “eine Frau von röthlicher Hautfarbe” HALĀY. 4, 53. JAṬĀDH. im ŚKDR. — 5) n. a) “Kupfer, Metall” AV. 11, 3, 7. — b) “Blut” (auch m. nach gaṇa ardharcādi zu P.2,4,31. SIDDH. K. 251,a,2 v. u.). AK.2,6,2,15. H. 621. H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. AV.9,7,17. 10,9,18. 11,5,25. VS. 39,9. 10. TS.2,1,7,2.4,1,1. yo lohitaṁ karavat “wer Blut vergiesst” 6, 10, 2. TBR. 3, 2, 9, 2. AIT. BR. 2, 14. lohitaṁ duhīta ŚAT. BR. 12, 4, 2, 1. 14, 6, 2, 13. KAUŚ. 11. 13. 36. CHĀND. UP. 6, 5, 2. M. 4, 56. 8, 284. MBH. 3, 14366. R. 4, 44, 65. 5, 14, 18. SUŚR. 1, 121, 13. BHĀG. P. 3, 26, 59. 67. VET. in LA. (III) 4, 7. salohitā diśaścāsan so v. a. “blutroth gefärbt” MBH. 3, 11399. — c) “Schlacht” H. an. — d) “Safran; rother Sandel”; = gośīrṣa (“eine Art Sandelholz”) H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. = pattaṅga, haricandana und tṛṇakuṅkuma RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — e) “eine best. unvollkommene Form eines Regenbogens” TRIK. — Vgl. a-, ā- (auch ṚT. 1, 21), kṛṣṇa-, dhūmra-, nīla- (adj. auch R. 2, 96, 30), bṛhallohita, vi-, su-, lohitya, lauhitya. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 lohita 1 (rohita) I (ROHITA) Son of Hariścandra. (For details see under HARIŚCANDRA). lohita 2 II A king of ancient India. This king was conquered by Arjuna. (Śloka 17, Chapter 27, Vana Parva). lohita 3 III A serpent. This serpent is a member of the court of Varuṇa. (Śloka 8, Chapter 9, Sabhā Parva). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 lohita lohita (= lohita, q. cf.), I. adj., f. tā, or inī, Red, Śāk. d. 29. II. m. 1. Red, the colour. 2. The planet Mars. 3. A sort of deer. 4. A snake. 5. A form of array. 6. A sort of fish, Cyprinus rohita. 7. (m. ?). A kind of mineral, Pañc. i. d. 89. III. n. 1. Blood, Man. 4, 56. 2. War, battle. 3. Red sanders. 4. Saffron. — Comp. dhūmra-, adj. of a grey-red colour, MBh. 13, 753. nīla-, I. adj. blue-red, purple, of a purple colour, Śāk. d. 194. II. m. the name of one of the great periods called Kalpas. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 lohita (f. -tā & lohinī) reddish, red, coppery, metallic. — m. a cert. precious stone, (*a kind of fish*). N. of a serpent-demon etc.; n. copper, metal i.g., blood, *saffron. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 lohita loh-ita [later form of rohita], a. (C. ā; V., C. inī) reddish, red; made of copper or metal (V., rare); m. a kind of gem (not ruby; very rare); planet Mars; n. red substance (V., rare); copper, metal (AV.1); blood (ord. mg.): -ṁ kṛ, shed blood (V.). Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 lohita na° ruha itac rasya laḥ . 1 kuṅkume 2 raktacandana 3 raktagośīrṣakabhede medi° . 4 pattaṅge 5 haricandane śabdaca° . 6 tṛṇakuṅkume 7 rudhire ca rājani° 8 yuddhe hemaca° . 9 nadabhede 10 mardane 11 raktavarṇe ca pu° medi° . 12 raktatāyuta tri° . 13 mṛgabhede 14 rohitamatsye 15 sarpe 16 devabhede bharataḥ . 17 masūre śabdaca° 18 raktālau 19 raktaśālau rājani° . 20 vanabhede 21 sarovarabhede brahmaputraśabde dṛśyam . sarvatra jātau striyāṁ ṅīṣ . varṇe tu strītve ṅīp tasya naḥ . lohinī lāhitavarṇayutastriyām . ruha–inan rasya laḥ . rohaṇakartari striyāṁ ṭāp . |
वैदूर्य – vaidūrya | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899vaidūrya mf (“ī” or “rī”) n. (fr. “vi-dūra”) brought from Vidūra
vaidūrya w.r. for “vaiḍūrya”. Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 vaidūrya a. (rī or ryī f.) Brought from, or produced in, Vidūra. –ryaṁ [vidūre girau bhavaṁ ṣyañ] Lapis lazuli; Ku. 7. 10; Śi. 3. 45. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch vaidūrya und die damit zusammengesetzten und davon abgeleiteten Wörter s. u. vaiḍūrya. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 vaidūrya vaidūrya, i. e. vidūra + ya, I. adj. Brought from Vidūra. II. n. A gem of a dark-blue colour, the lapis lazuli, Bhāg. P. 4, 25, 15; Rām. 3, 49, 2; 53, 15. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 vaidūrya -> vaiḍūrya. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 vaidūrya na° vidūre girau bhavaḥ ṣyañ . kṛṣṇapītavarṇe viḍālanetratulya varṇe maṇibhede keturatne (lasuniyā) rājani° . muktāvidrumavajrendravaidūryasphaṭikādikam . maṇiratnaṁ saraṁ śītaṁ kaṣāyaṁ svādu lekhanam . cākṣuṣyaṁ dhāraṇāttacca pāpālakṣmīvināśanam rājavallabhaḥ . tacchāyālakṣaṇaṁ yathā ekaṁ veṇupalāśakomalarucā māyūrakaṇṭhatviṣā mārjārekṣaṇapiṅgalacchavijuṣā jñeyaṁ tridhā cchāyayā . yadgātraṁ gurutāṁ dadhāti nitarāṁ snigdhantu doṣojvitaṁ vaiduryaṁ viśadaṁ vadanti sudhiyaḥ svacchañca tacchobhanam . tasya kulakṣaṇaṁ yathā vicchāyaṁ mṛcchilāgarbhaṁ laghu rūkṣañca sakṣatam . satrāsaṁ paruṣaṁ kṛṣṇaṁ vaidūryaṁ dūrato nayet . tatparīkṣā yathā . ghṛṣṭaṁ yadātmanā svacchaṁ svacchāyāṁ nikaṣāśmani . sphuṭaṁ pradarśayedetadviadūryaṁ jātyamucyate . rājani° vaidūryapuṣparāgāṇāṁ karketabhīṣmake vade . parīkṣāṁ brahmaṇā proktāṁ vyāsena kathitāṁ dvija! . kalpāntakālakṣubhitāmburāśinirhrādakalpādditikṣasya nādāt . vaidūryamutpannamanekavarṇaṁ śobhābhirāmaṁ dyūtivarṇavījam . avidūre vidūrasya gireruttaṅgarodhasaḥ . kāmabhūtikasīmānamanu tasyākaro’bhavat . tasya nādasamutthatvādākaraḥ sumahāguṇaḥ . abhūduttarito loke lokatrayavibhūṣaṇaḥ . tasyaiva dānavapaterninadānurūpaprāvṛṭpayodaravadarśitacārurūpāḥ . vaidūryaratnamaṇayo vividhāvabhāsāstasmāt sphuliṅganivahā iva saṁbabhūvuḥ . padmarāgamupādāya maṇivarṇā hi ye kṣitau . sarvāṁstān varṇaḥ śobhābhirvaidūryamanugacchati . teṣāṁ pradhānaṁ śikhikaṇṭhanīlaṁ yadvā bhavedveṇudalaprakāśam . cāṣāgrapakṣapratimaśriyo ye na te praśastā maṇiśāstravidbhiḥ . guṇavān vaidūryamaṇiryojayati svāminaṁ varabhāgyai . doṣairyuktodoṣaistasmād yatnātparīkṣeta . girikācaśiśupālau kācasphaṭikāśca bhūminirbhinnāḥ . vaidūryamaṇerete vijātayaḥ sannibhāḥ santi . likṣābhāvāt kācaṁ laghubhāvācchaiśupālakaṁ vidyāt . girikācamadīptitvāt sphaṭikaṁ varṇojjvalatvena . yadindranīlasya mahāguṇasya suvarṇasaṁkhyākalitasya mūlyam . tadeva vaidūryamaṇeḥ pradiṣṭaṁ paladvayonmāpitaṁ gauravasya . jātyasya sarve’pi maṇestu yādṛk vijātayaḥ santi samānavarṇāḥ . tathāpi nānākaraṇānumeyabhedaprakāraḥ paramaḥ pradiṣṭaḥ . sukhopalakṣyaśca sadā vicāryo hyayaṁ prabhedo viduṣā navena . snehaprabhedo laghutā mṛdutvaṁ vijātiliṅgaṁ khalu sārvajanyam . kuśalākuśalaiḥ prayujyamānāḥ prativaddhāḥ pratisatkriyā prayogaiḥ . guṇadoṣasamudbhavaṁ labhante maṇayo’rthāntaramūlyameva minnāḥ . kramaśaḥ samatītavartamānāḥ prativaddhā maṇibandhakena yasmāt . yadi nāma bhavanti dāṣahīnā maṇayaḥ ṣaḍguṇamāpnuvanti mūlyam . ākarān samatītānāmudadhestīrasannidhau . mūlyametat khanīnāntu na sarvatra mahītale . suvarṇo manunā yastu proktaḥ ṣoḍaśamāṣakaḥ . tasya saptatimobhāgaḥ saṁjñārūpaṁ kariṣyati . śāṇaścatumāṁṣamāno māṣakaḥ pañcakṛṣṇalaḥ . palasya daśamobhāgo dharaṇaḥ parikīrtitaḥ . iti mānavidhiḥ prokto ratnānāṁ mūlyaniścaye . gāruḍe 73 a° . sitañca dhūmrasaṅkāśamīṣatkṛṣṇasitaṁ bhavet . vaidūrvyanāma tadratnaṁ ratnavidbhirudāhṛtam . brahmakṣatriyaviṭśūdrajātibhedāścaturvidhāḥ . sitanīlo bhavedvipaḥ sitaraktastu vāhujaḥ . pītanīlastu vaiśyaḥ syāt nīla eva hi śūdūkaḥ . atha guṇāḥ mārjāranayanaprakhyaṁ rasonapratimaṁ hi vā . kalilaṁ nirmalaṁ vyaṅgaṁ vaidūryaṁ devabhūṣaṇam . sutāraṁ ghanamatyacchaṁ kalilaṁ vyaṅgameva ca . vaidūryāṇāṁ samākhyātā ete pañca mahāguṇāḥ . udgiranniva dīptiṁ yo’sau sutāra itīryate . pramāṇato’lpaṁ guru yad ghanamityabhidhīyate . kalaṅkādivihīnaṁ tadatyacchamiti kīrtitam . brahmaśastrakalākāraścañcalo yatra dṛśyate . kalilaṁ nāma tadrājñaḥ sarvasampattikārakam . viśliṣṭāṅgantu vaidūryaṁ vyaṅgamityabhidhīyate . karkaraṁ karkaśaṁ trāsaḥ kalaṅkā deha ityapi . ete pañca mahādoṣā vaidūryāṇāmudīritāḥ . śarkarāyuktamiva yat pratibhāti ca karkaram . sparśe’pi yattajjñeya ca karkaśaṁ bandhunāśanam . bhinnabhrāntikarastrāsaḥ sa kuryāt kulasaṁkṣayam . biruddhavarṇo yasyāṅke kalaṅkaḥ kṣayakārakaḥ . maladigdha ivābhāti deho dehavināśanaḥ . jayati yadi suvarṇatyāgahīno yadā vā bahuvidhamaṇihārī bhūpati rvā yati rvā . dadhadapi dhṛtadoṣaṁ jātu vaidūryaratnaṁ pratihataphalarūpaḥ pātameṣyatyavaśyam . yuktikalpataruḥ . |
शार – śāra | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śāra mf (“ā”) n. (in most meanings also written “sāra”; of doubtful
derivation) variegated in colour, of different colours (as dark hair mixed with grey), motley, spotted, speckled 2 mf (“ā”) n. yellow śāra m. variegating or a variegated colour, (esp.) a mixture of blue and yellow, green śāra m. (also “śāraka”) a kind of die or a piece used at chess or at backgammon śāra m. air, wind śāra m. hurting, injuring (fr. “śṝ”) śāra mf (“ā”) n. (“ī”) f. a chessman &c. (see m.) śāra m. a kind of bird (= “śāri”) śāra m. Kuśa grass śāra n. a variegated colour śāra Vṛiddhi form of “śara”, in comp. Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 śāra a. [śār-ac śṝ-ghañ vā] (1) Variegated, speckled, mottled, spotted. (2) Yellow. –raḥ (1) A variegated colour. (2) Green colour. (3) Air, wind. (4) A piece used at chess, a chessman; kālaḥ kālyā bhuvanaphalake trīḍati praṇiśāraiḥ Bh. 3. 39. (5) Injuring, hurting Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch śāra P. 3, 3, 21, Vārtt. 2 (vgl. P. 6, 1, 159). m. f. (ī) TRIK. 3, 5, 19. 1) adj. “bunt, scheckig” P. 3, 3, 21. Vārtt. 2. AK. 3, 4, 25, 168. H. an. 2, 461. MED. r. 90. HALĀY. 4, 56. palita- DAŚAK. 60, 5. Vgl. kṛṣṇa- und sāra. — 2) m. a) “ein beim Würfelspiel gebrauchter Stein, – Figur” H. 487.H. an. MED. kālaḥ kālyā bhuvanaphalake krīḍati prāṇiśāraiḥ Spr. 2294. pramādadatta- DAŚAK. 70, 4. — b) “Wind” P. 3, 3, 21, Vārtt. 2. AK. H. an. MED. — c) nom. act. von śar, = hiṁsana ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILSON. — 3) f. ī a) = 2) a) ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. (sārī). — b) Kuśa-“Gras” ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILSON. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 śāra śāra, I. adj. 1. Variegated (in colour), Daśak. in Chr. 180, 1 (of hair, mixed with greyand white). 2. Yellow. II. m. 1. Hurting (vb. śṛ10). 2. A mixture of blue and yellow, a green. 3. Variegating. 4. Air, wind (cf. sāra). 5. A piece or man at chess, backgammon, Daśak. in Chr. 185, 24 (cf. sāra). III. f. rī. 1. An arrow (vb. śṛ10, cf. śara), Chr. 297, 16 = Rigv. i. 112, 16. 2. Kuśa grass. — Comp. kṛṣṇa-, adj. blue-black, Megh. 48, read -śāra (Sch.). Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 śāra f. ā mottled, spotted; m. a stone or piece used at sev. games (also f. ī). Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 śāra śāra, a. variegated, speckled, spotted; m. piece or figure used on a draught-board: ī, f. id.; a bird. Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 śāra t ka daurbalye . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ . (adanta curā°-para°-aka°-seṭ .) aśaśārat . iti durgādāsaḥ .. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 śāra daurvalye ada° cu° uma° saka° seṭ . śārayati–te aśaśārat ta . śāra na° śāra–ac, śṛ–ghañ vā . 1 karvūravarṇe 2 tadvati tri° amaraḥ 3 vāyau pu° amaraḥ 4 akṣopakaraṇe medi° . |
श्याम – śyāma | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śyāma mf (“ā”) n. (said to be connected with “śyai”) black, dark-
coloured, dark blue or brown or grey or green, sable, having a dark or swarthy complexion (considered a mark of beauty) &c. &c. śyāma m. black or blue or green (the colour) śyāma m. a cloud śyāma m. the Kokila or Indian cuckoo śyāma m. a black bull śyāma m. N. of various plants (fragrant grass; thorn-apple; Artemisia Indica; Careya Arborea &c.) śyāma m. (in music) a partic. Rāga śyāma m. N. of a son of śūra and brother of Vasudeva śyāma m. of a modern prince śyāma m. of a mountain śyāma m. of a sacred fig-tree at Prayāga or Allahābād śyāma pl. N. of a Vedic school (a subdivision of the Maitrāyaṇīyas) śyāma n. black pepper śyāma n. sea-salt Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 śyāma a [śyai-maka] Black, dark-blue, dark-coloured; pratyākhyāta viśeṣakaṁ kurabakaṁ śyāmāvadātāruṇaṁ M. 3. 5; śyāmaṁ druyorbhāgayoḥ V. 2. 7; kuvalayadalaśyāmasnigdhaḥ U. 4. 19; Me. 15, 23. (2) Brown. (3) Shady, dusky. (4) Dark-green. –naḥ (1) The black colour. (2) The green colour. (3) A cloud. (4) The cuckoo. (5) N. of a sacred fig-tree at Allahabad on the bank of the Yamunā; ayaṁ ca kāliṁdītaṭe vaṭaḥ śyāmo nāma U. 1; soyaṁ vaṭaḥ śyāma iti pratītaḥ R. 13. 53. (6) The thorn apple. –maṁ (1) Sea-salt. (2) Black pepper. — Comp. –aṁga a. dark. ( –gaḥ) the planet Mercury. –kaṁṭhaḥ 1. an epithet of Śiva; (nīlakaṁṭha). –2. a peacock. –karṇaḥ a horse suitable for a horse sacrifice. –patraḥ the tamala tree. –bhās, –ruci a. glossyblack. –śabalau the two four-eyed watch-dogs of Yama; cf. Rv. 10. 14. 10. –suṁdarā an epithet of Kṛṣṇa. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch śyāma UṆĀDIS. 1, 144. 1) adj. (f. ā) “schwarz, schwarzgrau, schwarzblau, schwarzgrün”; = kṛṣṇa, nīla u.s.w. AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. 3, 4, 23, 145. H. 1397. an. 2, 338. MED. m. 31. fg. HALĀY. 4, 49. VIŚVA bei UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. = harit AK. 3, 4, 23, 145. H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. Jama’s Hund AV. 8, 1, 9. TS. 5, 7, 19, 1. ŚĀÑKH. BR. 2, 9. PĀR. GRHJ. 1, 16. – TS. 7, 3, 18, 1. TBR. 1, 3, 4, 4. NIR. 4, 3. ṚV. PRĀT. 17, 9. ŚAT. BR. 5, 1, 2, 9. 2, 5, 8. putra 14, 9, 4, 15. śyāma iva pāpmā KĀṬH. 13, 6. ayas “Eisen” AV. 11, 3, 7. anu cchya śyāmena tvacam 9, 5, 4. śyāmācchabalaṁ (als nom. abstr.) prapadye CHĀND. UP. 8, 13. – Ind. St. 8, 277. 10, 318. MEGH. 58. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 3, 29. 8, 17. 33, 16. 34, 23. 47, 23. 80, 7. LAGHUJ. 2, 18. KATHĀS. 22, 182. RĀJA-TAR. 4, 1. Erde SUŚR. 1, 135, 5. Kuh 371, 17. Pferd BHĀG. P. 1, 16, 12. śyāmo lohitākṣo daṇḍaḥ M. 7, 25. abhinavamadalekhāśyāmagaṇḍasthalānāṁ vāraṇānām Spr. (II) 227. stana MEGH. 18. vilīnapallavaśyāmamukhau stanau KATHĀS. 22, 5. stanāvāśyāmacūcakau 34, 32. śyāmayā cūcukatviṣā 120, 45. uras BHĀG. P. 3, 15, 39. -karṇa (haya) 9, 15, 6. -śroṇi 4, 24, 51. añjanabhṛṅga- VARĀH. BṚH. S. 64, 2. vapus einer Wolke MEGH. 15. nīlāmbuda- MBH. 1, 5911. prāvṛḍjaladhara- 5928. megha- R. 2, 83, 8. PAÑCAR. 1, 5, 3. divasa ivārdhaśyāmaḥ (ivābhraśyāmaḥ v. l.) ŚĀK. 60. udadhiśyāmasīmā dharitrī 48. snigdhaśyāmā daṇḍakāraṇyabhāgāḥ UTTARAR. 32, 6 (42, 8). vanabhūmayaḥ śyāmāstamāladrumaiḥ GĪT. 1, 1. phalapariṇatiśyāmajambūvanāntāḥ MEGH. 24. kuravakaṁ śyāmaṁ dvayorbhāgayoḥ VIKR. 26. atasīkusuma- VARĀH. BṚH. S. 58, 32. dūrvākāṇḍa- 5, 58. BHAṬṬ. 5, 18. dūrvā- VARĀH. BṚH. 2, 4. indīvara- MBH. 3, 1721. HARIV. 7081. R. 2, 88, 14. R. GORR. 2, 1, 41. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 24, 18. BHĀG. P. 3, 26, 28. nīlotpaladala- R. 4, 29, 9. palāśa- KATHĀS. 21, 11. śastrī- P. 6, 2, 2, Schol. ŚIŚ. 4, 44. komalaśyāmaśaṣpa SUŚR. 1, 22, 18. marakata- BHĀG. P. 8, 6, 3. 16, 35. Für schön gilt bei Männern und Frauen die durch śyāma bezeichnete Hautfarbe: rūpamatulaṁ -sundaram PAÑCAR. 1, 1, 3. 5, 3. ayaṁ śyāmo mahābāhuḥ siṁhaskandho mahādyutiḥ MBH. 1, 5943. 3, 2450. 7, 2243. 5089. R. 2, 34, 1. 3, 42, 33. WEBER, RĀMAT. UP. 294. BHĀG. P. 1, 12, 8. 19, 28. 4, 7, 20. dāsīsahasraṁ śyāmānām MBH. 3, 12711. 1, 5949. 3, 2664. 2754. R. 2, 61, 4. 3, 79, 20. 42. MEGH. 80. ŚIŚ. 8, 36. Spr. (II) 6542. fg. KATHĀS. 45, 334. RĀJA-TAR. 3, 413. CAURAP. 40. MĀRK. P. 21, 18. PAÑCAR. 1, 4, 48. Inschr. in Journ. of the Am. Or. S. 7, 12, Einschiebung nach Śl. 48. śyāmā = yauvanamadhyasthā UTPALA bei MALLIN. zu ŚIŚ. 8, 36. = aprasūtastrī H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. śīte sukhoṣṇasarvāṅgī grīṣme yā sukhaśītalā. taptakāñcanavarṇābhā sā strī śyāmeti kathyate.. Citat beim Schol. 2. zu BHAṬṬ. 5, 18. 8, 100; vgl. Spr. (II) 1850. ghanaśyāma BHĀG. P. 6, 4, 37. śyāmāvadāta 2, 9, 11. 3, 4, 7. 8, 18, 2. R. 5, 14, 23. śyāmāruṇa VARĀH. BṚH. S. 11, 24. In VARĀH. BṚH. S. häufig śyāva als v. l. — 2) m. a) “ein schwarzer Stier” TS. 1, 8, 8, 1. 2, 1, 4, 3. ĀŚV. ŚR. 9, 4, 6. — b) “der indische Kuckuck” H. an. MED. — c) Bez. verschiedener Pflanzen: = vṛddhadāraka H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. = damanaka und gandhatṛṇa ŚKDR. angeblich nach VIŚVA; = dhustūra, pīlu, śyāmāka RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — d) “Wolke” H. an. MED. VIŚVA bei UJJVAL. — e) N. pr. a) eines Mannes gaṇa aśvādi zu P. 4, 1, 110. gaṇa śubhrādi zu 123. eines Sohnes des Śūra und Bruders des Vasudeva HARIV. 1927. 1943. 5085. VP. 437. eines neueren Fürsten Verz. d. Cambr. H. 8, 1 v. u. — b) pl. einer Schule Ind. St. 3, 258. — g) eines Berges MBH. 6, 419. — d) einer für heilig erachteten Ficus indica H. an. MED. VIŚVA. a. a. O. R. 2, 55, 7. 22. RAGH. 13, 53. UTTARAR. 11, 8 (15, 11). — 3) f. ā a) “ein best. Vogel” RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 86, 37. 88, 1. 5. 14. -ruta Verz. d. B. H. No. 896. PAÑCAT. 157, 4. = kokilā TRIK. 3, 3, 303. = pika (vgl. 2) “b”) VIŚVA a. a. O. — b) Bez. verschiedener Pflanzen: = gundrā, priyaṅgu (die in H. an. und bei VIŚVA unterschieden werden) AK. 2, 4, 2, 35. TRIK. H. 1149. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 38. VIŚVA; = sārivā AK. 2, 4, 3, 30. 3, 4, 23, 145. H. an. MED. = pālindhī AK. 2, 4, 3, 27. = trivṛt, vāgujī (vāguji) und nīlī H. an. MED. (kṛṣṇatrivṛtikā). und VIŚVA; = kṛṣṇā H. an. VIŚVA; = somalatā H. an. = śyāmalatā VIŚVA; = guḍūcī, kastūrī, vaṭapattrī, vandā, nīlapunarnavā, pippalī, haridrā, nīladūrvā, tulasī, kṛṣṇasārivā, śiṁśapā und padmabīja RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. – R. 4, 29, 12. SUŚR. 1, 59, 11. 139, 18. 144, 16. 162, 8. 2, 102, 11. 110, 12. 374, 15. -mūla 122, 5. 135, 1. MEGH. 102. Spr. (II) 6044. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 54, 87. 55, 22. 85, 6. — c) “Nacht” AK. 3, 4, 23, 145. TRIK. 1, 1, 104. H. 142. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 1, 108. VIŚVA. KĀVYAPR. (II) 180, 1. — d) N. pr. einer Frau: śyāmāyā āśramaḥ MBH. 13, 1716. einer Tochter Meru’s BHĀG. P. 5, 2, 22. eine Form der Durgā WILSON, Sel. Works 2, 78. 184. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 93, “b”, 29. fg. 94, “a”, 44. fg. “b”, 26. 96, “a”, 8. 101, “a”, 12. -rahasya 104, “a”, 27. 108, “b”, No. 169. WILSON, Sel. Works 1, 250. 254. fgg. 262. -kalpalatā Notices of Skt Mss. 144. -kavaca 217. -nityapūjāpaddhati 179. -pradīpa 175. -ratna 213. -stotra 237. 269. śyāmārcanacandrikā 116. — N. pr. einer Göttin, die die Befehle des 6ten Arhant’s ausführt, H. 44. N. pr. der Mutter des 13ten Arhant’s 40. einer Fürstin HALL in der Einl. zu VĀSAVAD. 52. — e) N. pr. eines Flusses MĀRK. P. 59, 15. ein N. der Yamunā MED. — 4) n. a) “Pfeffer.” — b) “Seesalz” H. an. MED. VIŚVA. — Vgl. priyaṅgu-, maṇi-, mahā-, rakta- (auch VARĀH. BṚH. S. 69, 27), śyāmāyana, śyāmeya. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 śyāma A mountain in Śākadvīpa. It is as dark as clouds and very tall. (M.B. Bhīṣma Parva, Chapter 11, Verse 19). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 śyāma śyāma (probably from śvi, cf. śyeta), I. adj., f. mā. 1. Green. 2. Dark-blue, Vikr. d. 26. 3. Black, Bhartṛ. 2, 14; 36 (dry ?); shady, Utt. Rāmac. 42, 8. 4. Brown, Hiḍ. 2, 25; Nal. 12, 50; 18, 11. II. m. 1. Green, black (the colour). 2. A cloud. 3. The kokila or Indian cuckoo. 4. A sacred fig-tree at prayāga, Utt. Rāmac. 15, 11; cf. Wilson, Hind. Theat. 2. ed. i. 302, n. †. 5. Thorn-apple. III. m., and f. mā, A sort of grain, Panicum frumentaceum. IV. f. mā. 1. Night. 2. Shade, shadow. 3. The female of the Indian cuckoo, Pañc. 157, 4. 4. A cow. 5. Durgā. 6. A married woman before she has borne children. 7. A plant, commonly Priyaṅgn, Megh. 102; and name of several others. V. n. 1. Pepper. 2. Sea salt. — Cf. [greek] Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 śyāma a. black, dark-coloured. m. a black bull, a man’s name; f. ā a young woman with particular marks, a cert. bird, N. of sev. plants, a woman’s name. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 śyāma śyāma, a. black, dark grey, green, or blue, sable, dusky, swarthy (considered a beautiful colour in complexion); m. N. of a sacred fig-tree at Prayāya: -tā, f. blackness, dark colour; -tva, n. id.; -phena, a. having black foam: -tā, f. abst. N.; -mukha, a. black-faced (cloud); having black nipples. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 śyāma pu° śyai–mak . 1 vṛddhadārakavṛkṣe 2 prayāgatīrthasthe vaṭe 3 kokile 4 meghe 6 kṛṣṇavarṇe 6 haridvarṇe ca . 7 tadvati tri° medi° . 8 dhustūre 9 pīluvṛkṣe 10 śyāmāke rājani° . 11 marice 12 sindhujalabaṇe ca na° medi° . 13 damanakavṛkṣe 14 gandhatṛṇe pu° viśvaḥ . īṣadbhede’pi kṛṣṇaśyāmanīlādīnāmamarādau paryāyatā tatra kṛṣṇavastūni katicit kavikalpalatāyāṁ darśitāni yathā kṛṣṇāni keśavaḥ sīricīraṁ candrāṅkarāhavaḥ . vindhyāñjanādrivṛkṣāhivanabhairavarākṣasāḥ . śivakaṇṭhadhanadvaipāyanarāmadhanañjayāḥ . śaniḥ drupadajā kālī kalikolayamā’surāḥ . keśakajjalakastūrīrājapaṭṭavidurajam . viṣakoṣakuhūśastrāgurupāpatamoniśāḥ . masopaṅkamaṭāmbhodhiyamunādhūmakokilāḥ . golāṅgūlāsyaguñjāsye kaṇṭhaḥ ṇañjanakekinoḥ . śabalaṁ tālatāpiñjatilendīvaravallayaḥ . rasāvadbhutaśṛṅgārau kaṭākṣo’liḥ kanīnikā . nīlī jambūphalaṁ mustā kākakṛtyākukīrtayaḥ . bhinnacchāyā gajāṅgārakhalāntaḥkaraṇādavaḥ . |
श्यामल – śyāmala | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śyāmala mf (“ā”) n. dark-coloured &c.
śyāmala m. black (the colour) śyāmala m. a kind of bee śyāmala m. Terminalia Arjuna śyāmala m. a species of plant serving as a substitute for the Soma plant (= “pūtīka”) śyāmala m. the sacred fig-tree śyāmala m. black pepper śyāmala m. N. of a poet śyāmala m. of another man, Vāś., Introd. śyāmala mf (“ā”) n. (“ā”) f. N. of various plants (Physalis Flexuosa; = “kaṭa-ohī”; = “kastūrī”; = “jambū”) śyāmala m. a form of Durgā śyāmala m. N. of a woman Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 śyāmala a. Black, dark-blue, blackish; niśitaśyāmalasnigdhamukhī śaktiḥ Ve. 4; Śi. 18. 36; śyāmalānokahaśrīḥ U. 2. 25. –laḥ (1) Black colour. (2) Black pepper. (3) A large bee. (4) The sacred fig-tree. –lā N. of Durgā. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch śyāmala (von śyāma) gaṇa sidhmādi zu P. 5, 2, 97. 1) adj. (f. ā) “dunkelfarbig” AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. H. 1397. an. 3, 686. MED. l. 136. HALĀY. 4, 49. SĀH. D. 16, 5. ambara KATHĀS. 94, 9. nistriṁśa (vyoma von śyā- zu trennen) 26, 232. 86, 123. śyāmalāgrapayodharā 124, 197. bhūmi BHĀG. P. 8, 2, 4. -mṛdulakalevara GĪT. 11, 26. HARIV. 14708. 15838. KATHĀS. 48, 82. RĀJA-TAR. 4, 329 (śyāmalā von rakta- zu trennen oder śyāmalarakta- zu lesen). BHĀG. P. 8, 8, 32. PAÑCAR. 1, 3, 29. abhinavamegha- MĀLATĪM. 145, 10. vanarāji- RĀJA-TAR. 4, 150. kṛṣṇāgaru- DAŚAR. 190, 2 v. u. indīvaraśreṇī- GĪT. 1, 46. nīlotpalapalāśa- DAŚAK. 77, 15. dūrvālatā- KATHĀS. 45, 333. priyaṅgu- 47, 109. asitakuvalaya- KĀD. (ed. Calc. 1862) 32, 6 v. u. kalāya- PAÑCAR. 3, 7, 36. aruṇa- 35. — 2) m. a) “eine Bienenart” ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILSON. — b) Bez. verschiedener Pflanzen: = pippala H. an. MED. = arjuna (“eine Grasart”) Schol. zu PAÑCAV. BR. 9, 5, 7. = pūtīka Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 25, 12, 19. — c) N. pr. eines Mannes HALL in der Einl. zu VĀSAVAD. 41. 51. — 3) f. ā a) Bez. verschiedener Pflanzen: = aśvagandhā, kaṭabhī, jambū, kastūrī RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — b) “eine Form der” Durgā ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILSON. — c) N. pr. eines Frauenzimmers (aus dem Tibetischen zurückübersetzt) SCHIEFNER, Lebensb. 275 (45). — Vgl. rājaśyāmalopāsaka. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 śyāmala śyāma + la, I. adj., f. lā, Of a dark-blue or black colour, Daśak. in Chr. 190, 13; blackish, Mālat. 145, 10. II. m. 1. Black (the colour). 2. Pepper. 3. The religious fig-tree. 4. A large bee. III. f. lā, Pārvatī. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 śyāmala a. dark-coloured. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 śyāmala śyāma-la, a. dark-coloured: -ka, m. N.; -tā, f. blackness, dark colour. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 śyāmala pu° śyāmavarṇaṁ lāti lā–ka . 1 pippale 2 kṛṣṇavarṇayute tri° medi° . 3 aśvagandhāyāṁ 4 kaṭabhyāṁ 5 jambvāṁ 6 kastūryāñca strī rājani° . 7 śyāmavarṇe pu° amaraḥ . |
सार – sāra | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899sāra m. or n. (?) salts of iron
sāra (fr. “sṛ”) m. course, motion (see “pūrva-s-“); stretching out, extension ; mfn. driving away, destroying sāra m. n. (ifc. f. “ā”; perhaps to be connected with 1. “sāra” above; prob. fr. a lost root meaning. “to be strong”) the core or pith or solid interior of anything &c. &c. m. firmness, strength power, energy &c. &c. m. the substance or essence or marrow or cream or heart or essential part of anything, best part, quintessence (ifc. = “chiefly consisting of or depending on &c.” [cf. “para”] e.g. “dharma-sāraṁ jagat”, “the world chiefly depends on justice”; “tūṣṇīṁ-sāra” mfn. “chiefly silent”; “sārat sāram”, “the very best”) &c. &c. m. the real meaning, main point m. a compendium, summary, epitome (often ifc. in titles of books) m. a chief-ingredient or constituent part of the body (causing the peculiarities of temperament; reckoned to be 7, viz. “sattva, śukra, majjan, asthi, medas, māṁsa, rakta”) m. any ingredient m. nectar m. cream, curds m. worth, value (“eṇa”, “in consideration of.”, “according to”) &c. m. wealth, property, goods, riches sāra m. (in rhet.) a kind of climax (“uttarottaram utkarṣaḥ”) m. resin used as a perfume m. water m. dung m. the matter formed in a boil or ulcer, pus m. impure carbonate of soda m. a confederate prince, ally sāra m. (= 1. “śāra”) a piece at chess or backgammon &c. sāra mf (“ā”) n. hard, firm solid strong &c. sāra mf (“ā”) n. precious, valuable sāra mf (“ā”) n. good, sound, best, excellent sāra mf (“ā”) n. sound (as an argument, thoroughly proved) sāra mf (“ā”) n. full of (instr.) sāra mf (“ā”) n. motley, speckled (= “śāra”) sāra mfn. having spokes Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 sāra a. [sṛ-ghañ, sār-ac vā] (1) Essential. (2) Best, highest, most excellent; Mu. 1. 13. (3) Real, true, genuine. (4) Strong, vigorous. (5) Sound, thoroughly proved. (6) Highest or best (at the end of comp.); trivargasāraḥ Ku. 5. 38. — raḥ, –raṁ (but usually m. only except in the first 4 senses) (1) Essence, essential part, quintessence; snehasya tatphalamasau praṇayasya sa Māl. 1. 9; U. 6. 22. asāre khalu saṁsāre sārametaccatuṣṭayam . kāśyāṁ vāsaḥ satāṁ saṁgo gaṁgāṁbhaḥ śaṁbhusevanaṁ .. Dharm; 14. (2) Substance, pith. (3) Marrow. (4) Real truth, main point. (5) The sap or essence of trees; as in khadirasāra, sarjasāra. (6) Summary, epitome, compendium. (7) Strength, vigour, power, energy; sāraṁ dharitrīdharaṇakṣamaṁ ca Ku. 1. 17; R. 2. 74. (8) Prowess, heroism, courage; R. 4. 79. (9) Firmness, hardness. (10) Wealth, riches; gāmāttasārāṁ R. 5. 26. (11) Nectar. (12) Fresh butter. (13) Air, wind. (14) Cream, coagulum of curds. (15) Disease. (16) Matter, pus. (17) Worth, excellence, highest perception. (18) A man at chess. (19) Impure carbonate of soda. (20) A figure of speech corresponding to English ‘climax’; uttarottaramutkarṣo bhavetsāraḥ parāvadhiḥ K. P. 10. –21. The heart. –rā (1) Dūrvā grass. (2) Kuśa grass. –raṁ (1) Water. (2) Fitness, propriety. (3) Wood, thicket. (4) Steel. — Comp. –asāra a. valuable and worthless, strong and weak. ( –raṁ) 1. worth and worthlessness. –2. substance and emptiness. –3. strength and weakness. -vicāraḥ consideration of strong and weak points &c. –gaṁdhaḥ sandal wood. –grīvaḥ N. of Śiva. –jaṁ fresh butter. –taruḥ the plantain tree. –dā 1. N. of Sarasvatī. –2. of Durgā. –drumaḥ the Khadira tree. –bhaṁgaḥ loss of vigour. –bhāṁḍaṁ 1. a natural vessel. –2. a bale of goods, merchandise. –3. implements. –mitiḥ the Veda. –lohaṁ steel. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch sāra (von sar) m. 1) “Lauf, Gang” in -sārin und pūrva-. — 2) = prasāra “Ausstreckung”: sarvāṅgulyagra- KĀLACAKRA 3, 187. sāra (sāra P. 3, 3, 17; vgl. 6, 1, 159) 1) m. n. gaṇa ardharcādi zu P.2,4,31. SIDDH. K. 249,b,4. am Ende eines adj. comp. f. ā. a) “die inneren festen Bestandtheile eines Körpers”: khadirasya “Kernholz” ṚV. 3, 53, 19. khadira-, śāla- P. 3, 3, 17, Schol. tindukasāreṇa nirmitaḥ paryaṅkaḥ VARĀH. BṚH. S. 79, 11. abhyantaragataiḥ sārairyathā tiṣṭhanti bhūruhāḥ. asthisāraistathā dehāḥ SUŚR. 1, 339, 18. ŚĀRÑG. SAṁH. 1, 5, 4. asthīni na vinaśyanti sārāṇyetāni dehinām SUŚR. 1, 339, 21. sārāṇi von Früchten neben rasa und tvac vielleicht “Kerngehäuse” MBH. 3, 10064. sāra m. = sthira P. 3, 3, 17. = sthirāṁśa AK. 3, 4, 25, 173. H. an. 2, 466. MED. r. 96. = atidṛḍha ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — b) “Festigkeit, Härte; Stärke, Kraft”: bhujayoḥ sāramarpaya MBH. 1, 6029. 5, 1991. BHĀG. P. 5, 1, 29. -sthita SUŚR. 1, 188, 3. dharitrīdharaṇakṣama eines Berges KUMĀRAS. 1, 17. -gurubhiḥ padanyāsaiḥ desgl. 6, 50. Kāma’s 3, 13. akhilasārasaṁbhṛta Viṣṇu als Zwerg BHĀG. P. 8, 18, 20. yadi vaḥ pradhane śraddhā sāraṁ vā kṣullakā hṛdi 6, 11, 5. adrākṣamahametatte hṛtsāraṁ mahadadbhutam 7, 3, 18. āhārasya “die nährende Kraft” SUŚR. 1, 43, 5. 247, 21. ŚĀRÑG. SAṁH. 1, 6, 4. sāroddharaṇadūṣita (māṁsa) MĀRK. P. 34, 56. sāra (sārā Padap., wohl für sāram) ṛṣabhāṇām “die zeugende Kraft” AV. 4, 4, 4. vāksāra “die Kraft der Rede, Beredsamkeit” VARĀH.BṚH. S. 2, S. 4, Z. 18. fg. am Ende eines adj. comp.: vajrasamāna- ein Mann MBH. 1, 7076. mahendrādisamāna- RAGH. 6, 54. mahābhujau giriśṛṅgasārau R. 6, 37, 64. bhuje bhujagendrasamānasāre RAGH. 2, 74. nala- “die Härte” (d. i. “Weichheit, Schwäche) des Rohrschilfs habend” MBH. 12, 11156. utpalapattra- RAGH. 6, 42. sarvātirikta- (ātman) 1, 14. vapuḥ sasāram KUMĀRAS. 5, 19. dṛṣṭa- Spr. (II) 6212 (gajendra). RAGH. 11, 47 (vīryaśulka). dṛṣṭistṛṇīkṛtajagattrayasattvasārā UTTARAR. 111, 17 (151, 1 = SĀH. D. 38, 10). ajāta- R. GORR. 1, 39, 17. abhedya- RĀJA-TAR. 4, 298. kṣīṇa- MBH. 13, 281. gṛhīta- BHĀG. P. 5, 14, 19. ātta- 6, 10, 29. smaranunna- 10, 21, 12. mahā- “fest, stark”: Bogen R. 2, 100, 19. alpa- “schwach” Spr. (II) 1952. KĀM. NĪTIS. 11, 8. hṛtasārā sudhā “berauschende Kraft” R. 2, 61, 18. sāra m. = sthāman HALĀY. 5, 67. = bala AK. 2, 4, 12. H. an. MED. — c) “Werth”: sāratas M. 8, 405. YĀJÑ. 2, 275. (vijñātaḥ) rājñā himavataḥ sāro rājñaḥ sāro himādriṇā RAGH. 4, 79. puruṣārtha- BHĀG. P. 3, 13, 49. mahā- adj. “werthvoll, kostbar” R. 3, 72, 1. 4, 33, 15. 43, 33. alpa- adj. “von geringem Werth” M. 11, 164. gata- adj. “werthlos geworden, nichtig” Spr. (II) 2067. 6122. — d) “Vermögen, Besitz, Reichthum”; neutr. H. 191. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 1, 80. masc. 5, 67. sārāparādhau M. 8, 126. 9, 262. karaṁ dāpayāmāsa sāragrahaṇapūrvakam MĀRK. P. 122, 10. sārāpahāramakarotparihāsapurasya RĀJA-TAR. 5, 160. sāratas DAŚAK. 70, 13. am Ende eines adj. comp.: naikakoṭi- 75, 13. sāvitrīmātra- M. 2, 118. gāmāttasārām RAGH. 5, 26. — e) “Kern” so v. a. “Hauptsache, Quintessenz, das Beste, Werthvollste, etwas Werthvolles”: etatsāram (kāmaḥ) — dharmārthāvatra saṁsthitau MBH. 12, 6244. sāraṁ tato grāhyam Spr. (II) 243. sarvataḥ sāramādadyāt 459. atra na kimapi sāramaṇīyaḥ 554. 777. 1794. 2347. 2954. 5699. 5776. 6605. 6639. fg. 7211. sāra iti (besser als ratnamiti) VIKR. 143, v. l. KATHĀS. 28, 16. 34, 190. 39, 213. SĀH. D. 23, 17. MĀRK. P. 18, 43. VET. in LA. (III) 16, 16. BHĀG. P. 1, 1, 11. 4, 18, 2. 13. SARVADARŚANAS. 158, 20. sārātsāraṁ vadasva naḥ Verz. d. Oxf. H. 7, “a”, No. 42. apām RAGH. 10, 10. 53. kṛtsnasya jagataḥ R. 5, 12, 27. dharmasya KATHĀS. 33, 34. dṛṣṭaḥ sārastasyāḥ (so ist zu lesen) puro bhavān 54, 62. tat – sarvavedetihāsānāṁ sāraṁ sāraṁ samuddṛtam BHĀG. P. 1, 3, 41. PAÑCAR. 1, 15, 13. sarvamantreṣu sāraśca mantrarājaḥ prakīrtitaḥ 2,3,104. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 252,b, No. 626, Z. 4. kathāmeva kathāsu sāram. uddhṛtya puṣpebhya iva BHĀG. P. 3, 5, 15. -mārgaṇam Spr. (II) 4823. sārādānaṁ ṣaṭpadavat KAP. 4, 13. -śūnya Spr. (II) 2919. -saṁgraha CĀṆ. 1. -grāhin R. 3, 72, 1. -darśin 5, 84, 7. sārārthin MBH. 4, 1567. samudra- 2, 1893. kathāsāro hi sā (kathā) matā 12, 12711. loka- 14, 597. trivarga- (dharma) KUMĀRAS. 5, 31. muktā- RAGH. 4, 50. PAÑCAR. 1, 4, 54. 7, 49. 11, 13. veda-, yajña-, sāma- 4, 3, 50. ācāra- RĀJA-TAR. 4, 344. mandira- Spr. (II) 473. sakalārthaśāstra- PAÑCAT. Pr. 3. jīvaloka- 49, 4. samastavastusaṁbhāra- 157, 22. DHŪRTAS. 88, 1. vastusārāṇām BHĀG. P. 2, 6, 4. 10, 6, 7. am Ende eines adj. comp.: hṛta- R. 2, 33, 18. R. GORR. 2, 36, 12. upātta- MĀLAV. 22, 19. ātta- BHĀG. P. 3, 15, 23. sāra m. = śreṣṭha H. an. HALĀY. 5, 67. — f) “das Vorwaltende, Hauptsache” am Ende eines adj. comp. (vgl. den Gebrauch von para): tūṣṇīṁ- AIT. BR. 2, 31. prīti- (kāma) MBH. 2, 153. R. GORR. 2, 109, 61. kṣamā- HARIV. 15624. fg. dharma- R. 2, 33, 15. Spr. (II) 3113. WEBER, RĀMAT. UP. 338. ŚRUT. 20. Spr. (II) 2789. 3738. 4253. 6233. 6985. GĪT. 5, 8. KATHĀS. 40, 48. VP. 1, 9, 22. BHĀG. P. 1, 19, 19. 3, 5, 45. 6, 9, 50. 8, 16, 60.CAURAP. 5. 33. — g) “ein dem Temperamente eines Menschen zu Grunde liegender Hauptbestandtheil des Körpers”: es werden deren acht oder auch nur sieben angenommen: sattva (fehlt bei VARĀH.), śukra, majjan, asthi, medas, māṁsa, rakta und śukra SUŚR. 1, 125, 11. 126, 18. tvaksāra adj. 127, 3. CARAKA 3, 8. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 68, 1. 96. 69, 21. rakta- adj. 68, 97. māṁsa- adj. 100. LAGHUJ. 2, 13. fgg. — h) “Bestandtheil” überh.: pañca- adj. (peya) SUŚR. 2, 421, 5. — i) “das Rechte, Richtige”; neutr. = nyāyya AK. H. an. MED. naitatsāram Comm. zu TS. PRĀT. 14, 5. tadasāram zu 1, 21. — k) “Nektar”: yattatrotpatsyate sāraṁ tatpāsyāmaḥ R. GORR. 1, 46, 19. sāraṁ juṣāṁ caraṇayoḥ BHĀG. P. 7, 6, 25. am Ende eines adj. comp.: nirviṣṭasārāṁ pitṛbhirhimāṁśorantyāṁ kalām RAGH. 14, 80. — l) “Seim” KAP. 4, 13. BHĀG. P. 1, 18, 7. — m) “saurer Rahm” SUŚR. 2, 378, 6. dadhnā sasāreṇa 441, 8. sāra n. = dadhyuttara ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — n) “verdickter als Räucherwerk verwandter Pflanzensaft, Harz” SUŚR. 1, 133, 9. 12. 183, 15. 2, 12, 15. 63, 1. 73, 21. 83, 14. fg. 119, 3. 175, 4. 468, 21. ŚĀRÑG. SAṁH. 1, 1, 42. Vgl. sārin. — o) “Dünger” KṚṢIS. 8, 26. vinā sāreṇa yaddhānyaṁ vardhate na phalatyapi 9, 3. — p) “ein Fürst, der einem andern im Kriege zu Hilfe kommt, Bundesgenosse” VARĀH. BṚH. S. 34, 22; vgl. āsāra 3) in den Nachträgen. — q) Bez. “des Gürtels bei den” Maga Verz. d. Oxf. H. 33,b,30. — r) m. in der Rhetorik “eine Art Klimax”: uttarottaramutkarṣo bhavetsāraḥ parāvadhiḥ KĀVYAPR. 173,8 (331,15). SĀH. D. 731. KUVALAJ. 113,a. PRATĀPAR. 103,b,3. Beispiele Spr. (II) 2347. 5776. — Die Lexicographen kennen noch folgende nicht zu belegende Bedd. a) m. = majjan AK. 2, 4, 1, 12. H. 1121. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 28. 5, 67. = asthi H. 626 (neutr. v. l.). = tvacisāra 1153, Schol. = vajrakṣāra RĀJAN. 6, 256. = vāyu (vgl. śāra) JAṬĀDH. im ŚKDR. = roga DHAR. ebend. = pāśaka (vgl. śāra) ŚABDAR. ebend. — b) n. = jala H. an. MED. = navanīta RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. = lauha BHĀVAPR. ebend. = vipina ŚABDAR. ebend. — 2) f. ā = kṛṣṇatrivṛtā ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. = dūrvā (vgl. śārī) ŚABDAC. ebend. — 3) f. ī “der Vogel” Sārikā und = pāśaka (vgl. śārī) ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. = saptalā RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 4) adj. a) “hart, fest, stark”: -druma VARĀH. BṚH. S. 43, 58. -dāru 54, 118. dhanuṣī R. GORR. 1, 77, 14. -puṅkha ŚĀK. 10. – gātra (-yodha ed. Bomb.) MBH. 6, 3316. SUŚR. 1, 151, 5. CARAKA 3, 8. madhusūdana HARIV. 5794. ye tu garbhāṅkurāḥ sārāstāndivyānparvatānviduḥ 11446 (die neuere Ausg. hat eine andere Lesart). bala “Kerntruppen” (Gegens. phalgu) MBH. 2, 1031. 5, 2205. 2516. fg. 5244. KĀM. NĪTIS. 18, 58. 19, 59. Spr. (II) 5966. MĀRK. P. 122, 18. — b) “kostbar, werthvoll”: sārābharaṇa DAŚAK. 84, 11. — c) “der vorzüglichste, beste”; = vara AK. 3, 4, 25, 173. MED. sarvavedoddhṛtaḥ sāro mantraḥ Verz. d. Oxf. H. 106,a,32. sūkta BHĀG. P. 4, 22, 17. PAÑCAR. 1, 5, 22. — d) mit einem instr. “voller”: śukreṇa = śukrasāra adj. comp. “Samen zum Hauptbestandtheil im Körper habend” VARĀH. BṚH. S. 69, 33. — e) = śāra “bunt, scheckig”: maṇḍūkaḥ kṛṣṇaḥ sāraḥ (kṛṣṇasāraḥ?) kuhakaḥ SUŚR. 2, 290, 6. sāraḥ śabalaḥ kṛṣṇaścāsau sāraśca kṛṣṇasāraḥ kṛṣṇamṛgaḥ MALLIN. zu KUMĀRAS. 3, 36. nicht “schwarz und scheckig”, sondern “in dem das Schwarze vorwaltet.” — sāraniyuktaṁ HARIV. 4530 wohl fehlerhaft für sādhunirvyūhaṁ, wie die neuere Ausg. liest. Vgl. a- (“werthlos, nichtig” auch MBH. 14, 597. KATHĀS. 36, 105. BHĀG. P. 7, 5, 26), aguru- (“das Harz der Aquilaria Agallocha” SUŚR. 1, 183, 15. 2, 175, 4. RAGH. 6, 8), agra-, adri-, antaḥ- (“innerer Gehalt” Spr.(II) 350. “inwendig hart, – fest” VARĀH. BṚH. 3, 7), ambhaḥ, artha-, aśma-, kaṁ-, karka-, kāla-, kusuma-, kṛṣṇa-, kṣīra-, gandha-, gāyatri-, giri-, ghana-, candana- (auch R. 2, 78, 6), carma-, takra-, tantu-, tantra-, taru-, tīkṣṇa-, tṛṇa-, tvak-, tvaci-, dravya-, dhānya-, naya-, niḥ-, nīti-, piṅga-, picchila-, pīta-, pīlu-, puṇya-, puṣkarasārī, puṣpa-, prapañca-, prayoga-, prāṇa- (“Lebenskraft” RĀJA- TAR. 6, 368), bahu-, bindu-, bimbi-, bhadra-, bhāgavata-, bhāvasāraviveka, bhāvanāsārasaṁgraha, bhūta-, bhūṣaṇasāradarpaṇa, majjā-, maṇi-, mada-, manaḥ-, mahā-, māṁsa-, mādhvasiddhānta-, megha-, moca-, yajña-, yathāsāram, yuddha-, yoga-, rakta-, laghu-, lokabindu-, vajra-, vasu-, vākya-, vāri-, viveka-, viśva-, veda-, veṣṭa-, vaidyakasārasaṁgraha, vaiyākaraṇabhūṣaṇa- (unter vaiyākaraṇabhūṣaṇa), vyavahāra-, vyākhyā-, śāla-, śilā-, śubha-, śaila- (auch KIR. 10, 14), śyāma-, śveta-, sakalavedopaniṣat-, saṁkṣipta- (unter saṁkṣipta), saṁgīta-, samara-, samudra-, sarva-, sita-, siddhānta-. sāra 1) i) naitatsāram ebend. 8,21,b. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 sāra sāra, perhaps sṛ + a, with ‘cream,’ II. 9. as first signification, I. adj. 1. Easential, Hit. iv. d. 71. 2. Excellent, best, Daśak. in Chr. 194, 22; Pañc. i. d. 284; Hit. iii. d. 89. 3. Hard, Śāk. d. 10. 4. Irrefragable (as an argument), proved, Man. 9, 262. II. m. (and n.). 1. The pith or sap of trees. 2. The essence of anything, the essential or vital part of it, Hit. ii. d. 126; Pañc. 49, 4. 3. Nectar, Bhāg. P. 7, 6, 25. 4. The substance or material part (of a book, speech, etc.), Pañc. pr. d. 3; 10 (n.). 5. Marrow, Ragh. 10, 10. 6. Strength, vigour, Hit. 104, 7; affluence, Hit. i. d. 90, M.M. (artha-, of wealth, cf. IV. 2.). 7. Prowess, heroism. 8. Firmness, hardness. 9. The coagulum of curds, cream. 10. Fresh butter. 11. Air, wind (cf. śāra). 12. Disease, pus, Hit. ii. d. 101 (and wealth). III. m., and f. rī, A man at chess, backgammon (cf. śāra). IV. n. 1. Water. 2. Wealth, Man. 8, 126; Daśak. in Chr. 189, 3 (at the end of a comp. adj.). 3. Fitness. 4. Steel. 5. (In rhetoric), Climax. V. f. rā, Kuśa grass. VI. f. rī, Turdus Salica Buch. — Comp. a-, adj. 1. sapless, Hit. iv. d. 87. 2. insipid, Daśak. in Chr. 188, 2; vain, Pañc. 165, 17. 3. weak, Pañc. i. d. 376. 4. bad, Man. 8, 202. 5. poor, Daśak. in Chr. 180, 23. sāra-a-, m. 1. strength and weakness, Hit. 104, 7. 2. excellence or defect, Man. 9, 331. 3. substance and emptiness. agra-, f. rā, a method of numbering, by which one may sum up the sand of a hundred Koṭis of Gaṅgā rivers, Lalit. 141 (cf. Arcimedes’ method). adri-, m. iron. antaḥsāra, i. e. antar-, I. m. and n. 1. the inward pus and wealth, Hit. ii. d. 101. 2. own worth, Cāṇ. 69 in Berl. Monatsb. 1864, 411. II. adj. 1. having inward essence, full of strength, Pañc. i. d. 142. 2. heavy, ponderous. artha-, m. important motive, Pañc. ii. d. 46. aśmasāra, i. e. aśman-, m. iron, Suśr. 2, 531, 4. eka-, m. only essence, Bhartṛ. 2, 1. kṛṣṇa- (cf. śāra), I. adj. of a blue-black colour, Rām. 5, 32, 47. II. m. 1. the black-pied antelope, Man. 2, 23; Vikr. d. 120. 2. the name of several plants. giri-, m. 1. iron. 2. tin. ghana-, m. camphor, Lass. 92, 8. candana-, m. the best sandal, Rām. 2, 20, 43 Gorr. traksāra, i. e. tvac-, m. reed, Man. 10, 37. dṛṣṭa-, adj. one of whom the strength is tested, Kām. Nītis. 8, 67. nis-abhibhava-, adj. having the highest excellence, i. e. than which there is nothing better, Bhartṛ. 2, 54 (but cf. also Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 1859). niḥsāra, i. e. nis-, adj., f. rā, 1. sapless, Suśr. 1, 20, 16; Cāṇ. 66 in Berl. Monatsb. 1864, 411. 2. powerless, insignificant, Pañc. i. d. 421. 3. insipid. 4. vain, perishable, Hit. iv. d. 71. prāṇa-, adj. having the marrew of life, Śāk. d. 37. vajra-, I. adj. having the vigour of a thunderbolt, Pañc. 58, 10. II. m. a proper name, Rājat. 5, 226. vedānta-, m. the essence of the Vedānta philosophy, Vedāntas. title, in Chr. 202, 1. śilā-, m. iron. śaila-, adj. firm as a rock, Kir. 10, 14 sa-kala-artha-śāstra-, adj. containing the essence of precepts about all things, Pañc. pr. d. 3. sattva-, m. excellence of strength, i. e. the most powerful, Utt. Rāmac. 151, 1. su-, m. 1. a kind of jewel or crystal (?), MBh. 7, 672. 2. Mimosa catechu. sva-anubhūti- eka-sāra-, adj. whose only essence consists in enjoying himself, Bhartṛ. 2, 1. — Cf. sara; Goth. sāls; A.S. sel, sael. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 sāra [1] a. driving away, removing; m. course, way (only –°). sāra [2] m. n. the interior firm parts of a body; firmness, solidity, strength; property, wealth; substance or essence of anything; nectar; water. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 sāra 1. sār-a, a. [sṛ] driving away, destroying (-°); m. course. Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 sāra t ka daurvalye . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (adantacurā°-para°-aka°-seṭ .) rephopadhaḥ . asasārat . iti durgādāsaḥ .. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 sāra daurbalye ada° cu° ubha° saka° seṭ . sārayati te asasārat ta anekāckatvānna ṣopadeśaḥ sāra na° sṛ–ghañ, sāra–ac vā . 1 jale 2 dhane 3 nyāyye tri° medi° . 4 navanīte na° rājani° . 5 lauhe bhāvapra° . 6 vane śabdara° . 7 bale 8 sthirāṁśe 9 majjani pu° amaraḥ 10 sarjakṣāre 11 vāyau jaṭā° . 12 roge dharaṇiḥ 13 atidṛde 14 pāśake pu° śabdara° 15 dadhyagre pu° hemaca° 16 śreṣṭhe 17 vare ca tri° amaraḥ . 1ṣaparameśvare ekaṁ śivaṁ śāntamanantamacyutaṁ parātparaṁ jñānamayaṁ viśeṣam . advaita mavyagramacintyarūpa sārantvekaṁ nāsti sāraṁ tatonyat . yasmādetajjāyate viśvamagryaṁ yasmin līnaṁ syācca paścātsthitañca . ākāśavanmeghajālañca dhṛtyā yadviśvaṁ vai dhriyate tacca sāram . aṣṭāṅgayogairyadavāptumicchan yogī yunaktyātmarūpaṁ sadaiva . nivartate prāpya yanneha loke tadvai sāraṁ sāramanyanna cāsti kālikāpu° 27 a° . |
सितेतर – sitetara | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899sitetara mfn. “other than white”, black, dark, blue
mfn. white and black sitetara m. a kind of dark-coloured rice sitetara m. Dolichos Uniflorus sitetara m. “-gati” m. “having a black course”, fire sitetara m. “-saroja” n. a blue lotus Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch sitetara (3. sita + itara) 1) adj. a) “schwarz (dunkelfarbig”) H. 17. KUMĀRAS. 1, 38. VARĀH. LAGHUJ. 1, 6. H. 1326. HALĀY. 2, 97. — b) “weiss und schwarz” BHĀG. P. 10, 41, 41. — 2) m. Bez. zweier Pflanzen: = śyāmaśāli und kulattha RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 sitetara a. black, dark, blue (lit. opposite of white). Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 sitetara sita+itara, a. (opposite of white), black, dark, blue; -saroja, n. blue lotus. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 sitetara pu° sitāditaraḥ . 1 śyāmaśālau 2 kulatthe ca 3 śubhetaravarṇe 4 tadvati tri° . |
सु – su | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899su cl.1.P. ā. “savati, -te”, to go, move ( “sru”).
su (= 1. “sū”) cl.1.2. P. ( xxii, 43 and xxiv, 32; “savati, sauti”, only in 3. sg. pr. “sauti” and 2. sg. Impv. “suhi”) to urge, impel, incite ; to possess supremacy su cl.5.P. ā. ( xxvii, 1) “sunoti, sunute” (in 3. pl. “sunvanti, sunvire” [with pass. sense] and “suṣvati”; p. “sunvat” or “sunvāna” [the latter with act. and pass. sense] ; pf. “suṣāva, suṣuma” &c. ; p. in Veda “suṣuvas” and “suṣvāṇa” [the later generally with pass. sense; accord. to on “suṣuvāṇa” with act. sense]; aor. accord. to Gr. “asāvīt” or “asauṣīt, asoṣṭa” or “asaviṣṭa”; in also Impv. “sotu, sutam”, and p. [mostly pass.] “suvāna” [but the spoken form is “svāna” and so written in , “suv-” in ; and 3. pl. “asuṣavuḥ” ; fut. “sotā” ; “soṣyati” ; “saviṣyati” ; inf. “sotave, sotos” ; “sotum” Gr.; ind. p. “-sutya” ; “-sūya” , to press out, extract (esp. the juice from the Soma plant for libations) ; to distil, prepare (wine, spirits &c.) on Pass. “sūyate” (in also ā. 3. sg. “sunve” and 3. pl. “sunvire” with pass. sense; aor. “asāvi” Caus. “-sāvayati” or “-ṣāvayati” (see “abhi-ṣu” and “pra-su”; aor. “asūṣavat” accord. to some “asīṣavat”) Gr.: Desid. of Caus. “suṣāvayiṣati” Desid. “susūṣati, -te” Iutens. “soṣūyate, soṣavīti, soṣoti” su (= 2. “sū”), (only in 3. sg. “sauti” see “pra-sū”) to beget, bring forth. su ind. (opp. to “dus” and corresponding in sense to Gk. [greek]; perhaps connected with 1. “vasu”, and, accord. to some, with pron. base “sa”, as “ku” with “ka”; in Veda also “sū” and liable to become “ṣu” or “ṣū” and to lengthen a preceding vowel, while a following “na” may become “ṇa”; it may be used as an adj. or adv.), good, excellent, right, virtuous, beautiful, easy, well, rightly, much, greatly, very, any, easily, willingly, quickly (in older language often with other particles; esp. with “u”, = “forthwith, immediately”; with “mo” i.e. “mā u”, = “never, by no means”; “su kam” often emphatically with an Impv. e.g. “tiṣṭhā su kam maghavan mā parā gāḥ”, “do tarry O Maghavan, go not past” ; “su” always qualifies the meaning of a verb and is never used independently at the beginning of a verse; in later language it is rarely a separate word, but is mostly prefixed to substantives, adjectives, adverbs and participles, exceptionally also to an ind. p. e.g. “su-baddhvā”, “having well bound” ; or even to a finite verb e.g. “su-nirvavau” su (to be similarly prefixed to the following): su (to be similarly prefixed to the following). su (to be similarly prefixed to the following): su (to be similarly prefixed to the following): su (to be similarly prefixed to the following) su (to be similarly prefixed to the following): su (to be similarly prefixed to the following): su (to be similarly prefixed to the following): su (to be similarly prefixed to the following, in which the initial “ṣ” stands for an orig. “s”): su (to be similarly prefixed to the following): su (to be similarly prefixed to the following) Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 su I. 1 U. (suvati-te) To go, move. –II. 1. 2. P. (savati, sauti) To possess power or supremacy. –III. 5. U. (sunoti, sunute, suta; the s of su is changed to ṣ after any preposition ending in i or u) (1) To press out or extract juice. (2) To distil. (3) To pour out, sprinkle, make a libation. (4) To perform a sacrifice, especially the Soma sacrifice. (5) To bathe. (6) To churn. –Desid. (suṣūsati-te) –WITH ud to excite, agitate. –pra to produce, beget. su ind. A particle often used with nouns to form Karmadhāraya and Bahuvrīhi compounds, and with adjectives and adverbs. It has the following senses: (1) Well, good, excellent; as in suṁgadhi. (2) Beautiful, handsome; as in sumadhyamā, sukeśī &c. (3) Well, perfectly, thoroughly, properly; sujīrṇamannaṁ suvicakṣaṇaḥ sutaḥ suśāsitā strī nṛpatiḥ susevitaḥ &c … sudīrghakāle’pi na yāti vikriyāṁ H. 1. 22. (4) Easily, readily, as in sukara or sulabha q. v. (5) Much, very much, exceedingly; sudāruṇa, sudīrgha &c. (6) Worthy of respect or reverence. (7) It is also said to have the senses of assent, prosperity, and distress. — Comp. –akṣa a. 1. having good eyes. –2. having keen organs, acute. –aṁga a. well-shaped, handsome, lovely. –accha a. see s. v. –aṁta a. having a happy end, ending well. –alpa, -alpaka a. see s. v. –asti, –astika see s. v. –ākāra, –ākṛti a. well-formed, handsome, beautiful. –āgata see s. v. –ādānaṁ taking justly or properly; Ms. 8. 172. –ābhāsa a. very splendid or illustrious; Ki. 15. 22. –iṣṭa a. properly sacrificed. -kṛt m. a form of fire. –ukta a. well-spoken, well-said; athavā sūktaṁ khalu kenāpi Ve. 3. ( –ktā) a kind of bird (sārikā. (–ktaṁ) 1. a good or wise saying; netuṁ vāṁchati yaḥ khalān pathi satāṁ sūktaiḥ sudhāsyaṁdibhiḥ Bh. 2. 6, R. 15. 97. –2. a Vedic hymn, as in puruṣasūkta &c. -darśin m. a hymnseer, Vedic sage. -vāc f. 1. a hymn. –2. praise, a word of praise. –uktiḥ f. 1. a good or friendly speech. –2. a good or clever saying. –3. a correct sentence. –uttara a. 1. very superior. –2. well towards the north. –utthāna a. making good efforts, vigorous, active. ( –naṁ) vigorous effort or exertion. –unmada, –unmāda a. quite mad or frantic. –upasadana a. easy to be approached. –upaskara a. furnished with good instruments. –kaṁṭakā the aloe plant. –kaṁḍuḥ itch. –kaṁdaḥ 1. an onion. –2. a yam. –3. a sort of grass. –kaṁdakaḥ onion. –kara a. (rā or rī f.) 1. easy to be done, practicable, feasible; vaktuṁ sukaraṁ kartuṁ (adhyavasātuṁ) duṣkaraṁ Ve. 3 ‘sooner said than done.’ –2 easy to be managed. ( –rā) a tractable cow. ( –raṁ) charity, benevolence. –karman a. 1. one whose deeds are righteous, virtuous, good. –2. active, diligent. (–m.) N. of Viśvakarman. –kala a. one who has acquired a great reputation for liberality in giving and using (money &c.). –kāṁḍaḥ the Kāravella plant. –kāṁḍikā the Kāṇḍīra creeper. –kāṁḍin a. 1. having beautiful stems. –2. beautifully joined. (–m.) a bee. –kāṣṭhaṁ firewood. –kuṁdakaḥ an onion. –kumāra a. 1. very delicate or soft, smooth. –2. beautifully young or youthful. ( –raḥ) 1. a beautiful youth. –2. a kind of sugar-cane. –3. a kind of grain (śyāmāka). –4 a kind of mustard. –5. the wild Champaka. ( –rā) 1. the double jasmine. –2. the plantain. –3. the great- flowered jasmine. –kumārakaḥ 1. a beautiful youth. –2. rice (śāli). (–kaṁ) the Tamālapatra. –kumārī the Navamallikā jasmine. –kṛt a. 1. doing good, benevolent. –2. pious, virtuous, righteous. –3. wise, learned. –4. fortunate, lucky. –5. making good sacrifices or offerings (–m.) 1. a skilful worker. –2. N. of Tvaṣṭṛ. –kṛta a. 1. done well or properly. –2. thoroughly done. –3. well- made or constructed. –4. treated with kindness, assisted, befriended. — 5. virtuous, righteous, pious. –6. lucky, fortunate. ( –taṁ) 1. any good or virtuous act, kindness, favour, service; nādatte kasyacitpāpaṁ kasyacitsukṛtaṁ vibhuḥ Bg. 5. 15, Me. 17. –2. virtue, moral or religious merit; svargābhisaṁdhisukṛtaṁ vaṁcanāmiva menire Ku. 6. 47; tacciṁtyamānaṁ sukṛtaṁ taveti R. 14. 16. –3. fortune, auspiciousness. –4. recompense, reward. –kṛtiḥ f. 1. well-doing, a good act. –2. kindness, virtue. –3. practice of penance. –4. auspiciousness. –kṛtin a. 1. acting well or kindly. –2. virtuous, pious, good, righteous; saṁtaḥ saṁtu nirāpadaḥ sukṛtināṁ kīrtiściraṁ vardhatāṁ H. 4. 132; Bg. 7. 16. –3. wise, learned. –4. benevolent. –5. fortunate, lucky. –kṛtyaṁ a good action; Pt. 2. 41. –keśa(sa)raḥ the citron tree. –kratuḥ 1. N. of Agni. –2. of Śiva. –3. of Indra. –4. of Mitra and Varuṇa. –5. of the sun. –6. of Soma. –gaṁ a. 1. going gracefully or well. –2. graceful, elegant. –3. easy of access; Pt. 2. 144. –4. intelligible, easy to be understood (opp. durga). ( –gaṁ) 1. ordure, feces. –2. happiness. –gata a. 1. well-gone or passed. –2 well-bestowed. ( –taḥ) an epithet of Buddha. –gaṁdhaḥ 1. fragrance, odour, perfume. –2. sulphur. –3. a trader. ( –dhaṁ) 1. sandal. –2. small cumin seed. –3. a blue lotus. –4. a kind of fragrant grass. ( –dhā) sacred basil. –gaṁdhakaḥ 1. sulphur. –2. the red Tulasī1. –3. the orange. –4. a kind of gourd. –gaṁdhāraḥ an epithet of Śiva. –gaṁdhi a. 1. sweet-smelling, fragrant, redolent with perfumes. –2. virtuous, pious. ( –dhiḥ) 1. perfume, fragrance. –2. the Supreme Being. –3. a kind of sweet-smelling mango. ( –dhi n.) 1. the root of long pepper. –2. a kind of fragrant grass. — 3. coriander seed. -triphalā 1. nutmeg. –2. areca nut. –3. cloves. -mūlaṁ the root Uśīra. -mūṣikā the musk-rat. –gaṁdhikaḥ 1. incense. –2. sulphur. –3. a kind of rice. ( –kaṁ) the white lotus. –gama a. 1. easy of access, accessible. –2. easy. –3. plain, intelligible. –gahanā an enclosure round a place of sacrifice to exclude profane access. -vṛttiḥ f. the same as above. –gṛha a. (hī f.) having a beautiful house or abode, welllodged; sugṛhī nirgṛṁhīkṛtā Pt. 1. 390. –gṛhīta a. 1. held well or firmly, grasped. –2. used or applied properly or auspiciously. -nāman a. 1. one whose name is auspiciously invoked, one whose name it is auspicious to utter (as Bali, Yudhiṣṭhira), a term used as a respectful mode of speaking; sugṛhītanāmnaḥ bhaṭṭagopālasya pautraḥ Māl. 1. –grāsaḥ a dainty morsel. –grīva a. having a beautiful neck. ( –vaḥ) 1. a hero. –2. a swan. –3. a kind of weapon. –4. N. of one of the four horses of Kṛṣṇa. –5. of Śiva. –6. of Indra. –7. N. of a monkeychief and brother of Vāli. [By the advice of Kabandha Rāma went to Sugrīva who told him how his brother had treated him and besought his assistance in recovering his wife, promising at the same time that he would assist Rāma in recovering his wife Sīta. Rāma, therefere, killed Vāli, and installed Sugrīva on the throne. He then assisted Rāma with his hosts of monkeys in conquering Rāvaṇa, and recovering Sīta.]. -īśaḥ N. of Rāma. –gla a. very weary or fatigued. –cakṣus a. having good eyes, seeing well. (–m.) 1. a discerning or wise man, learned man. –2. the glomerous fig-tree. –carita, caritra a. well-conducted, well-behaved. ( –taṁ, -traṁ) 1. good conduct, virtuous deeds. –2. merit; tava sucaritamaṁgulīya nūnaṁ pratanu S. 6. 10. ( –tā, –trā) a well-conducted, devoted, and virtuous wife. –carman m. the Bhūrja tree. –citrakaḥ 1. a king-fisher. –2. a kind of speckled snake. –citrā a kind of gourd. –ciṁtā, –ciṁtanaṁ deep thought, deep reflection or consideration. –ciram ind. for a very long time, very long. –cirāyus m. a god, deity. –cūṭī a pair of nippers or tongs. –celakaḥ a fine cloth. –chatraḥ N. of Śiva. ( –trā) the river Sutlej. –jana a. 1. good, virtuous, respectable. –2. kind, benevolent. ( –naḥ) 1. a good or virtuous man, benevolent man. –2. a gentleman. –3. N. of Indra’s charioteer. –janatā 1. goodness, kindness, benevolence, virtue; aiśvaryasya vibhūṣaṇaṁ sujanatā Bh. 2. 82. –2. a number of good men. –3. bravery, –janman a. 1. of noble or respectable birth; yā kaumudī nayanayorbhavataḥ sujanmā Māl. 1. 34. –2. legitimate, lawfully born. –jalaṁ a lotus. –jalpaḥ 1. a good speech. –2. a kind of speech thus described by Ujjvalamaṇi; yatrārjavāt sagāṁbhīryaṁ sadainyaṁ sahacāpalam . sotkaṁṭhaṁ ca hariḥ spṛṣṭaḥ sa sujalpo nigadyate … –jāta a. 1. wellgrown, tall. –2. well made or produced. –3. of high birth. –4. beautiful, lovely; Māl. 1. 16, R. 3. 8. –tanu a. 1. having a beautiful body. –2. extremely delicate or slender, very thin. –3. emaciated. ( –nuḥ, –nūḥ f.) a lovely lady; etāḥ sutanu mukha te sakhyaḥ paśyaṁti hemakūṭagatāḥ V. 1. 10. –taṁtrī a. 1. well-stringed. –2. (hence) melodious. –tapas a. 1. one who practises austere penance. –2. having great heat. (–m.) 1. an ascetic, a devotee, hermit, an anchorite. –2. the sun. (–n.) an austere penance. –tamāṁ ind. most excellently, best. –tarāṁ ind. 1. better, more excellently. –2. exceedingly, very, very much, excessively; tayā duhitrā sutarāṁ savitrī sphuratprabhāmaṁḍalayā cakāśe Ku. 1. 24; sutarāṁ dayāluḥ R. 2. 53, 7. 21, 14. 9, 18. 24. –3. more so, much more so; mayyapyāsthā na te cettvayi mama sutarāmeṣa rājan gatosmi Bh. 3. 30. –4. consequently. –tardanaḥ the (Indian) cuckoo. –talaṁ 1. ‘immense depth’, N. of one of the seven regions below the earth; see pātāla. –2. the foundation of a large building. –tiktakaḥ the coral tree. –tīkṣṇa a. 1. very sharp. –2. very pungent. –3. acutely painful. ( –kṣṇaḥ) 1. the Śigru tree. –2. N. of a sage; nāmnā sutīkṣṇaścaritena dāṁtaḥ R. 13. 41. -daśanaḥ an epithet of Śiva. –tīrthaḥ 1. a good preceptor. –2. N. of Śiva. –tuṁga a. very lofty or tall. ( –gaḥ) the cocoa-nut tree. –tejas a. 1. very sharp. –2. very bright, or splendid. –3. very mighty. (–m.) a worshipper of the sun. –dakṣiṇa a. 1. very sincere or upright. –2. liberal or rich in sacrificial gifts; Pt. 1. 310. ( –ṇā) N. of the wife of Dilīpa; tasya dākṣiṇyarūḍhena nāmnā magadhavaṁśajā . patnī sudakṣiṇetyāsīt R. 1. 31, 3. 1 –daṁḍaḥ a cane, ratan. –dat a. (tī f.) having handsome teeth. –daṁtaḥ 1. a good tooth. –2. an actor, a dancer. ( –tī) the female elephant of the north-west quarter. –darśana a. (nā or nī f.) 1. good-looking, beautiful, handsome. –2. easily seen. ( –naḥ) the discus of Viṣṇu; as in kṛṣṇopyasudarśanaḥ K. –2. N. of Śiva. –3. of mount Meru. –4. a vulture. ( –nī –naṁ) N. of Amarāvatī, Indra’s capital. ( –naṁ) N. of Jambudvīpa. –darśanā 1. a handsome woman. –2. a woman. –3. an order, a command. –4. a kind of drug. –dā a. very bountiful. –dāṁtaḥ a Buddhist. –dāman a. one who gives liberally. (–m.) 1. a cloud. –2. a mountain. –3. the sea. –4. N. of Indra’s elephant. –5. N. of a very poor Brāhmaṇa who came to Dvāraka with only a small quantity of parched rice as a present to his friend Kṛṣṇa, and was raised by him to wealth and glory. –dāyaḥ 1. a good or auspicious gift. –2. a special gift given on particular solemn occasions. –3. one who offers such a gift. –dinaṁ 1. a happy or auspicious day. –2. a fine day or weather (opp. durdina); so sudināhaṁ in the same sense. –dīrgha a. very long or extended. ( –rghā) a kind of cucumber. –durlabha a. very scarce or rare. –dvara a. very distant or remote. (sudūraṁ means 1. to a great distance. –2. to a very high degree, very much. sudūrāt ‘from afar, from a distance’). –ṭṭaḍha a. very firm or hard, compact. –dṛś a. having beautiful eyes. (–f.) a pretty woman. –dhanvan a. having an excellent bow. (–m.) 1. a good archer or bowman. –2. Ananta, the great serpent. –3. N. of Viśvakarman. –dharman a. attentive to duties. (–f.) the council or assembly of gods. (–m.) 1. the hall or palace of Indra. –2. one diligent in properly maintaining his family. –dharmā –rmī the council or assembly of gods (devasabhā); yayāvudīritālokaḥ sudharmānavamāṁ sabhāṁ R. 17. 27. –dhita a. Ved. 1. perfect, secure. –2. kind, good. –3. happy, prosperous. –4. well-aimed or directed (as a weapon). –dhī a. having a good understanding, wise, clever, intelligent. ( –dhīḥ) a wise or intelligent man, learned man or pandit. (–f.) a good understanding, good sense, intelligence. -upāsyaḥ 1. a particular kind of royal palace. –2. N. of an attendant on Kṛṣṇa. ( –syaṁ) the club of Balarama. -upāsyā 1. a woman. –2. N. of Umā, or of one of her female companions. –3. a sort of pigment. –dhūmravarṇā one of the seven tongues of fire. –naṁdā N. of a woman. –nayaḥ 1. good conduct. –2. good policy. –nayana a. having beautiful eyes. ( –naḥ) a deer. ( –nā) 1. a woman having beautiful eyes. –2. a woman in general. –nābha a. 1. having a beautiful navel. –2. having a good nave or centre. ( –bhaḥ) 1. a mountain. –2. the Maināka mountain q. v. –nibhṛta a. very lonely or private. ( –taṁ) ind. very secretly or closely, very narrowly, privately. –niścalaḥ an epithet of Śiva. –nīta 1. well-conducted, well-behaved. –2. polite, civil. ( –taṁ) 1. good conduct or behaviour. –2. good policy or prudence. –nītiḥ f. 1. good conduct, good manners, propriety. –2. good policy. –3. N. of the mother of Dhruva, q. v. –nītha a. well-disposed, well-conducted, righteous, virtuous, good. ( –thaḥ) 1. a Brāhmaṇa. –2. N. of Śiśupāla q. v. –3. Ved. a good leader. –nīla a. very black or blue. ( –laḥ) the pomegranate tree. ( –lā) common flax. (–laṁ), –nīlakaḥ a blue gem. –netra a. having good or beautiful eyes. –nau n. water (?). –pakva a. 1. well-cooked. –2. thoroughly matured or ripe. ( –kvaḥ) a sort of fragrant mango. –patnī a woman having a good husband. –pathaḥ 1. a good road. –2. a good course. –3. good conduct. –pathin m. (nom. sing. supaṁthāḥ) a good road. –padmā orris root. –parṇa a. (rṇā or rṇī f.) 1. wellwinged. –2. having good or beautiful leaves. ( –rṇaḥ) 1. a ray of the sun. –2. a class of bird-like beings of a semi-divine character. –3. any supernatural bird. –4. an epithet of Garuḍa. –5. a cock. -ketuḥ N. of Viṣṇu. –parṇakaḥ = suparṇa. –parṇā, –parṇī f. 1. a number of lotuses. –2. a pool abounding with lotuses. –3. N. of the mother of Garuḍa. –paryāpta a. 1. very spacious. –2. well-fitted. –parvan a. well-jointed, having many joints or knots. (–m.) 1. a bamboo. –2. an arrow. –3. a god, deity. –4. a special lunar day (as the day of full or new moon, and the 8th and 14th day of each fortnight). –5. smoke. (–f.) white Dūrvā grass. –palāyita a. 1. completely fled or run away. –2. skilfully retreated. –pātraṁ 1. a good or suitable vessel, worthy receptacle. –2. a fit or competent person, any one well-fitted for an office, an able person. –pād (pād or padī f.) having good or handsome feet. –pārśvaḥ 1. the wavedleaf fig-tree (plakṣa). –2. N. of the son of Sampāti, elder brother of Jaṭāyu. –pītaṁ a carrot. ( –taḥ) the fifth Muhūrta. –puṁsī a woman having a good husband. –puṣpa a. (ṣpā or ṣpī f.) having beautiful flowers. ( –ṣpaḥ) 1. the coral tree. –2. the Śirīṣa tree. ( –ṣpī) the plantain tree. ( –ṣpaṁ) 1. cloves. –2. the menstrual excretion. –puṣpita a. 1. well blossomed, being in full flower. –2. having the hair thrilling or bristling. –pūra a. 1. easy to be filled; Pt. 1. 25. –2. well-filling. ( –raḥ) a kind of citron (bījapūra). –pūrakaḥ the Baka-pushpa tree. –prakāśa a. 1. manifest, apparent. –2. public, notorious. –pratarkaḥ a sound judgment –pratibhā spirituous liquor. –pratiṣṭha a. 1. standing well. –2. very celebrated, renowned, glorious, famous. ( –ṣṭhā) 1. good position. –2. good re putation, fame, celebrity. –3. establishment, erection. –4. installation, consecration. –pratiṣṭhita a. 1. well-established. –2. consecrated –3. celebrated. ( –taḥ) the Udumbara tree. –pratiṣṇāta a. 1. thoroughly purified. –2. well-versed in. –3. well- investigated, clearly ascertained or determined. –pratīka a. 1. having a beautiful shape, lovely, handsome. –2. having a beautiful trunk. ( –kaḥ) 1. an epithet of Kāmadeva. –2. of Śiva. –3. of the elephant of the north-east quarter. –prapāṇaṁ a good tank. –prabha a. very brilliant, glorious. ( –bhā) one of the seven tongues of fire. –prabhātaṁ 1. an auspicious dawn or day-break; diṣṭyā suprabhātamadya yadayaṁ devo ṭṭaṣṭaḥ U. 6 –2. the earliest dawn. –prayuktaśaraḥ a skilful archer. –prayogaḥ 1. good management or application. –2. close contact. –3. dexterity. –prasannaḥ N. of Kubera. –prasāda a. very gracious or propitious. ( –daḥ) N. of Śiva. –priya a. very much liked, agreeable. ( –yaḥ) (in prosody) a foot of two short syllables. ( –yā) 1. a charming woman. –2. a beloved mistress. –phala a. 1. very fruitful, very productive. –2. very fertile. ( –laḥ) 1. the pomegranate tree. –2. the jujube. –3. the Karṇikara tree. –4. a kind of bean. ( –lā) 1. a pumpkin, gourd. –2. the plantain tree. –3. a variety of brown grape. –4. colocynth. –phenaḥ a cuttlefish bone. –baṁdhaḥ sesamum. –bala a. very powerful. ( –laḥ) 1. N. of Śiva. –2. N. of the father of Śakuni. –bāṁdhavaḥ N. of Śiva. –bāhu a. 1. handsome-armed. –2. strong-armed. ( –huḥ) N. of a demon, brother of Mārīcha, who had become a demon by the curse of Agastya. He with Mārīcha began to disturb the sacrifice of Viśvāmitra, but was defeated by Rāma and Lakṣmaṇa; see R. 11. 29. –bodha a. 1. easily apprehended or understood. ( –dhaḥ) good information or advice. –brahmaṇyaḥ 1. an epithet of Kārtikeya. –2. N. of one of the sixteen priests employed at a sacrifice. –bhaga a. 1. very fortunate or prosperous, happy, blessed. highly favoured. –2. lovely, charming, beautiful, pretty; na tu grīṣmasyaivaṁ subhagamaparāddhaṁ yuvatiṣu S. 3. 9; Ku. 4. 34, R. 11. 80; Māl. 9. –3. pleasant, grateful, agreeable, sweet; śravaṇasubhaga M. 3. 4, S. 1. 3. –4. beloved, liked, amiable, dear; sumukhi subhagaḥ paśyan sa tvāmupaitu kṛtārthatāṁ Gīt. 5. 5. illustrious. ( –gaḥ) 1. borax. –2. the Aśoka tree. –3. the Champaka tree. –4. red amaranth. ( –gaṁ) good fortune. -mānin, subhagaṁmanya a. –1. considering oneself fortunate, amiable, pleasing; vācālaṁ māṁ na khalu subhagaṁmanyabhāvaḥ karoti Me. 94. –2. vain, flattering oneself. –bhagā a woman beloved by her husband, a favourite wife. –2. an honoured mother –3. a kind of wild jasmine. –4 turmeric. –5. the Priyangu creeper. –6 the holy basil. -sutaḥ the son of a favourite wife. –bhaṁgā the cocoa-nut tree. –bhadra a. very happy or fortunate. ( –draḥ) N. of Viṣṇu. ( –drā) N. of the sister of Balarāma and Kṛṣṇa, married to Arjuna q. v. She bore to him a son named Abhimanyu. –bhadrakaḥ 1. a car for carrying the image of a god. –2. the Bilva tree. –bhāṣita a. 1. spoken well or eloquent. ( –taṁ) 1. fine speech, eloquence, learning; jīrṇamaṁge subhāṣitaṁ Bh. 3. 2. –2. a witty saying, an apophthegm, an apposite saying; subhāṣitena gītena yuvatīnāṁ ca līlayā . mano na bhidyate yasya sa vai mukto’thavā paśuḥ Subbish. –3. a good remark; bālādapi subhāṣitaṁ (grāhyaṁ). –bhikṣaṁ 1. good alms, successful begging. –2. abundance of food, an abundant supply of provisions, plenty of corn &c. –bhīrakaḥ the Palāśa tree. –bhūtikaḥ the Bilva tree. –bhrū a. having beautiful eyebrows. ( –bhrūḥ f.) a lovely woman. (N. B. The vocative singular of this word is strictly subhrūḥ; but subhru is used by writers like Bhaṭṭi, Kālidāsa, and Bha vabhūti; hā pitaḥ kvāsi he subhru Bk. 6. 17; so V. 3. 22; Ku. 5. 43; Māl. 3. 8. –maṁgala a. 1. very auspicious. –2. abounding in sacrifices. –mati a. very wise. ( –tiḥ f.) 1. a good mind or disposition, kindness, benevolence, friendship. –2. a favour of the gods. –3. a gift, blessing. –4. a prayer, hymn. –5. a wish or desire. –6. N. of the wife of Sagara and mother of 60,000 sons. –madanaḥ the mango tree. –madhuraṁ a very sweet or gentle speech, agreeable words. –madhya, -madhyama a. slender-waisted. –madhyā, -madhyamā a graceful woman. –mana a. very charming, lovely, beautiful. ( –naḥ) 1. wheat. –2. the thorn-apple. ( –nā) the great-flowered jasmine. –manas a. 1. good-minded, of a good disposition, benevolent. –2. well-pleased, satisfied. (–m.) 1. a god, divinity. –2. a learned man. –3. a student of the Vedas. –4. wheat. –5. the Nimba tree. (–f., n.; said to be pl. only by some) a flower; ramaṇīya eṣa vaḥ sumanasāṁ saṁniveśaḥ Māl. 1 (where the adjectival sense in 1 is also intended); kiṁ sevyate sumanasāṁ manasāpi gaṁdhaḥ kastūrikājananaśaktibhṛtā mṛgeṇa R. G.; Śi. 6. 66. (–f.) 1. the great-flowered jasmine. –2 the Mālatī creeper. – phalaḥ the wood-apple. -phalaṁ nutmeg. –maṁtu a. 1. advising well. –2. very faulty or blameable. (–m.) a good adviser. –maṁtraḥ N. of the charioteer of Daśaratha. –mitrā 1. N. of one of the wives of Daśaratha and mother of Lakṣmaṇa and Śatrughna –mukha a. (khā or khī f.) 1. having a beautiful face, lovely. –2. pleasing. –3. disposed to, eager for; Ki. 6. 42. ( –khaḥ) 1. a learned man. –2. an epithet of Garuḍa. –3. of Gaṇeśa. –4. of Śiva. ( –khaṁ) the scratch of a finger-nail. ( –khā, –khī) 1. a handsome woman. –2. a mirror. –mūlakaṁ a carrot. –mekhalaḥ the Munja grass. –medhas a. having a good understanding, wise, intelligent. (–m.) a wise man. (–f.) heart-pea. –meruḥ 1. the sacred mountain Meru, q. v. –2. N. of Śiva. –yavasaṁ beautiful grass, good pasturage. –yāmunaḥ N. of Viṣṇu. –yuktaḥ N. of Śiva. –yodhanaḥ an epithet of Duryodhana q. v. –raktakaḥ 1. a kind of red chalk. –2 a kind of mango tree. –raṁgaḥ 1. good colour. –2. the orange. –3. a hole cut in a house (suraṁgā also in this sense). ( –gaṁ) 1. red sanders. –2. vermilion. -dhātuḥ red chalk. -yuj m. a house-breaker. –raṁgikā the Mūrvā plant. –rajaḥphalaḥ the jackfruit tree. –raṁjanaḥ the betel-nuttree. –rata a. 1. much sported. –2. playful. –2. much enjoyed. –4. compassionate, tender. ( –taṁ) 1. great delight or enjoyment. –2. copulation, sexual union or intercourse, coition; suratamṛditā bālavanitā Bh. 2. 44. -tālī 1. a female-messenger, a go-between. –2. a chaplet, garland for the head. – prasaṁgaḥ addiction to amorous pleasures; Ku. 1. 19. –ratiḥ f. great enjoyment or satisfaction. –rasa a. 1. well-flavoured, juicy, savoury. –2. sweet. –3. elegant (as a composition). ( –saḥ, –sā) the plant siṁdhuvāra. (–sā) N. of Durgā. ( –sā, -saṁ) the sacred basil. ( –saṁ) 1. gummyrrh. –2. fragrant grass. –rājan a. governed by a good king; surājñi deśe rājanvān Ak. (– m.) 1. a good king. –2. a divinity. –rāṣṭraṁ N. of a country on the western side of India (Surat). – jaṁ a kind of poison. -brahmaḥ a Brāhmaṇa of Surāṣṭra. –rūpa a. 1. well-formed, handsome, lovely; surūpā kanyā. –2. wise, learned. ( –paḥ) an epithet of Śiva. –rebha a. finevoiced; Ki. 15. 16. ( –bhaṁ) tin. –lakṣaṇa a. 1. having auspicious or beautiful marks. –2. fortunate. ( –ṇaṁ) 1. observing, examining carefully, determining, ascertaining. –2. a good or auspicious mark. –labha a. 1. easy to be obtained, easy of attainment, attainable, feasible; na sulabhā sakaleṁdumukhī ca sā V. 2. 9; idamasulabhavastuprārthanādurnivāraṁ 2. 6. –2. ready for, adapted to, fit, suitable; niṣṭhyūtaścaraṇopabhogasulabho lākṣārasaḥ kenacit S. 4. 4. –3. natural to, proper for; mānuṣatāsulabho laghimā K. -kopa a. easily provoked, irascible. –locana a. fineeyed. ( –naḥ) a deer. ( –nā) 1. a beautiful woman. –2. N. of the wife of Indrajit. –lohakaṁ brass. –lohita a. very red. ( –tā) one of the seven tongues of fire. –vaktraṁ 1. a good face or mouth. –2 correct utterance. ( –ktraḥ) N. of Śiva. –vacanaṁ, –vacas n. eloquence. –varcakaḥ, –varcikaḥ –kā, –varcin m. natron, alkali. –varcalaṁ linseed. –varcasaḥ N. of Śiva. –varṇa see s. v. –vasaṁtaḥ 1. an agreeable vernal season. –2. the day of full moon in the month of Chaitra, or a festival celebrated in honour of Kāmadeva in that month (also suvasaṁtakaḥ in this sense). –vaha a. 1. bearing well. patient. –2. patient, enduring. –3. easy to be borne. ( –hā) a lute. –vāsaḥ 1. N. of Śiva. –2. a pleasant dwelling. –3. an agreeable perfume or odour. –vāsinī 1. a woman married or single who resides in her father’s house. –2. a married woman whose husband is alive. –vikrāṁta a. very valiant or bold, chivalrous. ( –taḥ) a hero. ( –taṁ) heroism. –vid m. a learned man, shrewd person. (–f.) a shrewd or clever woman. –vidaḥ 1. an attendant on the women’s apartments. –2. a king. –vidat m. a king. –viditraṁ 1. a household, family –2. wealth. –vidallaḥ an attendant on the women’s apartments (wrongly for sauvidalla q. v). ( –llaṁ) the women’s apartments, harem. –vidallā a married woman. –vidha a. of a good kind. –vidham ind. easily. –vinīta a. well-trained, modest. ( –tā) a tractable cow. –vihita a. 1. well-placed, well-deposited. –2. well-furnished, wellsupplied, well-provided, well-arranged; suvihitaprayogatayā āryasya na kimapi parihāsyate S. 1; kalahaṁsamakaraṁdapraveśāvasare tatsuvihitaṁ Māl. 1. –3. well done or performed. –vī (bī) ja a. having good seed. ( –jaḥ) 1. N. of Śiva. –2. the poppy. ( –jaṁ) good seed. –vīrāmlaṁ sour rice-gruel. –vīrya a. 1. having great vigour. –2. of heroic strength, heroic, chivalrous. ( –ryaṁ) 1. great heroism. –2. abundance of heroes. –3. the fruit of the jujube. ( –ryā) wild cotton. –bṛkti f. 1. a pure offering. –2. a hymn of praise. –vṛtta a. 1. well-behaved, virtuous, good; mayi tasya suvṛtta vartate laghusaṁdeśapadā sarasvatī R. 8. 77. –2. well-rounded, beautifully globular or round; mṛdunātisuvṛttena sumṛṣṭenātihāriṇā . modakenāpi kiṁ tena niṣpattiryasya sevayā; or sumukho’pi suvṛttopi sanmārgapatito’pi ca . mahatāṁ pādalagno’pi vyathayatyeva kaṁṭakaḥ (where all the adjectives are used in a double sense). ( –ttaṁ) a good or virtuous conduct; Pt. 1. 69. –vela a. 1. tranquil, still. –2. humble, quiet. ( –laḥ) N. of the Trikūṭa mountain. –vrata a. strict in the observance of religious vows, strictly religious or virtuous. ( –taḥ) a religious student. ( –tā) 1. a virtuous wife. –2. a tractable cow, one easily milked. –śaṁsa a. wellspoken of, famous, glorious, commendable. –śaka a. capable of being easily done. –śalyaḥ the Khadira tree. –śākaṁ undried ginger. –śāradaḥ N. of Śiva. –śāsita a. kept under control, well-controlled. –śikṣita a. well-taught trained, well-disciplined. –śikhaḥ fire. ( –khā) 1. a peacock’s crest. –2. a cock’s comb. –śītaṁ yellow sandal-wood. –śīma a. cold, frigid. ( –maḥ) coldness. –śīla a. good-tempered, amiable. ( –lā) 1. N. of the wife of Yama. –2. N. of one of the eight favourite wives of Kṛṣṇa. –śrīkā the gum olibanum tree. –śruta a. 1. well heard. –2. versed in the Vedaś. ( –taḥ) N. of the author of a system of medicine, whose work, together with that of Charaka, is regarded as the olddest medical authority, and held in great esteem in India even to this day. –śliṣṭa 1. well-arranged or united. –2. well-fitted; Māl. 1. –śleṣaḥ close union or embrace. –satyā N. of the wife of Janaka. –saṭṭaś agreeable to look at. –sannata a. welldirected (as an arrow). –saraṇa. N. of Śiva. –saha a. 1. easy to be borne. –2. bearing or enduring well. ( –haḥ) an epithet of Śiva. –sāra a. having good sap or essence. ( –raḥ) 1. good sap, essence, or substance. –2. competence. –3. the red-flowering Khadira tree. –sāravat n. crystal. –sikatā 1. good sand. –2. gravel. –3. sugar. –stha a. 1. well-suited, being in a good sense. –2. in health, healthy, faring well. –3. in good or or prosperous circumstances, prosperous. –4. happy, fortunate. ( –sthaṁ) a happy state, well-being; susthe ko vā na paḍitaḥ H. 3. 121. (susthita in the same sense). –sthatā –sthitiḥ f. 1. good condition, wellbeing, welfare, happiness. –2. health, convalescence. –smita a. pleasantly smiling. ( –tā) a woman with a pleased or smiling countenance. –svapanaḥ an epithet of Śiva. –svara a. 1. melodious, harmonious. –2. loud. –hita a. 1. very fit or suitable, appropriate. –2. beneficial, salutary. –3. friendly, affectionate. –4. satisfied. ( –tā) one of the seven tongues of fire. –hṛda a. having a kind heart, cordial, friendly, loving, affectionate. (–m.) 1. a friend; suhṛdaḥ paśya vasaṁta kiṁ sthitaṁ Ku. 4. 27; maṁdāyaṁte na khalu suhṛdāmabhyupetārthakṛtyāḥ Me. 38. –2. an ally. -bhedaḥ the separation of friends. -vākyaṁ the counsel of a friend. –hṛdaḥ a friend. –hṛdaya a. 1. good-hearted. –2. dear, affectionate, loving. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch su 1 sunoti DHĀTUP. 27, 1 (abhiṣave, saṁdhākledapīḍāmanthe VOP.). sunota ṚV. 7, 32, 8. sunotana 5, 34, 1. sunuta 10, 14, 13. sunavat und sunvat 27, 22. sunvant partic.; med. sunve 3. sg. 7, 29, 1. 9, 88, 1. sunvire, sunudhvam, sunavai 8, 80, 1. suvāna partic.; suṣāva, suṣuma, suṣuviva (VOP. 12, Anf.), suṣuvaṁs, suṣuvuṣas 10, 94, 14. suṣvāṇa med. 4, 29, 2. 10, 148, 1. passivisch 9, 6, 8. sota, sotana, suṣvati 3. pl. (wohl praes.) 2, 16, 5. asāvīt, asoṣṭa und asāvīt P. 7, 2, 72. VOP. 11, 1. 12, Anf. soṣyati und saviṣyati 8, 46. 12, Anf. soṣyant KĀTY. ŚR. 16, 6, 10. (abhi) saviṣyant ŚAT. BR. 9, 5, 1, 66. infin. sotave (s. auch sotu) ṚV. 1, 28, 1. pass. sūyate, asāvi; partic. suta. “auspressen, keltern” (den Soma): sunu somam ṚV. 1, 28, 6. 101. 9. 137, 1. yaṁ te suṣāva (adriḥ) 7, 22, 1. andhaḥ 4, 16, 1. 5, 30, 6. 7, 21, 1. athā sunudhvaṁ savanaṁ madāya 4, 35, 4. havaṁ yajamānasya sunvataḥ 6, 60, 15. AV. 6, 6, 1. 54, 3. sotā hi somamadribhiḥ 8, 1, 17. asāvyaṁśuḥ 9, 62, 4. soma u ṣuvāṇaḥ sotṛbhiḥ 107, 8. grāvabhiḥ ŚAT. BR. 12, 8, 2, 14. payasā 15. KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 6, 23. soṣyatyasoṣṭa (zugleich zu 4. su) CHĀND. UP. 3, 17, 5. śaśvatsūyamānātsūryaḥ MAITRJUP. 6, 7. suṣāva ca vahūnsomānsomasaṁsthāstatāna ca MBH. 1, 4695. sarve sunvantaḥ P. 3, 2, 132, Schol. surāṁ sunoti so v. a. “braut” ebend. — asunvan AIT. BR. 4, 17 fehlerhaft für asanvan: s. u. 1. san. – suta partic.: suto aśnaiḥ ṚV. 8, 2. 2. 2, 11, 11. 4, 18, 3. aṁśu 25, 3. soma 41, 3. 6, 40, 1. sutāsa indavaḥ 8, 6, 21. sute adhvare 10, 94, 14. ŚAT. BR. 12, 8, 1, 5. pibasva somaṁ sutamadya taṁ mayā MBH. 14, 277. sute somasahasre 1, 8042. sutam Spr. (II) 2694 wohl fehlerhaft für hutam. masc. sg. und pl. “der Saft” d. h. Soma NAIGH. 2, 7. suṣvāṇaḥ pavate sutaḥ ṚV. 9, 6, 8. parīto ṣiñcatā sutam 107, 1. 2. 1, 135, 1. 2, 15, 1. 4, 32, 11. prātaḥ sutamapibaḥ 35, 7. madhumantaḥ 7, 90, 1. 10, 27, 2. TS. 7, 3, 11, 3. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 7, 10, 13. AV. 4, 29, 2. ŚAT. BR. 14, 5, 1, 3. -tejas 10, 6, 1, 8. = somayāga BHĀG. P. 7, 15, 48. neutr. CHĀND. UP. 5, 12, 1. — Vgl. 1. sava, 1. savana, asuta, adriṣuta, jambhasuta, suṣuta. adhi dass.: adhi suvāno nahuṣyebhirinduḥ ṚV. 9, 91, 2. — Vgl. adhiṣavaṇa. abhi, -suṇoti, abhyaṣuṇot P. 8, 3, 63. 65. -soṣyati, abhyasoṣyat 117. 1) “kelternd verarbeiten, pressen, mit Steinen ausschlagen u.s.w.” ŚAT. BR. 1, 1, 4, 7. 2, 2, 2, 1. 4, 4, 15. 3, 3, 2, 6. 4, 5, 10, 2. abhiṣuṇvanta āsate AIT. BR. 4, 14. 3, 15. 7, 17. plākṣāṇi 30. rājānam 32. ṛjīṣam TS. 6, 1, 6, 4. 3, 2, 2, 1. havirdhāne carmannadhi grāvabhirabhiṣutya 6, 2, 11, 4. ghnanti vā etatsomaṁ yadabhiṣuṇvanti 4, 4, 4. 5, 1. sa yadyabhiṣūyamāṇaḥ kiṁcidāpadyate ŚAT. BR. 12, 6, 1, 21. KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 5, 1. 10, 3, 12. abhiṣutya R. 1, 13, 5, v. l. abhiṣūya (so ed. Bomb.) somam MBH. 14, 2624. some vṛthābhiṣūyamāṇe 13, 372. “mit Flüssigkeit ansetzen und ausdrücken”: yāni caivābhiṣūyante puṣpamūlaphalaiḥ śubhaiḥ M. 5, 10. kṣīreṇābhiṣutya (v. l. abhiplutya) SUŚR. 1, 317, 12. kiṇvapiṣṭam 2, 73, 17. partic. abhiṣuta ŚAT. BR. 2, 4, 4, 16. 4, 1, 1, 15. 6, 1, 9. 14, 3, 2, 30. KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 1, 9. LĀṬY. 1, 9, 20. — 2) “bespritzen”: abhisoṣyantaṁ raktai rakṣāṁsi BHAṬṬ. 9, 90. — caus. -ṣāvayati P. 8, 3, 65, Vārtt. 3, Schol. — Vgl. abhiṣava fg., -ṣuta, -ṣotar, -susūs. ā “keltern” u. s. w.: ā sotā pari ṣiñcata ṚV. 9, 108, 7. yo asmai tīvrānsomāṁ āsunoti 10, 42, 5. ŚAT. BR. 12, 7, 3, 6. 12. tasmāttava sutaṁ prasutamāsutaṁ kule dṛśyate CHĀND. UP. 5, 12, 1. — Vgl. 2. āsava, āsāva. āsāvya (BHAṬṬ. 6, 64). 2. āsuti. ud “aufregen”: utsunoṣīkṣamāṇānāṁ kandukakrīḍayā manaḥ BHĀG. P. 3, 20, 35. Der Bedeutung nach eher zu 2. su (wie auch utsava). ni desid. vgl. nisusūs. nis, niḥṣuṇoti P. 8, 3, 65, Vārtt. 1, Schol. pari, -ṣuṇoti, paryaṣuṇot, -soṣyati, paryasoṣyat Schol. zu P. 8, 3, 63. 65. 117. in Stellen wie ṚV. 9, 10, 4. 87, 7 ist die Präposition zum Verbum finitum zu ziehen. pra “fortkeltern”; partic. “fortgesetzt gepresst, der” Soma “einer nicht bloss einmaligen, sondern andauernden Kelterung”: pūrṇamāse vai devānāṁ sutasteṣāmetamardhamāsaṁ prasutaḥ TS. 2, 5, 5, 4. aharahaḥ sutaḥ prasuto bhavati ŚAT. BR. 14, 5, 1, 3. 4, 1, 2, 6. saṁvatsaram PAÑCAV. BR. 25, 5, 1. 2. 18, 5. KĀTY.ŚR. 6, 6, 27. 8, 10. 7, 1, 26. LĀṬY. 3, 3, 29. 7, 8. tasmāttava sutaṁ prasutamāsutaṁ kule dṛśyate CHĀND. UP. 5, 12, 1. medial: dvādaśāhaṁ prasuto bhūtvā AIT. BR. 4, 24. — Vgl. 1. prasava, prasut. — caus. “fortgesetzt keltern lassen”: prasāvayet NIDĀNAS. 5, 11, 3 bei WEBER, Nax. 2, 284. vi, vyaṣāvīt; visoṣyati und visaviṣyati VOP. 8, 45. 12, Anf. “zerkeltern”: suṣvāṇāso vyadribhiḥ ṚV. 9, 101, 11. sam “gleichzeitig” (Soma) “keltern”: yau dvau saṁsunutaḥ TBR. 1, 4, 6, 1. saṁsuta TS. 7, 5, 5, 1. KĀṬH. 34, 4. PAÑCAV. BR. 9, 4, 1. — Vgl. saṁsava, saṁsutasoma. abhisam “gleichzeitig keltern für” (acc.): ekaṁ vā etāvindramabhi saṁsunutaḥ TBR. 1, 4, 6, 1. su (sū), savati (prasavaiśvaryayoḥ) DHĀTUP. 22, 43. suvati 28, 115 (preraṇe, VOP. kṣepe). suvatāt; med. (in den BRĀHMAṆA): suvate 3. pl. ŚAT. BR. 5, 3, 3, 13. suvāntai 14. suvante TS. 5, 6, 3, 1. suvai, suvāvahai P. 7, 3, 88, Schol.; später (auch ŚAT. BR.; s. u. pra) sauti DHĀTUP. 24, 32 (prasavaiśvaryayoḥ). sāviṣat (ved. P. 3, 1, 34, Vārtt., Schol.), asāvīt P. 7, 3, 96, Schol. VOP. 13, 1. sāvīs; suṣuve AV. pass.: sūyate, sūyai; partic. suta ŚAT. BR. 9, 3, 4, 5. 4, 3, 14. sūta (= īrita, prerita H. an. 2, 208. MED. t. 72. fg.) in nṛṣūta; s. auch unter pari und pra. (“in Bewegung setzen), veranlassen, zum Vorschein bringen; bescheeren, schicken” (von Savitar’s Wirkung); “aufstellen, bestimmen, weihen für Etwas; Ermächtigung geben zu Etwas”; med. “sich weihen” u. s. w. “lassen”: savitā suvāti ṚV. 7, 40, 1. śreṣṭhaṁ savaṁ savitā sāviṣannaḥ 1, 164, 26. AV. 6, 1, 3. devebhyo hi prathamamamṛtatvaṁ suvasi bhāgam ṚV. 4, 54, 2. fgg. 5, 42, 3. 82, 4. vāmamasmabhyaṁ sāvīḥ 6, 71, 6. yadadya sūra udite suvati savitā bhagaḥ 7, 66, 4. AV. 7, 14, 3. 14, 1, 33. 19, 8, 4. yathā sindhurnadīnāṁ sāmrājyaṁ suṣuve 14, 1, 43. suṣuvāṇa “in der Weihe begriffen, geweiht” TS. 2, 1, 9, 1 (P. 3, 2, 106, Schol., wo suṣuvāṇam zu lesen ist). 5, 6, 3, 4. 7, 5, 15, 2. TBR. 1, 8, 1, 1. ŚAT. BR. 5, 4, 3, 23. 4, 8. 5, 2, 1. PAÑCAV. BR. 18, 9, 1. 10, 1. pass.: yo vai somena sūyate (= niṣpadyate Comm.) TBR. 2, 7, 5, 1. sūyate ha vā asya kṣatram AIT. BR. 8, 5. ŚAT. BR. 5, 3, 1, 3. 3, 11. 15. 9, 3, 4, 6. agnisavena suto bhavati 9. sarvaṁ vastatsutam “zu all diesem seid ihr ermächtigt” 13, 4, 2, 17. sūyate vā eṣa yo ‘gniṁ cinute TS. 5, 6, 3, 1. yasmādeveme candraṛkṣagrahasaṁvatsarādayaḥ sūyante (= abhiṣūyante āpyāyante Comm.) so v. a. “in Thätigkeit gesetzt werden” MAITRJUP. 6, 16. mā na sāvīrmahāstrāṇi so v. a. “schleudere” BHAṬṬ. 9, 50. — prajāpateḥ sutaṁ rayiṣṭham N. eines Sāman Ind. St.3,225,a. — Vgl. 2. sava, 2. savana, 1. savitar, savīman. anu “nach Andern antreiben” u. s. w.: paśūn ŚAT. BR. 5, 5, 4, 19. anu ṣva (vgl. unter nis) TAITT. ĀR. 2, 6, 4 falsch; vgl. AV. 6, 121, 4. 117, 3. apa “wegschicken, vertreiben” ṚV. 10, 37, 4. apāmīvāṁ savitā sāviṣat 100, 8. yattatraino apa tatsuvāmi AV. 6, 119, 3. VS. 35, 11. abhi, -ṣuvati, abhyaṣuvat P. 8, 3, 63. 65. “weihen für” (acc.): oṣadhīḥ ŚAT. BR. 5, 2, 3, 9. “begaben mit”: pāpmanaivainamabhiṣuvati KĀṬH. 13, 2. — desid. -susūṣati P. 8, 3, 64, Vārtt. 1, Schol. ā “zutheilen, zusenden, schicken”: von Savitar ṚV. 1, 110, 3. a smabhyamā suva sarvatātim 3, 54, 11. 56, 6. saubhagam 4, 54, 6. 5, 82, 5. dāśuṣe vāmam 6, 71, 4. vasūni 7, 45, 3. 10, 35, 7. vayaḥ 100, 3. AV. 2, 29, 2. 7, 14, 3. 4, 24, 5. ŚAT. BR. 13, 4, 2, 9. med. ṚV. 7, 38, 2. PAÑCAV. BR. 21, 10, 15. ā suvorjam (agne) ṚV. 9, 66, 19. (indraḥ) ā sāviṣadarśasānāya śarum “sende” so v. a. “werfe auf” 10, 99, 7. “herbeischaffen, hercitiren”: ā te prāṇaṁ suvāmasi AV. 7, 53, 6. — Vgl. 1. āsava, āsavitar und 1. āsuti. ud “aufwärts gehen heissen”: ūrdhvāmeva varuṇamenimutsuvati KĀṬH. 19, 5. ni, partic. -ṣuta “hineingegeben, eingeworfen”: camase ‘ṣṭātayāni niṣutāni bhavanti AIT. BR. 8, 5. nis “fortscheuchen, fortgehen heissen”: duḥṣvapnyaṁ duritaṁ niḥ ṣvāsmat (suva) AV. 6, 121, 1. 7, 83, 4. 19, 57, 2. 1, 81, 1. 2. niritastatsuvantu ṚV. 7, 50, 3. parā “wegscheuchen” u. s. w.: parā ṛṇā sāvīḥ ṚV. 2, 28, 9. duritāni parā suva 5, 82, 5. 10, 137, 4. AV. 6, 127, 3. 7, 53, 6. 19, 39, 10. VS. 16. 5. TS. 1, 3, 14, 4. pari, -ṣuvati, paryaṣuvat P. 8, 3, 63. 65. partic. “geheissen, (heraus) getrieben” (vom Grase): devānāṁ pariṣūtamasi varṣavṛddhamasi TS. 1, 1, 2, 1. TBR. 3, 2, 2, 4. iti (“bei Gelegenheit dieses Spruches”) darbhānpariṣauti ĀPAST. in TS. Comm. 1, 53, 3 v. u. so v. a. “zusammenraffen.” — Vgl. pariṣūti. pra “in Bewegung bringen, erregen, zur Thätigkeit rufen” (namentlich von Savitar gesagt); “heissen, veranlassen; Jmd Etwas verstatten, überlassen”: niveśayaṁ ca prasuvaṁ ca bhūma ṚV. 7, 45, 1. 77, 1. 4, 53, 3. 5, 82, 9. prāsāvīddevaḥ savitā jagatpṛthak 1, 157, 1. arthamityai 124, 1. bhadraṁ dvipade 5, 81, 2. matim 9, 21, 7. pra vo grāvāṇaḥ savitā suvatu 10, 175, 1. AV. 1, 10, 2. saubhāgyāya 18, 2. yajñam TBR. 3, 1, 1, 9. dānam VS. 18, 33. jīvātave 67. ŚAT. BR. 1, 7, 4, 8. adhvaryum 5, 2, 1. 8, 3, 20. 2, 5, 2, 30. omiti brahmā prasauti TAITT. UP. 1, 8. auṣṇyaṁ prāsuvat MAITRJUP. 2, 6. sanim TS. 2, 1, 6, 3. annam ŚAT. BR. 9, 3, 4, 1. vahvannaṁ prasuvīran “zur Verfügung stellen” ĀŚV. ŚR. 2, 18, 8. puruṣān ŚAT. BR. 13, 6, 2, 9. yamu dviṣmastamu te pra suvāmasi “hingeben” AV. 12, 2, 3. śvānaṁ prasauti “überlassen” (zum Todtschlagen) TBR. 3, 8, 4, 1. prasuhi (v. l. -sūhi, in paralleler Stelle -suva) KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 14, 19. so v. a. “schleudere” Comm. zu BHAṬṬ. 9, 50. — partic. prasūta “angetrieben, gesandt, geheissen; verstattet, dem es verstattet ist” ṚV. 1, 113. 1. arṣantvāpastvayeha prasūtāḥ 3, 30, 9. dūta 54, 19. janāḥ sūryeṇa prasūtāḥ 7, 63, 4. pṛṣṭhe ninaddho jayati prasūtaḥ “entsandt” (Pfeil) 6, 75, 5. 11. prasūto bhakṣamakaram 10, 167, 4. AV. 6, 63, 1. 19, 51, 2. savitṛ- AIT. BR. 1, 7. 2, 38. 7, 22. ŚAT. BR. 1, 1, 2, 17. 5, 1, 1, 4. TS. 2, 5, 2, 6. 5, 3, 4, 4. – ĀŚV. GṚHY. 1, 15, 1. varuṇa- KAUŚ. 3. a- “keine Erlaubniss habend” ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 14, 7, 2. “nicht gestattet, nicht erlaubt” ŚAT. BR. 4, 1, 4, 3. – AV. 3, 1, 4 ist (vgl. ṚV. 3, 30, 6) zu verstehen pra sū te. — Vgl. 2. prasava, 1. prasavitar, 1. prasūti, indraprasūta, bṛhaspati-, brahma-, vāja-, haryaśva-. adhipra “wegschicken von” (abl.): prajāpatirindraṁ vajrādadhi prasuvati KĀṬH. 14, 7. abhipra “hintreiben zu”: yadenāmabhiprasuvanti nadyaḥ NIR. 9, 26. – sūta “veranlasst, geheissen” 11, 12. pratipra, partic. -sūta “wieder verstattet” Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 6, 6, 23. vi, -ṣuvati, vyaṣāvīt VOP. 8, 45. 13, 1. su adj. in dāvasu vielleicht auf 2. su zurückzuführen. su (sū), sūte DHĀTUP. 24, 21 (prāṇigarbhavimocane). P. 6, 1, 186. VOP. 9, 39. suve 1. sg. ṚV. 10, 125, 7. suvai VOP. 9, 40. suvāte, suvate 3 pl., suvāna; asūta, sūta; später auch sūyate DHĀTUP. 26, 23 (prāṇiprasave). savati und sauti s. u. pra. suṣuve, susāva, sasūva (P. 7, 4, 74) ṚV. 4, 18, 10. 10, 86, 23. AV. 10, 1, 23. asaviṣṭa und asoṣṭa (CHĀND. UP. 3, 17, 5) VOP. 8, 40. 46.11, 5. savitā und sotā P. 7, 2, 44. soṣyate und soṣyati (CHĀND. UP. 3, 17, 5); sūṣyantī und soṣyantī ŚAT. BR. 14, 9, 4, 22. sūtave ṚV. 10, 184, 3. AV. 1, 11, 2. savitave 6, 17, 1. sūtvā KĀŚ. zu P. 7, 2, 44. TS. 2, 1, 5, 4. partic. sūta, suta (s. besonders; nur wegen suta und suṣuti ist die Annahme von su mit kurzem u gerechtfertigt) und sūna (P. 8, 2, 45. VOP. 26, 88. fg.). “zeugen, gebären” ṚV. 1, 135, 8. 164, 17. 168, 9. nārī naryaṁ susāva 7, 20, 5. sūṣyantī 5, 78, 5. asūta pūrvo vṛṣabhaḥ “wurde geboren” 3, 38, 5. yadīṁ suvāte uṣasā 5, 1, 1. 2, 2. starīryatsūta 10, 31, 10. suvānā putrān AV. 2, 36, 3. “brüten” (von Vögeln) ṚV. 1, 164, 22. pass. wohl hierher: asāvanyo asura sūyata dyauḥ 10, 132, 4. — In der späteren Sprache meist in der Bed. “gebären”: āyuṣmantaṁ sutaṁ sūte M. 3, 263. 9, 9. 10, 39. Spr. (II) 1748. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 51, 41. suvāte R. 1, 23, 14. asūta RAGH. 3, 13. 15, 13. KUMĀRAS. 1, 20. KATHĀS. 23, 64. 28, 66. 42, 70. PRAB. 11, 10. BHĀG. P. 3, 1, 30. 17, 18. 26, 19. 4, 1, 34. 38. 13, 15. 24, 8. 9, 20, 17. 24, 47. sūyate CŪLIKOP. in Ind. St. 9, 12. asūyata MBH. 1, 2599. BHĀG. P. 4, 1, 39. 51. suṣuve MBH. 1, 2539. 5908. 3, 8844. 16638. R. 2, 90, 11. 92, 21. R. GORR. 2, 99, 14. 5, 36, 57. RAGH. 5, 36. 7, 54. MĀRK. P. 104, 8. RĀJA-TAR. 1, 74. BHĀG. P. 3, 23, 48. 4, 13, 18. 6, 18, 11. 9, 11, 11. PAÑCAT. 238, 6 (suṣūve gedr.). suṣuvire KATHĀS. 39, 18. suṣāva MBH. 1, 4765. R. GORR. 1, 39, 16. MĀRK. P. 104, 6. suṣuvus 49, 9. soṣyate KATHĀS. 21, 35. 34, 43. sūtvā BHĀG. P. 5, 2, 19. sūya MBH. 3, 10004. pass.: kausalyayāsāvi sukhena rāmaḥ prāk BHAṬṬ. 1, 14. “erzeugen”: sūte M. 10, 32. 34. suṣuve (subj. Mann und Weib) ŚĀK. 186. pass.: akrūraḥ suṣuve tasmāt HARIV. 1916. “erzeugen” uneig.: prakṛtiḥ sūyate sacarācaram BHAG. 9, 10. phalaṁ sūte pādapaḥ KATHĀS. 27, 99. asūta sadyaḥ kusumānyaśokaḥ KUMĀRAS. 3, 26. khanibhiḥ suṣuve ratnaṁ kṣetraiḥ sasyaṁ vanairgajān (bhūḥ) RAGH. 17, 66. payaḥ sūte ‘dya medinī, ratnaṁ vaiḍūryabhūḥ RĀJA-TAR. 4, 300. sūṣyant BHĀG. P. 3, 8, 13. dhūmāt – payaḥ sūte ghanasyodgamaḥ Spr. (II) 3162. dharmaṁ sūyanti prajāḥ MBH. 3, 11298. — partic. sūta mit act. Bed. = prasūta H. an. 2, 208. MED. t. 72. fg. sūtā “gekalbt habend” M. 8, 242. vanye sattve sūte “wenn ein wildes Thier Junge geworfen hat” VARĀH. BṚH. S. 91, 3. — Vgl. savitrī. nis vgl. niḥṣūti. pra 1) “gebären”: prasūte sma sutam KATHĀS. 39, 19. 56, 287. MĀRK. P. 51, 114. prāsūta R. 7, 35, 21. KATHĀS. 17, 65. kanyā prasūyate MBH. 3, 13057. 4, 71. ṢAḌV. BR. 5, 11. SUŚR. 1, 367, 18. Spr. (II) 1403. VARĀH. BṚH. 5, 8. 11. 16. PAÑCAR. 1, 8, 34. gauryā prativarṣaṁ prasūyate Schol. zu P. 5, 2, 12. prasūyante mithunānyeva tāḥ MĀRK. P. 49, 10. prasavanti MBH. 1, 6077. prasavantī M. 4, 44. prasuṣuve BHĀG. P. 3, 17, 2. prāsoṣṭa RĀJA-TAR. 3, 106. 4, 39. BHAṬṬ. 1, 14. prasaviṣyasi R. 7, 9, 24. MĀRK. P. 51, 113. 77, 6. BHĀG. P. 3, 21, 29. prasoṣyantī 11, 1, 15. prasūya ŚĀK. 94. 95, v. l. KATHĀS. 14, 38. PRAB. 11, 10. prasotum BHAṬṬ. 1, 13. “erzeugen”: prasūyate M. 10, 27. 30. fg. anena prasaviṣyadhvam “Nachkommenschaft haben” BHAG. 3, 10. “erzeugen” in uneig. Bed.: (buddhiḥ) prasūte hi phalaṁ śrīmadaraṇīva hutāśanam KĀM. NĪTIS. 13, 2. Spr. (II) 7062. dhūmaṁ prasauti (agniḥ) RĀJA-TAR. 5, 125. aṣṭamāsadhṛtaṁ garbham – dyauḥ prasūyate R. 4, 27, 3. prasūyate saṁgatiḥ śriyam PRAB. 86, 18. (drumāḥ) śayanāni prasūyante citrāstaraṇavanti R. 4, 44, 99. MĀRK. P. 49, 30. 59, 19. dīpaḥ kajjalaṁ prasūyate Spr. (II) 2816. taravaḥ prāsūyanta “trugen Früchte” BHĀG. P. 4, 19, 8. yathā prasūyamānastu phalī dadyātphalaṁ bahu MBH. 14, 498. (śāstraviṭapī) phalaṁ prasūya Spr. (II) 5426. — 2) “geboren werden, entspringen, entstehen”: kārāvaro niṣādāttu carmakāraḥ prasūyate M. 10, 36. tiryagyonau prasūyate MBH. 3, 12500. asyāmeva prasūyadhvam 1, 2502. 2504. etasmācca jagatsarvaṁ prasūyeta janārdanāt HARIV. 11053. prasūyatas 2. du. MBH. 13, 2565. prasūyāmas HARIV. 173 = VP. 1, 15, 128. sarveṇa khalu martavyaṁ martyaloke prasūyatā Spr. (II) 6949. sindhoḥ prasūya kamalā RĀJA-TAR. 6, 317. pra keśāḥ suvate TBR. 2, 7, 17, 1. śabdaḥ u. s. w. vedādeva prasūyante M. 12, 98, v. l. — 3) partic. prasūta a) mit act. Bed. f. ā “geboren habend, niedergekommen” (die Ergänzung im acc.; hier und da statt des verbi finiti) AK. 2, 6, 1, 16. MED. t. 124. HALĀY. 118. 285. 345. AV. 12, 1, 62. YĀJÑ. 2, 145. SUŚR. 2, 180, 8. devasadṛśānputrān HARIV. 4625. R. 7, 66, 3. UTTARAR. 38, 7 (52, 1). WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 249. 282. fg. 289. KATHĀS. 21, 117. 29, 137 (śatapadī). MĀRK. P. 51, 101. Schol. zu P. 2, 1, 65. PAÑCAT. 218, 21. HIT. 72, 14. a- Spr. (II) 2055. pratyagra- Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 24, 6, 8. jananī prasūtatanayā “deren Tochter niedergekommen ist” Spr. (II) 6033. prasūtamātrā “eben niedergekommen” KATHĀS. 28, 67. — b) “geboren, erzeugt, entsprungen, entstanden” H. an. 3, 273. MED. mit gen. oder loc. (auch abl.) P. 2, 3, 39. VOP. 5, 29. ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 5, 2. KAUṢ. UP. 1, 2. tasyām M. 3, 19. tataḥ MBH. 1, 35. mama kāyāt R. 2, 74, 21. tadanvaye RAGH. 1, 12. nīcakule Spr. (II) 6475. yasya tasya 5369. MĀRK. P. 104, 8. R. 1, 16, 26. ŚĀK. 178, v. l. Spr. (II) 1431. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 48, 11. BṚH. 23, 14. MĀRK. P. 76, 17. WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 266. 284. etaddeśa- M. 2, 20. kālanemi- ŚĀK. CH. 144, 4. KATHĀS. 50, 139. BHĀG. P. 6, 6, 24. 9, 6, 3. kula- R. 2, 82, 31 (Pferde) Spr. (II) 5970. BHĀG. P. 9, 3, 21. nandakula- PAÑCAT. 45, 2. veda- PRAB. 86, 19. vindhyapāda- (nadī) MĀRK. P. 57, 25. BHĀG. P. 9, 9, 14. PAÑCAR. 1, 7, 40. kalpavṛkṣa- (madhu) MEGH. 67. matprasūtaṁ bhayam MBH. 3, 2844. matprasūtena tejasā 11970. bhīṣma- (duḥkha) 5, 7029. dharmaviśeṣa- KAṆ. 1, 1, 4. saraladrumāṇāṁ srutakṣīratayā prasūto gandhaḥ KUMĀRAS. 1, 9. prasūtaṁ tarhi saukhyaṁ naḥ Z. f. d. K. d. M. 2, 426. — c) n. als Synonym von avyakta TATTVAS. 5. — 4) partic. prasūna a) = prasūta H. an. 3, 388. = jāta MED. n. 87. — b) n. “Blüthe, Frucht”; s. u. prasūna. In der Bed. “Blüthe” auch Spr. (II) 7411, v. l. UTTARAR. 98, 6 (129, 12). MĀLATĪM. 57, 13. BHĀG. P. 3, 18, 8 (“engendre” BURNOUF). PAÑCAR. 1, 7, 50. — Vgl. 3. prasava, prasavana, 2. prasavitar, 2. prasavin, prasūta, 2. prasūti, prasūna, devaprasūta (hierher oder zu 2. su). anupra, partic. -sūta “darauf entstanden”: sṛṣṭistathaiveyamanuprasūtā MBH. 13, 7361. abhipra, partic. -sūta “erzeugt, geboren”: mātuḥ pituḥ karmaṇābhiprasūtaḥ saṁvardhate vidhivadbhojanena MBH. 5, 964. saṁpra 1) “erzeugen”: -sūte MBH. 13, 2582. -sūyate M. 10, 33. — – sūyate MBH. 13, 5850 fehlerhaft für -ṇūyate, wie die ed. Bomb. liest. — 2) “geboren werden”: tadāhaṁ saṁprasūyāmi gṛheṣu śubhakarmaṇām MBH. 3, 12978. — 3) partic. -sūta “erzeugt, geboren”: bahvīḥ prajāḥ puruṣāt MUṆḌ. UP. 2, 1, 5. śarmiṣṭhayā MBH. 5, 5044. brahmāsyatas, bāhubhyām 12, 11814. 13, 4426. guṇavipuleṣu kuleṣu R. 4, 41, 79. māyā guṇasaṁprasūtā BHĀG. P. 11, 10, 13. — Vgl. saṁprasūti. vi “gebären”: sumatyapi garbhaṁ tumbaṁ vyasūyata R. GORR. 1, 40, 17. sam dass.: śāradvatasya (so die neuere Ausg.) dāyādamahalyā samasūyata HARIV. 1784. “erzeugen” in uneig. Bed.: dattaṁ śreyāṁsi saṁsūte (Conj.) Spr.(II) 4252. su 5 savati v. l. für sru (gatau) DHĀTUP. 22, 42. VOP. 8, 95. asāvīt, suṣavitha, suṣuviva, savitā und sotā 96. su adv. gaṇa cādi zu P. 1, 4, 57. VOP. 1, 8. über die euphonischen Veränderungen des Wortes (ṣu, ṣū), über die Dehnung eines vorangehenden Vocals und über den Wandel eines nachfolgenden na in ṇa handeln VS. PRĀT. 4, 183. TS. PRĀT. 3, 7. 14. P. 6, 3, 134. 8, 3, 107. 4, 27. “wohl, gut”; überhaupt verstärkend oder versichernd: “gewiss, leichtlich, völlig” u. s. w. wie “wohl” in älteren deutschen Liedern. Die indischen Lexicographen geben dem Worte folgende Bedeutungen: pūjana (pūjā) AK. 3, 5, 5. MED. avj. 79. nirbhara AK. 3, 5, 2. H. 1535, Schol. MED. bhṛśa, anumati, kṛcchra, samṛddhi MED. anāyāsa BHAR. zu AK. nach ŚKDR. 1) selbständig; nie am Versanfang; im AV. selten und meist in Verbindung mit u. u ṣu ṚV. 1, 26, 5. 4, 6, 2. 20, 4. vidmo ṣvasya mātaram AV. 1, 2, 1. 6, 84, 3. mo ṣu ṚV. 2, 18, 3. 3, 55, 2. AV. 5, 11, 7. mā su VS. 11, 68. uta su ṚV. 8, 2, 42. itsu 4, 22, 10. ā su 8, 34, 12. pra su 1, 136, 1. 8, 6, 32. vi ṣū 2, 28, 7. 8, 32, 19. ni ṣu 5, 13. adhi ṣū 8, 24, 7. paryū ṣū 9, 110, 1. asmāntsu 1, 9, 6. 17, 7. asmabhyaṁ su 3, 30, 21. asmākaṁ su 31, 14. asmābhiḥ su 8, 70, 8. tvaṁ su VS. 4, 14. asme su 4, 32, 14. sa su 12, 1. imaṁ su 2, 35, 2. idaṁ su AV. 14, 2, 8. yaṁ svaśnaṁ jaghāna ṚV. 2, 14, 5. sakṛtsu 16, 8. 8, 1, 14. namaḥ su te VS. 12, 63. vasvī ṣu te ṚV. 7, 20, 10. jīvātave su 10, 59, 5. ni māmṛje pura indraḥ su sarvāḥ ṚV. 7, 26, 3. su kam am Ende 1, 191, 6. 3, 53, 2. nāsmāllokātsvetavyamiva “nicht wohl” TS. 6, 1, 1, 1. bodhā su ṚV. 7, 22, 3. juṣasva sū 3, 24, 2. mandasvā su 8, 6, 39. pibā su 17, 4. AV. 6, 32, 1. jarāṁ su gaccha 19, 24, 5. na vai su viduriva manuṣyā nakṣatram KĀṬH. 8, 3 bei WEBER, Nax. 2, 296. su veda KENOP. 9. sūrmī jvalantīṁ svāśliṣyet M. 11, 103. su virājate sma MBH. 4, 2089. svanuyāsyanti 8, 1321. su śakyante R. 2, 33, 4. su samīkṣyatām Spr. (II) 1402. su saṁdadhīta 1961, v. l. su śobhante 4157. svanuṣṭhīyatām 6275. svaśikṣayat RĀJA-TAR. 4, 51. – MBH. 3, 14392 und 7, 8603 hat die ed. Bomb. tu und hi st. su. Vor einem absol. MBH. 7, 5783 (so ‘bhidrutya st. svabhidrutya ed. Bomb.). vicintya MṚCCH. 103, 16. baddhvā 176, 1. cintya und vicārya Spr. (II) 7100. snātvā WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 291. — 2) am Anfange eines comp. vor Adjectiven und Substantiven (über solche compp. handelt P. 1, 4, 94. 2, 1, 6. 5, 4, 69. 6, 2, 117. fgg, 145. 172. fgg. 195. 7, 1, 68. 8, 1, 67. fg. Vārtt. 4 zu 1, 4, 60. Vārtt. 1 der SAUNĀGA zu 2, 2, 18. VOP. 6, 88). svalaṁkṛta “schön geschmückt” MBH. 3, 2114. surakṣita “wohl gehütet” 2144. suprīta “hocherfreut” R. 1, 1, 76. sūcchritadhvaja 2, 43, 10. susaṁrabdhatara 6, 31, 44. susādhya “gut zu handhaben” PAÑCAR. 1, 8, 33. sumanohara “überaus reizend” MBH. 1, 5976. sudāruṇa R. 1, 8, 12. susūkṣma VARĀH. BṚH. S. 11, 44. sunikhilam “ganz vollständig” HARIV. 7034. suprākṛta “ganz gemein” R. GORR. 2, 11, 24. susita “schön weiss” PAÑCAR. 3, 11, 8. susugandha “sehr wohlriechend” VARĀH. BṚH. S. 48, 32. suduṣkara “sehr schwer zu vollbringen” MBH. 1, 6118. sunistriṁśa “ein schönes Schwert” MBH. 6, 5639. subhakṣya “eine prächtige Speise” Spr. (II) 7113. susahāya “einen guten Gefährten habend” M. 7, 31. sulalāṭa “eine schöne Stirn habend” R. 1, 1, 12. sukara (s. d.) “leicht auszuführen”, sulabha (s. d.) “leicht zu erlangen”, susaṁtoṣa (s. d.) “leicht zu befriedigen.” — su verhält sich wohl zum demonstrativen sa wie ku zum interrogativen ka. Vgl. sutarām. Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 su 1. su, i. 1, and ii. 2, Par., and sū sū, ii. 4, suya (properly pass. refl. of su), and ii. 2, Ātm. 1. To beget, Man. 10, 32. 2. To bear, to bring forth, Man. 10, 39; Pañc. pr. d. 5. ii. 5, sunu, Par. Ātm. (the act of expressing the Soma juice being compared to the act of generating, cf. Rigv. i. 28), To express the Soma juice, Chr. 294, 3 = Rigv. i, 92, 3. Ptcple. of the pf. pass. I. suta, 1. m. A son, Pañc. i. d. 185. 2. f. tā, A daughter, Chr. 3, 9. 3. m. pl. Cildren, Man. 2, 28. Comp. giri-, f. tā, Pārvatī, Pañc. i. d. 175. jahnu-, f. tā, the Gaṅgā, MBh. 1, 3913. jīva-, adj. one who has living children, Bhāg. P. 6, 19, 25. dāra-, m. wife and son, Yājñ. 2, 175. dāsī-, m. a base man, Rājat. 5, 179. dharma-, m. (the son of the god Dharma), epithet of Yudhiṣṭhira, Bhāg. P. 1, 7, 49. bhū- and mahī-, m. the planet Mars. bhṛgu-, m. 1. Śukra or Venus. 2. Paraśurāma. rādhā-, m. Karṇa. śaila-, f. tā, Pārvatī, Vikr. d. 128. II. sūla, 1. Engendered. 2. Born. f. tā, 1. A daughter, Pañc. 181, 5. 2. A woman lying in; see s.v. Comp. sūra-, m. Aruṇa, the dawn. III. sūna, 1. Born, produced. 2. Blown, budded (as a flower). m. A son, Pañc. 198, 2. f. nā, A daughter. n. 1. Bringing forth, parturition. 2. A flower. — With the prep. abhi abhi, ṣu, 1. To express the Soma juice, Rām. 1, 13, 5 (cf. Sclegel’s translation). 2. To extract juice, Man. 5, 10. 3. To sprinkle, Bhaṭṭ. 9, 90. — With ud ud, ii. 5, To agitate, Bhāg. P. 3, 20, 35 (cf. 2. sū). — With pra pra, 1. To beget, Man. 10, 30. 2. To bring forth, Man. 4, 44. 3. Pass. To be brought forth, Man, 10, 36; with the termination of the Par. (i. 4, Par.), MBh. 12, 5687. prasūta, 1. Engendered, Hit. pr. d. 23, M.M. 2. Born, Pañc. 45, 2. 3. Produced, Chr. 294, 8 = Rigv. i. 92, 8. 4. Engendering, Man. 3, 19. 5. Having brought forth, delivered, Hit. 72, 14; Utt. Rāmac. 52, 1 (she has brought forth). Comp. a-, adj. one who has not brought forth, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 809. kula-, adj. descended from a respectable family, Pañc. pr. d. 6. prasūna, Born, produced. n. 1. A bud, a blossom, Utt. Rāmac. 129, 12; flower, Mālat. 57, 13. 2. Fruit. Comp. visa-, n. a lotus. — With saṁpra sam-pra, 1. To beget, Man. 10, 33. 2. Pass. To be brought forth, MBh. 3, 12978 (with the termination of the Par.). — Cf. [greek] Goth. sunus; A.S. sunu (cf. sūnu). su 2. su, i. 1, and ii. 2, Par. † To possess power or supremacy (cf. the last). su 3. su, i. 1, Par. Ātm. † To go. su 4. su (for original vasu, cf. [greek] = Zend. vaṅhvām = Sskr. *vasvām), I. adv. ved. Beautifully, Chr. 296, 1 = Rigv. i. 112, 1. II. Very seldom combined and compounded with a verbum finitum; e. g. Pañc. i. d. 205, but cf. Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 647; but very often with nouns, 1. Good, well, Rām. 3, 53, 6; Ṛt. 6, 2; Lass. 15, 5. 2. Beautiful, beautifully, Rām. 3, 52, 35. 3. Much, very, Chr. 4, 12. 4. Easily, Daśak. in Chr. 185, 2. Comparat. sutarām, 1. Better. 2. With na, Very badly, Pañc. 199, 24; with mā, In no way, Megh. 108. 3. More, Śiś. 9, 67; Pañc. 163, 3. 4. Exceedingly, Śiś. 9, 55. 5. Consequently, of course. — Cf. [greek] Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 su sunoti sunute v pp. suta1 (q.v.) press out, extract, esp. the Soma. — adhi = S. abhi press out, prepare or win by extracting. ā & vi = S. sam & abhisam press out together. — Cf. prasuta. su [2] (sū) adv. well, indeed (strengthening and assevering); often °– in adj., adv., & subst. = Gr. ‘eu (opp. dus). Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 su 1. SU, V.P. suno, sunu, (sts. Ā.) press out, extract (Soma; V., rare in E.): pr. pt. sunvāna, suvāna; pp. suta, pressed, extracted. abhi (-ṣuṇoti), press out; ps. -ṣūyate, be extracted: pp. abhiṣuta (V.). ā, press out, extract (V.); boil, prepare (ghee). pra, pp. prāsuta (V.), pressed continuously; having continuously pressed. su 2. SU (= 1. sū), in sauti, suhi, and pp. suta, urged, instigated (ŚB.). su 3. SU (= 2. sū), in pra-savati (rare), pra-sauti (rare), pp. suta, son, and suṣuti. su su (in V. also sū), ad. [perh. for vasu = Gk.[greek]: cp. uṣu, ū shu, and u loka] good, well, indeed, right, very, thoroughly (never used independently at the beginning of a verse; rarely as an independent ad. in C.; very common °- with a. or N., in C. also with gd.). Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 su gatau . aiśvarye . prasave . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (bhvā°-para°-saka °-aniṭ .) savati . iti durgādāsaḥ .. su ña gatau . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (bhvā°-ubha°saka°-aniṭ .) ña, susāva suṣuve . iti durgādāsaḥ .. su vya, nirbharam . ityamaraḥ . 3 . 4 . 2 .. (yathā, mahābhārate . 1 . 158 . 16 . viditvā vyavasiṣyāmi yadyapi syāt suduṣkaram ..) pūjā . ityamaraḥ . 3 . 4 . 5 .. (śobhanam . yathā, manuḥ . 7 . 31 . praṇetuṁ śakyate daṇḍaḥ susahāyena dhīmatā ..) anumatiḥ . kṛcchram . samṛddhiḥ . iti medinī .. anāyāsaḥ . iti bharataikārthasaṁgrahaḥ .. upasargaviśeṣaḥ . yathā . supūjānāyāsātiśayeṣu . iti mugdhabodhaṭīkāyāṁ durgādāsaḥ .. saptamyā vahuvacanavibhaktiḥ . iti vyākaraṇam .. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 su avya° su–ḍu . 1 pūjāyām 2 atiśaye amaraḥ . 3 kṛcche 4 anumatau 5 mamṛddhau medi° 6 anāyāse ca anekārthako° . pūjāyāmasya nopasargatvam tena sustutamityādau na ṣatvam . atiśayādau tu suṣṭuta ityādi . gaṇaratne’rthaviśeṣānuktakrameṇodāhṛtam yathā su praśaṁsānumatipūjābhṛśakṛcchraśubheṣu . surūpaḥ sukṛtaṁ susādhuḥ sutaptaḥ suduḥ karaṁ sugandhaḥ . |
हरिक – harika | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899harika m. (for 2. see p.1291, col.2) a thief, gambler
harika m. (for 1. see p.1289, col, 2) a horse of a yellowish or reddish brown colour Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch harika (von 1. hari) 1) m. “ein gelbliches Ross” H. 1242. — 2) am Ende eines adj. comp. (f. ā) in a- “nicht das Wort” hari “enthaltend” (Gegens. harivant) LĀṬY. 3, 1, 18. harika (von 1. har) m. “Dieb” und “Würfelspieler” ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILSON. harika1 *harika m. “ein gelbliches Ross.” Vgl. aharika harika2 *harika m. 1) “Dieb.” 2) “Würfelspieler.” Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 harika hari + ka, m. A horse of a yellowish-blue tint. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 harika pu° hari + saṁjñāyāṁ kan . pītaharidvarṇāśve hemaca0 |
हरित – harita | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899harita mf (“ā” or “hariṇī”) n. yellowish, pale yellow, fallow, pale red, pale
(also, “pale with fright”), greenish, green (also; “verdant” as opp. to “śuṣka” “dry”) &c. &c. harita m. yellowish (the colour) harita m. Phaseolus Mungo qr Lobatus harita m. a lion harita m. N. of a son of Kaiśyapa harita m. of a son of Yadu harita m. of a son of Rohita harita m. of a son of Rohitāśva harita m. of a son of Yuvanāśva harita m. of a son of Parāvṛit harita m. of a son of Vapushmat harita m. of an ichneumon (v.l. “hariṇa”) harita m. pl. the descendants of Harita (also called “harītāḥ”), āśvśr. (cf. mf (“ā” or “hariṇī”) n. N. of partic. verses of the (also “haretā mantrāḥ”) mf (“ā” or “hariṇī”) n. of a class of gods in the 12th Manvantara harita mf (“ā” or “hariṇī”) n. (“ā”) f. Dūrvā grass (= “nīla-dūrva” mf (“ā” or “hariṇī”) n. turmeric mf (“ā” or “hariṇī”) n. a brown-coloured grape mf (“ā” or “hariṇī”) n. Sesbana Aegyptiaca mf (“ā” or “hariṇī”) n. a kind of Svara-bhakti harita n. a yellowish or greenish substance harita n. gold harita n. greens, vegetables (“unripe grain” harita n. a kind of fragrant plant (= “sthauṇcyaka”) Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890 harita a. (tā or hariṇī f.) [hṛ-itac] Green, of a green colour, verdant; ramyāṁtaraḥ kamalinīharitaiḥ sarobhiḥ S. 4. 10; Ku. 4. 14; Me. 21; Ki. 5. 38. (2) Tawny. (3) Dark-blue. –taḥ (1) The green colour. (2) A lion. (3) A kind of grass. — Comp. –aśman m. 1. an emerald. –2. blue vitriol. –chada a. green-leaved. Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch harita UṆĀDIS. 3, 93. 1) adj. (f. ā und hariṇī ŚĀNT. 2, 20. P. 4, 1, 39. VOP. 4, 27. AK. 3, 4, 13, 53. H. an. 3, 233. MED. ṇ. 87. VIŚVA bei UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 2, 46. hariṇī in der älteren, haritā in der späteren Sprache) “falb, gelblich; grünlich, grün” (daher auch im Gegensatz zu śuṣka dem “verdorrten Kraut”) AK. 1, 1, 4, 24. 3, 4, 13, 53. H. 1395. MED. t. 175. HALĀY. 4, 49. mṛga ṚV. 10, 86, 3. Rosse MBH. 13, 4923. Bart des Indra ṚV. 10, 23, 4. Wagen u. s. w. 3, 44, 1. 4. 10, 96, 3. 9. Soma und was dazu gehört: śṛṅge śiśāno hariṇī 9, 70, 7. ruc 111, 1. 10, 94, 2. AV. 6, 49, 2. dhānāḥ 18, 4, 34. Frosch ṚV. 7, 103, 4. 6. 10. takman AV. 1, 23, 2. 5, 22, 2. 6, 20, 3. śocañchuṣkāsu hariṇīṣu jarbhurat ṚV. 10, 92, 1. vanaspati 9, 5, 10. AV. 10, 8, 31. kuśa ŚAT. BR. 4, 5, 10, 6. Gras LĀṬY. 2, 11, 15. KĀṬH. 32, 1. KAUṢ. UP. 2, 8. HARIV. 3574. R. GORR. 2, 65, 16. 3, 73, 39. KIR. 5, 38. AK. 2, 1, 10. 9, 16. TRIK. 3, 3, 297. H. 955. HALĀY. 2, 4. BHĀG. P. 3, 22, 30. Bohne SUŚR. 1, 197, 18. kamalinīharitaiḥ sarobhiḥ ŚĀK. 86. – ŚAT. BR. 14, 7, 1, 20. ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 4, 4. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 5, 54. 8, 17. 9, 44. 30, 12. fg. 54, 30. 34. 67, 5. 68, 91. BṚH. 2, 5. LAGHUJ. 1, 6. WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 270. -puṣpa KAUŚ.10. 26. 116. vaiḍūryamaṇiratnābhaḥ prāsādo haritaprabhaḥ HARIV. 8985. -pāṇḍu SUŚR. 1, 159, 19. -kapiśa MEGH. 21. haritāruṇa KUMĀRAS. 4, 14. – gomaya wohl “frischer Kuhmist” KAUŚ. 19. GOBH. 4, 8, 12. “gelb” als Farbe des Goldes AV. 4, 37, 4. 7, 99, 1. 10, 2, 33. 3, 3. 11, 2, 12. 15, 2, 1. ŚAT. BR. 12, 4, 4, 6. rukma KĀṬH. 10, 14. VS. 23, 37. AIT. BR. 1, 23. TS. 6, 2, 3, 1. TBR. 1, 8, 9, 1. 2, 2, 9, 8. 3, 9, 6, 5. “gelb” (vor Schrecken), “bleich” (vgl. hariṇa) TS. 6, 5, 5, 2. hariṇī śyāvā “gelbbraun” (ohne Röthe) als Farbe der Schwangeren TBR. 2, 3, 8, 1. — 2) m. a) “Phaseolus Mungo” (mudga) H. 1172. “ein best. Gras”, = manthānaka RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — b) “Löwe” ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILSON. — c) pl. Bez. eines Abschnittes des AV. 19, 22, 5. hierher vielleicht haritā mantrāḥ (so trennen wir) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 93,a,1 v. u. — d) N. pr. a) pl. einer Klasse von Göttern im 12ten Manvantara MĀRK. P. 94, 23. BHĀG. P. 8, 13, 29. — b) verschiedener Männer P. 4, 1, 100. PRAVARĀDHY. in Verz. d. B. H. 56, 7 (haritakutsa- zu lesen; vgl. ĀŚV. ŚR. 12, 12, 3). Kaśyapa ŚAT. BR. 14, 9, 4, 33. ein Sohn Jadu’s HARIV. 4206. Rohita’s 758. BHĀG. P. 9, 8, 1. Rohitāśva’s VP. 373. Yuvanāśva’s 369. Parāvṛt’s (vgl. hari) 420. 421, N. 13. Vapushmant’s MĀRK. P. 53, 27. pl. Harita’s Nachkommen (vgl. hārita) P. 2, 4, 67, Vārtt. ĀŚV. ŚR. 12, 12, 3 (im comp.). — g) eines Ichneumons (nakula) MBH. 12, 4942. hariṇa ed. Bomb. — 3) f. haritā a) Dūrvā-“Gras” TRIK. 3, 3, 194. MED. = haridrā “Gelbwurz” DHANV. 1, 17. RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. = jayantī, kapiladrākṣā, pācī und nīladūrvā RĀJAN. ebend. — b) “eine best.” Svarabhakti (v. l. haritā und hā-) Comm. zu TS. PRĀT. 21, 15. — 4) f. hariṇī s. u. hariṇa — 5) n. a) “Gold” AV. 5, 28, 5. 9. 11, 3, 8. KĀṬH. 8, 5. — b) “Grünes” so v. a. “Gemüse” CARAKA 1, 27. — c) “eine best. wohlriechende Pflanze”, = sthauṇeyaka RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — Vgl. pīta- und hārita. harita 1) Adj. (f. haritā) in der älteren Sprache hariṇī “falb, gelblich” (von der Gesichtsfarbe eines Erschrockenen) ; “grünlich, grün” 304,23. 2) m. a) “Phaseolus Mungo.” b) “eine best. Grasart”, = manthānaka RĀJAN.8,135. c) “Löwe.” d) Pl. Bez. “bestimmter Sprüche.” Auch haritā mantrāḥ. e) N.pr. a) Pl. einer Gruppe von Göttern unter dem 12ten Manu. b) verschiedener Männer. g) eines Ichneumons. 3) f. haritā a) “Dūrvā- Gras” ŚIŚ.4,21 (am Ende eines adj. Comp. f. ā) = nīladūrvā RĀJAN.8,108. b) “Gelbwurz.” c) “grüne Traube” RĀJAN.11,104. d) “Sesbania aegyptiaca” RĀJAN.4,133. e) “eine best. Svarabhakti.” 4) n. a) “gelblicher oder grünlicher Stoff” ŚAT.BR.14,7,1,20.2,12. b) “Gold.” c) “Grünes”, so v.a. “Gemüse” VIṢṆUS.5,85 (nach dem Comm. “unreifes Getraide).” d) eine best. wohlriechende Pflanze, = sthauṇeyaka. Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975 harita 1 I A King who was the grandson of Hariścandra and son of Rohita. (Bhāgavata, 10th Skandha). harita 2 II A King, who was the son of Vapuṣmān and grandson of Svāyambhuvamanu. He was King of Haritavarṣa in the island of Śālmali. (Mārkaṇḍeya Purāṇa 50, 28; Brahmāṇḍa Purāṇa, 2, 3). harita 3 III A son born to Yadu of the nāga woman called Dhūmravaṇā. He founded an independent kingdom in the Nāga island and became a prominent leader of the Madgura tribe. (Hari Vaṁśa, 2, 38; 29, 34). Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866 harita harita, I. adj., f. tā, or iṇī (cf. hariṇa), 1. Green, Megh. 21; Hit. i. d. 178, M. M. (in haritī-kṛta, adj. Made green) 2. Dark blue, Kir. 5, 38. 3. Grassy. II. m. 1. Green, the colour. 2. A lion. III. f. tā. 1. Bent grass. 2. Turmeric. 3. A brown grape. Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891 harita (f. ā, older hariṇī fallow, pale, yellow, green. m. N. of sev. men etc.; f. haritā Dūrvā grass; n. gold, greens, any yellowish or greenish substance. Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893 harita har-ita, a. (ā, C.: hariṇī, V.) yellowish, tawny; pale (with fright); greenish, green (C.); n. gold (V.); vegetable (C.): -ka, a. green; n. grass; vegetable; -kapiśa, a. yellowish brown; -cchada, a. having green leaves; -dhānya, n. green = unripe corn; -pattra-maya, a. (ī) formed of green leaves; (harita) -sraj, a. bearing yellow (or green) festoons (trees; AV.); adorned with a golden chain (steed; Br.). Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 harita pu° hṛ–itac . 1 siṁhe 2 manthānatṛṇe rājani° 3 haridvarṇe 4 tadvati tri° amaraḥ striyāṁ ṅīp tasya naśca . 5 dūrvāyāṁ medi° 6 jayantyāṁ 7 haridrāyāṁ 8 kapiladrākṣāyāṁ 9 pācyāṁ 10 nīladūrvāyāñca strī rājani° ṭāp . 11 sthauṇeyake na° rājani° . |
हरिताश्म – haritāśma | Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899haritāśma n. “green-coloured stone”, a turquoise or emerald
n. sulphate of copper or blue vitriol Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch haritāśma n. 1) “Türkis” RĀJAN.13,217. ŚIŚ.13,56. 2) “*Kupfervitriol” RĀJAN.13,103. Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the 1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967 haritāśma [n] klī, (haritaṁ aśma .) tuttham . perojam . iti rājanirghaṇṭaḥ .. Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94, reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962 haritāśma na° haritavarṅamaśma aśmeva vā acsamā° (perījā) 1 maṇibhede tutthe (tuṁta) upadhātubhede ca rājani° . |